m^
110
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[286-286
From now on the special vocabulary will be discontinued and all
new words (except the verbs) will be found only in the general
vocabulary.
285 Strong Verbs
to drive away
tjertretben
t)ertrteb
tjertrteben
to forgive
t)er^ei^en
Derjie^
tjersie^en
to die
fterben
ftarb
geftorbeu
to make one's way fi(^ burd)f(i^la=
Wm fic^
fic^ burc^gefrfilagen
gen
bur^
Weak Verbs
to live
leben
to sigh
feufjen
to love
tithtn
to snow
fc^neien
to permit
eriaubeu
to weep
toeineu
to play
f^ielen
to believe to be
gutrauen, traute
to be afraid
fid^ bangen
capable of
ju, gugetraut
to deserve
tjerbienen
to pay
be5a{)len
286 2Bo ^at ber (Sc^netber gemo^nt? ^at er allein getuo^nt?
2Bie t)iele ^inber f)atten bie 2iiitt? (Stub fie f^dter (later) atlein
gen?efen? 2Ba§ tuirb ber ^ater tim, U)enn ber (Bo^n fortlciuft?
SSann Mrb ber @o^n tt)ieber!ommen? SSirb t)iel ^etb ba fein nad)
be§ SSaterg Stob? SSirb bie 9Jlutter t)er5tt)eifetn (despair)?
SBarunt tuirb fie m6)t tJergiDeifeIn? SSie toirb fie fic^ burd^fd^lagen?
3ft ber Wann geftorben? SBoran ift er geftorben? §attt er ben
(So^n fe^r geliebt? SSie ^attt er i^n be^anbett (treated)? §at er
fi(^ tia^ gorttaufen be§ (So^ne§ fe^r gu ^erjen genommeu? SSie fe^r
()at er e§ fic^ gu ^erjen genommeu? SSirb ber So^n tuieberfommen?
SSon tt)em mirb i{)m bie SJlutter erjdfilen? SSeffen t)at ber ^ater in
[einer Xobe^ftunbe gebac^t?
2Ba§ ift ein Sc^neiber? eine ©c^neiberin? ein ©d^u^moc^er?
geben fie ein anbere§ (other) SBort fiir (Sc^u^mad^er ! 2Ba§ ift ein
Set)rer? eine Se^rerin? ein (Sc^iiter? eine Sc^iilerin? '^a^ ift eine
287-289] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 111
Sd^ule? eine SSerfftott (workshop)? SBag ift ein 3lrbeitcr? eine
Wrbeiterin?
287 Translate: 1. I shall have a story for you which you
will like. 2. I shall have returned when your brother is in
school. 3. When the youth returns he will not find his father.
4. Does the mother think of her son in the hour of her death?
5. The father h.ad taken the departure {\i^^ ?^ortge^en) of the son
so much to heart that he died. 0. The mother will not make her
way through life and will not see her son again. 7. Will the
latter have become rich? 8. The former will have become old.
9. I shall have run away.
288 Change all the above sentences so as to use the present
tense; the perfect; the preterite.
LESSON 28
289 ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS
Nominative
^a§ ift bet gro§c S&awm,
^er SBaum ift gro^.
S^ie 93lume ift fi^bn.
5)ag ^inb ift flcin.
^a§ ift cin grower S3aum.
^a§ ift btc fd^onc S3hime.
^a§ ift eine fc^one S3lume.
^a§ ift ba§ ftetne ^iub.
®a§ ift ein fleinef ^inb.
M.
bet grogc 93aum
ein grower S3aum
F.
bie f^onc Slume
eine fc^oue 93tuTne
N.
btt0 fleine ^tnb
ein fleineS ^inb
Observe that when the article has an ending which
shows the number, gender, and case of the following noun
the adjective has merely a perfunctory inflection. In the
nominative case this is e. When the article has no inflection
m MEMOmAM
J. Henry Senger
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofgermanOObeckrich
tlbe Xahc (Berman Series
Elements of GtErman
A PRACTICAL COURSE FOR
SCHOOL, AND COLLEGE
BY,
HENRIETTA K. BECKER, Ph.D.
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
CHICAGO
SCOTT, FORES MAN AND COMPANY
19 3
IN MEMORIAM
COPYRIGHT, 1903
BY SCOTT. FORESMAN AND COMPANY
BOBT. O. I^AW CO., PSXNTBKS ANJ> BIKDXJRS, OBI.CA.aO,
TYPOGRAPHY BY
MARSH, AITKEN & CURTIS COMPANY
CHICAGO
PREFACE
The idea of effecting a compromise between the "natural"
and the "classical" method in the teaching of modern languages
is not a new one. It has been tried for some time and often
with considerable success. The advantages of each method are
so obvious to the thoughtful teacher — and the disadvantages no
less^ — that it is but natural for a renewed attempt to be made
to secure a perfect amalgamation of the benefits of both
methods.
In the book herewith presented a thorough study of the
essential principles of German grammar lies at the foundation
of the lessons. But the means by which these principles are to
be inculcated are inductive rather than deductive. The student
is first given a literary unit — a story or poem selected because
of its fitness to illumine the particular point to be studied.
From this as a text the grammatical rule is inferred, informal
exercises based upon the chosen unit follow, and finally the
new words thus used are impressed upon the memory by con-
stant repetition. The use of a story or a poem as illustration,
instead of disconnected sentences, tends to arouse a real interest
in the mind of the student, besides presenting language facts
in their natural relationship and environment. These points
are so well taken, it is hoped, that their pedagogical importance
need not be further dwelt upon,
A word as to the grammatical arrangement. The value of
first impressions scarcely requires emphasis. It is safe to say
that the beginning pages of a grammar and the opening lines
of any one chapter in it impress themselves upon the mental
vision of the learner with far greater incisiveness than do the
91^656
2 PREFACE
facts which are subsequently brought out. The picture grad-
ually becomes more and more blurred as the mind grows weary
a»d as details iiicifease. Thus it would seem highly advisable
to begin with the most vital element of the language and to
gH^^tj^^Jiliis preeminently the emphatic position. For this
reason the Verb has been made the leading motive of the book.
Under this arrangement the various elements of the lan-
guage are grouped around one central point and the student
deals not with a large number of isolated facts, but with a
totality each part of which with its organic functions becomes
gradually clear to him. When he has finished the book he
should feel, it is true, that many details remain to be filled in,
but that no large or important portion of the whole is unfa-
miliar to him.
The book is divided into ten chapters each one of which
contains a number of lessons. Every chapter has as a main
theme some form of the verb which is to be thoroughly learned.
This theme is generally the subject of the first lesson. Subse-
quent lessons treat of the main features of the verb form in
question, supplemented later by the other forms of the language
and by the syntax which the student is required to learn dur-
ing the first year of his high-school German or the first six
months of German in college.
The exercises in the book are of a two-fold nature. In the
first four chapters they consist mainly of such brief questions
as will bring into strong relief the words and constructions
previously studied. But from the fifth chapter on the ques-
tions become wider in scope and afford a larger freedom of
originality in treatment. For it is expected that the habit of
analyzing the connected stories will by this time have so gained
upon the student that he will experience small difficulty in
retaining for individual use the longer phrases which they
contain. The final lesson of each chapter contains a careful
review of the grammatical statements made in the preceding
lessons of the chapter. By means of these summaries the
PREFACE 3
student may bring up all the points previously dwelt upon,
and by running through the review exercises he may test his
ability to apply these facts.
The lessons are supplemented by an appendix which seeks
to give in succinct form a synopsis of the elements of grammar.
It may be used both for ready reference and review. The first
part of it (§§ 1-89) deals with the inflected words so arranged
as to bring together those which are alike in form, e.g., the
definite article and the demonstrative pronoun, the indefinite
article and the possessive adjective, etc. An attempt has been
made to present each page in a form which will render classi-
fication and enumeration graphic, in order that visualization
may assist memory. The second part of the appendix (§§90-249)
enunciates the more important rules of syntax with accompany-
ing illustrations. In both parts the procedure is: article,
noun, pronoun, adjective, verb. This appendix, if so desired,
may be used as a reference grammar in later courses devoted to
composition work or to the reading of texts.
In explanation of a few innovations, chief among which k
perhaps the inflection of the subjunctive mode, it may be said
that in every case actual usage as found in modern writers and
in accepted speech rather than grammatical tradition has served
as guide.
The new official orthography sanctioned in the year 1901
and now in force in the public schools of Germany, Switzer-
land, and Austria has been adopted without change. The
seventh edition (1902) of the inexpensive and excellent Duden's
Orthographisches Wbrterluch is cordially recommended to all
who wish a safe guide in vexed matters of spelling.
The Elements of German endeavors to give to beginning
students of German an opportunity to acquire a firm grasp on
the essential facts of the language. It is hoped at the same
time to stimulate interest because of the chance which it
affords for the reading of good German and for the continu-
ous practice of the spoken language in the classroom. For
4 PREFACE
only in this way can a sure feeling for correct form be devel-
oped.
It is a most pleasant duty to acknowledge the unusual debt
of obligation which the author owes to Professor S. W.- Cutting
of the University of Chicago. From first to last he has shown
a tireless interest in the book, has offered many helpful sugges-
tions and has stinted no effort in his desire to be of constant
assistance. Professors C. von Klenze and Max Batt have also
done much to further the progress of the author's work. The
editorial connection of Philip S. Allen of the University of
Chicago with the Lake German series during the early stages
of the preparation of the book and his continued generous aid
to the time of its publication have been an invaluable help to
the author.
Henrietta K. Becker.
Chicago August, 1903.
CONTENTS
CHAP. PAGE
I. Indicative Singular Present 9
1. Verb: Third Person ; Nouns and Pronouns : Nominative
and Accusative Singular 9
2. Continuation of Lesson 1 12
3. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns: Nomina-
tive and Accusative 15
®er ^aufmann unb ber ^unb
4. Verb: First and Second Person : Possessives 18
5. Grammar Review 21
II. Indicative Singular Perfect 25
6. Tense Auxiliary f)a6en 25
®te ^a^e unb bie Wlau^
7. Tense Auxiliary fein 29
®er Sc^neiber unb ber ©c^u^inac^er
8. Genitive 33
®er Wiener he^ ^dnig§
9. Dative 38
%aS @Jenji[fen be§ SSolfg
10. Prepositions with Accusative 42
©onntagmorgen
11. Dative and Accusative with Preposition 46
@in Unterfd^ieb. 2)a3 S3ac&lein
12. Grammar Review 51
III. Indicative Preterite. Plurals 55
13. Weak and Strong Verbs 55
SSa§ jcber fa^
14. Weak and Strong Verbs— Continued 61
©efunben
15. Plural of Verbs 64
S)ie SSoget
• 16. Plural of Nouns— Strong Declension — Class 1 68
®e§ ajlanneg SSerbtenjt. 9^ad)taeb
17. Plural of Nouns — Strong Declension — Class II 73
^ie SSolfe
18. Plural of Nouns— Strong Declension — Class III.. 77
^erbftaeb. Ulbenblieb
5
6 CONTENTS
19. Weak and Mixed Declensions 80
2)ie 3a()lett
20. Grammar Review 84
IV. Indicative Pluperfect 87
21. Pluperfect Tense 87
@r l^atte ©pa^en imter bent ^utc
22. Personal and Reflexive Pronouns 90
^er aJlorber
23. Possessives 93
(5ein 9tid)tgfpru(t)
24. Demonstrative and Indefinite Pronouns 97
®er einfaE
25. Relative Pronouns 101
®er ^rin§ bon |)omburg
26. Review 105
V. Future and Future Perfect 107
27. muttetikbe 107
28. Adjective Declensions Ill
29. muitexikbc {(Bdjln^) 115
30. ^ie gaule unb bie ?5Iei§i(;c 119
31. ^ie ^auie unb bie gleifetge (gortfe^uncj) 121
32. 2)ie f^aule unb bie ^(cifeige .©c^lufe) . .' 125
33. Grammar Review 128
VI. Reflexive Verbs 130
34. ®ie SSerirrten 130
35. Cardinals and Ordinals 133
®te SSerirrtcn (5ortfc|ung)
36. Fractionals 136
2)ie SSerirrten (f^ortfe^uug)
37. ^ic SBerirrten (©c^Utfe) 140
38. Comparison of Adjectives 144
^eutfc^eg ©d^ulmefen
39. ^eutfd)c§ Sc^ufnjcfen (Sdjlufe) 148
40. Grammar Review 151
VII. Passive Voice 153
41. ®eutfd)Ianb 153
42. Word Order 156
(Srlfonig
43. Transposed Order 160
3Benn ber ^riitiling auf bie S3erge fteigt
44. Conjunctions 162
©iegfrieb »
45. Grammar Review 165
CONTENTS 7
VIII. Modal Auxiliaries 167
46. Present Tense 167
S3ttte ail bie Whittet
4!7. Preterite of Modal Auxiliaries 170
(Siegfrteb (gortfc|ung)
48. Perfect and Pluperfect of Modal Auxiliaries 173
©tegfrieb (©djrufe)
49. Future and Future Perfect of Modal Auxiliaries and
Passive Infinitives 174
^riem^ilbe^ Xraum
50. Grammar Review 177
IX. The Subjunctive 178
51. Present Third Person Singular 178
2)ie ©Dime unb bcr 2Binb
53. Present and Preterite 180
^ie ©onnc unb bcr SBinb
53. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive 184
2)a§ treue dio%
54. Future and Future Perfect Subjunctive 187
®cr ©chafer unb bcr ®Dlb[d)micb
55. Subjunctive Passive 190
^ag gefto^lcne ^ferb
56. Ideal Condition 193
®er ^hig ber Sicbe. ®er ^'onig uiib bcr iianbmaim
57. Wish— Unfulfilled .' 197
®ie t)ier 2Biinfd)e
58. Wish— Fulfilled ; Desire and Prayer 199
2)cr 9Jlai ift gcfommcu
59. Subjunctive of Doubt 301
•Der giite ^amcrab. Xu btft lutc eiuc S3Iuuic
60. Grammar Review 303
X. Imperative. Compounds. Infinitives. Participles 305
61. Imperative 305
®eutfd)er ffiat Xic SO^a|ming
63. Compounds 308
©in f^ricb^ofggang
63. Infinitives 313
®ie beutfd^en ©table
64. Infinitives 215
Xic beutfd)cu ©tdbtc (©d)lufe)
8 APPENDIX
65. Participles 216
5)ie beutfc^e ®ef(i)id)te
66. Participles 218
^ie beutfc^e @efrf)ic^te (©djlufe). ®ie SSad^t am
67. Grammar Review 232
APPENDIX
Alphabet 224
Pronunciation /. 227
accidence
Article 231
Nouns— Gender 232
Declension 233
Pronouns 237
Adjectives— Declension 239
Numerals 241
Comparison 242
Verbs— Conjugations 245
Tense Auxiliaries 245
Modal Auxiliaries 256
Causatives 259
Reflexive Verbs 259
Impersonal Verbs 259
Table of Strong Verbs 260
SYNTAX
Word Order 265
Use of Article 266
Nouns— Syntax of Cases 368
Nominative 268
Genitive 269
Dative 273
Accusative 377
Pronouns 280
Verbs— Mode 282
Indicative 282
Subjunctive 284
Imperative 288
Infinitive 288
Participle ' 290
Passive Voice 291
Modal Auxiliaries. . . . , 292
Impersonal Verbs 295
ELEMENTS OF GERMAJST
CHAPTEE I
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT
LESSON 1
Verb: 3rcl person
Nouns and Pronouns: Nominative and Accusative Singular
I Masc. 2)er ^cA\6)i fliegt fliegt
Fem. 2)ie $enne ift grog. ift
Neut. ^ttg Siii^Iein^ tjt fleiiu ift
M. ^et^ §abic^t fliegt, er^ ift ein SSogeL er
F. ^ie ^eiuie fliegt, fie ift and) ein 9?ogeL flc
N. 2)ag tii(^Iein fliegt nidjt, e§ ift ein SSoglein.' e«
2 VOCABULARY ^
flies fliegt hen bic §enne wrd tin ^ogel
is ift large grOg also aUC^
chick 'ha^ ^iic^Ieiu not nic^t
hawk ber §abic^t smaii !(ein iittie bird ein SSoglein
3 ^ The syllables leilt and ^etl may be added to any noun to ex-
press diminutive size or endearment. Such nouns are always neuter
(see App. 13a).
2 In German the article and the personal pronoun denote the varia-
tion of gender even where no sex designation is felt.
^ In the vocabularies the words that represent the new principle
will be found first. After these will come the other new words in the
order in which they occur in the story or exercise above them.
10 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [4-8
4 Subject Object
2)te .^emie fie^t ben §aiir|t.
®ie fur(^tet t|n.
2)er ^abi^t fie^t bie §enne.
@t jagt fie.
2)te $enne Itebt bag ^nt^lein.
®ie ruft eg.
5 sees fie()t chases jagt calls ruft
fears furd^tet loves liebt
6 DEFINITE ARTICLE AND PERSONAL PRONOUN
Nominative Accusative
Def. Art. Pers. Pron. Def. Art. Pers. Pron.
ber
er
ben
illtt
bie
fie
bie
fie
ba§
ee
bag
ee
7 INDEFINITE ARTICLE
Nominative Accusative
@ln ^abid^t fliegt. ©tne .^eitite ftel)t etuen^abid^t.
(Sine §emte ruft. ©in ^abi^t fie^t eiue §eune.
Gin Mdjietu fommt nidjt* (5ie l)at ein Su(J)Iein.
8
M.
F.
N.
j Nom.
\ Ace.
Def. Art.
ber
ben
ludef. Art.
eiu
^ eiuen
Pers. Prou.
er
itin
( Nom.
] Ace.
bie
bie
eiue
eiue
He
lie
( Nom.
1 Ace.
ba§
bag
ein
ein
eg
eg
9-12]
9
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT
Sine ®eft|i^te
11
Sine ^enne fte^t eineu ^abi^t. ©r fliegt, S)ie
^enite i)at ein Mc^Iein, ©ie ruft e^, 2)a§ Siid^Iein
fommt nid^t, eg ift ungef)orfam» S)a fommt ber ^abic^t
unb ijolt bag Siid^lein, ®g jd^reit laut, aber ber ^abid^t
frigt eg unb fliegt fort, 2)ie §enne ift fe^r traurig, ®ag
Md^Iein ift nun tot. 2)ie SJlutter ijat !ein ^iic^lein nte{)r/
®ie §enne f)a§t ben ^abid^t unb fie fiird^tet i^n and).
10
VOCABULARY
has
t)at
and
unb
comes
!ommt
aloud
taut
fetches
^olt
but
aber
yells, squeak
s ^c^reit
away
fort
devours
frigt
very
W
hates
mt
sad
traurtg
does
tut
•
now
dead
mother
uuu
tot
bie gjJutter
story
bie OJefd^i^te
disobedient
ungei)oiiam
no
!eiu
then
ba
more
me^r
« « 3ft bie §enne ein SSogel? ©ie ift ein SogeL 3ft
fie gro§? ©ie ift gro§. 3ft ber ^abii)t ein SSogel?
(£r ift ein aSogel 3ft er tiein? ©r ift nidjt flein.
gliegt ber §abid)t? ©r ftiegt. ^(iegt bie §enne?
bag tii^Iein? 9?uft bie ^enne bag tii^Iein? ©ie
ruft eg, tomntt eg? ©g fommt nid^t, 3ft eg
ungel)orfam? §oIt ber ^ahii)t bag ©iid^Iein? gri^t
er eg? 3ft bie 50?utter traurig?
12 ' ^ttt fein ... me^r = has no
left.
12 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [13-15
13 LESSON 2
SBer fliegt? S)er ^abi^t fliecit. SBag tut er? ©r
fliegt. 2Ba^ tut bie ^tnxitl @ie fliegt auc^» 3ft ber
^abic^t fe^r gro§? ®r ift uic^t fe^r grofe. SBa§ ift bie
^euue? ©ie ift ein SSogeL 2Bie fliegt ber §abi^t?
©r fliegt fi^uell, Sliegt bie ^tnm fi^ueU? 9iic^t fo
fd^uell tt)ie ber |)abidjt» 2Sie fliegt ba§ Mi^leiu? ©§
fliegt laugfam, e§ ift fleiu. 3ft e§ au^ eiu 3Sogel? 3a,
e§ ift eiu SSogleiu,
Answer the following questions :
i4 SBer fliegt? aSa^ ift bie ^tmtl SBie fliegt ber
^abi^t? aSa§ ift bag Siic^leiu? 3ft bie ^txmt grofe
ober fleiu? %i\tQ,t bag ^iid^leiu? 3ft ber ^abii^t eiu
9Sogel? 3ft bie ^tUMt eiu SSoget ober eiu SSogleiu?
giiegt ber SSogel fi^uell?
1 5 PRONOUNS
3Beu fie^t bie ^mm'i @ie fie^t \^tn ,^abid^t. Siebt
fie i^u? 9teiu, fie liebt i^u uidjt, fie ^^t i^u. SSeu
fie^t ber ^abit^t? ®r fie^t bie l^txmt. gri^t er fie?
3a, er jagt fie uub fri^t fie» Siebt ber ^abi^t bie |)euue?
9ieiu, er liebt fie ui^t, 3Beu ruft bie ^tmxt'^ ®ie ruft
bag Sii^leiu. Siebt fie eg? 3a, fie liebt eg. ^rifet
bet ^abi^t U^ M^leiu? 3a, er frifet eg. 2Beu liebt
bie ^tMMt'i giir^tet fie beu ^abid^t? 393eu fri^t
er? 33Sag fiet)t bag Siid^leiu? ^ort eg bie SUJutter?
2Ber ruft? SBeu ruft bie ^tMXitl SSer fiir^tet beu
^abi^t? aSeu fiir^tet bie ^zxiM'i S^iirc^tet bie ^twxiz
lG-17] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 13
ben ^abic^t? aBarum? SBag tut er? 2Sag ift ber
^abi^t? me ift ba^ Mdjlein? SBer Itebt eg? S)a§
Sinb Itebt bie ^^enne, ober bag ®tnb l^at bie ^entie gern*
SSBag liebt bag Sinb? SBer Itebt bie ^entte? ^at
ha^ Sinb bie |)enne gern? SSag ^at eg gern? 2)er 9Jfann
I)at eitten ^unb* ©r ^t ben ^uttb gertt» ^^at bie^enne
ben ^abidjt gern? SBaritm ni^t? Ser ^abid)t fri^t
bag Suc^Iein, 2)ie 9}Jutter ^at bag tinblein gern, 2Ber
liebt bag Slinb? SBen liebt bag tinb?
16
VOCABULARY
hears
I)ort
slow
langfam
likes
i)ai ...
. gem
yes
ja
■
or
ober
who?
toer?
whom!
? mn?
what?
toa^?
no
neiu
how?
tvk?
why?
tuanim'?
quick
frfinea
child
ba§ ^inb
so
fo
man
ber Wann
as
tuie
dog
ber |)imb
17 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. Verbs in third person sing, indicative pres. end in t.
2. All nouns are masculine, feminine, or neuter, as shown
by the form of the article.
3. The definite article nominative singular is bcr, bic, bttS.
4. The definite article accusative singular is bctt, bie, bal.
5. The indefinite article nominative is eitl, ciltc, tin.
6. The indefinite article accusative is cineit, cine, citt.
7. The nominative and accusative forms of the personal
pronouns in third person arc : er flc el
i^tt fie eS
14 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [18
18 REVIEW EXERCISES
I, Fill out vntli verbs: Ste ^ettne — etn Ru^Ietn,
2)er ^abic^t f ^neU, ®ag Sii^Iein — tiein. ®er
^abi^t "^a^ ^u^Iein. ®a^ Siidjletn nt^t
^ie §enne laut. 2)ag Siii^Iein — uiiQe^orfam.
S)er ^abic^t ba§ Mi^Iein unb e^,
//. Fill out with noun and definite article:
f)at etn Siid^Ieitt, fdegt fie^t
i^n, 2)ie §enne ruft . tommt nii^t
fommt mtb fri^t , jdireit, —
frtfet bag Sii^tetu. ift tot 2)ie 9Kutter
I)at nii^t mef)r, {}a§t ben ^abic^t,
fltegt langfam. fltegt jdjnell.
ift flein, tft etn SSogel. tft an^ ein
SSogel ift ein SSoglein.
III. Fill out with noun and indefinite article:
ift tranrig, S)er ^abi^t frifet .
^enne f)at . ®ie ^enne fie^t . ■
fiiri^tet ben §abi^t. ift nnge^orfant.
fliegt f d)nell, fliegt langf am. ift tiein,
ift grofe* fri§t . f^reit
lant* 3)ie 3Jlntter ^at ntel)r.
IV. Fill out with personal pronouns: 2)er
©abi^t ift ein SSogel — ift gro^, — fliegt f^nell.
t)ie ^enne ift anc^ ein SSogel — fliegt langfam. SDa^
^it(^lein ift ein ^^ogelc^en. — ift nnget)orfant. ®ie
§enne rnft — nnb — fontntt nic^t. 2)er ^abit^t fontntt
nnb bie ^enne fief)t — . ©ie l^a^t nnb fiirc^tet — .
S)ag Sitd^lein fie|t — ni^t, ®ie gjJntter rnft — ,
— fontntt nic^t. S)er ^abi^t frifet — . S)a§ M^=
lein ^ort — ni^t, 2)er ^abid^t fie^t — .
19-21]
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT
15
LESSON S
Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns : Nom. and Ace.
1 9 ^er Sttufmatitt untJ ber ^unli
©in Saufmann ^ai etn ^ferb, ©r reitet eg. S)iefer
Saiifmann ^at ehte Sorfe» S)iefe fdflt unb ber Sauf=
maun jie^t ba§^ nid^t. ®er .^unb jiel)t bie^/ er beUt
iinb jprittgt. S)er Saufmaun benft: ,,2)iefer §unb ift
toll!" 2)ann nimmt er bag ©eme^r unb f^ie^t ben
|)unb. ®er §unb ftirbt nnb ber Saufmann reitet traurig
ttjeiter; er ^at biefen |)nnb je^r gem. S)a t^ernti^t er
feine SSorfe unb get)t juriid unb finbet fie, Stber eg ift jn
fpdt, ber ^unb ift nun tot. S)er Saufmann ift fefjr
traurig. ©r ^ai ben §unb gem, unb eg tut i^m leib/
bafe biefer tot ift.^
VOCABULARY
merchant ber ^aufmann
20
rides
reitet
falls
fdHt
barks
beat
jumps
fpringt
thinks
benft
takes
nimmt
shoots
frfliegt
dies
ftirbt
misses
tjermifet'
goes
gef)t
llnds
finbet
horse
ba§ $ferb
purse
bie Sorfe
mad
toll
then
bann
gtm
\ias> (SJett)el)r'
on
tueiter
back
guriid'
too late
m fpat ^
sorry
leib
that
ba§
2 I ' btt§, ilieS— neuter demonstratives referring to preceding sentence.
2 Observe inversion of subject and predicate caused by prece-
dence of the adverb tiann.
^ eg tttt i|m leitl = lie is sorry.
* Note that the verb comes last in the dependent clause.
16 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [22 20
22 Demonstrative and Interrogative
melc^er Saufmann?
Norn. itx Saufmann biefer Saufmann
jener Saufntann
JDcId^eu Saiifmann?
. Ace. ben Saufmann biefeii Saufmann
jenen ^aufmann
welijt 33orje?
Norn. & Ace. V\t 93orfe btefe 93orfe
jene Sorfe
tt)el(^e§ ^ferb?
Norn. & Ace. bag $ferb bieje§ ^ferb
jene^ ^ferb
23 Masculine
Norn -^ 3SeI(^er Saufmann reitet?
{
Siefer Saufmanu reitet.
( 2)iefett §unb f^ie^t er.
24 Feminine
^^^ f 3BeIc^e Sorfe fadt?
^'""- t Sent «orie follt.
^^^ J SBeldjc SSorfe fiel)t ber |)unb?
2)iefeg ^ferb fri^t.
3ene 33orfe fietjt er.
25 ' Neuter
^,^^ j SBelc^eg $ferb frtfet?
^^^ j 2SeI^e§ ^ferb reitet ber Saufmann?
\ ®iefe§ ^$ferb reitet er.
26 The demonstrative and interrogative pronouns biefcr, btefe,
biefcS (this), jencr, jene, jencS (that), iDetc^cr, mi<i)t, Jpelc^cS
(which), are inflected like the definite article in the nominative
and accusative cases.
27-29] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 17
27 9isa§ ijat biefer 9)Zami? ®r ^at eiuen ^unb» 2Bte ift
jeiier ,^unb? Qeiier ^unb ift fe^r treu, SBa^ tut biefer
Saufmann? (£r reitet. aSag faUt? Sie^t bag ber taiif=
maun? SZetn, er fte^t ba§ nt^t. 2Ber fie^t eg? 2Bag
tut jeuer ^uub? SJJerft eg ber Saufmauu je^t? 9?eiu,
cr uterft eg je|t and} ui^t, 3Bag beuft er? Sft bag
tua^r? 2Sag tut jeuer Wlann bauu? ©tirbt ber ,^uub?
Wie ift ber ffaufmauu? Sermi^t er uuu jeue Sorfe?
5iubet er fie? 9ft eiu §uub eiu Xier?
.^at ber Saufutauu eiu ^ferb, eiueu |)uub, eiue ^euue
ober eiueu ^abidjt? 2Bag tut ber ,^abid)t? bie ^euue?
ber ,^uub? bag Md)Ieiu? ®er ,^uub beUt. ®iefer
^^^uub ift gro§. SBelc^er ^uub ift grau? Seuer
.^uub ift (]rau. 3ebe >^euue t)idt bag Soru. 3BeId)er
§uub beat? 3eber ^mh beUt, S8eld)eu .g)uub ^at ber
Saufmauu? @r ^t biefeu ^uub.
S?e(d)e ^cnm ruft it)r ffiic^Ieiu? 3)iefe .^euue ruft
eg. ai^eld^er ^abic^t ftie^t? Qeuer ^abidjt fliegt. ®iet)t
ber ,^abid^t biefeg ober jeueg tiidjleiu? ®r fri^t jebeg
teiic^Ieiu, bag^ er faucet. Sft biefe ,^enm traurig? 2BeI=
i)en ,^uub fc^ie^t biefer Saufumuu? SBeli^e 93orfe
tjermifet jeuer Saufmauu? SSeldjieu ^uub ^at biefer
Kaufmauu geru?
28 VOCABULARY
29
notices Itterft
true lDaI)r
picks picft
animal ba§ %kv
catches fciugt
gray (^mu
every jebcr, jebC, jcbCg
faithful treu
grain ba§ ^OVW
now je^t
which ba§
^iia*f, rel. pron. = which.
For word order cf. 21, 4.
18
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[30-3J
Verb: 1st and 2nd person. Possessives
30 9^a^ iii VnU
^6) liebe bte Slunte,
Sd) liebe ba^ ©piet,
Sc^ liebe bie @d)ule,
^d) liebe gar t)ieL
^(^ liebe ben SSogel,
®r ftngt gar fo fdjon/
3?c^ liebe bie SBieje,
^6) liebe bie ^^o^'n,
®ie ©rbe, ben ^immel,
2)ie Sonne, ben Stern,
Qd) liebe ba§ aHe^v
3d} f)ab' e^ fo gern,'
3d) liebe ben 5!]{cnfd)en,
Da^ ^^erj nnb ben 9)htt,
3d) liebe I)erjinnig,
St?a^ fd)on \]t nnb gnt
3 1 Hove id) (iebc ^
I have
id) I)abc
you love bn Uebft
you have
bn I)aff
he loves er liebt
he has
er Ijaf
I call id) rnfe
I sing
id) fingc
you call bn rnfft
you sing
bn fingft
he calls er rnft
he sings
er fingt
32 VOCABULARY
flower bie 33(unte
heaven
ber .^immcl
game ba^ 'S^icl
sun
bie Sonne
school bic @(f|Mle
star
ber ©tern
a great deal gau Uiel
all
aUe§
exceedingly C\aV
man
ber SOfJenfdj
beautiful |c^on
heart
ba§ .^er,^
meadow bie 2Bieje
courage
ber mm
heights bie |)oI)en
heartily
l)er^innig
earth bie @rbe
good
gnt
33 ^ gttt fo fi^Ott— idiom : so very charmingly.
2Cf. 10.
3 Note omission of h before ft and t, an example of the wear-
ing-off process which words undergo.
34-36] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 19
34 ^i) Itebe bie ©onne, liebft bu fie? ^a, ii) liebe bie
Sonne imb ben ©tern* Siebft bu bie aSiefe tne^r ate
btn SSatb? 9iein, i^ liebe ben aSalb ebenjo jeljr tnie^
bie SSiefe, §aft bu bie ^lume gern?^ 3a, ic^ i}abe bie
33lnme, bag Spiel unb bie @d)u(e fel^r gern* SBag ^aft
bu lieber,^ bag Spiel ober bie Sd^nle? 3cf) l^abe ta^
Spiel gern unb and) bie Sdjule, aber ic^ glaube bo^/
ic^ ijabe bag Spiel etwa^^ lieber,
3[8el^e 23lume liebe id)? ^d) liebe biefe 93lume unb
jene, id) liebe jebe 93lume. SSag i)at biefer SKenj^ gem?
®r ^t atteg gem, tnag^ ji^on ift SBeld)er SSogel fingt
fc^on? ^at biefer SSogel ein ^erj? 3a, jeber 9Sogel
^at ein *^erj, SBag ijat jeber 3Sogel? SSelc^eg Sii^=
lein i^at biefe §enne gem? 3ene §enne i)at biefeg
Sii^lein gern, SSeld)en .^unb t)at biefer 50Jann gem?
©r ^at biefen |)unb gem.
35 POSSESSIVES
aSen l)at biefer 9)iann gem? ©r i)at feinen 3Sater
unb feine Tlntt^x gem. |)aft bu beinen SSater unb beine
3Kutter gem? 3a, gen)i^! 3^ ^cibe nteinen SSater unb
meine 5!JJutter feljr gem. §aft bn beinen Dnfel lieber alg
beine S^ante? 3d) l)abe fie^ gleic^ lieb.^ §aft bu einen
®ro§t)ater unb eine ©rofemutter? 2iebft bu fie?
36 1 eBenfo fe^r mie =±= just as much as.
^ ^ttft iiu . . . . flem, cf . 10.
^ Ott ^aft Itfber = you prefer.
Ml^ glttUk iJOli^ = I rather think.
5 ctttiaS = somewliat.
'ttae§ toltt§ = all that.
' fie = they, them (see she, her = fie, p. 10).
^ tj^ ^ttfte fie gleid^ Uefi = I love them alike (see \^ Ittht . . . ebenfo
fe§r ttlie, note l above).
20
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[87-40
37 ,^aft bu behieii ©ro^dater ebeitfo geru \me beine
©roBmntter? §aft bn fie glei^ lieb? aSelc^e^ M^=
lein f)at bie .f>enne gern? @ie ijat xi)x Sn(J)Iein gern.
©ief)ft bn bie ^enne nnb i^r Sii^Iein? 3a, id) fe^e
fie» ^aft bn fie gern? SBa^ ^aft bn lieber, bie §enne
ober 'i)a§> Sit^tein? SSSeldje §enne ^aft bn lieber, biefe
ober jene? SKa^ ^at ber Sanfmann lieber, feinen §nnb,
fein ^ferb ober feine 33orfe? .^at ber Sanfmann nnn
noc^ eine 33orfe? 9?ein, er t)at feine 93orfe nte^r nnb
and) feinen ^nnb. |)aft bn einen ©^tnager?
38
XOMINATIVES
tin
©olcr
cine abutter
cin ^inb
ic^
tnein
Sater
meine 9)Jntter
nietn Kinb
bu
betn
n
beine ,,
betn ,,
er
feitt
ft
feine
fein „
fie
tlir
ff
it)re
\¥ „
e0
fein
ft
feine
fein ,,
teitt
It
feine ,,
Wn „
39
Accusatives
cinctt 35otcr
cine 9Wuttcr
cin ttnb
meinen 93ater
meine 9JJntter
ntein Sinb
beineii
beine ,,
betn n
feinen
feine
fein ,,
i^ren
i^re
iDtr n
feinen
feine ,,
fein „
feinen
feine ,,
fein „
40 Note that the po^Hessivc pronouns and the word fein
(no) are inflected like the indefinite article in nominative and
accusative.
41-48] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 21
41 3a, id) ^abe etneu (S(f}tDager uiib eiiie @d)tudgerin
uiib id) ijahe nteiiteu Sdjiuager imb meine ©d)it)dgerin
ie()r gent* 3Keii I)aft bu lieber, beinen SSetter ober betne
tSoujiue? 3d) I)abe meiiten i^etter ebenjc gem me mehic
Soujiue* |)aft bu feiiien 35ater uiib feine 9)cuttcr? JJetii,
id) ^abe feineu Skater unb feine aifutter. Sag Kinb ^t
lueber i^ater nod) SUJutter, e§ ift eiite SBaife,
42 VOCABULARY
father bei* S3ater suii noc^
yes, certainly ja, gett)!^ brother-in-law bcr Sd^tUagcr
uncle ber £)n!el sister-in-iaw btc (Srf)tudgerm^
aunt bie ^ante cousin (male) ber S5etter
grandfather ber (S^rofeDater cousin (female) bie ©Ouft'ltC
grandmother bie (^rO^lUlltter neither ... nor tOebcr . . . Itod)
orphan bic SBaife
43 Compare ber (Sc^luager, W <Sc^mdgerin. What is the feminine
suffix ? What change in the original word is effected by the
suffix? Form feminines of bcr Center (teacher), bcr @f|u(cr
(student), bcr ^iinig (king).
LESSON 5
GRAMMAR REVIEW
44 1. Present indicative endings are:
First person c
Second person ft
Third person t
45 2. The definite article, de^nonstrative and interrogative
pronouns are inflected alike in the nominative and accusative.
46 3. The indefinite article, possessive pronouns, and fcitt
are inflected alike.
47 4. Personal pronouns must agree with their antecedents
in gender whether the noun represents a person, an animal, or
a thing,
48 ^ For explanatioa of the umlaut in ^i^tt)d(tcrtn see App. 7,
22
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [4
49
PARADIGMS
tc^ ^abe icf) rufe
bu fiaft bu ruffl
cr ^nt cr ruft
50
Definite Article
Nom.
Ace.
Masc. Fern. Keut.
bet yRann bte 9Kutter ba§ Stub
bett "^ann bie 9J}utter bttfif Stub
[49-56
51 Demoxstrative and Ixterrogative Pronoun
Nom. biefet ^uub jeue @d)tt)efter U)et^e§fttub?
Ace. biefett ^uub jeue @(^tt)efter uiel(f)e§ fttub?
52
Indefinite Article
Nom
Ace.
. eitt 33ogeI etue Slume
eiueit SSogcI etue Sluute
eitt^ferb
eitt ^Jpferb
53
Possessive Pronoun and
fein
Nom,
Ace.
. ttteitt Oufel i^re Se^rertu
meiuett Dufel i^re £el)rertu
feitt ©eiue^r'
feitt ©etoe^r
54
Personal Pronoun
Nom,
Ace.
55
et
i^tt
fie
fte
IDIOMS
e«
eg
Hike
I prefer
I like equally well
1 rather think
1 have no . . . left
he is sorry
i(i) ^abz . . . gem
tc^ ^aU . . . tieber
tc^ \^aht . . . gteidj (or
i^ gtaube bod)
ic^ ^aht fein . . . niel)r
e^ tut tf)m tetb
ebenfo) lieb
66] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 23
56 REVIEW EXERCISES (Written)
/. Aiistver^ using as many 'j^'^'onoiuis as possible:
1. aSeWjer Saufmami ^at beii'^mtb? 2. aBa^ (}at bie
^enite? 8, 2BeIcI)en .^unb f^tegt ber $l:aufmanu? 4.
mk fliegt ber ^abid)!? 5, SBer jdjiefet beii ^unb?
(3. 2Bag tut ber Socket? 7, ma^ ^abe id) gerii? 8, SBen
tjaft bu Iteber, ben ®roJ3t)ater ober bie ©rogmittter?
9, mtw liebt ba^ Sinb? 10. 2lsa^ liebt eg? 11, 2Bag
liebe id)? 12, Sl^a^ Derlicrt ber taufmami? 13, SBer
merft e^? 14, 2Bag tut ber ^uub? 15, 3BeId)eu
^mx^ ]l)u^i ber Saufmauu?
II. Fill out:
1, 2)ief — 9)Jaun liebt feiu — ,^unb»
2, 3)ie)— 9Jhttter ruft il)r Siub,
3, 2)iei— Siub fief)t feiu— 9}httter,
4, ^a\i bu ■ flutter?
5, |)at er 9«utter?
6, S)ie aSaife f)at «ater SJ^utter,
7, S)ie aSaife t)at aSater uub 9Jlutter,
8, aUeiu @d)tuager t)at ^iub,
9, 9JJeiu — (5d)U)dneriu t)at aud) ciu ftiub,
10, 3eu — 93lume ift lel)r fd)ou,
III Use in sentences: biejeu, meiue, i^r, feiu,
feiue, itw aSater, fd^ie^t, fd)iege, liebt, l^at . . . geru, I)at
, . , lieber, l^abe . . . ebeufo geru tuie, id) glaube bod),
etluag, feiueu,
IV. Translate: 1. This bird sings beautifully. 2. It flies
quickly. 3. That hawk catches the chick and eats it. 4. The
merchant shoots his dog and he is sorry. 5. A mother loves her
24 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN • [57
child very (much).^ 6. Have you a brother-in-law? 7. My
sister-in-law is an orphan, she has neither father nor mother.
8. I have no purse. 9. The horse is an animal. 10. The dog
is also an animal. 11. This hawk chases that chick.
12. Which man loses his purse? 13. Do you prefer this dog?
14. Do you love your grandmother and your grandfather
equally well? 15. What do you like better, school or play?
16. I rather think I prefer play.
57 ^ Words in parentheses are not to be translated; words in brack-
ets are to be inserted in the translation.
58 (ilj INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 25
CHAPTER II
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT
LESSON 6
58 Tense Auxiliary ]^ttbcn
S)ie |)enne ^at einen §abi(^t gefe^en. @ie ||at \\)\\
gefurri^tet unb ^at ba^ Siidjlein gentfeu. ©^ ^at bie
3JJiitter ntd)t ge^ort. S)a ^at e^ ber ^abtc^t gefreffen.
2)a^ Stub ^ttt bie Sonne gelieJt. 3c^ ^aJe ben ^nnb
geliett. §aft bn ben §nnb gefe^en? §ttt ber Sanf=
ntann ben |)nnb gentfen?
59 Strong Verbs "Weak Verbs
(Wt) f)at gefe^en (fiirc^tet) \^ai gefiird^tet
(nift) ()at gernfeH ftort) |)at ge^ort
(fn6t) i)at gefreffen Oi^bt) (jut geliebt
60 Note difference in perfect participle of strong and of
weak verbs. Observe that the perfect tense is used in German
for the simple statement of a fact in past time. (See App. 177.)
61 SBag ^at ber .^abic^t getan? @r ):jCii etn Siid^Iein
gefreffen, §at bie ^enne ba^ Mijtein gernfen? 3a,
fie I)at e^ gernfen, aber e§ f)ut nid)t gefjort, 238er ^at
\>Ci^ Md)tein gernfen? ^ai e^ ge()ort? ^at bie ^enne
:)a^ Siidjlein gern geljabt? ^ai W^ Siid)lein bie 5Ilhitter
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [62-65
gettebt? ^at bie ^enne ben .f)abi(^t gettebt? 9fein, jie
i)at il}n md}t (^eliebt, fonbern^ fie l}at tlju geljafjt aS?en
f)at bag Sinb gern ge^abt? SSen ^at eine ^eiine gern
ge^afat? 2Sen i)at fie (^efiir^tet?
62
63
Present
AVeak
Perfect
\6) fiirc^te
id) ^nOc gefiirc^tct
„ I)ore
„ „ ge{)ort
„ ^Qbe
/, „ Q^t)M
. ^affe
n /, Q^¥i^
„ i)aht gern
Strong
„ „ flern ge^abt
id) fef)e
tc^ f)abe gefef)en
„ tne
„ „ getaii
. freffe
,/ „ Qefreffcn
// nife
„ „ gerufen
PARADIGM
Perfect Tense—
-Singular
Weak
Strong
icf) f)abe gefitrdjtet
ic^ I}abe gerufen
bu i)a\i
bu !)aft „
er f)at
fie ^at
64 ^ie ^tt^e ttttb bie SJlang
Sine Sa^e l^at immer eine 9}laǤ Q^i^Qt. 3)a ^^i
bie 9J?au§ bie Sa^e feljr gefiird^tet imb fe^r ge^a^t
©ublic^ f)at bie 9]?aug einen ©infad ge^abt ®ie f)at
gebadjt: ,,Sc^ ge^e au^ iinb faufe eine Stfjelle, bie^ pnge
65 1 fontlem = but, used after a negative clause to introduce an
affirmation, the opposite of what has been denied, W^tX is used for
h\d to introduce an additional thought (after either positive or nega-
tive statements).
^ tlie = demonstrative fem. , masc. lier. neut. ba§.
66-68] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 27
id) hex ^a^e^ an. 2)amt f)ore id) immer, luenn bie ^ai^e
fommt." ®te I)at aljo' bie SdjeUe gefauft. ,^at fie biefe
ber fialie augel)dugt?^ 9leiu, fie fiird)tet bie ft'a|e fo
fe^r, ba^ fie fd)uell fortlduft,^ iuenn jeite fommt @o gef)t
bie Sa^e itoc^ ()eute* o^ite (Sd^eUe ^erum.
66
VOCABULARY
chased gejagt
had gr!)QBt
feared 9efurd)tCt
thought gcba^t
hated 0Cl)aSt
bought gcfaitfl
hung geljdugt
cat bic ^a^c
I hang
onto id) ()ange an
always tmiltcr
I hear
[^ ()ore
mouse bie Wan^
when
tueuu
then bd
so
a(fo (resumptive)
finally twhlid)
I run
i(S) (aufe, (bit Idufft,
idea bcr ©iiifatt
cr Iditft)
I go out tc^ gefjc au§
without
o[)ue
I buy id) faufe
about
I)cntm
bell bie (Scfielle
67 SBag I)at bie .^atje irnnter getait? ®ie t)at bie 9JJau§
gejai^t. ,^at bie Siau^ bie Statue (]ern gefjabt? 9iein, fie
I)at fie uidjt gem gel)abt, fie Ijat fie ge^a^t uub gefiird)tet.
a^a^ ^t bie 9JJau^ gefauft? ,^at fie ber Sa^e bie
Sd)etle auge^dugt? aKarum uidjt? .gat bie Sa^e nun
eine ©djeUe? aSie gel)t fie uoc^ tjeute Ijerum?
68 ^ bcr Sa<?C = dative form.
2 dljo = so, resumptive ; never the English also.
^auge^dttgt. Note that the particle tttt is attached to the parti-
ciple, making one word. Observe similar position of particle in
fortliittft, where Idttft is placed last in the dependent clause. See 21, 4.
^noiii ^Cttte = still to-day (a redundancy of expression common in
German, noi^ ic^t, ttoii^ tmmer = still).
28 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [«;)-71
69 GRAMMAR
1. The perfect tense is composed of the tense auxiliary ^ai +
perfect participle. Note that the perfect participle of all verbs
begins with the augment 9c, but that some verbs add (c)t to
the stem, while others add (c)n and change the stem vowel.
The former are called weak verbs, the latter strong. The per-
fect participle of each verb must be learned. The participle
comes last in the sentence.
2. The perfect tense is often used in German where in Eng-
lish the preterite would be employed. See App. 177.
70 WRITTEN EXERCISES
/. Write perfect 'participlm of: id) fiirdjte, id)
freffe, t^ ^abe, \i) fef)e, bu t)orft, bu faufft, bu f)a§t/ cr
^at gern, er Ijcingt, er tut
//. Write out the paradigiti of the above verbs
in singular present and perfect.
III, Answer: 28en ^at bte^emie ge^a^t? SBeldje^
Sii^Iein ^^i fie gern ge^abt? aSag ^^i ber Saufmami
oerloren?^ 2Ber \)^i e§ gefe^en? SBag ^t bag Siub
geliebt? SBen ^^i ba§ ^inb geliebt? 2Ber ^t tueber
SSater noc^ abutter ge^bt?
IV. Translate and ansioer^ using 'perfect tense: Whom did
the hen fear? The chick did not fear its mother. The mer-
chant had a horse. The mouse hated the cat. Whom did the
hen like? The merchant did not see the purse. The hawk
devoured the chick.
What did the dog do? Who devoured the chick? Whom
did the hen call? Did you call? I thought: "He did not do
7 I ' Syncopated from ^affcft, cf. ^aft for ^afift.
^Perf. part, of %x Ucrticrt, he loses.
72-76] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 29
this." Did the mouse buy a bell? The cat always^ chased the
mouse. Why did the mouse fear the cat?
LESSON 7
72 Tense Auxiliary fcin
S)tefer §abt^t tft fe{)r fc^netl gejlogett, Q'ene §enne
ift gefommen unb t)at it)r Mc^lein geriifen, ®er ®auf=
mann tft fdjneU geritten, ber ^unb ift gef^inittgen, Q'ener
.^aufmann ^at biefen ^unb gef(^ojfen, ba ift biefer rjes
ftorien, Q'eneg Siid^Iein ift f^ned gefommett, aber ber
A^')abic^t ift no^ j^neHer^ fl^folgi
73 Participles
Strong Weak
(ftiegt) ift geflogen (foigt) ift gefolgt
(fommt) ift gefommen
(reitet) ift geritteu
(fpringt) ift gefpruitgeii
(ftirbt) ift geftorbett
74 Note that all the above verbs are intransitive and express
a transition either of condition (as geftorbett) or of place (as
gefottttttett). Such verbs are conjugated with ift instead of ^at
in the perfect tense. In the same manner is conjugated the
verb ift — er ijl geloefett, and mirb — er ift getuarbett.
75 2)er S^neiber ttitb ber ®^tt^mar|et
©in Sc^u^mad^er ift einmal fe^r tranf gemefen, 2)a
^t er einen 3) of tor gerufen. ®iefer ift gefommen unb
I)at i)iel SJlebijin t)erf(^rieben. 33efonberg f)at er befo{)Ien:
76 ' Observe position of always in text.
'^ nor^ f (^netter = stiU more quickly (cf . noji^ \itVik, 68, 4).
30
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[77-78
„®ie effen nic^t^!"^ 9?un ^at aber ber S^nlimadjer fef)r
gern- Sauertraut Qegeffen nnb ba er hunger gefjabt f)at,'^
]^at* jeine ^^xan einen 2:o|)f ©auerfraut gefodjt, i^r
Wann i)at tiic^tig gegeffen iinb ift batb gefnnb getnorben,
SlI^ ber Sottor bag geljort Ijat,^ ^at er in feiit ^Zoti^biicf)
gefc^rieben: ,,®auerfraiit ift ein Wittel gegen ben
X^p^ng." Salb ift and) ein ©c^neiber franf geiDorben,
®er Sottor ift gefomtnen nnb i)at fogleii^ ©anertrant
t)erfcl)rieben. 2l(Iein^ ber Srfjneiber ift geftorben. S)a
i)at ber ®oftor in fein 9Zoti^bncf) gefd^rieben: „®aner=
frant fnriertbenSc^nljmadjer^ nnb tbtet ben ©d^neiber/"'
77
came
prescribed
commanded
ate
became
wrote
VOCABULARY
Perfect Tense
Strong
ift gemefeit
ift gefoinmen
I)at t)erfd)rie'beif
t)at befo{)'Ieir
^at gegeffen
ift getDorben
t)at gefd^rteben
Weak
had ^ai gef)abt
cooked f)ai gefod)t
heard t)at geljuvt
cure ^at furiert'
kill ^at getotet
78 1 ^ic effen ui^tg— an indicative used for a command = you must
eat nothing.
^ |at Bern gegeffen = like'd to eat. Observe order of words; cf.21,2.
3 Observe order of words; cf. 21, 4.
* Observe order of words; cf. 21, 3. Here the preceding adverb is
a temporal clause.
^ aUein = but, adversative after eitlier positive or negative state-
ment; see fonliem and after, 66, 1.
^ben Sdjn^ma^er = shoemakers — noun with geneHc article stands
for entire class; see App. 100.
^ Note that where the first syllable of a verb is an unaccented pre-
fix (er, tte, Uer, ht, itV, ent) the augment ge is omitted in the parti-
ciple. The same is true of verbs ending in ie'ren (which last are of
French origin).
79]
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT
31
tailor
shoemaker
once
sick
ber ©d^ueiber
ber (Scf)u()mac^er
einmar
fran!
pot
man, husband
heartily
soon
ber Xo^f
ber Wann
tiic^tiij
balb
doctor
ber ^ of tor
well (healthy)
gefmib'
medicine
especiallj'
bie 9}lebiain'
befou'berS
notebook
means
ba^ 9Jotis't)ud)
t>a^ mind
nothing
now, well }
(expletive) \
sauerkraut
iiic^tg
mm
ba§ ©mierfraut
against
typhoid fever
at once
gegen
ber ^9|)()U0
^fogleic^'
hunger
ber |)mtger
to cure
hirie'ren
woman, wife
bie e^rau
to kill
toten
79 2Ber ift trauf (^emeieii? aBa§ I)at er c^e^abt? aSa^
i)at er getan? Sft ber Sottor fogleicf) gefommen? SBa^
^at ber 3)oftor getan? SBa§ f^at er befo{)Ien? §at
ber S^neiber ha^ getan? a93a§ ()at er gern getan?
SBer ^at §nnger ge^abt? 2Ba^ ()at bie "Svan gefoc^t?
aSie t)iel I)at fie gefodjt? JJiir tuen I)at fie e^ ge!od)t?
$at ber 3)fann e§ gern gegeffen? Sisie ift e^ i^ni befom=^
men? (How did it agree witli him?) S'g ift i^m fel)r
gnt betommen, 3ft er gefnnb gemorben? SBa§ ijat ber
3)o{tor gelernt? ^at er e» be^aCten (remembered)?
3Sa§ t)at er gefi^rieben? Q^ft fonft jemanb (anybody
else) franf gemorben? SSe(d)e^ SiJtittel ^at ber 3)oftor
Derfd^rieben? ^\t e§ i^m gnt betomnten? SBie ift e^
if)m betomnten? SSa^ f)at ber 2)ottor nnn gelernt?
2Ba§ ^aft bn gern ge(}abt? 3Ben i)abe id) geliebt? SBer
ift gefommen, at^ ber Sd^nfjmac^er franf gemefen ift?
Sft ba^ ^ndjtein unge^orfam getnefen?
32 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [80-83
80 GRAMMAR
1. The perfect tense of both strong and weak verbs is
formed by means of the tense auxiliaries l^rit or ifl + per-
fect participle of the verb.
2. Only intransitive verbs of transition (of place or con-
dition) take ift; all others take |ot. See App. 68-70.
8 1 PARADIGM
Strong
ic^ ^abe gefe^en ic^ bin gemefen
bu l}aft „ bit bift „
er^at „ er ift
Weak '
\d) ^aOe gefiirc^tet tc^ bin gefoljt
\>\\ ^aft „ bu bift „
er :^ot „ er ift „
82 SBag 1:\(ii ber ^aWd^t getan? ©r ift geflogen, 2Sie
ift er geflogeu? ©djnell ift er geftogen? SBa^ ^at bie
Sa^e getan? ©ie ift gefprungen, 2Ba^ ()at fie fonft
no^^ getan? ©ie Icjdt bie 2)iang g^jcigt- ^at fie fie
gefangen? 9lein, fie \)ai bie 3JJan§ nic^t gefangen, aber
bie 3Kan§ l^at bie Sa^e gefiird^tet, SBa^ ^at bie SKanei
getan? ©ie ^at eine ©c^eUe getanft. §at fie fie ber
fe'a^e ange^cingt? 9?ein, fie ^ai ba§ ni(^t getan, fie t)at
feinen 9Knt gef)abt, 3ft ber Sanfmann geritten? 3ft
ber §nnb gefprnngen? Sft ber SSogel geflogen? aSer
ift gefontmen? 3Ber ^^ai ben ^abic^t gefetjen? 3Sen ^at
bie ^enne gernfen? SBen l^at bie §enne gem ge^abt?
aSer ift geftogen? 3ft ber §abi(^t fd^neU geflogen? SSer
ift getomnten? aSa^ Icjdi ber ^abid^t getan? 3ft ^^d^:}
Siic^Iein ge^orfant getnefen?
83 ^ fonft no(| = besides; cf. no^ immer, <>8, 4; noi| fj^nettrr, 76,3.
84-8«] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 33
84 WRITTEN EXERCISES
/. Write the perfect paradig7)i of: bu fotgft, bu
bx\t, er ruft, er ^at, er tut, id) fiird^te, fie jagt*
II. Aiisiver: 2Ber ^at ben ^abic^t gefei)eu? 2Ba§
^at ber ^aufmann t)erIoreu? Sft ber ^unb gefprmigen?
,^at er gebeHt? 2Ben {)aft bu geru? SBa^ I)at ba§ Siub
tieber, ben 33erg ober ba^ SKaffer? 2Bie ift ^a^ Siid^Ieiu
gefommeu? 2Bie ift ber 3Sogel geftogeu? SBa^ t)at bie
ajJau^ gefauft? ^at bie Sa|e bie ©c^eUe an?
///. Translate: The dog jumped and barked. The merchant
lost his purse. When did the dog jump? What did the hen
see? What did the mouse fear ? Whom did you love ? What
did I love ? How did he come ? The doctor prescribed much
medicine. The sauerkraut cured the shoemaker, but killed the
tailor. The doctor came quickly. The girl became ill. The
chick died. The dog died suddenly.
LESSON 8
85 Genitive
2)ag ift ber ^Juub beg 9}Jauue^.
©ie liebt bie Sa^e ber grau*
©r fiel^t ben 35ogeI beS Siube^*
NOM.
Gen.
M.
ber 9JJaun (etn)
be§ ajJauueS (eiueg)
F.
bie fjrau (eiue)
ber grau (eiuer)
N.
bag Siub (eitt)
beg SiubeS (eiueg)
ttjer? ttja^?
lueffen?
86 Note that the inflection of the genitive masculine and
neuter is alike (c8) both in the noun and the artide; that
the feminine noun is not inflected; and that the article in
feminine genitive ends in ct.
34 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [87-90
87 Observe that the genitive follows the noun it limits.
88 2)er ftopf ber ^euiie ift Hein,
SLVeffen Sopf ift ftein?
2)er giiicjel beg §tttii^t« ift ftarf.
aSeffeu gtiigel ift ftarf ?
Der Sorper beg ^it^Ieing ift !(ein/
SBeffeii ftorper ift fleiii?
2)ie g^arbe einer ^emie ift grau ober tueig,
aSeffeu garbe ift grau?
2)cr 5tii9 ^itt^€^ §tt6i^t0 ift I)o^»
aBeffeu ^lug ift l)od)?
2)ie ajhtttet beg ^inbeg ift l)ier.
aSeffeu mnitex ift I)ier?
89 VOCABULARY
head bcr ^'opf - color bic ?^arBe
wing ber ?^lugcl flight ber glug
strong ftar! high ()£)d)
body ber ^or^er here I)ier
90 Xtv 2)ieiter beg Itiinigg
Gin ftouig ^at eiiimal eiiieu Sieiier ge^abt, 3)er
5Dieuer beg Souigg I)at bie ffiadje ge^bt, aber er ift
miibe geiDefen uiib ift eiiigefdjlafeiL 2)er Sonig ^t if)U
gerufeU; aber ber Sieuer beg Souigg t)at eg uidjt get)ort.
®a ift ber Souig gefommeu unb l)at U)n gefu^t. ©r
^at einen aSrief beg Sienerg gefunben. 2)er 33rief ift
an bie 9Kntter beg 2)ienerg gemefen, ®er ^onig l)at
91-92] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 35
ben 35rief gelefen* 2)a i)at geftanben\* ,,Sd^ bin je^t jo
miibe, benn i^ ^be lange nic^t gejdtilafen. Qc^ i)abe fo
Diel jn tnn ge^abt, nnb nnn fc^icfe id) bir ba§ @elb/' 2)a
l)at ber ffonig SOJitteib gefiitjlt nnb i}at @elb t)in'gelegt
nnb ift fort'gegangen, ®er S)iener ift balb anf gema^t,
i}at ba^ ®e(b be^ S^onig^ gefnnben nnb ift ^nerft je^r
erfd^rocfen, ®ann f)at er ade^ geprt nnb f)at fic^ fe^r
gefrent nnb ijat ha^ @e(b be^ ^onig^ an feine SKntter
gef^ictt,
9 i VOCABULARY
Masculine
NoM. Gen.
king ber ^'onig bel ^ouigl
servant ttt Xieiter bcl ^ieuevl
letter bcr 23nef beS 33nef8
Feminine
NoM. Gen.
story bit 6Jefc^ic^te ber ^efc^ic^te
watch bie 2Boc^e ber2Bad)e
mother bie 3)hitter ber SOhitter
Neuter
NoM. Gen.
pity ba0 SD^itleib bel mnum
money baS ®elb bel ®elbel
Pres. Perf.
I go to sleep ic^ fc^lafc etii' ic^ bin ein'gefc^Iafen
he hears er ^ovt er ^ot gef)ort
you seek bu flK^ft bll l^oft QefllC^t
I find i(^ finbe ic^ ^abe gefimbeu
you write bu f c^reibft bu ^aft gefd^rtebeu
92 ^ §at Qefianben = stood ; subject is the following clause. What is
the order?
36
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[93-94
Pres.
Perf.
he reads er licft
cr l)at gelefen
he sleeps er fd^lftft
er f^at gef^lafen
I feel ic^ fit^le
id) I)abe gefui)tt
I do i^ tue
id) ^be getan
you lay money dow-n bu legft ^clb fjllt'
bu ^a\t (^elb ^tn'gelegt
he goes away er ge{)t fort' ^
er ifit forfgegaugen
I wake up [^ lt)OC^e Qltf
id) tin mif gemac^t
I watch id) tva^t
id) 'f)aht geujod^t
you are frightened bU erfd^rttfft'
hn hifi erfc^ro'cfen^
he rejoices very much er f reut ftC^^ f e^r
er ^at \id) fe^r gefreut
I send to my mot^her td^ fd^irfe ait metite
tc^ 1)aht on meine 9}^ut=
ajJutter
ter gefd^icft
tired mube a long time lange (adverb)
for beuu at first ^uerft'
all
aHeg
93 aSer f)at ben 33rief gejd^rieben? 3ft er eiugefc^Ia^
fen? aSer I)at i^n gefnnben? ,^at ber Sonig ben Srief
gelefen? 9ln tuen ift ber 93rief gemefen? 2ln meffen
9)httter ift er getDefen? 3ln bie SKntter be§ ®iener§,
2Ba§ {)at ber S)iener be§ Sonigg gefdjrieben? ^at ia^
ben Sontg geriil^rt? 2Bag l^at ber ^ontg l^ingelegt?
aeSeffen ®elb ift eg getnefen? j^iix^ wen ift eg getnefen?
94 ^ Observe that an adverb closely associated with a verb, is written
with the perfect participle, like a part of the verb. In the present
tense it comes last in the sentence. This particle always has the
accent. See App. 80.
2 Note that when an unaccented prefix is attached to the verb,
the perfect participle omits the augment gf.
^ flli^ is reflexive for third person.
* fiir tuen? = for whom ?
96-97] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 37
^at ber 2)iener be§ Sontgg ba§ ®elb gefunbeu? 3ft er
erfdjtoden? ^at er jidj gefreut? 2i>ag f)at er baim
getan? 3Seffen @o^n I)at gej^Iafeu? SBeffeu Sieiter
Ijai bie SBa^e ge^abt? SBeffen Sonig ^at if)n gefunben?
aSeffen ^uiib l)at bag @elb geje^en? &^efjen ^ferb ift
j^neH gelaufen? SBeffen 33orfe ift gefaUen? SBeffen
ftud)tetn f)at ber §abi^t gefreffeu? SSeffeu 9Jtutter ift
bie ^enne?
95 Mil m witJi articles: 3)te ^enne ift bie SUJutter
fiiid^Iein^. S)er §unb ftaufmann^ I}at bie
33orfe gefet)en. 5Da§ ^ferb SWanue^ ift grau, S)ie
garbe ^unbe§, ^eiiue, ^Mdjlein^. S)er
I51ug ,^em\e ift nidjt ^odj. Sie SRutter
Sinbeg ift ^ier,
96 Answer: SBeffeii Siidjieiu ift uidjt gefommen?
SSeffen §unb I)at bie 33orfe gefe^en? SSeffen Sruber ift
ein Dntel? SBeffen SSater ift ®roBt)ater? SBeffen Sorfe
ift gefaUen? SSeffen ©^ttjefter ift eine STante? SKeffen
glug ift t)oc^? aSeffen ajJutter ift ^ier? SBeffen Sopf
ift grofe? SBeffen gliiget ift ftart?
97 Translate: The hen's chick did not hear the mother. The
merchant's purse fell. The horse of the merchant was large.
The merchant's dog saw the purse. The chick's mother called
it. The king's servant did not go to sleep. The grandfather
is the father's father or the mother's father. Is the nephew
the son of a brother or of a sister? The uncle of the brother
of the father or of the mother.
38 ELEMENTS OF GEEMAN [98-100
LESSON 9
Dative
98 Indirect Object
2)er 2)iener t)at bcr SJlutter mten Srief gef^rieben.
3)cr Koiiig I)at bem Wiener ba^ ®elb gegeben* 2)ie
9Kaug :^at bcr ^a^c !etne Sc^elle auge^dugt ®er ^uub
t)at bem ^aufmami 'i)a^ @elb iii^t gerettet 2)er Sauf=
mami l^at bem SJJferb bie ©poren^ gegebeiu S)er Wiener
l)at feittet SJluttcr eiueii 33rtef gefdjriebeu. 2)er tonig
]^at feittem ^itntv bag @elb gegebeii, Qeiie Wlam l^at
blefet ^a^e feiiie ©djette auget)diigt, 2)iefer §uub l^at
itntm ^attfmttiitt feiit ©elb nidjt gerettet.
99 KoM. Dat.
bet Stoiiig bem ^ontg
bie 5Jlutter bet ^ntttv
bag ^^ferb bem ^ferb
100 SBem l)at ber 2)iener einen Srief gefdjrieben?
I)er Stttttter ijat er i^n gefdjrieben,
aaSag ^at er beir SJlutter gefd)riebeu?
©iueu Srief t)at er i^r gefc^rieben.
3Bem ()at ber ftaufmami bie ©poreu gegcbeu?
Setnem 5pferb ijat er fie gegeben,
aiJag l)at er feiuem ^Pfevb gegebeu?
2)ie Sporen ^t er ti||m gegebeu.
SBem Ijat ber Sonig bag ®elb gegebeu?
®etnem 2)iener Ijat er eg gegebeu,
aSag ^at er ttm Wiener gegebeu?
^a^ ®elb ijat er t^m gegebeu,
* tie @|iprctt = spurs.
101-103]
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT
39
101
Nominative
J and Dative
Nom.
ber
bie
ba§
Dat.
bem
ber
bem
Nom.
jener
jeue
jene^
Dat.
jeucm
jener
jenem
Nom.
eiit
etue
eiii
Dat.
eiiiem
eiuer
ctnem
Nom.
metii
metne
nieiii
Dat.
meiitem
meiiier
meiuem
Nom.
tuer?
Dat.
mem?
102
Dative after Prepositions
^tt§ ©emiffeii be§ SBoIfS
©in ©jel fonimt einnml an^ bem Sl^albe nnb begeg^
net einem SBolf.^ liefer Ijat feit bem Xag 3nt)or nidjt^
gegefjen nnb ift fe^r Ijungrig. ®a uerfnc^t ber ©jel, fid)
jn retten. ,,^cibe^ SOJitleib mit mir, id) bin arm nnb
franf, id) tomme eben t)on bem 9BaIbe, ino id) anf einen
SDorn getreten bin. 3d) ge^e nnn nadj ber @tabt, p
einem 2)ottor, ber foU mir l)elfen.^ Unb er ^^eigt bem
a55oIf feinen %n^, tnorin rid)tig ein 2)orn ftedt. 2)od)^
bei bem 2Bolf fte()t e^' feft/ ha^ er ben &)el frigt. ®o
fprid)t er, nad)bem er fid) ein inenig befonnen \}at: ,,5!Kein
©emiffen befief)(t mir, bid) t)on beinem Seiben ^n be=
freien." Unb im 9?n t)at er ben (£fet anfgefreffen.
1 03 1 Note that ficgepet takes dative as direct object. See App. 133.
^fidht, imperative.
*lier jott mir ^ctfen = he is to help me.
J )I0(^ = but. yet (adversative) cf. 78, 5.
■' Anticipatory object — in apposition with the foUowing ba^ clause.
'^bct . . . feft = it is a settled matter with the wolf.
40
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[104-106
I04 Prepositions that always govern the dative:
to (a place) na^ out of au^
to (a person) git near, with bcl
from t)On since jeit
with mit
105
VOCABULARY
Masculine '
NOM.
DAT.
wolf
ber SSoIf
bent SSolf(e)
donkey
ber @fel
bem efel
woods
ber SSalb
bem 2Batb(e)
day
ber Xag
bem Stag(e)
thorn
ber ^orn
bem ^orn(e)
doctor
ber ®o!tor
bem Softer
foot
ber 5u§
bem 5it§(e)
FemininI:
NOM.
DAT.
city
bie Stabt
ber ©tabt
Neuter
NOM.
DAT
conscience ha§> (^etOtf feU
bem ^emif feu
pity
'i)a^ mtki'o
bem $mitleib
suffering ha^ Seibett
bem Seibeu
Pres.
Perf.
I come
ic^ !omme
i^ Bin gefommen
I meet
i6) begeg'ne
id) bin begeguet
he eats
ertgt
er ^at gegeffen
I try
td^ t)erfu'c§e
tc§ \)aU t)erfu^t
he saves himself
er rettet fid)*
er ^at fic^ gerettet
I step
i^ trete
i(^ Bin getreten
I go
i(i) ge^c
t^ Bin gegangen
he shows
ergeigt
er f)at gegeigt
* Observe that the infinitive phrase, flt^ jtt tettCU (to save him-
self), occurs in the text.
100-107
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT
41
PRES.
Perf.
it sticks
e§ fterft
c§ ijat geftedt
he devours ei* f ri^t
er i)at gefreffeit
he speaks
er fpric^t
er l)at gefprod^en
I consider
ic^ befin'ne mic^
ic^ ^ahz mid^ befonnen
he commands ei* Beftel^It'
er f)at befoti'len
he frees
er befreit'
er f)at befreit
before
5ut)or'
in -w
rhich tuorin'
hungry
l^ungrifl
really ric^ticj
I)oor
arm
but
boc^
sick
!ran!
firm
feft
just
eben
after nac^bcm' (conjunction)
where
tl)0
a little eiii mentg
now
nun
in a
trice im 9fJu
I06 Seit tvann ^t ber SBoIf ge^nngert? 3Sie ift er
je^t? aSem bec^egnet biefer 33?olf? 35>em begeguet ber
gfel? SBag Derfud)! ber ©fel 511 tun? 2Ba^ geigt er
bem aSolfe? aSBa^ i)at er in bem gn^? 2Bo^er ift er
gefommen? SBo^in gef)t er? Sffier lnot)nt^ in ber ©tabt?
3u tuem ge^t ber (£je(? SBa^ jo(l ber 2)oftor bem ©fel
tun? 2Ba^ ftectt in bem 5nj3 be^ ©fete? 2Bag fte^t bei
bem SSolfe feft? 2Bie lange ^at \\i) ber SSoIf befonnen?
3ft \)a^ ©emiffen be^ 2Bo(fe§ fef)r jart?' SBa^ befie^It
e^ it)m? @e^ord)t^ er feinem ©emiffen? SBag tnt er
im 9lu?
aSo!)in reitet ber Sanfmann? 9?ac^ ber Stabt reitet
er, ajlit mem f priest ber 9Jlann? $IJit feinem 9?ater
1 07 ^ ttio^ttt = dweUs.
^ jUtt = tender.
^ (je^Orj^t = obeys.
42 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [108-110
j<)ri(^t ber Tlamu ^u tuem ift ha§> tiidjlein gelaufen?
Su jeiner mnttn ift e§ gelaufen, SBo^er^ ift ber SSoIf
gefommen? ©eit wann ^at er nid)tg gefreffett? 93ei
tuem l^at ber ®iener be^ Sonigg getebt? SBem i)at er
eineu Srief gefi^riebeu? 3u ttjem ift ber Sotiig gegangen?
LESSON 10
pREPOSITION^S WITH ACCUSATIVE
108 ©in S)orf liegt fe^r einfam itn gelbe, ®g ift feit
lange^ ffrieg getDefen, unb je^t ^ort mm, ba§ ber geinb
gegen ba§ S)orf jie^t. 2)a§ 2)orf ^at feine Slrmee' miber
\>n\ geinb 511 fc^icfeu unb man fiirc^tet fi^ fe()r, 3)a
bittet ber ^farrer ®ott nm feinen ©d^n^, ©r foil ettt)a§
fiir ba§ 35orf tnn.^ ^n ber 9iad)t fommt and) ber geinb,
bod) er jie^t Doriiber ol^ne SJJorb, <5ener ober S^otfd^Iag,
2Bag ^ai nur ben Drt bef^it^t? 3n ber ')ilcii)i \)ai eg
gefd)neit nnb eine SSanb t)on ©d^nee \)ai fii^ nm bag
Sorf ge^ogen, fo ha^ ber g^nb nid)tg bauon* gefe^en
\)Cit ®a§ ^at "ba^ Sorf gerettet,
109 Prepositions that always govern the accusative:
through, by means of buvrf) against, contrary to tUtbcr
for fiir without of)Ue
against, toward QCQCU ai'oiind UTtt
f iO * tUO|er = whence.
2 feit lOttge = a long time.
^ fott iVin = is asked to do.
>iiatiott = of it.
Ill] INDI
CATIVE SINGUL
AR PERFECT
1 1 1
VOCABULARY
Masculine
NOM.
Acc.
war
bcr ^'rieg
belt Srieg
enemy
ber ^^eiiib
belt geinb
pastor
ber starrer
belt ^farrer
God
ber (^ott
\)tn (^ott
protectiou ber @C^U^^
ben ^d)u^
murder
ber mvvh
ben moxh
slaughtei
' ber Xotjdjlag
belt Xotfdjiag
place
ber Drt
ben Ort
snow
ber (Sdjitec
ben 8^nce
Feminine
army
bie 5(rmee'
bie ^Irmec'
night
bie ^ad)t
bie 3lad)i
wall
bie 3Boub
Neuter
bie SBmtb
village
\)a^ ^orf
ha^, ^orf
field
ba^ Tsd't)
'oa^ gelb
fire
\)a^ gcuer
bo§ geiier
Pres.
Perf.
It lies
e§ liegt
c§ I)at gclcgen
one hears
luaii I)ort
man I)at gel)i)rt
he marches
er 5iel)t
er ift gc^ogeit
he sends
cr irf)tcft
cr I)at gefd)idt
one is afraid
iimu furd)tet ]id)
man t)at jid) gefiird)ti
he prays, heg
s er bittet
cr ()at gcbeten
he prays
er betet
cr I)at gcbetet
he does
er tut
cr l)at gctan
he protects
er bc}d)ufet
cr I)at bcjd)ii^t
it snows
e» jd^neit
e§ I)at gefd)neit
it draws abont C» ^tct)! ftd)
e^ t)at fic^ ge^ogen
he sees
er fiel)t
cr I)at gefel)en
this saves
'oa^ rettet
ta^ hat gerettet
43
44 ELEMENTS OF GERJMAN [112-114
lonely ein|'am something et'tUQ^
for long feit lange past uorii'ber
now je^t only mir
1 12 SBJte Uegt ha^ ®orf? 2Ber jie^t gegen bag ®orf?
^at bag 2)orf feine Strmee? ®egen tueu fdjidt man eine
SCrmee? S^iird^tet man fid^ fe^r? 3u ft^^nt betet ber
starrer? 28er bittet nm ®otteg ©^n|? 33ittet er nm
©otteg ©(^nfe fiir bag 2)orf? SSag ^at ®ott fiir bag
2)orf getan? 6r l^at eg befi^ii^t ®egen tnen? SBer
lommt gegen bag ®orf? Snt er ettnag imber bag ®orf?
aSie 3iel)t er t)ornber? SSag i)at ben Drt bef^it^t?
2Bo tft bie aSanb gemefen? 3ft fie aug ©c^nee getnefen?
3Bag ^at ber geinb nidjt gefef)en? 395ag tear um bag
3)orf?
1 13 ^onntagtnorgen
®te^/ ber 9Jiann !ommt ang ber SBette,
Cangfam bnrc^ ber SSiefe ©lan^,
Unb er ijixlt in ^anben^ Ijente,
©tatf beg ^flngg ben Stofenfranj.
aUntter fommt mit i^rem Sinbe,
Unb eg^ eitt bie ©c^nitterin,
^immelggarben^ l^ent^ p binben,
3u bem §ang beg ^immelg ^in.
I 14 iM= behold!
^ttt ^iillilCtt — stereotyped phrase = in his hands.
^ fiatt — preposition governing the genitive = instead of. These
prepositions are not so frequently found as those that govern the
dative, or the accusative. See App. 126.
* e8 — merely introductory; do not translate (somewhat like English
there).
^ p'mnitU^nvttn = heavenly sheaves— picturesque figure of speech
for "laying up treasures in heaven."
116-118] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 45
SlHe^^ ^ie^t nadj einem^ ^iri^
Slu§ ber 9id^e, an§> ber S^ernV^
SSeg t)om^ lauten SSeltgetDit^te
§in sum* ftiUen §aii^ be^ |)ernu
binbet
bag Qid
hit D^d^e
bie gerne
ba§ SSBettgetDiiljl
ftia
ber §err (gen.
be§ |)errn)
1 16 SBie ift ein ©onntagmorgen? 9(r6ettet bann alle§?
SSa§ tut jeber? SBa§ ^at bie SSiefe? ©ie ^at eiiien
©(aiij, SBer gieljt burd^ ben ©lans ber 3Siefe? SKa§
^d(t ber 9JJann ()eute in |)dnben? aSa^ ^dlt er jonft
(on otlier days) in ,^dnben? Strbeitet er mit bent
^ftug? Setet er mit bem 3?ofentranj? SJJit mm
fommt bie 9JJutter? SBa^ binbet bie ©c^nitteriu
fonft? aBa§ binbet fie ^eute? SSo jie^t aUe^ ^in?
I 1 7 Insert nouns in proper cases : 9lIIe§ fomntt a\\^:>
unb ^ie^t nac^ , 2)ie 9JJutter fommt mit
t)om , §um , ®er SJfann ^dlt
in §dnben« ©onft ^dlt er . (£r ^ieljt
1 15
VOCABULARY
Sunday morning bei* (Somitag'
binds
morgeii
draws toward
distance
bie 2Beite
goal
brightness
ber (^\mi
neighborhood
to-day
^eiite
distance
plough
ber $flug
away
rosary
ber 9iofen!ran5
rush of the wo
she hurries away fie ettt I^IU
quiet
reaper (fem.)
bie (Sc^nitteriii
Lord
sheaf
bie (JJarbe
burd) , gu
■ ■" ^ (lfff§ — neuter as collective, very common in German, mea-
ning all people, but seeming to include all beings.
^ etnem ^ielc — emphasize einem in reading and translate : one goal.
^ ^U§ . . . i^f ttt = from near and far.
*tiom, pm — contractions of tion tiem, ivi bem.
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [119-121
LESSON 11
Dative and Accusative with Preposition to express
Position and Transition
1 19 Dat. 2Bo ift bie ^Jeniie? 3u bem ©arten.
Ace. aSoljiu geljt fie? ^w ben ©arteiu
Dat. aSo ift bie Sa|e? Sluf bet ©trafte.
Ace. aaSo||itt fpringt fie? Sliif bie Strafe.
Dat. ago ift bie 9Kutter? SJor "^m C^aufe.
Ace. . aSa^itt get)t fie? aSor ba§ ^pan§.
120 Observe that the prepositions in, ttttf, tior may express
either position or transition from one place to another, accord-
ing as the verb expresses a state of rest (as ftc^eit, lilciben,
fi^en) or a motion towards an object (as gc^cn, Ittttfen). When
a state of rest is expressed, tlie preposition is followed by the
dative, when motion towards an object is expressed, by the
accusative. The prepositions of this kind arc:
by an over liber upon auf
behind ()inter under lintcr in, Into ill
beside ncbeit between gtDljd^en before, in front of t)Or
121 SBofjiu ift ber Sonig be§ 2)ienerg gefommen?
®r ift in ba^5 ^intmer gefommen. ^ffio(}in ift ber |)abid)t
geflogen? 9lnf ba^ 5!iic^Iein ift er geflogen, 3Bo ift ba^
Siic^Iein getuefen? 3n bem ®arten ift e^ gemefen. 3Sof)in
ift e^ nirfjt gelanfen? Unter ben ^liigel ber 9J?ntter ift e^
nid)t gelanfen, 3)er tanfmann ^ai anf bem ^ferbe
gefeffen nnb fein §nnb ift neben i^m t)ergetanfen. 2So
^ai er gefeffen? 2Bo ift ber .^nnb tjergelanfen? 2)ie
33orfe ift auf ben 33oben gefatlen, SSo^in ift bie 93orfe
122-124] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 47
gef alien? ®er §unb ift jtDtj^en bem Saufmann unb ber
33()rfe ^in unb l)er gefprungen. 2Bo ift ber §unb Ijxn
unb ^er gejprungen? ®ie SKaus ift Winter ben ©tu^l
gefprungen* SBo^in ift fie gefprungen? Der Stnl)I I)at
Winter bem Xifd) geftanben^ SBo ijat er geftanben?
122 Pres. Perf.
er ftl3t er f)at cjefeffen
id) iQufe l)er irf) bin I)erge(aiifen
fie fdllt fie ift gefalleu
where:- tt)l)? room 'i)a§> 3^^^^^'
where to!- lUOl^ilt"? to and fro ij[n Ullb ^er
garden ber kartell chair ber (3tut)l
street bte Strafje tawe ber %i]<^
house hCl^ ^a\l^
123 (§in Uttterft^ieb
Sluf einem Sirrfjtnrme l)at einmal ein ©tord) gefeffen.
9((§ er niiibe gemorben/ ift er t)innnter anf hie Strafe
geflugen. S)a0 !)at ber Sater gefel)en. ©^ l}at i(}m^ gut
gefallen unb er ijat bei fid) gebadjt: „®i, ba^ tue id)
andj!" ©r ift alfo anf ben 2:nrm getlettert, Ijat .anf bie
Strafe gefe^en unb Ijat fid) bann l^inunter anf ben Soben
geftiirst, 9l6er ba§ Ijat iljm^ fe^r inelj getan unb er
Ijat laut gefdjrieen, 2)a I)at er gefagt: ,,2)ag gUegen^
Ijat fidj gemadjt, aber ha^ SUeberfi^en^ ift ehva^
befd)tner(idj gemefen,"
124 1 Supply ift.
- Dat. obj. of ^ttt gefaUen.
3 Dat. governed by ^at ttie^ getdll.
* Verbal noun ; note gender.
48
125
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
VOCABULARY
[125-120
Pees,
Perf.
he sits on the tower CY ft^t OUf bettt Xuritte
er f)ot auf bent Xurme
gefeffen
you become h\l W'u^t
bu bift geU)orben
he flies down cr fliegt fjeruuter
er ift ^erunter geflogeu
it pleases me well e§ gefdUt Htir
gut
e§ ^at mir gut gefalleu
he thinks er beuft
er i)at gebac^t
he climbs on the er ftettert auf ben
er ift auf ben Xurm ge^
Xurm
flettert
he casts himself down er ftur^t ftC^ f)i
luiuter
er ^at fic^ f)tuuuter ge=
ftiirgt
that hurts me \)a^ tut lulr tDCf)
ba§ 1:)at mir mi) getaii
I scream ic^ fd)reie
id) t)ab^ gefd^rieeu
I say id) fage
id) i)ah^ gefagt
that does pretty well e§ inad^t \xd)
e§ ^at fic^ geiuac^t
it is e§ ift
e§ ift gett)efeu
difference ber Uii'terfc^ieb
why:
ei!
steeple ber £*ird)tiirm
tower
ber Xurm
stork ber Stord^
ground
ber Sobeu
when aB
flying
't>a^ ^luQtn
tired llulbe
sitting down ba§ ^Hcberft^eu
down f)initn'ter
somewhat et'tDO^
tom-cat ber ^akv
difficult
befc^mer'tic^
126 2Bo I)at ber ©torc^ (]eie|fen? aBo^iu ift ber Skater
(]e!lettert? §at ber Stored bem Sater gefallen? SBo{)in
f)at ber Sater gefef)en? SBofjin ^at er fi(^ geftiir^t? ^at
i!)m bag tuef) getan? 3Sag l^at i^m rt)e^ getan, ha^
gtiegeu ober bag 9iieberfi^en?
127-130]
INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT
49
2)er ©tor^ fi^t auf bent 2:unn. SBorttttf fi^t er?
2luf bem Sturm. aSobur^ I)at @ott bag Sorf befc^li^t?
®ur(^ ben @^nee» SSorin lebt ber gifd)? Sm^ SBaffer*
aSoritt lebt ber SSogel? Su ber Suft Siegt ba§ ®orf
in bem 2BaIb? ^a, eg liegt bartn. 2i^ag lebt tm2Bajfer?
©in %i\^ lebt baritt. ka^ ift urn bag 2)orf? ©ine
SBanb aug ©i^nee ift barum.
1 27 Note that mag and the demonstrative pronouns that repre-
sent lifeless objects are not used as the object of prepositions,
but are replaced by too and ba (before vowels tt)or and bar) and
written as compounds with the preposition.
in what?
tDorin'?
in that
barin'
at what?
tporan'?
at that
baran'
on what?
tDorauf?
on that
barauf
under what?
hjorun'ter?
under that
banm'ter
with what?
Itjomit'?
with that
bamit'
before what?
tr)ot3or'?
before that
batior'
for what?
tDofiir'?
for that
bafitr'
wherefore?
ioarum'?
therefore
barum'
128 Similarly are compounded the interrogative adverb too
and the demonstrative adverb bo with the adverbial particles
^in (thither) and ^cr (hither)
where? tt)0? there (place) 'iia
whereto? tDO'^in'? there (to) baf)in'
where from? tVO^tx'? from there ba^et'
129 ^ag Sai!^lein
®u 3Sac^Iein, filber^ell unb flar,
2)n eilft t)oruber immerbar;
2lm Ufer ftet)' i^, finn' unb finn':
aBo tommft bn t)er,^ tt)o get)ft bn l^in?
i30 1 Contracted form of in bent.
- tOO^tn and tOO^er are sometimes separated in colloquial usage.
50 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [131-182
^i) !omm^ aii^ buitfler %eV]e\i ®d)oJ3:^
9)leiu Saiif i]e()t iiber Slunf luib S)coo§;
Stiif metitem Spiegel jdjiuebt fo nitlb
®e^ blaueii ,S^imme(^ freunblid) Stib.
3)rum ^aV id) frol}eu ^tiiberfinn;'^
©^ treibt mid) fort^ iueif3=^ nidjt tuoljiu,
3)er^ mid) ncruf^n^ au§ bem Stein,
©r,^ beuf' tdj, iuirb meiii g^ul)rer jeiii,^
131
VOCABULARY
you hun-y
bit cilft
bu Bifl flccilt
I meditate
id) finiie
ic^ I)abe
nefoinien
it hovers
c§ fd)li)cbt
c§ I)nt gcfdjlucbt
it drives me on
c§ treibt mid) fort c<g I)at mid) fortgetrieben
I know
ic^ toeig
ic^ l)abe
dehjufet •
brooklet
bay S3ac^(eiu
(dim. of ber S3ac^)
bank
ha^ lifer
moss
bn§ moo^
rock
ber i^etfen
mirror, surface bcr (S^ieCJCl
lap
ber Sc^og
picture
bag S3ilb
course
ber Saiif
stone
ber (Stein
flower
bie 33tumc
guide
ber giif)rer
bright as silver
ft(berl)ea
mild
milb
clear
ilav
blue
Uan
past
t)oru'ber
gentle
freunblid^
forever
immerbar
therefore
brum (contracted
dark
bimfel
from bariim)
32 ^ an«J . . . ^^O^ = out of dark rocks. ■
- frozen llittiicr|ltttt = joyous, childlike mood.
^UJCife = iri^ ttieijj (poetic license).
* ber, er = he who.
^ficrttfen, supply ^at.
•^ ttiirii fcttt = will be.
133-134] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 51
133 aSo IjQbe id) geftaubeu? 2{u luefjen ttfer? 2Ba§
i)abe id) ha^ 33dd)leiu gefragt? 2Bof)er ift e^ gefommeu?
2l^o()tu ift e0 gegaii(]en? 9l>a§ fjat auf bem ©piegel be^
33ad}lein^ n^frf)^^^6t? ai^ei^ ha^ 33ad)(ein luo^iu e^ i]e()t?
21% ()at e^ gerufeu? 3i^oI)er ()at @ott bag 33ad)leiu
gerufen?
LESSON 12
1 34 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. The perfect tense of all verbs is formed by the tense
auxUiary ^ttbcn or fcin + perfect participle; fcin if the verb
expresses transition, jobctl in all other cases.
2. The perfect participle of all verbs is formed by prefixing
the augment jjc to the stem (except for verbs that have an
unaccented prefix) with endings as follows:
{a) Strong verbs alter the vowel of the root and add cjl —
ic^ fpringe, id) bin gcf^itungcn ; gc + stem changed + en.
{h) Weak verbs do not change the root vowel, and add
(e)t — ic^ folge, id) bin gcf o(gt; gc + stem unchanged + (c)t.
3. The participle stands last in the sentence.
4. The genitive masculine aild neuter has the article bcS,
cincif, and the noun = ending (c)8. The genitive feminine has
the article bcr, cittcr, but the noun has no inflection.
5. The dative masculine and neuter has the article bcm,
eincm, and the noun has no inflection (monosyllables may
add e). The dative feminine has the article bcr, cincr, (like
the genitive), the noun has no inflection.
6. The dative is used after some verbs as the direct object;
such verbs are: 16;) folge, ic^ begegne, ic^ f)elfe. See App. 132-138.
7. The dative is used after many verbs as the indirect
object; such verbs are: ic| gebe, id) fage, ic^ jeige. See App. 141.
52 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [135
8. The following prepositions always govern the dative:
ttO(^, Hon, au8, mit, JU, hti, fcit. See App. 146. These must
be learned.
9. The following prepositions always govern the accusa-
tive: bur^, fiir, gcgcn, tnibcr, o^ne, urn. See App. 164.
10. After the prepositions of position : an, ouf, Jitltcr, in,
ncbcn, fiber, nntcr, tior, jmifr^cn, the dative is used if the verb
expresses rest, and the accusative if the verb expresses motion
toward the object. See App. 147.
11. tUOg and the demonstratives that represent lifeless ob-
jects are not used as objects of prepositions. Instead of them
we use nio(r) and ba(r) to form a compound with the prep-
osition. See App. 171.
12. The definite article + preposition are contracted when
euphony permits : an + bem = ttm, an + 'i>a^ = on8, in + bent = im,
ill + \>a^ = inS, ju + bem = jum, 511 + ber = jnr, bei + bem = Mm,
135 VERBS
Perfect Ten^se
Strong
t^ })ait bag 33u^ gefe^en
bii ^ttft ha^ Su^ gefe^en
er ^at bag 95uc^ gefe^en
ic^ Bin in bag dimmer gelammen
hn iift in bag dimmer gefommen
er ift in bag dimmer gefommen
Weak
t^ me ben a3rief ge^ttW
bn ^aft ben Srief ge^ait
er ^at ben 33rief ge^ait
id) Bin bem aJZanne gefolgt
bn 6ift bem 9Kanne gefolgt
er ift bem Wanne gefolgt
136-137] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 53
136 NOUNS
Definite Article and Demonstrative Pronoun
Masc. Fern. Neut.
N. ber"^ aTcann btefe abutter jeneg Stnb
G. be^ 9JJanne§ biefer 9Jiutter jeneg ^Hitbe^
D. bent SJJanne biefer 9)Zutter jenem ftinbe
A. ben 9Kann btefe 9JJntter jene^ Stnb
Indefinite Article and Possessive Pronoun
N. ein §nnb meine S^tuefter nnfer 23 ud)
G. etne^ §nnbe§ nteiner ©djtnefter iinfere^ 23ud)e^
D. einent ^unb(e) nteiner @(^tne[ter nnferem 33ud)(e)
A. einen |)nnb ntetne ©c^tnefter nnjer 33nd)
137 REVIEW EXERCISES
/. Give present and perfect paradigms of: etlft,
bift, iiaft, ruft, !aufe, fpringft, folgt, geflettert
II. Decline: ber 9JJann, ber SKalb, bie 33Iume,
\>a^ 23dd)Iettt, \>(i^ 33ilb, ba^ Ufer, ber giiljrer, bie Sal^e.
Ill Fill out: 2)er ©tord) ji^t anf 2:nnn»
©r fliegt t)on 2^urnt, ®er ^ater flettert anf
Xnrnt. 2)te ©rofetnntter ift anf ©trage, ®ie
fflJntter ge^t in (Sarten, 2)er gifd) leOt — Staffer.
2)er 55ogeI lebt in Snft 2)er ©tordj fliegt t)on —
2^nrin,
IV, Ansioer: SBo^in fliegt ber ©tord)? 3Bof)er
fontntt ber 33ac^? aBoriiber ge^t fein £anf? aSSent ^at
bie aJlang bie ©^eUe ange^dngt? SBent f)at ber 2)iener
*For full declension of the articles and pronouns see App. 11
Wd \% '■
54 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [187
beg Sonig§ ben 33rief Qejcfjrieben? SSem ift ber SSoIf
begegiiet? 3Bot)er ift ber ©fel (]e!ommeii? aSoIjiu ift er
gegangen? SBag ^at er in bem gug geljabt? 3Beni ift
er begepet? 33Jag t)at bei bem SBotfe feftgeftaubeu?
aSag I}at bag S)orf gerettet? aiJoraug ift bie Sl^aiib ge^
madjt? SKo ift bie "i&anh getucfeu? SKer ift gegen bag
S)orf gefommen? 2Beu fdjicft man luiber ben 3^eiiib?
V. Translate: 1. The man went to the house of heaven
on Sunday morning. 2. The mother came with tlie child.
3. The Lord saved the village. 4. The brightness of the
meadow. 5. The hen's chick. G. The pastor of the village
begged God for protection. 7. The servant of the king wrote
his mother a letter. 8. The king gave the servant the money.
0. The wolf met the donkey. 10. The doctor did not help the
donkey. 11. The wolf devoured him in a trice. 12. The cat
sat on the tower. 13. The stork flew from the tower upon the
ground. 14. The cat jumped from the tower upon the street.
15. Where did the cat sit? 10. Where did he jump (to)?
17. Whence did he jump? 18. AVhat hurt him? 19. Where does
the brooklet go? 20. Whence has it come? 21. Whither
does its course go? >^
\
138-141]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
55
CHAPTER III
INDICATIVE PRETERITE. PLURALS
138
139
I40
LESSON IS
^er Stord) ^t^i aiif bcm Xurmc gcfcffcn.
©r fog mif bem Xurm.
^er tater tfl auf bic ©trnfic gcf^jrungcn.
@r flirttitg aiiT bie 8traftc.
^er .^ater ift ant ben Xurm gcflcttcrt.
©r flcttcrtc auf bcit Xurm.
Ta§ glicgen ^ot fid) gcmttf^t.
Xa§ gfi^G^" mai^tc fid).
Strong
InQnitive
Preterite
Perfect Part.
fi^cit
fflfe
Oefeffeit
fpringcit
flirong
Weak
gcfprungcn
flctteru
ftettcrtc
c^etlettert
mad)eit
ma^tc
(]cmac^t
1 4 1 Observe that strong verbs form their preterite from the
infinitive by an alteration of the stem-vowel, and that no suffix
is added. To form the preterite weak verbs add it to the stem.
The stem is found by dropping the Ctt of the infinitive.
The infinitive, preterite, and perfect participle constitute
the principal parts and on them are based all the modes and
tenses. The principal parts of every strong verb must be
learned.
56
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[142-145
42 paradigm-
Strong
fe^eit, fo§, gefe^en
bu faf)|l
er \di)
PRETERITE
"Weak
fragen, fragtc, gefragt
ic^ fragte
bu fragteft
er frogte
Note that in the preterite singular of both strong and weak
verbs only the second 2)&niOn shows a personal ending, (c)flt.
143 9Bag icbcr {a§
©in 8pec^t befuc^te einmal eiiten "^^axu Sine %anbt gtiig mil.
„9^un, iDie ()at bir I)eute ber ^<Pfau gefallen?"^ fragte ber ©pec^t. „2Bar
cr nic^t iDibrig? Uub it)te ftolg er ift! 2Barum tft er mir^ fo ftolg? (5ein
giig ift nid^t fc^on, feiite Stimme ift Imtt xin'i) I)d§tid^, er ift bumm,
iii^t lua^r?"^ ^ie %anht aber antluortcte: „3c§ geftelje, id) I)abe
'iia^ itic^t bemerft; i(^ fal) nur immer* feiueii ^opf, bie @(^onI)eit fei^
ne§ (^^efieber^ uub ben ^lan^ feine§ ©c^lueife^."
144
VOCABULARY
Strong
to see fel)en
fat)
gefet)eit
to go gel)en
9tng
gegangen
to please gef atteu
gefiet
gefaHen
to be fein
Wat
geioefeu
to confess geftef)en
geftanb
geftaubeu
1 45 ^ tilie ^at ilir . . . gefatten = how did the peacock please you? or,
how did you like the peacock? Notice the dative after Qcflltteu. See
App. 136.
'^ ttiarum . . . nur = but why?
^tlid^t ttJfl^r? (the French ti' est-ce-pas) requires an affirmative
reply.
*ili§ ftt§ nur immcr = I kept seeing only. Observe that while
the German has no progressive tense, the idea of continued action
is expressed by particles (cf. 83).
146-148] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 57
to visit befitd^eit
VV i^^Aft.
befuc^te
befii^t
to ask frageii
fragte
gcfragt
to answer aitttDOrteit
aittttjortete
geantmortet
to notice bemerfcn
bemerfte
bemer!t
woodpecker ber SpeC^t
voice
bie Sttmme
peacock ber ^fau
ugly
^fetirf)
dove bie Xoube
foolish
bumm
along mit
head
ber ^opf
to-day fjeute
beauty
bie ©c^on^eit
disagreeable tt)ibrig
plumage ba^ (SJefic'bcr
proud ftot^
sheen
ber ©tan5
foot ber 5»6
tail
ber ©c^ttjeif
146 SSen befiid^te ber Spec^t? SSar ber ^fmi ^u ^au\t?^ ©ing
ber (S^e^t alleiu? 2Ba§ tat bie Xaube? 3ft bie Slaube geflogeit ober
gegangeu? (SJefiel ber $fau bent (S))ec^t? 2Bo§ gefiel bem @ped)t
nic^t an bem $fau?^ S33ie ift ber ^fau gen)efen? 2Bar ba§ bumm
t)on i^m? SSie Wax W ©timme be§ ^fau§? fetn gufe? 2Bie gefiet
ber ^fau ber ^aube? $at fie feine 6timme unb feineu gu§ bemerft?
2Ba§ bemerfte fie? SSie mar 't>a^ dJefieber be§ ^fau§?
GRAMMAR
147 Strong Verbs
1. The principal parts exhibit a vowel variation in the stem.
2. The preterite has no suffix. The personal endings of
the singular are: — , (c)fl, — .
3. The perfect participle ends in en.
4. The imperative is formed by dropping the fl of the
second person singular. Note, however, that only c verbs
change the vowel.
5. In the present tense, the personal ending of the second
1 48 ^ Jtt ^attfc = at home.
^ an bem $f au = about the peacock.
58
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[149-150
and third singular formerly was of a nature to produce
umlaut (cf. App. 7), hence: e becomes t
e " ie
a '' a
an ' ' an
149 In the following
t becomes t:
give gebeu
gab
gegeben
Present
Preterite
,
• id) geOe
id) gab
hn gibft
bu gabft
er gibt
er gab
speak fprecf)eu
fprac^
gefprod)eu
icf) f precipe
id) fprad)
bii iprirf)ft
bit fprad)ft
er fprirf)t
er fprad)
f
break brcd^CH
brad)
gebroc^en
id) breeze
ic^ brad)
hn hv\(i)\t
hn brad)ft
er brid)t
er brac^
become toerbeii
tuarb (tuurbe)
getuorbeu
id) tDerbe
ic^ tt)urbe or
ttjarb^
hn it)irft
hn iDurbeft or trarbft
er U)irb
er iDurbe or
toarb
throw tDerfen
tporf
gett)orfen
ic^ tperfe
ic^ rt)arf
hu n^irfft
hn tt)arfft
er tt)irft
er trarf
I50 ^Note that ttiettlen lias two preterite forms, one strong, one
weak; tuurbc is more frequently used. The second and third person
singular present has undergone the same assimilating process that
we observed in |afi and l^ttt. The imperative is weak.
151]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
59
151 In the following C becomes \t :
see fel)en
fal)
Gefel)cn
td^ fc()c
i^ fo^
\>u ficl)ft
bit fa^ft
cr jtc()t
cr \al)
read lefcit
Ia§
gclefeii
i^ lefc
ic^ la§
bit licft
bit iQfeft
er licft
cr ia^
steal ftctjien
ftal)!
gefto()tcn
i^ ftc^Ie
id) fta^I
\)u fticl)Ift
bit fta!)lft
er ftic^tt
cr fta()(
step treten
trat
gctrcten
id^ trete
id^ trat
hit trittft*
bit tratft
er tritt
cr trat
take ncf)incn
na^m
gciiommcn
id) ncl)mc
i^ ita^m
bit nimmft*
bit iialimft
er nimmt
cr na()m
Irregular
fein
iDor
gciDcfcn
tc^ bin
id) tvax
bit bift
bit tDarft
erift
Imperative
er luar
flib! fpric^!
bric^ ! ttjerbj
;! mirfl tritt!
ntinm ! f ict) ! lk§> !
fticl)(! fei!
* Observe that in tretcil and ne^men the long c is changed to short
I and the following consonant is doubled.
50 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
Two Exceptions
go ge^en
Qtng
gegangen
Present
Preterite
i^ ge^e
tc^ ging
h\t ge^ft
\>n gingft
er ge^t
er ging
stand ftel)en
ftanb
geftanben
x6) fte^e
i<i) ftanb
bufte^t
hu ftanbft
er ftel)t
er ftanb
Imperative Q^W) ! ft^MO
l!
152 In the following
d becomes &:
hold I)alten
^ielt
ge^alten
tc^ ^alte
*
i(^ ^telt
bu ^iiltft
'on ikU\t
er i)tttt
er ^ielt
carry, wear trageit
trug
getragen
i^ trage
i^ trug
\)n triigft
bu trugft
er triigt
er trug
fall fatten
Pel
gefaUen
ic^ faUe
,
id) fiel
bu fritlft
bu fielft
er font
er fiel
Imperative ^alt(c)!
trag(c) !
faa(c)!
153 In the following
aU becomes aU:
run laufen
lief
gelaufen
t^ laufe
i^ lief
bu liiufft
bu liefft
er Iduft
er lief
Imperative
lauf(e)!
[162-163
154-158]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
Gl
1 54 Observe that the imperative of the a and an verbs does
not show the umhiut. They follow the analogy of the weak
conjugation, though the final c may be omitted.
155
Weak Verbs
1. The weak verbs exhibit very few variations. The prin-
cipal parts all have the same vowel ; the preterite is formed on
the stem by adding (c)tc;* the perfect participle ends in (c)t;
the imperative is formed by adding c to stem.
156
157
answer ant'tuorteit
aut'mortetc
geant'tDortct
Present
Preterite
id^ mitiportc
iii) auttt)ortclc
bu autmortefl
bu anttoortctcft
er antftjortct
Imperative
anttDortc !
er auttuortctc
Slightly Irregul.
^R
^aben
^attc
L}t^ahi
i<i) i)dbi'
iii) f^atte
bu ()aft
bu Ijatttfi
er ()ot
Imperative
ijahtl
LESSOX U
er ()attc
^
Continuation of Weak and Strong Verbs in Present and
Preterite Singular
158 5Ser fie^t beu Stored auf bent Xurm? 2Ber fpridjt mit bent
(Spe^t? SSoriiber fprid)t bie Zaubt? ^avl, jprid^ft bu tnit bem
Set)rer beg 9Jlabd)eu§? 2Ba§ tut ^av{? 2k\t er bte (S5ej^id^te mi
bem SBotf unb bent ©fel? SSel^e ©ef^ic^te lieft tiu ant liebfteu? 3c^
gebe bent Wiener be§ ^omg§ ben 93rtef ber SJlutter. 2Sa§ tm id)?
* Where the stem ends with a dental, an e must be inserted
between this and the t of the inflection.
62 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [159-160
®er ^ijuig ninuiit bcii 33rief be§ ®iener§ intb lieft il)u. 2Ba§ tut ber
fonig? SSer tt)irft bie S3lumc unb ben Stein in ha§> '&ad)Um?
©tie^It ber ^aufmaiut U^ ^elb au§ ber SBorfe? ^u trtttft in ba§
Simmer. 2Ba§ tue i^? 28a§ tut ^arl? SBeu fie^t ber^ater anf
bem Xurm? 2Ba§ tut ber ©torc^? ^a§ 9}Zabd)eu tt)irb eine ?5rou
uub ber ^uaOe tt)irb eiu 9}^auu. 2Ba§ tpirb 9Jlarie? 2Bq§ tnirft bu?
S33a§ tragft bu gur S^ule? 2Ber fallt t)on bem Xurme? 28a§ Ijciltft
bu in ber §anb? ^ie %anU antn)ortet bem <Bpt^t 28em antlDortet
ber SSolfV 2Ba§ ^at ber Wiener in ber §anb?
Change the above sentences to
(a) tlie preterite
(b) the perfect
Answer the questions in both tenses.
1 59 Oefunben.
3c^ ging im SSalbe gcfj modt' e§ bred^en,
©0 fiir mic^ I)in/ ®a fagt' e§ fein:
Unb nidjt§ gu juc^en „SoII id) 5um^ SSelfen
^ag*^ tuar mein (Sinn. ^ebrod)en fein?"*
3m ©(fatten faf) id; 3d^ grub'§ mit aden
@in ^liimd^en fte^n, ^en 2Biir5(ein'^ au^;
SSie Sterne teuc^tenb, Qum Garten trug ic^'^
2Bie ^Suglein fd;i3n. 5Im ^iibjc^en §au§
Unb pflan^t' e§ tuieber
5(m ftitten Drt;
9^un stueigt e§ immer^
Unb blitl)t fo fort.— ©oet^e.
1 60 ^ fiir mil^ ^tu = along, by myself.
^baS, demonstrative that, resumptive of ni^tS Jtt fui^en.
^mm (=SU liem) 2fielfeH= for the purpose of withering.
*fott i^ ... ge6rO(^en fein = shall I be broken,
^mit afien iien SSiirjlein = with all its rootlets.
*tttttt... immer = it continues to grow, ^mmer has progressive
force here ; cf . 146.
161-164]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
68
161
VOCABULARY
Strong
to find
fiubeii
faiib
gefunben
to dig
tjrabeu
grub
gegraben
to carry
tiageii
trug
Weak
getragen
to seek
fud)eu
fuc^te
gefi^t
to want
iDoUeii
hJodte
gemoUt
to say
ffl9^»
fagte
gefagt
shall
foflcu
ioUte
gefoUt
to plant
^flaujen
^flangte
gepflanjt
to biid
^tueigen
atueigte
ge^^toeigt
to blossom OUiljCU
blu()te
geblu()t
mood
ber (Siim
garden
ber kartell
shadow
ber Sc^atteu
pretty
pbfc^
fiowret
ba^ SlumC^eu^ again
hjieber
shining
leuc^tenb
place,
spot ber Ort
littie eye
ba^ ^iiugleiii^
on
fort
softly
feiii
littigroot ba§ SSuv^Ieiu
162 SSo giiig id)? ©ing id) mit jemanb? SBolhe ic^ ittva^ fuc^a.?
3Sa§ ianh ic^V 3Bo ftanb ba^ ^(iimc^eiiy 2Bie fal) eg au^? SBj-S
Juoflte ic§ bamit tun? SBoUte ba§ 93(umc^eu gebrodjeu fein? Wa§
fragte e§? ^a^ tat ic^ bauu bamit V SBobiu trug ic^ e§V
2i3ag pflan^te id;'? SfSag btiibteV SSo blii^te e^V 2Ba§ ^tte id)
bann in meinem Garten? 3ft ba§ ^adileiu im (SJarten ober im
SSatbe? 93(u^t ba§ 531umc^eu am Ufer be^ S3dc^(ein§? SSo ift baS
ajioog? 3ft bie 93lume blau? 2Bo leud^ten bie ©terne?
163 Exercise — Paraphrase stanzas 1, 2, 4, 5, using;
(a) the present tense
{b) the perfect tense
164 ^lla# ^litmc^en and ba§ ^ugUtn are the diminutive forms
respectively of liif ^lutnt and tial %Vi%t. Observe the umlaut pro-
duced by the suffix.
64 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [16o-l(>9
1 65 Translate^ using preterite: Where was I walking? I was
walking by myself in the forest. Where did you go ? I went
into the forest. Why did he go into the forest ? He went
into the forest to seek^ flowers. Did the man find anything
[etlt)a§] in the forest ? Yes, he found a flower. What did he
do with it? He carried it to the garden by the house. There
he planted it, and there it still grows.
Change these sentences to the present and to the perfect.
LESSON 15
Plural of Verbs
1 66 ^er Wiener be§ ^onig§ fi^t in bem Si^tmer imb jrf)reibt. ^er
^ontg, W ^onigin imb ber Wiener fi^cn in bem ^itnmer be§ ^'onig^
unb fdireibcn. 2Ba§ tun fie? (Sic fi^cn unb f^reibcn. ^er Wamx,
bie gran unb ba§ ^inb fe^cn unb ^orcn. 2Ba§ tun fie? Sic fef)cn
unb ()orcn. ^ie Xanbe fliegt, ber §abic§t fliegt auc^, ber (S|)ec^t ftiegt
and). ®ie Xanbe, ber §abi(^t unb ber Spec^t fUegcn. ^ie §enne
pidt ba§ ^orn, "ba^ ^iic^lein ptcft an^ \>a^^ ^orn. ®ie §enne unb
\>a^ ^ii^lein picfcn "t^a^ ^orn. ©in Wann, eine ^xaw unb ein ^inb
fommcn.
^' Sing. (3rd person)
Plural (3rd person)
er, fie, e§ ge^t
fie get)cn
,/ /, ,r vuft
„ nifcn
,/ ,/ ,. tut
// titn
// n „ tanft
„ taufcn
The third person plural is formed
by adding en to the
stem. 2
i 68 The verb to he is irregular.
Singular
Plural
er, fie, e^ift
fie finb
I 69 1 Note that the infinitive phrase comes last in the sentence.
2 ttttt adds only n, since the stem ends in a vowel.
170-171] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 65
^ie 35ogel tjaben'^ ^ lua^irltc^ gut:
(Sie fltegen, I^iipfen, fiitgen;
(Sie ftngen frifd^ iinb tt)ol)tgeinnt,
^ag SSalb mtb gelb er!ltngeiu
Sie finb gefunb imb forgenfret
Uiib finben, it)a§ gut fc^ntetfet;^
SSo^iu fie fliegeu, mo'^ aud) fei/^
3ft fc^ou ber Xifc^ gebecfet;'
Hub ift* t^r Xaqtwcvi t)oIIbrarf)t,
SDauu ^ie^u^ fie iu bie ^dume ;
©te rul^en ftill uub fauft bie 9iac^t ^
Uub f)abeu fiifee Xrdume.
Uub tozdt '^ fie frii!) ber ©onueufc^eiu,
®auu fc^tuiugeu fie'g'^ (S^efieber^
Uub fliegeu iu bie ^t\i \)\x\.tm ^^
Uub fiugeu i^re Sieber.
171 1 ^ttften'g (= ^albctt eS) pt = are well off.
'^ f d^merfet, fiCberfet— an c before t on account of meter.
^ujo'g (=ttJO eg) and^ fet = wherever it be.
* Xtttb ifi t^r Xagettier! etc. — a conditional clause with the con-
ditional conjunction tiietttt omitted. This omission always causes
the inversion of the position of the subject and the predicate. See
App. 188.
^ jie^tt (short form of Jte|en) literally = draw, poetically = wander,
betake themselves.
^ biC ^tad^t — accusative of duration of time. See App. 169.
^tiieift flc, etc.— see note 4 above.
«flc'g = flc bag.
^ fd^ttilttflctt fle'g ©cflebcr = they soar.
'"Itt bie SJcU ^itteitt=into the world. This tautological use of
the adverbial phrase + adverb is often found. Cf. auS ber %ViX
|lttatt§!= out of the door, gum Sfcttfter ^crcttt!= into the window, etp.
66 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [172-174
172
VOCABULARY
Singular
Plural
flies
er fliccjt
fie fticgctt
hops
fie ppft
fie t)ii))feu
sings
ۤ fingt
fie fingeii
resoundM
e§ erfUngt'
fie er!(iit'gen
is
fie ift
fie ftitb
finds
c» finbet
fie ^n'i>m
tastes
c^ fc^mecft
fie fc^meden
rests
fie ritl)t
fie ru[)eit
wakens
e^ Wcdi
fie tuerfen
swings
cr fcfjtuingt
fie fd)tuiugen
bird
ber SSoget
bic m^d
tree
ber 55aum
bic ^dumc
dream
ber ^raum
bic Xrdunic
song
ba§ £ieb
bic Siebcr
truly Jual)l-U^
day's labor ZaQtWtxt
fresh frifc^
1
completed Dollbrac^t'
joyous iuot)(genmt
sweet fii§
carefree forgeilfrei
sunshine Suuiieufc^ein
set, spread gebccft'
plumage OJefie'ber^
1 73 SSer l)at'§ gut '? 2Bo^ tun fie ? SSie fiugen fie ? SBa§ mad^t
SSalb uub gtur crfliugeu ? ^a§ 8ingeu ber SSi)ge( ma^t 2Satb uub
giur erftiugeu. 2Ba§ freffeu bie ^oge( ? SSo fiubeu fie ba§ ?
2S3o ift ifjr %[)d) gebecft ? SSBer becft uufereu %i\d) ? SBa§ ift ha^
Xagemer! ber SSi)ge( ? Siugeu ift bag Xagetoer! ber 3^oge(. SSa§ ift
meiu , ^agetuer! ? SSa§ ift 'i>a^ Xagemer! beS 8rf)ul)macf)er§? be§
6d)ueiber§? be§ Eoc^§ (cook)? SSaun ift ba§ ^agetuerf ber
SSogcl lJolIbrad)t ? 28a§ tun fie bann ? 2So ruf)en fie? SBic
1 74 ' @f Hc'bcr, observe that nouns as well as verbs have unaccented
prefixes.
175-176]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
67
(ange ? SBann f)ahai fie Xriinine ? 3Sann iuecft fie bcr (2onnen=
fd^ein ? 2Ba§ tnn fie, mnn er fie mecft ? 2BoI)in fUegen fie '? 2Ba§
tuw fie bo ?
2Ba§ tun bie SSoget ? 28elc^c 35uget befuc^ten ben ^fou ? 2Bo
fingen bie S^ogel ? 2Bot)on erflingen SBalb nnb ^^Inr ? §i)rft bn bie
SSi)gel fingen V ^'arl unb iUiarie, l)ort Hir bie 33iJge( fingen ? 3<^
ging im 2Balb. 93?ein ^ater nnb id^, mir gingcn im 2Balb. S93a§
fonb ti^ V SSa§ fanbcn loir ? ^u fingft ein Sieb. ^n nnb bein
33rnber, i^r fingt Sieber.
3Sir fingen Sieber, n)ir fangen Sieber, wiv l)aben Siebtr ge=
fnngen. 2Ba§ tnt il)r ? 3I)r fingt. 2i^a^ tatet iftr ? 3f)r fangt.
2Bo^ ()abt il)r getan ? 3f)r Ijabt gefnngen. Sie ge^en an^ bem ^a\x^,
fie gingen au^ bem $au§, fie finb an§ bem 4)an^ gegangen.
175
GRAMMAR LESSON
Present
Singular
Plural
id) finge
ttiir fingrn
bu fingft
il)r fingt
er fingt
Preterite
fie fingen
Sie^ fingen
ic^ fang
tt)ir fangen
bu fangft
il)r fangt
er fang
Perfect
fie fangen
©ie fangen
id) I)abe gefungen
toir \)<xht^ gefungen
bu ^aft
It
i^r l)abt „
er ^at
II
fie l)aben
8ie ^aben
1 76 ^ The third person plural (written with a capital) is used in-
stead of bit and ilr in conventional address. See App. 165.
66 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [177-178
Perfect
Singular Plural
i6) bin gettjefen ' tt)tr finb getuefen
^n bift „ if)v f eib
er ift „ fie (@ie) finb „
Personal endings for plural (in all tenses) are —
en (c)t en
177 EXERCISE
Write paradigms singular and 2}l'ff'ral of present^ preterite^
and perfect tenses of fiugeit, geben, gef)en, fte^en, fuc^eu, p^fen,
freffen, ^aben, fein, toerben.
Translate: We are fond of grandmother^ and grandfather.^
Do you^ love father^ and mother?^ What do the hen and the
chick pick ? Where do the birds fly? Do the merchant's
horse and dog see the purse? Whom did the woodpecker and
the dove visit? You see^ the birds on the tree
LESSON IG
Plural of Nouns
178
Strong Declension— Class I
Singular
N.
^er ^agclfltegt
G.
^ie garbe bcS SSogelS ift f^tuars.
D.
maw gibt bcm SJogcl gutter.
A.
3c^ I)6re ten S^oget fiugeu
Plural
^ie aSbgcl fUegeiu
G.
^ie garbe ber SJiigel ift f^tuars
D.
man gibt ben SSiigeln gutter.
A.
3c^ ^ore bie SSbgel fiugeu.
^ Use definite article.
2 Give three forms.
179-182]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
69
Singular
bcm ^oget
ben SSogel
bog 9Jidbd)en
bc8 SD^abd)en§
bcm 9JJabc^eu
bag 9Jldbd)cn
bic SDlutter
bcr aJJutter '
bcr 9[}^utter
bic Sautter
Plural
bic ^ogel
bcr ^ogel
bctt ^ogeln
bic 55ogel
bic 9}Zabd)en
bcr 9}idbd)cit
ben 9JJdbd)en
bic SO^dbd)eii
bic aJliitter
bcr 9D^utter
ben aJiiittern
bic ajliittcr
1 79 Observe that in the plural —
(a) The article is the same for all genders.
(b) The noun takes n in dat. f many of the masculines
modify the root vowel.
i80 The nouns in this class are all poh/si/Uabic and hence
are not increased in plural. Most of them are masculine or
neuter, ending in cr, cl, cn; some neuters end in li^cn, Icin.
Only two are feminine: bic SWuttcr and bic Xoii)kv. See
App. 20.
181 Decline like bcr 93Qgcl: bcr (^axttn, ber Sl^fel (apple),
bcr fSaitx, ber 53ntber, ber (^rogtiater.
. AVithout umlaut: 'i)a§> ^Hubleiit, ha§> grdittetn, ba§ ^iid)(ein,
ber Sel)rer, ber @d)ufter (shoemaker) , ber Dn!e(, ber Sc^luager, ba§
WcLt)d)zn, ha§> g^nfter (window).
182 ^ Note that feniinines have no inflection in sing. See App. 17.
2 Nouns that end in n. do not have this inflection.
70 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [183-184
183 ^e§ mmriH ^tttitnfi
^arl ber ^rogc intcrcffterte fic^ fe()r fiir Silbung mib ©r^ie^ung.
3u jeiiter 3^^^^ fonutc man mir in bcii .tloftern 5111* Sdjule gc^cn.
^arum griinbete ber ^aifer cine Semitic an feinem §ofc. ^ie ©c^iitcr
lernteu bort bon Scl)rern, btc ber ^aifer aii§ ©ngtonb bericf. ®ic
Sl^dter, Ditfet iinb ©rogudter ber Sc^iiler lunrcn an bem §ofc bc§
^nifer§, fie tuaren feine 3Jatgeber unb ,f rieger. ^od) mand^er Snabc
mar faut unb ungef)orfam unb lernte nic^t§, iueit er glaubte, ha^ ber
©influg fcine^ !!8ater» ober feine§ Dn!el^ il)n bcfc^ii^en foUte.' 3(ber
e§ iuaren'' nod) anbere 3(^u(er in ber <3c^ute. 9fad)!ommcn t)on
^riegern, ^rompetern, ^ienern, tut ^ampf fiir f Onig unb SSatertanb
gcfaHen,* fanben I)ier 3(ufnal)me.
(Bim^ Xagc^'fam ber .ftaifcr, urn bie 8d)utc ju befuc^en, bic
Stiller 5u priifen unb uon ben Se^rern 33eric^t 5U Ijoxtn. <3etn
■•^irger tuar gro6, aU er fanb, bag @d)iiler, bie" 9cad)!ommen feiner
9?atgcber unb S'rieger luaren, nid)t fo fleigig luaren aU jcnt, bic
feine Skater unb iOnfet Don SDZad^t unb 5(nfe()en l)atten. ^a befaljl
ber ^aifer ben S^iilern, bie" faut Joaren, auf eine 8eite 5U ger)cn.
3)ie anbercn^ ftettte er ouf bie anbere <3eite. 9hin rief er jencn'
^u: „3l)r Schiller, uieint il)r ber ©iuflug eurer ^dter unb Ouf el
folltc euc§ Ijelfeu? 8c^amt end)!" 3Bei( ij^dter unb ©rogodter topfer
iuoren, mii$t il)r ftcigig fein urn ^u Derbicnen, bog il)r fo(d)e ^^dtcr
1 84 * jtt fcinr r ^f U = in his time.
^ i^n 6t|(i^it^en fottteI= should protect him. Observe order.
' f ^ tnarrn = there were.
* ftffttttCtt— participle of strong verb fnllni, flfl, Hffjlffftt, used
adjectively to modify Itriffiem, etc.
' fittf^ Xagfl — genitive of time. See App. 128.
« lltf = who.
' bie ttltberttt = the others.
* jfllfn (dat. pi.) == the former, btffe = the latter.
^ |d||dtnt eil^— imperative reflexive.
185-186]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
71
^abt! 3^r anbcru aber, bic t^r feinc i8dter me^r ^ahi, obcr bo^^ nut
fold^e, bic arm [inb, auf euc^^ bin ic^ ftolj! 3l)r tDcrbct einniaP
meinc ^flatgebcr unb .trieger, mcinc Seljrer unb ^^sriefter I Unb merfl
eii^ bicfen meiiteu 2Ba^l(pnid): Qd) fragc noc^ bc^ 9JJauue^ S^erbieitft,
ua(f) fcincm Xiamen ni^t"
185
VOCABULARY
Strong Nouns— Class I
convent
ba§ .tlofter
bie .tlofter
pupil
ber Sd^iiler
bie 6d)iiler
teacher
bcr Se^rer
bie Se^rer
emperor
ber .toifcr
bie taifcr
father
ber ^ater
W ^dter
uncle
bcr Oitfel
bie Oiifet
councilor
ber D^atgebcr
bie 9latgeber
warrior
ber ,<^rieger
bie ftrteger
trumpeter
ber Xrompeter
bie Xrompeter
vexation
ber ^(rger
power, respect ba^ 2(nfe()cn
,
priest
ber ^^^riefter
bic ^ricfter
Strong Verbs
to call berufcu bcrtcf bcrufen
to command bcfc^tcii befo()l befol)lcn (bu bcfiet)lft, er befte^lt)
Weak Verbs
to take an interest fld^ intcrefficrcil
to found grunbeit
to learn IcrilCU
to believe gtaubeil
to protect befd)ii^cn
to test priifen
to place, put ftcttcn
must miiffcit
to earn UcrbtCItCn
1 86 * tiO^ nitr foll^C = at least only sucli. ttltf fttdi = of you.
'^ f tnmar = at some time.
72
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[187-188
desert
t)a§> ^erbienft'
Influence
ber @iuf(u§
Charles the Great ^avl ber ^rO^e
others
nnbere
education
bie 93itbuug
descendants
bie 9^ad)!onimen
pedagogy
bie ©r^ieii'img
struggle
ber ^ampf
time
bie 3eit
native country 'tia^ SCaterlaitb
one (any one)
man (seeApp.35)
here
l^ier
court
ber §of
asylum
bie 5(ufnaf)me
England
(bo§) ©iigranb
In order to
urn (with inf.)
ber S3erid)ty/
many a
manc^er
report
boy
ber ^nabe
might
bie m^ad^i
lazy
faut
side
hk Sette
because
iDeit
such
folrfie
diligent
fteigig
watchword
ber SSa^lfpru^
brave
tapfer
187 SSer loaren bie 58dter unb ^ro^Dater ber ©chiller be§ ^^aifer§?
SSofier t)at ber ^aifer bie Se{)rer berufen? SSeld^e ^naben iDareii
faut unb uugeI)orfam? SSer JDaren hit ©driller, bie fleigig luaren?
§at ber ^aifer bie 8d^ute befud^t? SSantm? 2Ba§ h^otlte er bou ben
Se!)rern ^oreu? SBetd^e (Schiller iuaren fleigig? SSeld)e toaren faul?
2Bot)in ftettte ber ^aifer ))k\t? 2Bo{)in fteHte er jene? SSeld^e f^att
er, biefe ober jene? 5(uf lueld^e ttjar er ftol^? 2Sa§ JDurbeii bie, bie
flet^ig traren?
SSa§ tun ©filter? 2Ba§ finb fie? SSa§ tun bie Se^rer? 6ie
lel^ren bie ©(filter, ^'art, bifl hn ein Se^rer ober ein ©djiiler? ^art
unb SSiK^elm, toa^ feib i^r? SBa§ tut i^r in ber ©c^ute?
1 88 Translate: The mothers of the pupils were proud. The
emperor commanded the teachers and pupils. The cousins
(masc.) love the uncles. Do you like* the birds and bird-
lings? Do you hear the birds in the garden? The gardens
are beautiful in summer, but cold in winter. The girls love the
apples.
* Give three forms.
1S9-192]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
73
189
liber alien ©ipfelu
3ft ^x^\
Sn alien SStpfeIn
©piireft bn
I90
mountain top
tree top
Weak
feel fpiiren
wait tDorten
rest rnt)en
^anm einen ^audj ;
SDie SSogelein fc^metgen im SBalbe.
SSarte nnr, balbe
9f{n()eft bu and) !
Aortic.
VOCABULARY
Nouns of Class
ber ©ipfel bte (SJipfet
ber mp\d bie SSipfet
Verbs
Strong
to be silent fc^ttjcigen jc^ttjieg gefc^micgen
breath bev
soon Oalbe
^an^
peace bte 'tRll^t
scarcely fanUl
91
LESSON 17 ^
STRONG DECLENSION — CLASS II
Singular
^cr ©aum ift grun»
®ie garbe bc8 ©ttumcS ift griin,
^ie ^^ogel f%n anf bcm ©attm(e).^
3d^ fe()e ben ©ttum.
Plural
^ic ©dumc finb griin.
^ie garbe bet 95ttttme ift griin.
®ie ^oget fi^en anf ben ©oumen.
3c^ fe^e bie ©dume.
92 ^ With monosyllables the e in dat. sing, is optional.
74. ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [193-196
193 Model Noun— Class II
Sinpriilar Plural
ber <Bo\)n bie 8ot)ne
be^ ®o^ne§ ber @dt)iie
bem So()n(e) ben ®ot)neu
ben <3ul)n bie (Sof)ne
194 (nf) The plural takes c and visually the umlaut.
(b) Membership of Class II:
1. Monosyllabic masculines.
2. Some monosyllabic femininos and neuters.
3. Some polysyllabic masculines in ig, iitfl, linfl.
4. Some polysyllabic neuters in itiS^ fol. See App. 21.
1 95 Like Solvit are declined —
1. Masculines (a) with umlaut: ber ^tw^l (chair), ber .^^nt
(hat), ber ©tamm (trunk of tree) , ber ^aiu] (walk), ber Jrl'opf
(head), ber i^ii^i)^ (fox), ber ^litg (stream).
(b) Without umlaut: ber @c^u() (shoe), ber §uub (dog), ber
%vm (arm), ber %\\ii) (table), ber S3rief (letter).
2. Feminine monosyllables (all have umlant): bie SSanb
(wall), bie ^anb (hand), bie 6tabt (city), bie 3}Jan§ (mouse), bie
33anf (bench), bie ^uft (nut).
3. Neuter monosyllables (no umlaut) : ba§ 3fl^t* (year), ba§
^aav (hair), \)a^ $ferb (horse), 'i>a^ ^aar (pair), ha^ ^ult (desk).
4. Polysyllabic masculines and neuters: ber .funig, ber %rixf}'
Itug (spring), ber SihigUng (youth), ba§ ^e^eimui» (secret).
196 2)ic 2Bo(ff
3n einem SBalb gab e§^ 2Bi)Ife. 3^fi ©i)l)ne eine§ (Sc^afer^
l^iiteten ©c^afe auf einer 2Biefe in ber 9Zd^e be§ 233albe§. ^ie Sente
t)om ^orfe in ber 9^a^e fagten: „333enn SSolfe an§ bem 2Ba(b fon^
men, jo ruff'^ nn§. ^ann fommen mir nnb ^elfen." 2^age bergingen,
^ 0ft6 fl = there were. See App. 87.
^ rttft (i^r) irnl = call us.
197-198]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
75
mtb e§ iDurbe langlueitig. ^a riefeit ftc ciumal: „2Bbtfe! SBolfc!''
ititb hk Scute famcit gef|jnmgen/ ^a ladjkn bic @oI)itc be^ (Sd^dfer^
bor greubc imb mm riefcit fie alle Xage:"^ „2Bolfe/' obgteid^ feiitc
Xiere ha luaren. 3»^c^t iuurbeit bie Seiite ber <^ad)i^ miibc. %U
ctiie^ Xage» tmr!tid) 5tuei 5B0tfc l)crborbrad)eu uiib bie Sc^afe fragen,
Urn niemaiib auf it}reu 9tuf mib fie tomiteii itid)t» tim at^ bie §dnbc
riitgen imb jd)reieu.
197 VOCABULARY
Nouns of Class II
ber SSoIf bie SSolfc
ber 8o()u bie 8ot)ne
ba^ Sd)af bie ®d)ofc
ber Xag
wolf
son
sheep
day-
people
animal ba§ <Iier
call ber 9?uf
hand bie §aub
bie Xagc
bie Scute
bie Xiere
bie 9iufc
bie ,^dube
Strong Verbs
l)elfeu {\)n I)ilfft, l)alf
er l)ittt)
to pass away uerget)eit (bit ucrge()ft, Uergiug
er t)ergel)t)
rufeit rief
I)ert)or'bred)cu (bu brad) Ijcruor'
brid)ft I)erDor', er
bric^t I}erbor')
to wring riuQCu raug
to scream fc^rcicu f(^rie
to help
to call
to break out
ge^olfen
toergangcn
gerufeu
I)eruor'gebrod)en
gcruugen
gefc^riecu
I 98 1 gefjiruttften— perf. part, used as a descriptive adverb with (ommett
= came running. So also bcr ^Ogrl fommt Qeffogett, the bird comes
flying; tier Rttttbe fommt gelaitfcu, the boy comes running, etc.
'^ ttUe %a^t = every day. Ace. pi duration of time. (See App. 159.)
Note the difference between this phrase and iictt QflttSftt %(i%, all day.
^ttX ®aii§e = of the affair, matter.
76
to guard
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
Weak Verbs
pten to laugh la^en
[199 200
shepherd
ber @(^afer, -§, -
joy
bie grcube
two
atuei
although
oBgletc^
village
ba§ ^orf
really
iDtrflicC)
tiresome
langtoeittg
nobody
niemanb
199 28ie t)iele ©o^ne :^Qtte ber S^afer? 2Ba§ taten bie ©o^ne?
2Bo I)uteten fie bie (Sc^afe? 2Bar e§ gefa^rlic^ (dangerous) ? 2Ba^
rum? SBeil 2BoIfe in ber m^t maren. SSo it)aren bie 2Botfe? 2Ba§
finb SBolfe? 9^ennen @ie noc^ !i;iere. 2Bo mo^i^en SSolfe? SBeld)e
Xiere tool^nen im §aufe? ^iefe ^eigen |)au§tiere. 3ft ber SBolf ein
§au§tier? berguc^§? 2Ba§ freffen biefe Xiere? SSar e§ ben eo^nen*
langn)eilig? 2Ba§ taten fie, at§ e§ i^nen langmeilig mar? 28er !am?
3Sie !amen bie Seute? SKoju famen fie? Urn ^u §e(fen. ganben fie
toa^ fie furfiten? (SJefiet ba§ ben (So^nen be§ ©c^dferS? ^a§> taten
fie? SSie murben bie Sente? ^amen fie bann nid)t nte^r? 2Ber !ant
anient (at last)? 2Ba§ taten bie So^ne be§ (5c^afer§?
200 Fill onty giving 'proper plural forms: %\\^ — , ©tii^t —
unb S3dn! — finb in biefem ^i^ii^^i*- '^^^ ©chafer );)(ii fec^§ (5o^n — .
3n ben 3intmer — finb 9}JobeI (furniture). 3" "^^^ ©drten finb
S3dnm — . SInf ben S3dnm — finbet man ^))fel nnb D^itff — . ^ie
(Sc£)iiter mac^en ben Sel)rer — * SOlii^e (trouble). 3d^ l^aht §mei
gug— . SDie gliiff— 5rmeri!a§ finb grog. SSit^etm nnb ^art,
if)r meine ©chiller.
Decline in singular and plural all nouns of the first and
second class that have occurred in this lesson.
* Dative of interest. See App. 142.
201-204] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 77
LESSON 18
STRONG DECLENSION— CLASS III
20 I . Singular
^a0 Ctcb be§ 95ogel§ ift fd^on.
^er 9?amen bc8 8icbc§ ftel)t in bent 33urf)c.
3(^ lauf^e* bcm Sicb(c) be^ 3$ogel§.
prft bu ba0 8icb?
Plural
^ic Cicbcr be§ SSoge(§ finb fd^un.
^Die 9^ameu bcr Cicbcr ftelieit in bent S3nc^.
gc^ lanfc^e ben Sicbcrn,
§orft bn bic Siebcr?
202 Singular Plural
ba§ S3ncf) bie 33uc^cr
be§ 33nd)e8 ber ^^nd)cr
bent S3nd)C ben ^^iic^crn
ba§ 93ud) bie S3uc^er
203 {a) Plurals take cr umlaut if stem-vowel permits.
(Z>) Membership of Class III:
1. Monosyllabic Neuters.
2. A few monosyllabic masculines.
3. Masculines and neuters ending in turn.
4. Polysyllabic neuters accented on last syllable.
204 Like 93tt^ are declined:
1. Neuters: 'Xio.^ §an§, ba§ ^inb, \i^^ 33ratt (leaf), ba§ 93ilb,
ba§ getb.
2. Masculines: ber 9Rann, ber SSalb, ber %t\\i (spirit), ber
SSitrm.
3. Nouns in turn : ber grrtnm (error), \^Qi^ 5(ltertunt (age).
(See App. 22.)
4. Polysyllabic neuters : \iO.^ ©ofpitar.
* lanfr^C = listen to. See App. 138.
78 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [205-208
205 ^crbflHcb
93init ftitb id)on bie 2Bd(ber,
dJelb bie Sto^^jelfeiber
Uiib ber §erOft beginnt.
Hub bie flatter fatten,
Unb bie ^f^ebet iunlleii,
^ii()l mf)t ber Wmh.
206 ^ftetiblifb
2)er 5lbenb fommt leife f)ernieber
5(iif Sorter imb SSdIber iinb ^^^v.
@§^ ftf^tDeigen ber S?i)glein Cieber,
^od) e i n Sieb^ ^ort man nut,
207 VOCABULARY
Strong Nouns— Class III
forest ber SBalb bie SSdIber
stubbiefieid bag Stoppelfelb^ bie @to^^e(felber
leaf ba§ maii bie flatter
village 'aa^' ^orf bie ^orfer
song bo§ Sieb bie Sieber
Strong Verbs
to fall fallen (bii fdllft, er faHt) fie(
gefatlen
to begin beainnen begaim
begonnen
Weak Verbs
to wander toaUen to blow mi)m
208 ^<li . ... fiitbrr. @8 is merely introductory. Translate:
The songs of the birds are silent.
^fl0(^ . . . iittr = one song only is heard. 9{o4 and UUX express
the same idea.
^In compound nouns only the last component part is inflected.
209 211]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
79
gay bunt
already fd^Olt
yellow gelb
autumn bcr §erbft, -eg, -e
wind ber 2Binb, -e§, -e
evening ber Slbeitb, -§, -C
down tieruieber
meadow bie f^^wr (bte SSiefe)
fog, mist ber 9Zebet, -§, -
209 SSa§ iDddjft in ben SSdtberit? SSie finb bte gelber iitt ©erbft?
SBie finb fie im grueling? SSamt fallen bie 33Iatter? SSie finb fie
im §erbft? SKaS Ijabcn bie S3aiime? Bairn ^abeii fie 93tdtter? SSa§
ift bie mz^v^a^ (plural) t)ou „ber SBiitb/' „ber |)erbft/' „ber
S^ebet/' „bag Sieb"? SKa§ ift ber llnterfc^ieb gmifdien 5)orf unb
©tabt? 2Ba§ ift bie mii)v^a^ t)on „bag ®orf/' „bie ©tabt"?
2 I O Review of Strong Declension
Singular genitive — c0 (except feminines)
MAIN CLASSES SUBCLASSES
Plurals
II. Masculine Monosyllables
III. Neuter Monosyllables
cr
I. Masc. &Neut. Polysyllables Two feminines : bie Wni-
ter, bie Xo^ter
Monosyllabic feminines
Monosyllabic neuters
Masculines in ig, ing, ling
Neuters in ni0, fal
Monosyllabic masculines
Neuters and masc. in turn
Polysyllabic neuters ac-
cented on last syllable.
For full statement and examples see App. 19-22.
2 I I EXERCISES IN STRONG DECLENSION
I. Give dative plural of: ber 35ogeI, ba§ ^a\i^, ber |)unb, bie
SSSanb, bie 90^utter, ber mann, ber SSalb.
//. Give genitive singular of the above.
80 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [212-218
///. Change nouns and verbs of the following sentences to
plurals: ®er ^aufmann ^at em ^ferb gel^abt. ^a§ ^aw^ be§
ajJamteg \\i an bent %\\\% ^ie SSanb be§ 3immcr§ tft tDeig. (Sin
S3latt ift griin. 3nt §erbft n)irb ba§ S3ratt eine§ 93anme§ gelb.
3m SSi^fel iff 9lu^. 3m SSi^jfel be§ 33aume§ fifet ein ^ogel unb
ftngt. %m Xifrf)e fijt ein a}Mbc^en nnb Heft. SDer (Sc^iiter be§
Se^rer§ ift ftei^ig. ®er Server !ommt mi§ ©nglanb nnb ift fe^r
Berii^mt. ^a§ Staffer ift fait nnb ftar, ^ib bem ^inb einen
5l))fet t)on bem S3anme.
IV. Translate: The woods and the fields were gay. Did
you see the apples oq the trees? The little-birds were singing
sweetly in the gardens. The fathers, brothers, and uncles of
the pupils were the councilors and warriors of the emperor.
The little-girls have sung songs, and the names of those songs
were in the books. Wolves, donkeys, foxes, and dogs are
animals. Domestic animals live in houses with people. Wolves
live in forests. Storks live in the neighborhood of water.
LESSON 19
WEAK AND MIXED DECLENSIONS
2 1 2 Weak Declension
Singular Plural (c)tt
W ©dtihjefter \>k ©c^meftern
ber 8ct))r)efter ber Sc^tt)eftern
ber @(^n)efter ben ©c^n^eftern
bie (5d^rt)efter bie (Scf)n)eftern
213 All weak masculines take the ending (c)n in all cases
except the nominative singular.
ber ^nobe bie ^naben
be§ ^naben ber ^naben
bem ^naben ben ^naben
ben ^naben bie inoben
214-217] INDICATIVE PRETERITE »1
ber §err bic |)erren
be^ §errn ber ^erren
bent ^cxvn ben §erren
ben ^erin bie ^erren
2 1 4 Singular Plural
bie Se^rerin bie Se^rerinnen
ber £ef)rerin ber Sefirerinnen
ber Sefirerin ben Set)rerinnen
bie Se^rerin bie Se^rerinnen
215 The suffix ttt is affixed to many masculine nonns
(especially names of occupation or nationality) to form the
feminines. Ex. — ber ©tubent', bie ©tubentin; ber @c^ii(er, bie
©d^iilerin; ber 5(meri!a'ner, bie 5Cmeri!anerin. Wherever possible,
this suffix produces umlaut — cf. ber ^oc^, bie ^od^in (cook);
ber S3aner, bie SBdnerin (peasant) .
Note the doubling of the tl in the plural.
2 1 6 Membership of Weak declension :
1. Polysyllabic Feminines.
2. Some monosyllabic feminines (but see Strong Class II):
bie U^r (clock), bie gran (woman), bie Qa^l (number).
3. Masculines ending in c: ber ^nabe, ber S^^nge, ber (SJatte
(husband), ber 'tRdbz (raven), ber §afe (hare.)
4. A small number of masculines formerly ending in c:
ber §err (master, Mr.), ber ®raf (count), ber Siirft (prince.)
5. Foreign masculines with accent on last syllable: ber
©tubent' (student), ber ©tefrntt' (elephant), ber ©olbat' (soldier.)
2 1 7 Mixed Declension
Some nouns are strong in the singular, weak in the plural.
Singular Plural
ba§ 5luge \>it 5lugcn
be§ 5lngc8 ber ^Tugcn
bem 9Iuge ben 5(ugcn
ba^ ^uge bie 5tugctt
82 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [218-220
2 1 8 Like ^ugc are declined : ba§ Df)r, ber <Btaai, ha^ 93ett,
and words derived from Latin, as ber ®o!tor, ber gnf^ef'tor, ber
©eim'tor, and also a number of nouns of Latin derivation which
end in ium in the singular and ictt in the plural.
bag ^^mnaftum bte (SJ^mnaficti
ba§ Stubium bie ©tubien
l)tx (Biaat fd)idt id^rttc^ S^fr^^toren an^, urn bte <B(i)xiUn auf
bem Sanb imb in ber @tabt ^u befi^tigeu. ©inniat l)at eiu 6d)u^
tnf^eftor eine (Bd^nk auf bem Sanbe befud^t, '^a ift fetn 5(uge auf
ciueu ^noben gef alien, ber erft * fteben 3^^^^^ ^^t tear, ober fo gefd^eit
au§fa^,^ ba§ er bie 5lufmer!fam!eit be§ Snfpeftorg auf fid^ gog.^
„9^un/' fagte biefer, „mein Qunge, ncnne mtr* etnmat eine gafit!"
„S8ier unb jtuangig/' anthjortete t^a^ ^inb fc^neE, o^ne fic^ ^u beftn=
nen.^ ^Der ^ann t)at nun bte Qdf)l an bie Xafel gefd^rieben, aber
fo: 42. ®aitn faf| er ben SunQ^n erirartungSboII an. ^ie ©filler
f|)errten 3lugen unb D^ren auf. ^er ^nabe aber macule fid) nid)t
njiffen." ®a f)ai e§ ber 93efud^er nod) einmal t)erfu(i^t. „@age mir
nod^ eine Qdf)lV' SDer S3urfd^ fagte fd^neH, „fed^§ unb fieb^ig."
SBteber fd^rieb ber @(^utinfpe!tor bie Qa^ tytvtt^xi: 67, unb toieber
inad^te ftd^ ber Qunge ntd^t toiffen.* 9^un fagte ber ^nfpeftor njteber:
„^\h mir noc^ eine' Qa^V ^a ^jlajte ber S3urfc^e ^erau§:
„SSier unb t)ier§ig! @d)reibe \>a^ berfe^rt, tt)enn bu fannft, bu
(Jiefc^eiter!''*
220 lerfi— literally y^rsf; translate only.
^ au§fa| = looked, appeared
' ttllf ^ri^ jog = attracted to himself.
* Jlltr— ethical dative. See App. 143.
^ 0|tie fi^ Jtt Ikefinnen = without hesitating. Note the use of Ger-
man infinitive as object of the preposition where English employs
the present participle. See App. 217.
^mari^te flii^ nili^t miffctt = pretended not to notice it.
'ttor^ eine = another.
^iiu ®e|(§eitcr— translate here, smarty, you!
221]
INDICATIVE PRETERITE
83
22 1 VOCABULARY
Weak Nouns
Singular Plural
number bie Qa^i bie 3^^!^"
school bie (Bd)\ik bie Sd^ulen
boy ber ^nabe bie ^naben
attention bie 5lufmer!fam!eit
blackboard bie %a\tl bie ^afeln
boy ber Sunge bie Sungen
number bie S^iimmer bie 9^umnteru
boy ber S3urfd)(e) bie 93urfrf)en
Mixed Nouns
Gen. Sing.
Nom. Sing.
ber (Staot
ber 3nfpe!tor
'ba^ 5Uige
ba§ p^r
be§ @taate^
be§ Snfpeftor^
be^ ^hige^
be§ O^reg
Strong Verbs
to look, appear aii§'fef)en (bu fief)ft faf) aii§
an^, er fie()t mi^)
gie^eu
Nom. Plural
bie ©toaten
bie Qnfpefto'ren
bie §(ugen
bie Oi)ren
au§'gefet)en
to draw-
to consider
to look at
to send
befinnen
an'fe^en
frf)ic!en
iiennen
509
bejaiiu
Weak Verbs
geaogen
befonnen
an'gefe^en
nannte
to open
to know (be ac- /
quainted with) f
to try
to burst
tDiffen
t)erfiic^eii
platen
yearly jdtirlic^
seven jtebeu
old alt
smart gefc^eit
auf'jperren fperrte aiif
tpugte
tjerfuc^te
genannt (see App. 88)
auf gefperrt
getDU^t (see App. 83)
t)erfuc^t (see App. 80, 1)
24 (four and twenty)
76 (six and seventy)
wrong side before
you can
t)ierimb5tt)an5ig
fec^^unbfiebsig
t)er!e^rt
bu fannft
84 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [222-224
222 233of)m ging ber 3nf|)e!tor? SBa§ tut ein 3nfpe!tor? SBie
\af) ber Sunge au^? ^eben ©ie ein (S^nont^m fiir „ba: Sunge."
^a§> ift bie aJie^rga^l tjon „3unge" imb bem @t)nont)m? SSa§ tuoate
ber 3nf^e!tor t)on bem Sungen ^aben? S3e!am er fie? SSofjin
fc^rteb ber gnf^eftor bie 3<^^^? ©c^rieb er fie ric^tig ober berfe^rt?
SSotlte er ben ^naben bamit fangen? (SJetang e§ if)m? 2Ba§ fagte
ber ^nabe sule^t?
223 WRITTEN EXERCISES
1. Give singular and plural genitive of all the nouns in the
above story.
2. Change tne entire story so as to have all the nouns in
the plural.'
3. Form feminines of: ber Siigner (liar.), ber Sefer (reader),
ber ©dnger (singer) ; decline them in singular and plural.
LESSON 20
224 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. The preterite indicative of strong verbs is formed by an
alteration in the stem vowel — no suflfix is added to the stem :
toar, ging, fta^.
2. The preterite indicative of weak verbs is formed by add-
ing tc to the stem of the present : liebtc, I)offlc, befiic^tc.
3. Personal endings in preterite singular are the same for
strong and weak verbs, — , ft, — .
4. The principal parts of all verbs consist of: present
infinitive, preterite indicative, perfect participle. On these
parts all the tenses are formed.
5. Strong verbs with the stem vowel a, C, OM, take the
umlaut in second and third person singular indicative (except
in ge^en and fte{)en).
6. Plural personal endings for present and preterite, weak
and strong, are en, (e)t, en.
224] INDICATIVE PRETERITE ' 85
7. Ill direct address, bu and i^r are superseded by StC
(3rd pi.) in all conventional conversation. Only towards chil-
dren and animals, between members of the family and very
intimate friends, in prayer and very elevated diction, are btt
and ijr used.
8. In the declension of nouns, two facts apply in every
case without exception : (a) no feminines are inflected in the
singular, (b) all dative plurals end in n.
9. There are three noun declensions, strong, weak, and
mixed.
10. All strong nouns form their genitive sing, by adding
(C)8 (butcf. 8, r^.
Class I takes no additional syllable (sometimes umlaut).
Class II takes e (often umlaut).
Class III takes cr (always umlaut).
11. Membership — Main Classes.
I is primarily a class of polysyllables (masc. and neut. )
II is primarily a class of monosyllabic masculines.
III is primarily a class of monosyllabic neuters.
The subclasses are:
I two feminines: bte SQlutter and bie Xoc^ter (umlaut).
II monosyllabic feminines and neuters, and polysyllabic
masculines in ig, ing, ling, and neuters in ntS, .fol.
III monosyllabic masculines, and polysyllabic neuters and
masculines in tum, and neuters accented on the last syllable.
For examples see App. 19-22.
12. The weak declension has (e)tt in singular and plural
(except nom. sing.). See 8, a.
13. The weak declension is primarily a class of polysyllabic
feminines, but it contains also monosyllabic feminines, foreign
masculines, masculines in c and a number of monosyllabic
masculines (no neuters, no umlaut).
14. Mixed nouns take a strong genitive singular and a weak
plural. See App. 24, 25.
86 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [225
225 REVIEW EXERCISES
/. Give the preterite paradigms^ singular and plural^ of:
gef)en, ftei)en, tun, loufcn, rufen, fuc^en, iuecfen, fingen.
//. Write principal parts of these verbs.
Illi Ansiver the following questions: 2Ba§ inn bie ^^iigtetn
tm SSalbe? SBelc^e Xtere fiitb §au§tiere? SBetc^e Xiere ftnb im
SSalbe? 2Ber n)ar faul in be§ ^aifer§ (B^nk? SBer Ie!)rte bie
©chiller? SBo^er !amen bie Se^rer? SSie finb bie flatter ber 33dume
im gruf)ling? SSie tDerbeu fie im §erbft? 2Ba§ fallt im SSinter ab?
SBie l^eigt ein 9}Zann au^ 5(meri!a? 2Bie I)ei§t eine gravt au§ 5Imeri!a?
@inb @ie 5(meri!aner? SSo^er !ommt ein ©ngtdnber? ^enuen (Sie
tJtele 5(merifanerinnen? Sernen <Sie ^eutfd^ bei einem Sef)rer ober
bei ciner Seijrerin? §at man f)ier mel^r Se^rer ober met)r Se^rerin*
nen?
IV Give plural forms in the same cases of: bem ©taate, be§
@(^ut)e§, ber (Sc^mefter, ba§ ©au§, be§ Wannt^, bem SSatbe, ber
ajJutter, ben ^ater, ber 3nf))e!tor, bie Un^, ber tnobe, ber ©aft, \ik
SBanb, ber UI)r, ber grau, ber ©anb.
F. Translate: 1. The little birds sing joyously in forest and
field. 2. Are you well and in good spirits? 3. The trees be-
come brown in autumn and the leaves fall. 4. The pupils were
lazy and disobedient. 5. They did not obey the teachers. 6. The
warriors and councilors of the emperor had sons in the school.
7. Were the boys lazy in the eyes of the teachers? 8. In the
tree-tops and the mountain-tops is peace. 9. The villages are
near the cities. 10. The sons of the shepherd herded the
sheep near the city. 11. Do the wolves and bears live in the
woods? 12. They come out and devour the sheep of the people.
13. All day, the boys watched the sheep. 14. But it grew
tiresome. 15. The numbers on the board were wrong, but the
boy read them without hesitating. 16. The eyes and ears of
the pupils were not open.
22<>-227] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 87
CHAPTER IV
INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT
LESSON 21
226 6r ^ottc S^n^cn wnter bcm ^utc*
(?tn 23ancriijuiujc uanicibi W\6.)<d ()attc cinmal ©pa^en
gefonGcn. Gi* l)attc nid)t gcmufet, luoftin^ baniit, fo r)attc
cr fie in feincn §ut geftecft unb ben ^\xi auf ben ^opf geftiilpt.
Sonn mar cr dergniigt Uieitergegangen.
B 9^nn Begegnete i^m- ein "Maww ; ber^ griiBte i()n freunblid)
unb Iprad):
„3rGunb, fonnft bn mir DteIIeid)t fogen, n3o()tn bicfer 23eg
fit^rt?" SBeil abcr 9}Hd)eI bic 3pa^en unter fcinen §nt geftedt
ftattc, fo badjte er: „3BtK> gel)t bid) ber ^"Dtann cin?"/* lief]
10 hzw ^ni Quf bem llopfe unb ging n^eitcr. 9tad)bem ber 30?ann
il)m ctn paar 5?tinut€n nadjgeblidft Ijcitte, fd)iittelte cr ben .^iopf
unb fprad): „2)er Junge l)at nid)t Uiel SeBeneart!" Xann ift
ber 90?ann iDcitergegangen.
Setst !am ber 5rmlmann bec^ 2Begec>. 2)cr'^ Ijatte cinen
15 8^Q3i€rgQng gemodit unb mar auf bcm 3Scg nodi ^aufe.
ijintcr tl)m I^cr fam ber @erid)tc>biencr. 9tun griifeen tmmer
alle Scute ben Hmtmann. 5lBer unfer ?J?id)cI iai cc> nid)t,
227 ^ ttlO^itt bomtt (ge^Ctt) = what to do with them— literally=: where
to go with them. Note the omission of the verb of motion, since the
idea is already expressed in the adverb tHOl^ttt.
^ i^m— dative after !6egepeit. Cf . App. 133.
* tiJttg (JC^t bt(^ iier SHtttttt an = what is the man to you?
88
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[228-229
erflen§ rt)eil er bon ^an§ an^^ imnter ein ©robian getDefen
tear, gtoeitenS tuetl er ben SO^orgen lang bie ©^a^en unter bem
30 ^uk l^erumgetragen ^atte, unb tijn bolder ntrf)t oBne^imen
fonnte. ®q ging ber ©eric^tSbtener gu t]f)m unb fprod^: „'I)u
^vohian, l^a\t hu nod^ nie gclcrnt, \va§> fid) fdjicft?" intb rife
il)m ben $ut t)om ^opU- ^^^^ — li^arcn aHe ©pa^en IierouS^
geflogen nad) alien ©d'cn nnb ©nbcn,^ hk ber 3[)tid)el ben
35 9[)?orgen long anfBeh)aI)rt ^atk. Sllle Sente I)QBen gelQd)t.
llnb toenn man I)ente ben $ut nid)t snr 3eit oBnimmt, bann
f)ci6t e§:^ ,,®er I^ot gemifs 3|.ial3en nntcr beni .<Qui."
228
VOCABULARY
Pluperfect
Strong
Weak
had caught
^aitt gefongen
had known
tjattt getDugt
had gone
ttior gegangeu
had stuck
I)Qtte geftedt
had been
tattr gelt)efen
had put
^atte geftiitpt
had walked on )ti at ItJeitergegaugeit
had made
I)atte gentac^t
farmer's boy
ber SBauernjunge
manners
bie Sebengart
by name of
namtn§>
bailiff
ber Slmtntann
sparrow
ber (SpQ^
walk
ber (Spa^ier'gang
cheerfully
ijerguiigt
beadle
ber (^erid)t§'biener
on, farther
treiter
first (adv.)
erfteng
to greet
griigen (weak)
lout
ber ^robian
pleasantly
freunbli^
secondly
5rt)eiten§
friend
ber ?5reunb
morning
ber 9JJorgen
perhaps
t)ie(Iei(^t'
around
I)erum'
way
ber SSeg
thereforo
ba^er
to look after
itac^blideit (weak)
off
ab
shake
fc^iittetn (weak)
229 ^ Hon ^ttttg ttttg = by nature.
^ @(fctt Uttti @utiett — an alliterative phrase meaning in all directions.
^ t^ ^ei§t = the saying is.
230-281] INDICAT
IVE PLU
PERFECT
to snatch reigeu, rife, geriff cit
to ke^p auf benja^ren,
ben)ai)rte auf , auf'bert)af)rt
to laugh tac^eu (weak)
to be called ^elfeeu, t)ieg, ge^eigen
certainly QCtDlfe
230 Synopsis Through
Pluperfect
Strong
Weak
fein war gemefeu
\)aba\ f)atte ge^abt
ic^ bin
ic^ f)ahc
irf) wax
ic^ r)atte
irf) Bin gemefen
id) f^aht ge^abt
id) tottr getoefen
id; i^aiie ge()obt
tragen trug getragen
Iad)eu lac^te gekc^t
bu tragft
er lac^t
'Dn triigft
er lac^te
't>ii ^aft getragen
er Jot gelarf)t
bu ^ttttcft getrogen
er Jattc gelad)t
89
Note the pluperfeot tense is similar to the perfect (see
81), except that the preterite instead of the present form
of the auxiliaries l^aben and fcin is used.
23 1 SSie ^atte ber SBauernjunge ge^eifeen? SSa§ f)atte er gcfangen?
28o()in i)atte er fie geftedt? 2Bo ^atte er \>tn §ut getragen (carried,
worn)? 28ie tDar er meiter gegangen? 3Ser mar i^m baim begegnet?
§atte ber SJlann ben Qungen gegriifet? §atte er mit if)m gefprod)en?
2Ba§ ^atte er gefagt? 2Bar 3}lic^e( freimblic^ 5u i^nt? 2Barnm
nid^t? 2Ba§ moUte er nicfit tnn? 2Barum nic^t? 2Bem begegnete
er bann? §atte 9J^ic^e( ben 5Imtmann dormer gefannt? SSer tvat
f)inter bent 5(mtmann ^ergegangen? SSa§ tnig ber (iJerid^t§biener?
2Ba§ follte ber gunge tnn? golgte er nid)t? SSarum? SSa§ rig
i^m* ber ^eri^tgbiener t)om ^opf? 2Ba§ gef^al) bann? 2Bie tvaxm
bie SSogel nnter ben ^ut gefommen?
* See App. 144.
90
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[232-233
232 EXERCISES
/. Cliange verbs in the following {sentences to plupe^'fect:
®er S)iener fagt: „S[Ba^ ^aft 't>\\ imter bem §ut?" 9JJid)el ant=
ttjortet: ,, gd^ l)abe nid^tS barunter." SSa§ f)at ber ^Imtmann gefragtV
@r f)at gefragt: „2Barum mmmt ber '^nrn^t ben §ut nid^t ab?
^^(Ue Seute nef)men if)n ab." ^ie Seute benfen: „3Sir ^aben immer
ben §ut abgenommen, nur ber W\6)t\ tut e§ nid^t. SSarum tut er e§
uid^t?" @r ^t @^a^en unter bem §ut.
//. Give pri7icipal ^jarts of all verbs in the above story.
III. Fill out with auxiliaries to form j^^'^^l^^tfeot tense: 3*^)
— nci6) ber Stabt gegangeu. SE)er Sunge bte 3^^^^" ^^ ^^^
Xafet gefc^riebeu. — er gu §aufe getoefen? @ie beu ^ut
aufgeftiilpt? tt)ir eineu ^ragen getrageu? SSir ^iuter
bem 5(mtmaun tiergegaugeu.
LESSON 22
233
PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
Personal Pronouns
Singular
Masc
Fem.
Neut.
N.
ic^
bu
er
fie
e§
G. .
meiner
beiner
feiuer
i^rer
feiuer
D.
mir
btr
i^m
i^r
i^m
A.
mi^
bid)
Pt.
URAL
i^n
fie
e§
N.
n)ir
i^r
fie
(8ie)
G.
unfer
euer
i^rer (3^rer)
D.
un§
z\v^
i{)ncu (3^»^J1
i)
A.
und
eud^
fie
(@ie)
234-236]
INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT
,
91
234
Singular
REFIiKXIVES
Plural
4
X.
_
(4.
—
D. mir
bir
fic^
itn§
tud)
fid,
A. ttttd^
bt^
fi(^
un§
euc^
m
235
• '
^ct m'oxhcx
(5in SSurm tDor einmal aiif bent 33oben I)erumgefrod^en.
®a \)atte il^n em Sperling gefcI)Gn, I)Qtte il)n fd}ncE mit feinem
<S^nabel gefofet unb tDor mit if)m ouf cincn 33aum gcflogen.
„5ld)", I)Qt ba bcr SSurm gcrufcn, „la% mid) bo(^^ leben!
5 SSorum toteft bu mid)? Jd) r)nbc bir nid)t§ 311 Icibc gctan,^
unb id) lebc fo gcrn!"^ 5Ibcr bcr Sperling ^ai gcfogt: „^d)
freffe bid^, benn id) bin grofe unb bu bift flein, barum gel^orft
bu mir!""^ X'amii I)Qt er il)n gcfofet unb aufgeselfirt.
Xa i]t ein §Qbid)t gefommen unb i)at ben Sperling
10 gefoBt. „2)u bift ein SO^Jorber!" fd)rie biefer, „SBarum frifet hu
mid)? 3tf) l)cihc bir^ nid)t^ getan." .3* freffe bid)\
antlDortete ber §abid)t, „benn id} bin grofeer qI§ bu!" 2)q^
l^atte ein ^dger gcfe^en unb nun fc^ofe er auf ben §abid)t.
15 „So", fagte er, „id) bin §err itber eucft oHe, benn ifir feib oEe
fleiner aU id) ! '^f)x totet eud^ unter einanber, unb idj tote eud^
Qlle!"
f
236 * bo^ — intensive ; do not translate.
^ i(i^ ^afcC bir nili^tS JU (ciiie getan = I did not harm you. For dative
see App. 142.
' x^ Icbe ftem = I like to live.
* mir— dative with gepren. See App. 135,
92
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[237-239
Verbs— Pluperfect
^
Strong
had crept Wat ge!rod)eu (frie-
had flown
Wat geftonen
c^eit, !roc^, gefroc^en)
had seen
()atte geje^eu
murderer bei* SJJorber
to live
(ebeit (weak)
ground bei* 93obeu
to kill
toteit (weak)
sparrow ber ©perUitg (ber
to devour
auf'^e^ren, ^e^rte
(Bpa^)
(luY, aiif'gege^rt
bill ber @d)nabe(
to seize
faff en (weak)
to let lafi'en, (bit tdgt, er
among
unter
Idgt) liefe, gelaffeu
one anothei
' einanber
238 SSar ber 2Burm grower aU ber 3per(tug? S^ein, er Wat
fleiner. ^ati, bift bu grower aU i^? 9lein, t^ bin fleiner a(§ @ie,
unb 6ie ftnb grower uitb alter aU id), ®er Sager fagte: „^d) bin
grower a(§ i^r alle, fo tote id) eu^ alle. Q^r feib fleiner ai^ id), i()r
fount mic§ nidit toten." 2Ba§ ^atte ber (Sperling ^u bent SSurm
gefagt? S23a§ fiatte ber SSurm gefragt? 333er l)atte ben (Sperling
gefagt? SBarnm fonnte ber §abid)t ha^ tun? SSa§ fjatte ber
Sperling ^u bem §abi(^t gefagt? SSem ge^orten fie alle? SSarum?
2Ba§ fagte ber Qager ju i^ueu?
239 Translate: "You are my child, '^ said the hen to the
chick. "You have not been there, Mr. Smith, "^ said Mr.
Brown. "Children, you have been lazy and disobedient," said
the mother. I had seen him. They had gone home. He
gave you^ his hand. He met her in the garden. She saw him
in the house. They wore hats and coats. "Children, I see you
1 ^crr ^^mM.
2 Use three pronominal forms for you.
240 242]
INDICATTVE PLUPERFECT
93
in the garden!" '
"Mr. Smith, I saw
Change all the
the singular to the
LESSON
2S
r
POSSESSIVES
o
Singular
Masc.
Fein.
Neut
N.
mcin
metuc
mcin
G.
meinc0
nieincr
meincS
D.
meincm
ineincr
titeiitcm
A.
ineinen
meine
mcin
N.
eucr
eurc
cncr
G.
eureS
eurcr
eurcS
D.
eiircm
eurcr
eurcm
A.
eiivcn
eurc
cncr
'Mr. Brown, I have given you^ the purse."
you all day."^
nouns and verbs in the above exercise from
plural, or vice versa.
/
Plural
M. F. N.
meinc
meincr
lueincn
meinc
eurc
eurcr
eurcn
eurc
241 Note that —
1. The inflection is the same as that of tlie indefinite article
in the singular. In the plural it is like the definite article.
(See App. 12.)
2. Three forms ()iom. maf^c.^ nom. and ace. neut.), are
uninflected. The other forms have the same endings as the
definite article.
3. The other possessive pronouns are: bcin (your), fcin
(his), ijr (her), fcin (its), unfcr (our), cncr (your), i^r (their),
3||r (your) — all declined like the paradigms above.
242 Masculine
N. Scin §nt ttjar aw] bem ^o^fe gcbliebeu.
G. ^er ^atfer I)atte ben @o^n fcincg SlatgclicrS geliebt.
D. ^ie 9)^utter \6)xkh i^rcm So^nc.
A. 3d^ :^atte mcincn ^Jogcl getotet,
' Dative.
2See 198,2.
94. ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [243-247
243 Feminine
]S . ^cittc SWttitcr toax arm imb Iran!.
0. ^er '^amzn unfercr <^tatt ift 9lett) ?)orf.
D. 3^r gebt curcr 2^antc etn (SJef^enf.
A. (Sie f)aben 3^re <S(^U)cfier lange ntc^t gefe^en.
244 Neuter
N. Wltin ©urj ent^dtt mete (SJefd^ic^tem
G. ^er ^aufmann pit ben Bugel (bridle) fcincS ^fcrbcg.
D. Xie grau l^atle i^rcm ^inb einen ^rief gefd^nebeit.
A. ®ie SSoget fingen i^t fitcb.
245 Plurals
X. Mtint ©ruber finb in bem Garten.
G. ^ie 58iic^er beincr S^lucftcrn finb bentfrf).
D. ®§ fte^t in unfercn ©Hii^crn.
A. ^ie §ennen lieben ijre ^ili^lein.
246 ecin md)t^^^xi\(i)
Qtvei ^aufleute, namen^ ^oltljafar unb 2)^iifta|)!)o, tuaren
f(f)on rtjeit geritten. ^d t)erIor 33alt!)afar feinen 33eutcl, oljnc
eS gleid^ 3U bemerfen.^ Gin 2}errt)ifcft l^ar ben SBeg^ gegangen,
^otte il^n gefiinben, aufgel^oben unb eingeftecft.
5 9^itn Bemerften an6^ bie ^aufleute il)rcn 35erluft unb 'oev"
f^radjcn bem Stuber i()rev @elbe§ 500 ©olbftiitfe aU Coifin.
S)er ®ertDifd) trot ^erbor unb \pvadj: „Qiev ift euer ©elb, gcdt
ntir meinen So^n!" ®od) bic ^aufleute l^citten fid^^ einen
^lan auggebad)t. 33alt()afar offnete feinen 33eutel, sd^lte ba^
247 ^ 0|ttC. . . ^U Bcmerfcu = without noticing. Of. App. 217. '
^ben 99Scg — ace. of place. See App. 160.
3jlj^—dat. of interest. Cf. App. 142.
248-249J
INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT
95
20
@elb unb rief : „^d), greunb, id) \el)e, bu ^a\i bir beincn 2or)n
f(i)on genommen; e^ felfilt^ mein 8maragb. Ser tear 500
©olbftiidte mert." S)e§l)alb2 tnoKten fie bem ginber ben So^n
n'ldjt geBen. Umfon[t betcuerte bcr 2)ertDifd) feine ©^rlid^feit;
fie cjlaubten feinen SSortcn nid)t unb blieben bci iftrer 33e()aup=
hmc\. QnhWd) gingen aKe brei 3u eineni ::}iid)ter, trugen iftni
i()re ^adjc Dor unb Dcrlongten feine @ntfd)eibung. Xcv Widy-
tcr fprad): ,,31)^ ^aufleute, il)r beftmiptct, il)r i-)aiict cincn
Smarogb in ben 33eutel gcftedt?" „^aV' riefcn fie qu^; „ber
Smoragb wav in unferem 33eutel, toir fd)ix)oren ©ud^ unferen
mb borouf!" ,,@ut!" fogte ber 9lid)ter, „bann ift alleS flor.
2)ie^ ift nid^t euer 33eutel, benn er entf)dlt nid^t euer ©igentum.
(Fr gebort alfo biefem 90^anne, unb i()r miifet marten, bi§
iemanb euren 33eutel finbet. ^a§ ift mein ^i^t^f^rucft. Se^t
gebt eure SSege!"-''
248
VOCABULARY
judgment
ber 9iic^t§fpruc^
to count'
3d()(en (weak)
merchants
bie ^aufleute*
to be lacking
fe^len (weak)
to ride horseback
reiteii, ritt, gerit^
to affirm
beteuern (weak)
ten^
honesty
bk (S^rltc^feit
far
tvtit
to believe
gtauben (weak)
to lose
berlieren, tjerlor,
word
ba§ SSort
terloren^
to remain
bleiben, blieb, ge-
pouch
ber S3eutel
blieben^
at once
gleid)
assertion
bie 93e^au^tung
249 ' eg fe^It niein Smaragtl— the 'fg is impersonal and introduc
tory, like Eng. there; translate: My emerald is gone.
^ tieS^al^ = on that account.
^ eurc aSege— ace. after ge^t
♦ Used as plural of tier 0attfmann.
spiup. ttior geritten; ^tttte tierloreti; mv fiebliebett.
96
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
260-251
dervish
ber 5J)ertt)ifc^
three
bret
to pick up
• auf'f)eben,()obauf',
judge
ber atic^ter
auf'ge^oben*
cause
bie @Qc^e
to pocket
ein'fteden (weak)
to demand
tJerlongeit (weak)
loss
ber S^erluft'
decision
bie (Sutfd^ei'binig
to promise
tjerf|)red)eu, t)er^
to Insist
be^au))ten (weak)
fprac^,t)erfpro^eu*
to vow
fc^tt)oreu, jc^njur,
finder
ber i^inber
gefd^ttjoren*
goldpiece
bag ©olbftilcf
oath
ber eib
forward
i)ert)or'
clear
Hat
reward
ber So^u
to contain
ent^alten, ent^ielt,
plan
ber ^ran
entl)atten*
tooi)en
offnen (weak)
property
ba§ ©igentum
250 SSelc^er ber ^aufleute ^atte feinen ^t\M berloreit? SBeffen
93eutel fanb ber ^ertDifc^? SBa^ tat er bamit? S5km oerf^rad)en
bie ^aufleute ben 2ot)n? 2Ba§ tjerlaitgte er? SSofur? SSeffeu Seutel
offnete S3aU{)afar? 9^ac^ (according to) n^effen $lon h)ar ba§?
SBottten fie bem ^ermifc^ feinen So^n nid^t geben? SSa§ fagte ber
^ertpifc^? ^u mm gingeu fie? 2Ba§ berlangten fie bon it)m?
|>at er i^nen feinen 9^ic^t§f|)rn^ gegeben? SSaren bie ^aufteute
Snfrieben bamit? §atte ber 9tid^ter i^ren ^lan burci^fdjant?
25 1 EXERCISES
/. Fill out the blanks: ®ie SBoget fingen i^r — Sieber. ®ie
Se^rer te^ren il)r — (Stubenten. ®ie ©driller ftnbieren an§ i^r —
S3iic^ern. 9JJein — 9Jiutter liebt i^r — Xod^ter. ®ie ^inber get)ord^en
i^r — (lltern. 2Bir tieben nnf — Onfel, nnf — Xante nnb nnf —
^ettern unb (£onfinen. ^ie S3iic^er eur — ^inber finb bicf nnb
fd^ttJer.
*Plup. liattr ttttf'fif^often;
ent^altru.
^attr tirrf)iro(^ett; ^attr grfi^ttiomt; lattr
2o2-2o3] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 97
//. Fill out loith appropriate posscssives : ^avl, f)a\t bu
^ufgabe geternt? §attc Wlid)ti bic 6per tinge unter
§ut gefterft? ^ic SSogel fc^tafen in 9fleftern. §aben 6te
§ut in bcr §anb ober Quf bem fto|)fe? 3c^ tiebe 3?ater,
Gutter unb ^I'ofteltern. ^ec 3unge ()attc 5(ngen unb —
O^ren tDcit aufgemac^t. ®er Xiencr be§ ^ijnigg l^atte 9JhUtcr
eineu S3ricf gefc^riebeu unb tvav babei eingefc^tofen.
///. Answer: SOleiu §unb ift grog, tt)ie ift 3()rer? ^ Scin ^ferb
ift grou, mie ift 3§rc§? 3^c §au§ ift teuer, ift meine^ billig? Un[cr
md) ift bicf, h)ie ift eure§? §aben @ie 3^r Suc^ ober meine^? §at
cr fein ^ferb ober beine§? §abt i()r euer ^a\i^ ober feine§? 9}lein
§ut ift fc^hjars, ift beiner tt)ei6? 3t)r §au§ ift !lein, ift feine§ grog?
IV. Fill out with pronouns: §au^ ift neu, ift alt
§crr SBraun ^t nic^t mein SBud^, fonbern . SSir i)aUn
V. Translate: She has her book, not his. The boy had
written his word on the board, not hers. My horse is expen-
sive, is yours cheap? Our house has a garden, has yours one?
I hftve two apples, my brother has only one. She has one
book and he has one. Have you two horses or only one? I
see your hat, do you see mine?
LESSON 2Jf
DEMONSTRATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
252 liefer ^aufmann ^atte einen 33eutet oertoren.
3cncr ^eriDifc^ ()atte il)n gefunben.
^icfc SJlau^ ^at bet to^e eine Sc^ette nic^t angepngt.
gene §enne rief il)r ^iic^tein.
253 ^ Note that when the three un inflected cases of the possessives
are used without a noun, they have the same ending as the definite
article (er, e§. ) See App. 44.
98 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [254-265
^icfc0 ^iic^lcm tft fcincr ^utttx nid^t gefolgt.
3cnc0 ^Hnb ift unge^orfam geloefen.
2)tcfc8 ^ferb f)atte jenen ^aufmaim nad) ber Stabt gebroc^t.
^er ^obt^t :^at jcnc |)enne erfc^recft.
^tcfcr §abtd^t ^at jcncS ^iid^lein gefreffen.
§ter tt)ar ein Xifd^. ^arauf ^at ein ^sBitc^ gelegen.
Sie^ft bit ba§ «iid^? ^arin ftel)t etne ©efc^t^tc.
®te Xafel ift fc^mar^. ^ at ttuf fte^eu ga^len.
254
Singular
Plural
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
M. F. N.
this N.
btefer
biefe
btefe^, bie§
biefe
G.
bieje^
biefer
biefe^
biefer
D.
biefem
biefer
biefem
biefen
A.
biefen
biefe
biefe^, bieg
biefe
that X.
jener
jene
jene§
jene
G.
jene^
jener
jene§
jener
D.
jenem
jener
jenem
jenen
A.
jencn
jene
jeneS
jene
each, every N.
jcbcr
jebe
jebeS
aUt'
G.
iebeS
jeber
jebeS
atter
D.
jcbcm
jeber
jebem
alien
A.
jebcn
jebe
i^.'o^^
atte
this one N.
ber
bie
\>a^
bie
G.
beffen^
beren
beffen
beren (berer)
D.
bcm
ber
bem
benen
A.
ben
bie
\)a§>
W
255 ^ jeber, by its nature, can have no plural; ttUe may take its place.
The singular of ttUe is inflected like the other pronouns of this class,
or may be used without inflection— atteg SSttffer or aU M ^difw,
^ Note difterenoe from gen. of definite article.
256-268] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 99
256 Observe that —
1. The demonstratives are inflected like the definite article,
Avith a slight deviation in the gen. sing, and gen. and dat.
pi. of ber.
2. The demonstrative bcr may often be translated by tlie
personal pronouns, he, she, it.
3. 2)icfer and jeitct are used for the latter and the former.
See App. 167.
4. The demonstratives (when referring to things) may be
compounded with the prepositions in the following forms:
barin, barauf, baruber, barum^ baneben, bamit, babei, etc.
See 127.
257 ^cr dinfaff
Btx'et ??u]^rleute, ^an§ unb ^TiJid)eI, trafeu in etnem ^o^V-
tnege sufammen. liefer tear \o enge, ho!)^ bte SBagen iener
Wanmx nur mit 30?iir)e barin on dnanber dorbeifommen fonn-
iQw. „5a!)r' mir^ aii§ bem SSege!" rief $oax\^ biefem 311.^
5 „2Beid^e bu felbft^ aix^V entgegnete x^m biefer. „^6) tuifl
ni^t!" fd^rie jener barauf guriicf. 3SeiI nnn ieber nad^ feincm
^o^f* l^anb^In mollte, fom e§^ 3u Qan! unb ©treit barliber.
@nblt(^ fagte ^an^: „9^un frnge \6) bidf) wo6) einmol:
inillft bit mir qu§ bem SSege^ fal^ren ober nid^t? SSenn
10 nid)t, bonn mQd)€ id) e§ bir^ jejt gerobe fo tnie idi e§ fteute
morgen'^ jenem SQ^anne^ gemad^t I)Qbe." 2)a iiberfam
258 ' ntlr au8 bm SBege. See App. 144.
^ Observe position of ju; prufew = to call out to.
* fclftft — intensive (uninflected) = yourself.
* tttt^ felnent ^O^lf = according to his own inclination.
^ f am eg JU '^mi = a quarrel arose.
* Dative of interest. See App. 142.
' ^eutC morgett = this morning.
100
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[26J> 261
^Dtid}cl ein gJrauen. Jinn, I)ilf mil' iDcniaften^ blefen ^hiocu
beifeite f^ieben'', brummte er barouf, „fonft fann irf) nid}t!''
^arnuf ging ^an§> ein, itnb bolb tear bicfc 9lrbcit geton.
15 D^iun foBtc fid^ ber SDMkI cin .S5er3 inib frogtc: „^bv' Q\n-
mat tDtc l^aft bit g§ benn mit jcnem SOIonn l^eute morgcn
gemad)t?'' :3^Qraiif loditc ,§an§ iinb rtef au§: „^enf' bir iiitr,
jcner 3[)ten)d) mid) nun cinmnP nid)t qiic>. :l)a bin id) ielbft
auc^geix)id)cn!''
259 VOCABULARY
wagoners
bie t^u^rleute^
once more
nod) ein'moi
to meet
treffen, trof,
troffen
ge-
overcome
iiberfom'men, nber=
!am', iiberfom'men
canon
ber ©o^lmeg
awe
t>a^ ©ranen
together
jnfammen
at least
n)enigfteii§
narrow
enge
aside
beifeite
wagon
ber 2Bagen
push
fc^ieben, fd)ob, ge=
difficulty
bie mn^t
fd^oben
past
tjorbei'
to mutter
brnmnien (weak)
give way
n)eid)en, mic^,
ge=
otherwise
■fonft
mic^en
to agree
ein'ge^en, ging ein',
back
^nriid
ein'gegangen
quarrel
ber 3anf
work
bie STrbeit
fight
ber ©treit
heart
bag §er5
260 EXERCISES
/. Answer, using demonstratives: SBeld^er Wamx ^aiU etnen
SBagen? SSeffen SBagen ift jn breit fur ben Sa^rtneg gert)efen?
aSelc^er gn^rmann ttjottte nac^ feinem ^opf ^anbeln? §an§ imb
aJlid^el n)aren in bem 3a^rtt)eg getoefen. SBeld^er ift banod^ Qn§ge=
26 I ^ nVin rtntnal — a somewhat colorless parenthetical adverb difficult
to translate. Say : The man would not get out of the way.
2 PI. for gu^rmttttti; see ftttttfiftttf, 249, 4.
262] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 101
Ujic^cn, biefer obcr jeiter? 2Be(c^cr ^atte etncn (SinfoII 'aahti gct)abt?
§atte er btefe ©rfa^ntitc^ (c^on tinmai (once before) ge^abt? SD^it
mem? 293a^ ^atte cr mit jencm SDlaimc getan? 3Ser ^attc bobet met)r
90^ut gejetgt, §an§ ober jcncr Wann?
II. Translate: 1. These two wagoners had met [each other]
in a cafion. 2. This was very narrow. 3. These wagoners,
Hans and Michael, had wagons in this cafion. 4. The former
said upon this : "Get out of my way!" 5. The latter did not
yield. 6. Each acted according to his own inclination. 7. The
two merchants had lost this purse. 8. The contents (ber
3nl)a(t) of it were gold pieces and that emerald. 9. This
dervish found that purse with the gold pieces in it. 10. These
merchants had promised that finder a reward. 11. The judge
spoke this sentence: ''You say, your purse had contained this
emerald. 12. The dervish found this purse without the
emerald. 13. He did not find your purse. 14. The purse
without the emerald in it is not yours."
LESSON 2d ■
RELATIVE PRONOUNS ■, } \\^ ..
262 bet, tticld^cr
Masculine
Xcr ?^u^rmann, ber guerft auf bent §o^tit)eg tt)ar, imb bcffctt
SBageu fetir gro§ tDar, ift guriicfgegaugen. §an§, bor bcm SJiid^et
fic^ fiirc^tete, 1;)Ciiiz fet)r laut gefc^rieen. ^er SSagen, ben SOiic^el nic^t
allein fc^ieben fonnle, ftaub im 28 eg.
263 Feminine
^ic Wm<i, btf bte .^a^e fiirc^tete, ()atte eiite Sc^eHe gefauft.
^ie §enue, bercn ^iic^leiit iii^t !am, ()atte e» oft gerufcit.
^ie f a|e, t)oii bet xoxx getefen ^aben, trug feiite ©c^ette.
®ie Wuiitx, bie ber Wiener be§ ^omg§ ttebte, tDar fe^r fran!.
t
102 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [264-267
264 Neuter
Dag S3Ium^eu, baS im SBatbe geblu^t §atte, Uii^t tm (SJarteii
better.
Dag ^iic^lein, bcffen 9J^utter e§ gerufen Iiatte, tuar nic^t gefolgt.
Da§ ^inb, bcm bie SJiutter ben Slpfel gegeben f)atte, tear gut
genjefen.
Da§ ^ebic^t, baS ft)ir lefeit, ift fd^on.
265 Plural (Masc, Fem., Neut.)
Die gu^rleute, bic fid) in bent §of)ltt)eg begegnet tvavm, finb
einanber auggemic^en.
Die ^ferbe, bcrctt 3lrbeit 311 fc^tuer geiuefeu luaf, tateit fie nic^t.
Die ^ogel, \)on bcncn ioir gelefen I)aben, lebeit im SSalbe.
Die Siirften, bic bag «oI! liebt, finb gliidlid).
266 Der ^o^ltoeg, ttjoburiij W SBagen fu^ren, wav fe^r eng.
Dag Sdc^leiu, tnotitt bie ©latter f^mammen, loar filbertjell.
Die ^efd^tdite, ttrnrin ioir ijou bent SSolf gelefen fatten, Wat
eine gabcl (fable).
,.<>«'':;^: ^ A
;;
•
■\ " '^"M.-' "''■-■^'-
F.
N.
PI.
ber
bie
bag
bie
beffen^
beren
beffen
beren
bem
ber
bem
benen
ben
hk
bag
Ut
tt)eld^er
n)elc^e
iuelc^eg
iuelc^e
beffen''
beren
beffen
beren
mel^em
n)et(^er
njeld^em
toeld^en
n^elc^en
melc^e
ftjetc^eg
tDtl^C
267 ^ Note difference from def. article.
2 See A pp. 36 and 168.
268-271] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 103
268 Relative and interrogative compounds are formed by
too + the preposition. See 127, also App. 171-174.
269 Note that in all relative clauses the verb comes last.
270 ^er ^rtn^ uon ^omburg
griebrtd) 2BiI^€lm, ben man „hcn ©roBen" nennt, ireil
er fo fel^r tap\ev tvat unb fetn Sanb t)on geinben Befreit I)atte,
tuav ^xirfiirft t)on 33rQnbciiburg. ©r 1:)atie ctnen D^effen,
bem^ er fefir gugetan tvav. 2)tefer wav iung unb feurtg
5 aber oudft ftiag^alficj. ©r l^atte \d)on atuet 'Bd}lad)tm tierloren
burcf) ben ©ifcr, beffen"-^ er nid)t $err getueien tnar. 9tun
Ijatte tf)m ber ^hirfiirft inieber einen ^^^oftcn Qut)ertraut in ctner
<S(^lQd)t, iuoDon man t)iel enuartete. Stefe (Bd)lad)t Ijeifet
„gel)rbellin" nadj bcm Seamen be§ Orte^, wotin man \od}i.
JO ^er ^$rtn3 fonnte ben Wnt, ber tftn befeertc, nidit bdmpfen
unb ftitrgte fid) 3U friil) in bie 8d]Iad)t, bte er and] gemann.
5lber fein Onfel, beffen Strenge befannt uuir, nerurteiltc ifin
3um ^obe. 33ergeben^ baten alle Offi^tere, benen^ er fel)r
teuer tuar, unb olle ©olbaten beren ^er^ cr geinonnen f^atte,
15 um ©nabe.
^Q legte ber S^lurfiirft, ber 9iefpeft Dor beni (Sfiorafter
be§ ^rinaen Ijattc, beffen^ llrteit in feine Ajonb. Itnb ber
^^Jrina, beffen ©eredjtigfeit^ifinn fe()r ftarf \mv, fd)rieb: „2^ein
Urteil ift gcred)t. ^dj I^Qbe ben Xob, ben Xn niir 3ugcfprod)en
20 I}aft,-t)erbient." ®a berjie]^ iljm fein Onfel, ber nun fal), bafe
27 I ^iicm— dat. with adj. See App. 145 and 136.
- beffen— gen, with ^err ttlcrBen = to become master of. See list in
App. 122.
^ benen— dat. with adj. See App. 145 and 136.
*beffett Urteil = the judgment of the latter.
104
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[272-274
ber ^rtns ftd^ geBeffert ):)aiie. 3Son mm an^ ift ber ^^5rtna,
beffen DZotnen S^^tebrirf] bon $omburg roar, nic^t nur topfer
fonbern au6) befointen unb fetbft bef)err}tf)t geioefen.
272
VOCABULARY
enemy
ber getnb
known '
befannt'
to free
befrei'en (weak)
to condemn
Derur'tetten (weak)
elector
ber ^urfiirft
in vain
toerge'ben^
partial
jugetau
dear
teller
fiery
feurtg
pardon, gract
5 W @nabe
reckless
tuag^alfig
resjject
ber 9?efpe!t'
battle
bie <Bd)la6)t
character
ber 6;f)ara!' ter
zeal
ber ©ifer
judgment
'tia^ Urteil
to entrust to
an'Dertraueu (weak)
sense of justice ber ^erec^'tigfeit^fiiut
to expect
ertuar'ten (weak)
death
ber Xob
to fight
fe^ten, foc^t, geforfjteu
to decree
5ii'fpre^en,fprac^3ii',
prince
ber $rins
au'gefprot^en
to inspire
befee'Ien (weak)
to deserve
ijerbie'nen (weak)
to dami)en
bdmpfen (weak)
to forgive
tjer^ei'^en, t)er5te^,
too
3w
tierjie^en
early
m
to improve
befferii (weak)
to win, gain
getoin'nen, gehjaitn',
careful
befon'neii
gett)on'nen
controlled
felbft be^errf^t'
severity
273 FiJ
bie ©trenge
7 in wifJi rpJaf.iiw. rtr
nnnunn' S^
rtphrtffi 5'?^tlfiptm.
9^omc „ber ^rofee" tuar, unb fein Sanb t)on g^int^cn befrett
^aiit, tt)ar eiit ^urfiirft. ^m Sa^re 1675 f^liig er bie ©d^toeben
(Swedes), feiite geiiibe tDareii. ^ie (Sd^tac^t, biirc^ bieg
gefc^a^ (happened), f)ie§ gefirbeUin. tuir iiber ben ^^riiisen
gelefen I)obeii, gef^a!) ludl)reiib biefer ©d^lQd^t. ®er ^^riii^, etn
S^effe be§ ^urfiirften tuar, t)oii tuir oben gefproc^eii ^abeii, mar
274 * tlOtt mm an = from now on.
275-276] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 105
M)n, aber loagljalftg geloefeii. 2)q§ 9legiment, er gu fu()ren
^atte, ftanb im |)intergrunb. ^er ^urfiirft, Siebe fiir ifyx fe^r
grog tvax, ^atte i^m befoI)(en, nxd)t toor ber Orbre (before the
command came) t)or5uge^en. 3(ber ber ^rinj, ^ebulb
(patience) nic^t ftar! mar, n^artete nic^t auf bie Orbre, i^m ju
langjam mar. ®r fturjte ftc^ ^u friil) in bie 8d)Iad^t, miitete.
^ie Sdilac^t enbete in einem ©iege fiir ben ^urfiirften, aber auf
feinen SfJeffen, bie Drbre tjerte^t ^atte, fe^r bofe mar. 5((Ie
Dffijiere, greimbe be§ ^rinjen gemefen maren, unb ade 8olbaten,
gu er fe^r gut gemefeu mar, haUn fiir ben ^rinjeu, fie fo
fe^r liebten. 5(ber ber ^urfiirft, §ers fiir ben ^riu^eu fprac^,
©inn aber fet)r ftreug mar, Qah n\d)t nad), (£r fc^rieb bem
^rinjen, im ®efdngni§ mar, eiuen ^rief, — riu ftanb: „2Benn
ba§ Urteil, id) iiber ®icl)^ gefproc^eu t)ah^, in feinen 5(ugen
nid^t rec^t (right) ift, mill id) Xic^ freifprec^en!" ^er ^rin^,
Seele gered^t mar, bac^te longe iiber biefen S3rief, i^n feijr gerii^rt
i)atit, nad). ^ann frfirieb er: ,,^a§ Urteil, — nac^ id) fterben mug,
ift gerecfjt (just)!" ^er ^urfiirft, Seele biefe 5(ntmort ermartet
^atte, mar febr geriif)rt. ^xin fonnte er ben ^rin^en, fein
Unrec^t einfaf), freif|)recf)en, mo^*^ er anc^ tat.
LESSON 20
275 REVIEW
1. The pluperfect tense is formed of the preterite of
l^a&cn or f cin -f perfect participle.
2. The rule for the choice of }^ti\^tXi or feitt is the same as in
the perfect. (See 80, 2.)
3. For personal and reflexive pronouns, see App. 27-29.
276 ^ Note that in letter- writing the proroun of address is capitalized.
2 t]ja§ has for its antecedent the preceding clause.
106 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [277
4. For possessive pronouns, see App. 31-33.
5. For demonstrative pronouns, see App. 34, 35.
6. For relative and interrogative pronouns, see App. 3Q, 37.
7. For syntax of pronouns, see App. 165-175.
8. Eelative clauses have the verb at the end.
277 REVIEW EXERCISES
/. Give pluperfect paradigms of: fteifen, ftutpen, l^oben, feiu,
tdten, fliegen, (aufen, urteilen, tDeid^en, fec^ten.
//. Translate: 1. The battle in which the elector freed his
land was in Fehrbellin. 2. That wagoner, whose load was
very large, went back. 3. The cafion, through which he had
gone in the morning, was too narrow for two. 4. The hunter,
who had killed the hawk, cried out: *'I am large, you [all] are
small, you [all] belong to me, I have you all!" 5. The mer-
chants asked, "What have you done with our emerald which
was in the purse?" G. The dervish declared: "The pm'se in
which the emerald was, was not the (one) which I found."
7. The judge's sentence whereby the merchants had lost their
purse was just. 8. The dervish had come the way which the
merchants were coming. 9. The tower from which the stork
had flown, was that tower on which the cat was sitting. 10. Did
you find the flow'ret which you were seeking in the woods?
11. I had found it in the garden in which it had been growing.
12. The officers, to whom he had been very dear, begged for his
life. 13. The soldiers whose officer he had been loved him.
14. He was brave and reckless, which* lost him the battle.
///. Give the plurals^ in the corresponding cases, of: bent,
bte, tt)el(^e§, ber, melc^em, biefe^, biefer, id), bu, meiiu
IV. Translate, singular and plural: My book, his battle,
that officer, his judgment, her sparrow, their hat, our house,
your goldpiece, in which, in this, on which, on this.
*See 276, 2.
278-280] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 107
CHAPTER V
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT
LESSON 21
278
Present ^er ^^aufittantt tcitct ^eute nac^ ber @tabt.
Future @r tuttb morgeit nac^ ber (Stabt tcitcn.
Fut. perf. ®r tnirb morgeit nac^ ber Stabt gcrittcn fcin.
@r mitb bie Slrbeit ^tivi^ §ckn.
279 SDie ^aufteute merben nac^ ber (Stabt reiten. 3^^ tperbe bir
morgeit \iCi^ S3iic^ gebeit. 'J)ie 90^ait§ mirb ber ^a^e itiemat§ eine
@(^elle auf)aitgeii, benit fie luirb fie ftetS fiird^teit. %zx (Sterling fagt
3tim SSurme: ,,3c^ tuerbe bi^ freffeit, beitit td^ bin gro§ unb bit bift
flein/' Xer^abid^t fagt ^um ^dger: ,,3Birft bit mtc^ tfiteit? 3d)
^(i\it bir bod^ itt(^t§ 5u leibe getait."
@^e bie §enne 'tioA f itd^Ieiit erreic^t, mirb e§ ber §abic^t gefaitgeit
I)aben. SBeiiit \!)\z ^^a^e !ommt, mirb bie 3Jlau§ fortgelmifeit feiit.
SSenit bie S3ditme ttirfit me^r blii^eit, mirb ber grii^Ung tiergmtgeit
feiit. ^ie ©perlinge merbeit tjerlorett fein, tuenn ber Wiener be§ 5(mt=^
manned bem ^itabeit beit §ut itimmt.
280 Future Tekse
ic^ wcrbc belt 50^aitit fc^en
bu mirft ben 9Jlanit fc|en
er ttitrb ben SJiaitii fc^cn
ttjir mcrbctt ben 9J^ann fcjcn
i^r ttjctbcl ben 9Jlann fcjcn
fie ttictben ben SD^ann fc^en
®ie toerbm ben SJ^ann fe^en
108 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [281-283
28 1 Future Perfect
Verb with Ifa^fn
id) wcrbc ba^ 2Bort gcfi^ncBctt |oBcn
't>n mirfl 'oa^ SSoit gcf^ricbcn ^aficn
er ttirb ba§ SQSort gcf^ncficn ^ttbcn
iuii itterbcn ba^ SSort gcfc^ttcficn IJafien
il)i mcrbet ba§ SBort gcfi^ricBcn ^oBcn
fie mcrben ha^ SBort gcfr^ricficn ^o6en
@ie tocrben 'tia^ SBort gefi^riebcn |abcn
Verb with fftji
ic^ tuerbc md) §aufe gcfommen fcin
bu mirfl nad) SQan)z gcfcmmcn fein
er ttiirb narf) §au}e gcfommcn fcin
tt)ir toerben nac^ §aufe gefommen fcin
it)r mcrbet itad) |)aiife gcfommcn fcin
fie mcrbcn nad) §aufe gcfommcn fcin
(Sic toerben narfi §aiife gcfommcn fcin
282 9RnttcrIic6c
5n einem 2)orfe im Sd^tDargtDalb Icbtc cin vSd)nctbcr itnb
feine grau. ©ie gotten einen ©oI)n namen§ 2)onteL Xer
93ater ift I)Qrt unb flreng getoefen. (^r l^ai ben ©o^n gelicBt,
aber er I)Qt it)m felten eriaubt 3u fpielen. Smmer fafe er Bei
5 bent 3Sater unb l^alf il)m. „2)u iDirft ben S^ng^n nod^ ^ t5er=
283 ^ ttodi = before you're through with it. Compare with the use of
nod^ to express progressive action (83). See also Ibod^ (36, 4). These
particles lend color and force to the narrative.
284] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 109
treibcn", fagte il)m oft bie ^van, bic fid) T()re^:^ (Sol^ne^ tDcgen -
Bangte. 5Iber ber 3Sater trurbe sornig iinb fd)rte: „5ur tuen
arbeite id^ benn? bod) nur feinettDegen !^ ®r tvivh mmal ein
SO^cifter fein unb Orel ®€lb tierbiencn!" ^od) bie SDhttter, bie
10 Die! fliiger tDor, feufate mir: ,,2Bcnn er mir bio bal)in'^ iiid)t
Tangft'* fortgeloufcn fein iDirb!"
Unb e§ fam tnirflic^ fo. SSdftrcnb ciner ^cid)t, in ber e§
ftorf fd)neit^, ift ber .^nabe baOongeloufcn. Qt I)interlie6 einen
93rief an feine 90^utter: „3Benn 2)u biefcn 33rief (ieft mcrbe id)
i'> ((ingft fort fein. 3Senn id) reid) bin, tnerbe id) miebcrfommcn.
Si;^ haf)in mirb mir ber 35ater inol)! Der5ief)en baben!"
2)a meinte bie SUZntter bitterlid^, nnb ber 3Sater, bem^ nie=
manb fo oiel ©efiibt gugetrant botte, nnbm e§ fid) fo feftr gn
.§er5en^ bofj er franf innrbe nnb ftarb. (Jfte or ftnrb, fagte er
20 5n feiner J^ran : „9}iarie, menn bn alle 8d)ulben be3al)lt r)aben
rt)trft, tnirb tnenig iibrig bleiben. 5(ber hu tDtrft bid) burd)=
fcftlagen, benn bu bift tnpfer nnb bu liirft dnft nnferen 2)QnieI
mieberfeben. ^nnn fagc ibni, ba)] id) feiner" in meinex ^obe§=
ftnnbe gebad)t i)ahQV' Xaniit ftarb er.
(Srf)lii6 folgt=ro be concluded.)
284 ^ mcflen, f^alttX, urn • ttlitten = for the sake of, on account of—
almost synonymous. These prepositions usually follow the noun, and
govern the genitive. See App. 126. When united with a personal
pronoun, ttirgm is preceded by et, giving frinettnegtlt, for his sake,
tnfinetilieBfn, for my sake, etc. See App. 88.
^ h'xi iltt^in = by that time.
^ tdngft = long ago.
^liem— dat. obj. of juttttttftt. See App. 132,
*^na^m eg flr^ p ^erjen^took it to heart.
' jeiner-gen. after flfbai^t. See App. 122.
110
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[286-286
From now on the special vocabulary will be discontinued and all
new words (except the verbs) will be found only in the general
vocabulary.
285 Strong Verbs
to drive away
t)ertretBen
t)ertrieb
tjertrieben
to forgive
t)er^cif)en
t)er5ie(}
tjersie^en
to die
fterben
ftarb
geftorbeu
to make one's way fid^ burdlfrflla^^
Wm firfi
Jic^ burc^gefc^lagen
gen
burd^
Weak Verbs
to live
lebeu
to sigh
feufjen
to love
Ueben
to snow
fc^neien
to x)erinit
erlauben
to weep
toeineu
to play
jpielen
to believe to be
gutrauen, traute
to be afraid
fic^ bangen
capable of
511, jugetraiit
to deserve
tjerbienen
to pay
besaf)ien
286 2Bo f)at ber (Sd^neiber getoo^nt? §at er allein Qttoo^ni?
2Bie t)iele ^inber fatten bie 2tnU? 6inb fie fpdter (later) allein
gen?efen? 2!3a§ mirb ber ^ater tiui, tpenn ber <3of)n fortlduft?
SBamt ttyirb ber @of)u iDieberfommen? SBirb mi ^elb ba feiu nad)
be§ S^aterg Xob? SSirb bie Tlntitv tjerstueifetn (despair)?
SSarum tpirb fie nid^t tjergtoeifetn? 2Bie tt)irb fie fic§ burd^f^Iagen?
3ft ber Waim geftorben? SSoran ift er geftorben? §atte er ben
(Sof)n fe^r geliebt? SSie ^atte er i^n be^anbelt (treated)? §at er
fic^ \>a^ gortlaufen be§ (5o^ne§ fef)r gu ^er^en genommen? 2Bie fe^r
()at er e§ fi^ gn ^erjen genommen? SSirb ber 8o^n tuieberfommen?
^on tt)em mirb it)m bie 9Jlutter ergd^len? SBeffen ^at ber ^ater in
jeiner ^obe^ftnnbe gebac^t?
2Ba§ ift ein 8d^neiber? eine ©d^neiberin? ein ©d^nfjmad^er?
geben fie ein anbere^ (other) SBort fiir ©i^u^mad^er! SSa§ ift ein
Sel)rer? eine Se^rerin? ein Sd^iiler? eine ©c^iiterin? 2Bog ift eine
287-289] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 111
B^nk? eiite SSerfftatt (workshop)? 2Ba^ ift eiu 5lrbeiter? eine
^^rrbeiterin?
287 Translate: 1. I shall have a story for you which you
will like. 2. I shall have returned when your brother is in
school. 3. When the youth returns he will not find his father.
4. Does the mother think of her son in the hour of her death?
5. The father h.ad taken the departure (ba§ gortge^en) of the son
so much to heart that he died. G. The mother will not make her
way through life and will not see her son again. 7. Will the
latter have become rich? 8. The former will have become old.
9. I shall have run away.
288 Change all the above sentences so as to use the present
tense; the perfect; the preterite.
LESSON 28
289 ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS
Nominative
®a§ ift bcr grogc S3aum.
^er S3aum ift gro§.
%\t Slume ift fj^iin.
5)ag ^inb ift flcin.
SDa^ ift cin grower S3aum.
^a§ ift btc fd^bnc 93lume.
®ag ift einc fd^onc SBlume.
5)a§ ift ba§ Heine ^tub.
®a§ ift cin fletncS ^inb.
M.
bcr gro^c 93aum
ettt grower 93anm
F.
liic f(^onc 93lume
eine fc^one 93lnme
N.
bag Heine ^inb
tin fleineS ^inb
Observe that when the article has an ending which
shows the number, gender, and case of the following noun
the adjective has merely a perfunctory inflection. In the
nominative case this is e. When the article has no inflection
112 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [290-291
(as tin in masc. uom., iieut. iiom. and ace.) the adjective
takes the strong characteristic ending, masc. cr, neut. e8.
290 Genitive
^ie flatter bcS griincn 93oume§ fiub grog.
^ie SBIcitter eiucS griincn S3aume§.
^te garbe bcr fc^onen S3lume ift rot
^ie i^axU etncr fi^onen S3lume.
®ie mutizx bcl fretnen ^inbe§.
SDie SJiutter eineS fleiucn ^inbe§.
beS griincn S3anme§ einci griincn 93anme^
bcr f(^i)ncn Slnme eincr fd^iincn S3lnme
bcS fleincn ^inbe§ eincS fleincn ^inbe^
Observe that the perfunctory inflection in the genitive
is en, and that this appears after tlio definite and the indefinite
articles, since both indicate the number, gender, and case of the
noun by their full inflections.
29 1 Dative
5)ie S3(atter finb ouf bcm grogcn S3aumc.
^ie 93tdtter finb auf eincm grogcn ^anme.
2)a§ ^inb mirb tjon bcr fc^oncn S3(ume jprec^en.
^a§ ^inb n)irb oon eincr fi^ijncn 33lume fprec^en.
Xte 9Jiutter ge^t gn bcm fleincn ^Hnbe.
®ie 3JZntter gef)t 5u eincm fleincn ^inbe.
bcm grogcn S3aume eincm grofecn Sanme
bcr jc^onen ^hime eincr jc^oncn Slnme
bcm fleincn ^inbe eincm fleincn linbe
Observe that the dative as well as the genitive of the
adjective after the definite and indefinite articles has the per-
functory ending en.
292-295
FUTiniE AND FUTURE PERFECT
113
202
Accusative
3(^ ttjerbc bctt grogcn S3aum fe^eii.
3(^ toerbc eincn grogcn Saum fef)en.
S33ir tteben btc fc^onc S31ume.
SBir Uebeit einc fd^onc SUtme.
SHait ttJtrb bag fleinc ^inb ^oreiu
SOlan tDirb cin fleincS ^inb 1i)6mu
ben gro^ctt S3aum
btc jd^onc S3(ume
ba9 flctnc ^inb
eincn gre^en 33aum
einc fd^onc 93lume
cin fleincS ^titb
Observe that in the accusative neuter the adjective
varies according as it is preceded by the definite or by the
indefinite article. Note the same difference in the nom.
masc. and neut., caused in all three cases by the uninflected
condition of cin.
The masculine accusative is alike after the definite and
indefinite articles and ends in en.
293
Plurals
bic grogen 53dume
ber fc^ouen S3(umeu
ben fleiucn ^inberu
bic gro^cn S3dume
feinc^ grogen S3dumc
meiner fc^ouen S3(umeit
feinen fleinen ^iiibent
!eiue grogen S3diimc
294 AVhere no article or pronoun precedes, the adjective
is declined like ber.
grower S3aum
gro^cf'' 93aume§
gro§em S3aume
gro^cn S3aum
fc^one 93(ume
fc^oner 53lume
fc^oncr ^(ume
frf)one 33tume
fleincg linb
fleincr ^tnbe^
fleiitcm ^inbe
!(einc8 ^inb
Plural
fc^one S3Iumeu
fc^oner Slumen
ft^onen ©lumen
\d)bnt S3I|tmcn
295 ^ The indefinite article has no plural, but feitt and the possessires
which are decUned like it and have a plural form are therefore used
instead of it. See App. 12.
2 C9 is usually changed to en to avoid recurrence of sibilant.
114 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [296-297
The plurals of those phrases that have citt in the singular
*aro also declined like bcr:
tin ftetncS ^inb Heine ^inber
eineS fteiucn ^tnbe§ !teincr ^inber
eiucm fleincn ^iube fleincn ^inberu
cin fletncS ^inb fleinc ^inber
296 GRAMMAR
1. Adjectives used predicatively are uninflected.
2. Adjectives iised attributively are inflected according to
the following principle: One of the adjuncts of the noun must
show the number, gender, and case. If this is done by the
article or pronoun, the adjective has a merely perfunctory
ending (c, Clt). When the article or pronoun does not do this,
the adjective must have the strong ending.
3. There are three possible conditions: (a) The adjective is
not preceded by article or pronoun ; (b) the adjective is pre-
ceded by the definite article, or the pronouns declined like
it; (c) the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article, or
the words declined like it. We get, therefore,
THREE ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS
I. Strong — when used alone — inflected like definite article.
II. Weak — preceded by def. art. (or demonst. pronoun) —
weak endings (c, cn ).
III. Mixed — preceded hy indef. art. (or possess, pron.), —
three strong endings, the others weak.
297
TABLE OF ADJECTIVE INFLECTIONS*
M.
Singular
F.
Strong
N.
Plural
M. F. N.
-er
-C
-e§
-c
-e§ (en)
-er
-e§ (en)
-er
-em
-cr
-em
-en
-en '
-e
-e§
-e
* For full adjective declension, see App. 38-44,
298-299]
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT
115
Weak
ber — c
W — e
ha^ — e
bie —en
be§ — en
ber — en
be§ —en
ber —en
bent —en
ber —en
bem —en
ben —en
ben —en
W —t
ba§— c
Mixed
bie —en
mein — er
meine — e
mein — e8
meine — en
meine^ — en
meiner — en
meine» — en
meiner — en
meinem —en
ntetner — en
meinem —en
meinen — en
meinen —en
meine — e
mein — e§
meine — en
LESSON 29
298 aWntterliek
(©cfilufe)
^ic einfome Sraii Icbtc nun Iraurig lucitcr. (5§ !am fo,
mie e» i6r ftcrbcnbcr^ SO^ann gefaot ()attc. Sie ntiifstc aUcv
berfaufen xmb miifete fogar bet fremben Seuten bienen, urn tf)r
2eben 3u crl)alten. Sod)- bie lanacn, trauriiicn ^^nfere ticr=
5 gtngen i^r^ fdjncll in ber ^offnung: ,/Dtein SanicI, mein
lieber ©ol^n, irirb fd^on tricber fommcn. 5<i) tuerbe bieHeid^t
bann fc^on alt gemorben fcin, abcr fterbcn tDerbc \6) ntc^t, ^\^^
r fommt!" ®o Icbte bie liebenbe 9[)?utter iDeiter in biefer
ftctigen $offnung unb merfte gar nid)t, n^ie bie ^a\)ic: ont=
10 {d)Iiipftcn.
2)er ©olfin tear mittlernjeik iueit ficntmgefommcn in ber
SSelt, \)aii^ nici bnrdigcniadit tnar alt itnb grait gelnorben iinb
f)atte feine Cittern faft gdnjlid) t)ergeffen. SSenn er ifirer"^ cin=
299 ^ fterftettber = dying.
'^ ilO^ — an adversative conjunction, weaker than abff.
^i^r — dat. of interest. See App. 142.
M^rer— gen. with Jjettfen. See App. 122,
116 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [300
mol t)ad}te, \o fmjtc cr fid): „2)ie l^)cr^cn uioljl laiujft ^fftorbcn
S)o tvat er einmal augegen bei cinem itoltenifc^en Sefte,
too er t)i€le Srembe^ trof. Swfallig font ble 9lcbc ouf bte
beutfdfte 2:rciie. Semanb modjte bte ^emcrfung: „5ld), mit
ber BeriiJimten b€utfd)en ^reue ift C£^ and) nid}t fo toett I^er.^
20 !^ie j^ot aud^ i^xe Siiden!" Sie onberen Iad)ten mit^ imb aud)
ber grembe an^ bem Sd^iDorgtooIb mod^te cine ironifc^e 33em€r=
fung boriiber. So fagte ein iunger Spooler mit ernftem (^e=
fid^t: „5c^ toiK end) etne ©efd^id^te eracil^Icn, bie mir jiingft
borgefommen ift, bo merbet il^r \e^en, toa§> bn^ mit ber
25 beutfrf)eii ^reiie ouf fid^ !)Qt!"^
^fJun er3al)Ite cr bie @efd)id)tc Don ber alten 31*01! im
8d^toor3tooIb, bie if^r l^orteg 2o§> fo gebulbig trug, toeil il^r^®
tief im .^perjen bie Sicbe gum ©ol^n, tvk dn frifd^er 39riinnen,
Seben imb ^offnung gob. ,,So finb nun tiieraig goitre ber-
80 floffcn, bie olte grou ift toeife getuorben unb gel^t gebeugt il&ren
fd)rt)eren SScg, bei fremben Ceuten nm il^r 93rct orbeitenb. 5tber
ieben SO^orgen mxh jeben ?Ibenb hokt fie fiir biefcn ©ol^n, ieben
gremben frogt fie nod) iljm, unb jeben 9^eifcnben" bittct fie
300 ^ tOtttien ttlOl|l geftor^en f tin = probably have died — an idiomatic
use of the future perfect. See App. 1 79.
® tltele SfrfWlbe— fremb is an adj. Here it is used as a noun. But in
such cases the adjective retains its full inflection according to rule.
It is strong ; coordinate with tlicle.
Mft e§ au^ niii^t fo ttiett I|et = isn't so great as always supposed—
corresponds to the slang phrase, "isn't all it's cracked up to be," but
is less inelegant.
8 mit = too.
^ ttiaS lltt§ ouf fl(^ ^Ot = what is in this talk of German fidelity.
^« i||r im ^erjcn— dat. pron. -\- def . art. instead of possessive. See
App. 144.
" jflint 9lHfentfn = each traveler — a present participle used adjec-
tively. See note 6.
301-302]
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT
117
narf) if)m Qu^aufc^ouen. Wnh aii i§r fQiter berbtente^ @elb
35 gtbt fie Qii§, urn nad) ii)m 511 frageu. ®ie tuith uidit fterben,
bio fie t)on if)m f)6rt! "
5I((c tDaren ftill geluorben. 2)cr ^Taniel aber fragtc leifc:
,Mic I)ciJ3t bie alte grau?" „Si*i"iu '^runner, btc "Biiwc bct>
8d)neiber5 '^runner, unb bcr 8or)n ftieB Saiiicll" Xa quxq ber
40 aj^ann fttll l^inou^, f^niirte fcin 33unbel unb mad)te fic^ ouf
ben §etmtuct3,^"2 ^jj^^ j^i^ (^^itc aiiiitlcr nod) cinniQl 3« umarmon.
301
Strong Verbs
i
to maintain
er^Qlten
erfitelt
cr^^Qlten
to forget
tjergcffen
bergag
bergeffen
to pass away
Derflte^eu
tjerflofe
tierfloffeit
to bite
betgen
bi6
gebiffcii
to happen
tjorfommen
Weak Verbs
t)orge!onimen
must
niuffcit, mugte, ge==
tolrelate Cr^oljlCU
niugt
to bend bCUgeil
to sell
Derfaufcn
to pray betClt
to serve
bienen
to travel reifcit
to'escape
entfd^lii^fen
tosee/look fd)aUCU
to experience
burci^mad^eii
burcb, bur
1, mac^te
cbacmocbt
to strap f c^niircu
to embrace UlUarmcn
EXERCISES
302 SSag fiir eine^" g^-^y j^qj. j^^,^ 5ie 3Bitrt)e be§ (Sd)neibcr§?
2Ber f)Qtte tl)r ha^:^ q^qV^ 33ci rt^em muBte fie bienen? SSie iDoreii
bie 3a!)re, bie nun t)ergingen? SSas erftielt ifiren SO^ut au btefer
trourigen 3eit? 2Sa§ ^offte fie? 3Sa§ tDar il)re ftetige ^offnung?
'^moj^te fllft auf ben ^timttlf ft = started on his way home.
" ttia^ fiir eine = what kind of.
118 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [303-304
''Mat hn ool)n ein retd^cr ''Mann geiuorben, ioie er e^ geI)offt l^atte?
SSa§ fiir ein Stnabe tvav er getDefen? SSoS fiir etn 2)?ann Ji:)ar
cr gctDorben? 3Ba^ bod^te er in Sesug auf (in regard to) feine
(51tern? Sei iuqjS fiir einem gefte tuar er gugegen? SSa§ ift ein
italienifcl}c^> Reft? SBorauf fom bie 9lebe? Sft bie beutfdje ^reue
.l)criiI)mtV ^ennen ©ie (do you know) ba^ Sieb „2;eutfd)Ianb,
S)eiitfd)lQnb iiber aUe§"? gielten^ bie 2eule ki bem italienifci)cn
5eft Did t3on ber beutfdien ^reue? 2Bq§ fiir 33emer!uJtgen mady
ten fie? SSer bodite anber§ (differently)? 3Ba^ fiir ein ©efi(i)t
niQcljte er? 3Son toem ersctl^Ite er nun? 2Sie fie^t bie altc Jran
jetst anS^? 3Sann Bctct fie fiir if^ren berlorenen ©o^n? SSo^et !)at
fie @elb? 2Sa§ tut fie bamil? SSeld^en ©inbrucE mad)te biefe
(3efd)id)tc auf Daniel?
303 Fill in:
tierlaffen grou n?irb auf ben tierloren-
(Bofyx luarten. S)er arm — , alt — SO^ann tDirb je^t fein — alt — ,
gcbcugt — a)httter umarmt I)aBen. S)er jung — , ftiE — Tlakv,
mii bem ernft — @efid)te, er3a!)It bie traurig — @efd)id3te ber
trcu — , alt — grau. ^a§> italienifd) — 5eft, tnobei ber iung—
Stealer bie§ erscit^Ite, ift langft boriiber. ®a§ §er3 be§ alt—
®d)nciber§ mar nid)t fo I)art, alS ber gomig — (Sol^n geglaubt
Ijattc. 2)a§ Ijart — 2o§> ber arm — SSittoe rit^rte alte ^ergen.
304 Translate: 1. The poor old woman will work hard all
her life. 2. Her son will not return for many years. 3. She
will hope for (ttuf) his return and will look out for him.
4. He will have become a rich man. 5. She hopes to see her
young son, who will have become an old man.
^ lieltett . . . UOtt = thought much of.
305-306] \ FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 119
LESSON 30
305 ^ie goulc itnb W Slctfetgc
©ine 3Sitit)c f^attc glDel ^odjter; bie cine toar fc^on unb
ffetfetg, aBer bie anbere tear l^dfeltd^ unb faul. Xte 90?utter
liebte hit Ijaglidje, faule ^od)tcr Diel mel)r al§ bic fd)one, flei=
feigc. ®ie erft gcnanntc^ !^od^ter tear i^r etgcne§ Uxnh, aBer
5 hit anbere tear ha^ einaige S!inb ber erften grau il)rc§ 9P^anne§.
2)arum Ijagte W bofe SSitoe ba§ arme, fd^one 30^db(^en. 8ie
^gaB tl)rer eigenen, {)af3lic()en S^odjter alle§ ©ute^ ju efjen, 311
trtnfen unb 311 tragen, aBer bem jd^dnen, fleifetgen (Stieffinb
gaB fie nid)t§ aB !)arte 5IrB€it, fd)Ied)te§ ©ffen unb alte, aBge=
10 riffene^ ^leibcr. (^inft toar bem armen ©tieffinb^ Beim ©pin-
nen^ eine ©|)ule in einen tiefen, bunflen^ ^runnen gefaHen. ®a
fagte bic Bdfc, alte ©tiefmutter: „9cun ift bie fd)6nc ©pule
I)cruntergefancn. Xa luirft hn fie ai\6) \mthn I)oIen, bu faulcsi,
bummcS, Bdsartige^ Sing!" Sa§ arme 9Jidbd)en Bangte fid) fo,
15 ho!^ e§ bor lauter'^ ©direden in ben fc^tDargen 33runnen fprang.
Sod) e§^ fici nid^t in !alte§, fdirerflid)e§ 2Saffer, niie e§ tDoIjl^
ern)artet \)aiit, fonbern auf cine fd)t3ne fonnige SSiefc, boH rci=
3enbcr 33Iumcn.i^ (Sana erftaunt ging e§ tecitcr. „2Sa§ leerbc
306 ^ bic erft genamtte = the first named.
^ tttte§ ©tttC = all good things; note the weak adj. after atteS.
^ ttbfteriffcn = shabby.
* ^ticffiniJ, dat. of interest. See App. 142.
^6cim(=bCt ticm) (©))tttttCtt = at her spinning
^bunflCtt, for tittttfelett. See App. 31, note.
^ lautcr, indeclinable adj. = sheer.
^ t% refers to bag 9Rdb^en, hence neuter. But often flc is used,
referring to sex.
9 ttJO^l = probably.
'° reii^Ctttlcr ©lumen— gen. after tiott. See App. 125,
120 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [307-308
id} jtun Qlle$ finben?" fragte fie fid). S^a fam e§ an etnen
20 grofeen ^odfofcn, t)oE l^elfseS 33rot.^^ Setnaub Ijatte i)a§> fdjijuc
33rot I)inciiiGeftc(ft, unb l^otte e§ bomt l^cracffen. ®q§ frifd)=
cjebacfcnc 33rot ricf: „5[d), 3tel)e mid) IjerouS, bii fd)one§, gutcS
2)^Qbd)en, fonft lucrbe id) cjan^ uiib gar^- tiGrbrenneu". -^q^
gate Sliiib tat €§ unb ging frofilid) iDciter. Sa !ant e§ an ctnen
25 indd)tigen St^jfelbaum. Der^^ I)ing bolt fd)oncr S^fel. ^ic^^
ricfen: „5ld), gutc§, licbcS S^inb, fd)uttlc uii§ rcifc S^jfcl oB!"
Sq§ gefallige a)tdbd)eit tat ec^ gcrii imb gtug glitdlid) ldd)elnb
tueiter. ©nbltd) tarn c$ an etn fleine§, niebrtge^ ^au§>, init
minstgen genftern, einer fd)iefen ^iire unb etnem nieber^dn^
30 genben Sod). 5Cu§ etnem ber iDinjigen genfter^^ gudte eine
fleinc, runjlige olte grau ^erauS. Sie^^ I)attc gar fcinc Sdljue,
fd)n€eiDet6e§ §oar unb eine ^riide, rt)orauf fie fid& ftii^te.
(^ortfe^ung folgt.)
307 SxRONa Verbs
to tear down abretgen rig db obgeriffen
to spin fpinnen fpann gefponncn
to bake badcu buf gebaden
Weak Verbs
to expect erluarteu to shake fc^iittelu
to burn up t)erbrenuen, l)er= to smue Icid^etn
bramtte, tierbrannt to peep guden
308 " ^fifeeH SJrot— accusative with tiott- Cf. note 10. Observe that
Hott governs both gen. and ace. The latter is more usual in colloquial
German.
^^gattj Wttil gar = altogether. Note alliteration.
*^ ter, bit. Is this relative or demonstrative? See App. 166.
** iffttjJer— partitive genitive after etnem. See App. 120a.
30»-310J FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 12J
309 EXERCISES*
1. SSie fa^en bie beiben 3:od)t€r bcr SBitire auS?
2. 3Sie befjanbeltc bk 9[^utter bie Beiben 99^Qbrf)€n?
3. SSa§ ge|rf)Ql) ber fd)oncu Zo6)t^x eine§ ^age^ beitn ©pinncn?
4. 33efd)reiBen ©ie ba§ Conb boS fk in bem 33runnen borfonb!
5. 3Sq§ iDor bie crftc (first) ^riifung, bie fie gu beftel^en l^atte?
G. SSq§ tear bie nodifte?
7. 3Bie btitte fie fid) in ben beiben ^riifungen geaeigt?
8. 33efrf)reiben Sie hc[^- §Qn§ unb beffcn QScmol^nerin !
1. The wicked widow had an only daughter, but her hus-
band had liad a daughter before. 2. She will not treat her
beautiful stepdaughter well: she will give her nothing but hard
work and poor food. 3. Once the poor child let her spool fall
into the dark cold water of the well. 4. The bad stepmother
called (nonnte) her a lazy, stupid, malicious creature. 5. The
poor girl will be so frightened, that she will leap into the
black water of the deep well. 6. But she will not have
taken the leap in vain. 7. She will find a beautiful, sunny
land, and a kind old woman who will love her.
LESSON SI
310 ^ic j^mXt unb bie ^Icigige
(3ortfe|ung)
2ie alte 5rau rief: „Swrc5^ie bid) ni^t, licbes ^inb ! 99Idbe
bei mir ! 3Betin bu aHe 5trbeit in meinem f leinen $aufe orbent--
iid) tiift, mirft h\\ Q% g^wi Ijabcn^ bei mir. Hbcr mein n^^ofeeS
*The questions on the text can now be formed by student and
instructor in analogy with tliose of the preceding lessons. The
questions in the exercises from now on will be more in the nature of
composition work (frcie 9^eprobu!tion) and will give the student more
scope for originality and independence of expression.
' ttllrfi bu eg pt ^aftrn = you shall have a good time.
122 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [811
geberbett mufet bu gut fd^iitteln; bann tDtrb e§ brunten ouf ber
5 gonaen SSelt ber Wcn\d]en fdjneien. ^cnn id) bin bie bir tDolf)I=
befannte grou ©oHe/'^ SSon ber^ Srau ©olle W^^ ha§> Wab^
d)en fd)on fel^r oft gelfiort. S)ie Seute fagten bid i3on il^r, @ute^<
unb ^ofe§.
SSeil bie 5IIte il&m fo gut gufprad^,'^ fafete fic^ ha§> 90^dbd)eu
10 ein §er3 unb tuiEigte ein, unb begab fid) in iljren 2)ienft. ©§
bcforgte oud) Qlle§ gu il&rer giinalidjen 3wfi^iebcnl)eit unb fd)iit»
telte ii)x ha^ grofee Sett tmmer fo getoaltig auf, ha^ bie bielen
gebern trie lauter (Sd)neefIoden umljerflogen. ^afiir^ l^atte
e§ and) ein gut€§ Seben bei i!)r, befam fein bbfcS SSort unb aHe
15 ^age ©efotteneS unb ©ebrateneS.^.
9^un tvav e^ eine gonse B^itlang bei ber olten gran ^olle;
ha tvath ^§> trourig in fcinem ^eraen, unb ob e§> !)ier gleid)"^ t)iel
taufenbmal beffer tvai al§> au ^aufe,^ fo l^atte e^ boc^ ein grofeeS
35erlangen bal)in. ©nblid) merfte eg, ba^ e§ ^cimtoei^ wax, unb
20 fogte 3u il)r: „S(^ 6obe b€n '^amrnex nod) §au§ gefriegt, unb
n^enn es mir aud^ I)ier nod^ fo gut gel^t,^ fo fonn id) bod) nidjt
Idnger bleiben." S)ie alte grou ^oEe fogte: „($§> gefdEt mir,^^
bafe bn tDicber nad) $Qufe berlangft, unb meil bu mir fo treu
311 ^ble bit ttI0|l6e!ttttttte Srau ^otte = Dame Holle well known to
you — an example of the use of the participle as adjective, with its
object (titr) before it. See App. 214.
^ijer. The article is used with proper nouns to express familiarity.
See App. 100, 3.
* %ni JU^Jraj^ = spoke encouragingly
^ bdfut = in return.
^ ©ejottctteg ttttti ©eBrttteneg = (meat) boiled and roasted. Note sub-
stantive use of participial adjective. See App. 217.
■^ oB filci^ = although — the separation is colloquial.
®Jtt ^ttttfe = at home. See App. 101.
® loettn fiC^t = however well off I am here. See App. 142.
^^ eg 0rf iittt mir = it pleases me, I like it.
812-313]
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT
123
gebtent fiaft, fo tiierbe t(f) btc^ felBer JDteber l^ittaufbringen/'
25 ©ie nQl)m e§ barauf bet ber rei^ten $Qnb unb fiii^rte eS bor
ein grofee^ ^or. S)q§ grofee ^or offnete fie, unb aU ha§> fleine
Tlahd)en barunter ftanb, fiel ein getraltiger (S5oIbregen, unb
QEe§ @oIb blieb an tl)m l^dngen,^^ fo ha% e§ iiber unb iiber
babon bebedt tear. „S)q^ foEfl bn Ijoben, iDeil bu fo fleifeig
30 gctDefcn bift", \pmd) hie Qlte grau ^oHe unb gob tl^m an^ bie
Derlorene ^pule toicber, bie t^m in ben ticfen 33runn€n gefaHen
mar. S^arauf fd^Iofe fie ba§> Zov, unb ba§> fleinc 3P^dbd^en
befonb fid) oben auf ber olten SSelt, nidjt todt t)on feiner
Wuttev §Qufe; unb qB e§ in ben befannten §of fam, fag ber
35 rote ^al^n ouf bem olten ^runnen unb rief: ,,^iferi!i, unfre
golbcnc Sitngfrou ift iDieber r)ic!"i2 Xa ging fie ()inein 3u
il)rer bdfen Tluttet, unb tueil fie fo mit ©olb hebedi anfam,
irar bie bofe 99httter fel)r freunblid) gegcn fie.
(<Bd)\u^ folgt.)
3 1 2 Strong Verbs
to betake oneself
ftd^ hzq^htn
htc^a^ fic^
ft^ htQthtn
to obtain
befotttmeu
befam
befommen
to boil
fieben
fott
gefotten
to roast
braten
briet
gebraten
to be
fic^ befinben
befanb fic^
fid^ befimben
to sit
fifeen
fa6
gefeffen
to arrive
aufommen
font an
Weak Verbs
angefommen
shall
foUeii
to demand DertaugeiT
to consent
) eintoiHigen
•to lead
fii^ren
to arrange Beforgeit
to cover
bebcden
to get
!riegen
313 " hlith m i^m Idngen = stuck to her.
" |le— archaic form of Ijler.
124 ELElVIENTO OF GERMAN [814-816
EXERCISES
314 1. 28q^ itJirb bQ^ a^iabc^en Bet ber alien grau tun?
2. 2ISq^ fagten bte Seute Don ber iDunberbacen olten grau?
3. Surd)tete m boS mahd)cn fe^r l3or iljr? 2Barum ntd)t?
4. ^a^ tat ba§ 9Wabrf)en bei ber alten Srau? SSle bel^anbelte
biefe ha§> gute 9}Zab^en?
5. SSie ging e^ bem fremben a^dbd^en na^ einiger S^it?
6. 2Sar bie alte S^au sorntg ober gufrleben?
7. SSaS fiir ^in ^erg f)atte ba§ Mabd^en? SBte getgt fid) bo§
filer?
8. 35Joburd) tnor bo§ $Retd) ber alten grau $oKe l^on ber SSelt
abgefdiloffen? SBirb ba^ Wdbdjen X2tiiau^gel)en, Wte e§ fieretn=
gefommen tnar?
9. SBtrb fie je^t nod^ immer „\)a^ oriuc 9}labd&cn" ^etgenV
SSarum nid^t?
315 Fill out:
?J?ein grofe geberbett iDtrft hn fd)iitteln. S)ie§ ift ha^
flein §au§ ber btr tDofilbefannt — J^xau §oKe. Sie 5llt —
fprad) bem fletn — S!??dbd)cn fefir freunblid) 3U. 2!ie Sebern bes^
grofe ^die§> trerben auf bie SSelt ber gut — 2)^enfd)en fliegen.
©in mddfttig — ^or t)erf(^Io6 ba^'> fUeid) ber gut — grau §olIe, bte
ba§ ^or fiir ba§> gefdilig — 9J^dbd)en dffnete. ©in rot — §al)n
fan auf einem tief — ^runnen unb begriifete unfere golben —
^ungfrou.
Change all the verbs in the preceding story to the future
tense. • . ,
3 1 6 Translate: 1 The obliging girl met an old woman who
was supporting herself on a crutch. 2. '*Will you come with
817-318] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 125
me and make my large beds well and shake my feathers thor-
oughly?" said the old woman. 3. The feathers in the old
woman's feather-beds are snow down in the world of men.
4. This is probably Frau HoUe, who is well known to us.
LESSON 32
317 ^ic ^ttulc unb bic Srlci^igc
(@d)tu6)
^a§ gate 90^abrf)cn cr3d()Ite olleg, tuaS il^m Begegnet mar,
unb al§ bie bo)c SDhitter ()orte, trie e§ 3U bem iDunberbarcu
9^cid)him gcfoinmcn tiinr,^ iDoIItc fie ber I)nBlicC)en imb faulen
%o6)itx- baC'jelBe grofec %\M Dcrfd)affen. ^iefe ftafelidjc unb
5 faule ^od)ter iniiBte'^ fid) mid) an ben tiefen, fd)mar3en ^runneti
feljen niib fpiinien; fie ivarf bie fleine Spnle in ben bnnflen
33rnnnen nub fprnng fclber ()inein. 3ic fam, uiie bie anbre,
Quf bie fd)one SBiefe unb ging auf bemfdlien griinen ^^^fabe
tDeiter. 51B fie gu bem fd^tDaraen 93adofen gelangle, fd)rte ha^
10 gebacfene 33rot n^ieber: ,,5rd), giel) mid) I)erau§, siel^ mid)
I)eraug, fonft toerbe id) berbrennen; \6) Vm fd)on Icingft oit^^gc*
hadm\" Die gaule aber antrtiortete: „5^) i^^i^^ «iirf) "irf)t
fd)mnt3ig mad)en!" unb ging fort. 33alb fam fie ju bem mad)=
tigen ^fpfelbanme; ber rief: „M), fd)iittle mid), fd)iittle mid);
i."^ meine rotcn ^Ipfcl finb aKe mitcinanber'* reif!" 8ie antlnortete
aber: „2)a§ \aiii mir nid)t cin!"'^ unb ging meiter. ?(B fie Uor
ber Jvfcm .<5olIe .<pQn!$ fnm, fiird)tetc fie fid) nid)t, meil fie Don
i()rem 3toc!e fd)on ge()ort I)attc, nnb Derbingte fid) if)r gleid).
318 ^ ttlie ttmr = ^^ow she had attained this wealth.
2 tier ^or^tfr — dat. of interest. See A pp. 142.
^ mufete = had to.
* atte miteinotttlfr = all together {not altogether).
^bftS •• . riu = I have no suoh intention. What does it mean
literally?
120 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [319-320
2Im erften ^age tat fie fid) grofee ©etnolt axij^ tear fleifelg
20 unh folgte ber alten 5rau ^oIIe> lD€nn fie i^r ettva§> fagte;
benn fie hadjte an ha§> biele Oolb. 5tm gmetten ^age fing fie
id)on an 3U faulensen, am britteti nod^ me^ir ; ba iDoUte fie mor-
gen§^ gar tiid)t auffte^en. ©ie tnad)te aud) ber guten grau
^olle ba§> mdd)tig grofee 33ett fd)Ie(^t unb fd)iittclte €§ ntd&t.
25 <De^ JDarb bie alte grau §oEe balb miibe unb fagte bem fau»
len, unnii^en ®ing ben Sienft auf.^ !3)ie gaw^e tear e§ tool^I
gufrieben unb ertoartete nun ben Befannten unb gett)iinfd}ten
©olbregen. ®ie alte Srau ^olle aber fiil^rte ha^ bumme SO^ab-
d)en Bi§ an ba§> grofee, fd^tDarge ^or. SIB bie So^Ie barunter
30 ftanb, fiel ein Sf^egen t)on fd^trargem ^ed^ ftatt be§> ertoarteten
@oIbe§^ auf if)r bummed §au^t unb il)ren faulen ^or^er. 2)a
fam nun bie gaule gans mit foIjIfditDarjem $ed^ iiberfd^iittct
nad) §auf€. 2)er rote §a]&n fc^rie: „^iferi!i, unfre fc^mu^ige
Sungfrau ift tx)ieber §ie!" S)a§ fdjmarse $ed^ iDirb an il^r
35 l)angen bleiben, il^r gan^eg Seben lang.^^
3 1 9 Strong Verbs
to occur einfatten fiel ein eingefaHeri
to begin aitf aitgen fing an aitgef angeu
to get up aufftel)eu ftanb auf aufgeftanben
Weak Verbs
to procure Detf d^affcu to be lazy f aulengeu
to get gelaugen to wish tuiinfc^en
to hire out tjerbiugen
320 ^tdi tttt = exerted great control over herself.
^ lttOtgen§ = in the morning — adverbial genitive.
® fagte belt ^tenfi auf = dismissed from her service.
« ®0Hie«-gen. with ftatt (= attftatt). See App. 126.
^^X^t lang = all her life long.
321-323] FUTURE AND FUXaRE PERFECT 127
32 1 EXERCISES
1. Sefd)retben ©te hie Beiben Zbd}tet bet SStoe!
2. ©radl^Ien ©ie JDa§ ben 3Jldbc^en I)eim ©pinnen Begegnete!
3. Wie unterfd^teb fid^ bog SSerJ^oIten ber Betben in bem 9let(f)
ber grau §oll€?
4. SSie ging e§ ben Beiben bort? 33eid^retBen 3ie jebe ^ritfung,
bie fie ha 3u Beftelfien Ijatten!
5. 3Sie famen bie Beiben I^eim?
6. Wlxi tveld)en SSorten Begriifete fie ber ^oiin?
7. ^efd^reiBen ©ie ben SlpfelBaum, bejt 33Q(fofen, baB $au§ ber
grau ^olle!
§ier ift ein !Ieinc§ ©ebid^t iiBer biefe grou ^oHe, ba§> in
2^cutfrf)Ianb feljr Befannt ift. Sefen (©ie e§ unb fe^en (5ie e§ in
^^rofa um, mit fo t)ielen 5Ibieftit)en luie moglidf).
322 groit ^uHc
©d^neeflocfen n)irBeIn nm nnb um;
Sm (Garten Blu^t bie SSei^nQd^t^BIum' ;
gran ^oHe fal^rt im Sorf l&erunt —
©d^nurre, D^dbd^en,^ fd^nurrel
2)er a^onb Blidft au§> hem 3BoIfengran§,
SBeift i^r hen SSeg gn jebem ^au^,
®q6 fie bie flinfften finb^t an^ —
(sd^nurre, Sldbd^en, fd^nurrel
323 ^ fldbli^en— addressed to the spinning wheel with which tradition
associates Frau HoUe.
128 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [324-325
33emerft2 fie tDO'*^ nod) einen (Serein,
grau §oIIe l^dlt^ unb fd)aut l)tnein;
S)te^ tnunter brel^'n, belol^nt fie fern —
©cf)nurre, 9^abd^en, fd)nurre!
aRartitt ®reif.
Write a prose version of the poem with verbs in the future
tense.
LESSON 33
324 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. The future tense is formed of tticrben + present infinitive.
2. The future perfect is formed of tticrben + perfect infin-
itive. Cf. App. 67, II., and 76.
3. The future and future perfect tenses are used idiomatically
to express probability. App. 179.
4. The infinitive always comes last in the sentence.
App. 92.
5. Adjectives are not inflected when they are used predi-
catively or when they follow the noun.
6. Attributive adjectives when they precede a noun are
inflected in three ways, according as they are preceded by the
definite article (or demonstrative or interrogative pronouns) ;
the indefinite article (or the possessives) ; or by no limiting
word whatever. See App. 38-41.
7. The general principle that underlies adjective declension
is : Some one word before the noun must show by its form,
the gender, number, and case. After such a word, the adjec-
tive has the weak ending (c or en). When not preceded by
such a word, the adjective has the strong ending.
325 ^23emerft fie — inverted order, because ttietttt is omitted. See
App. 188.
3 )))p = anywhere.
*pU = stops.
^i\t (=tte. Me) = those who.
326] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 129
326 REVIEW EXERCISES
/. Give future and future perfect paradigms of: \6)Xt\^tn,
gei)en, !ommen, fein, l^alten, bleiben.
//. Change to future and future perfect: %\z arme ^^rau
\)Oii tange auf i^ren @of)n getDartet, ^er junge @o^n ift alt
gett)orben» ©r ift biete Qa^re in ber grembe gebUeben. ^er alte
^ater ift au§ (5Jram geftorben. %\z SCRutter ^at bie §offmmg uic^t
tjerloren. ^ie SQlater unb ^iinftler I)abeu ein prdd)tige§ geft gefeiert.
@ie finb lange gufammen geblieben. SDann finb fie olle nad^ §aufe
gegangen.
///. Translate: 1. The old story of Dame HoUe will always
please the little children. 2. The wicked stepmother will have
died before (et)e) the good little girl returns. 3. The two
little children were spinning by the deep well. 4. They will
drop the shuttle into the black water of the dark well. 5. An
old woman will be very kind to them, and they will not be
afraid. 6. The red cock will crow: "Golden maiden! good
child!" 7. When she returns she will be covered with gold.
8. Her wicked stepmother will treat her well, because she will
be rich. 9. The ripe apples called from the tree: "We are
ripe, will you not shake us?" 10. The little girl had a good
heart.
IV. Decline in the singular and plural all the adjectives
and their nouns in II. and III.
130 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [327-329
CHAPTER VI
REFLEXIVE VERBS
LESSON SI^
327 Some verbs in German require as direct object a per-
sonal pronoun which refers back to the subject. The verb and
the pronoun together express the thought. For example :
fid) freuen = to rejoice
fic^ fd^dmeu = to be ashamed
ftc^ eriunern = to remember
fid^ Befinnen = to recollect
328 The reflexive pronouns in 1st and 2d pers. sing, and pi.
arc the same as the simple personal pronouns in the dative and
accusative; in 3rd pers. sing, and pi. the reflexive pronoun is
fi(i^, for both dative and accusative. .'^
In independent clauses this pronoun always comes immedi-
ately after the inflected part of the verb.
329 AccusATivB Dative
to rejoice to imagine
Singular
ti^ freuc mi(| i^ bitbc mlr etn
bu freuft bi(^ bu bilbeft bit eiu
cr frcut fl(^ cr bitbet fi^ ein
Plural
ftiir freuen unS ttiir bilben tttt0 ein
ii^r freut cui^ i^r bilbet vx^ ein
fie freuen fi^ fie bilben fir^ ein
@ie freuen fi(^ (Sic bilben fi^ ein
830-332]
REFLEXIVE VERBS
131
330
^u SJcrtrrtcn
10
15
Siuet ^inber gotten M int SSalbe Dertrrt. 2)a fogte ber
fleine £naBe 3U bem Jletncn $D^dbd)en: „©rinnerft bu bid) benn
gar ntd^t, tcol^er tt)tr gefommen ftnb?" ©r fd)dmte [id), ba|5
er eg nic^t iDufete unb barum fdftalt er feine arme fleine ©efo^ir^
tin. ®iefe rief qu^: „5I(^, fd)ilt mid^ nid^t, id& fiir d)te mid^ fo
fd^on^ entfe^Iid^. Safe un§ tDcnigfteng einanber troften, bann
toerben toir un§ Jjielleidit Befinnen, n)o!)er trir gefommen finb."
^Bolb famen fie an eine moofige ^iitte. ^nn freuten fie
fid^, benn fie glauBten SO^enfdften gu finben. ^od} fie l^atten
fid& geirrt. §ier n)oI)nten brei fonberBare SSefen, hie fid)
SSalbrtjeiBIein nannten. (Sie iroren flein unb flinf unb flei«
beten fid^ in griine§ Tloo^, ©rft fiird)tete fid) ha§> fleine a^iib-
d^en, bod) ber ^naBe, ber fid^ gem feine§ Tlute§>'^ riil^mte, trat
Be^ergt bor fie r)in unb Bat bie 2BaIbtt)eiBIein urn 5lu§funft.
®iefe traren gerabe Bet red)t guter Saune. ®ie Begniigten
fid& bamit, ben ^nbern gtoet 9ldtfel aufgugeBen. „2Senn iBr
biefe loft, bann iDerben mir eu6f ben red^ten SSeg meifen!" fag=
ten fie.
(iJortfe^ung fol
3t)
>
331
Strong Verbs
to scold
fd^elten
fc^att
gefc^olten
to let
taffcn
Uefe
gelaffen
to give
aufgeben
gab auf
aufgegeben
to guess
raten
riet
geraten
to direct,
show njeifeu
tDie§
getuiefen
332 ^ fo f^Ott = without that.
2 feittCg attttte^ — gen. with ^ij^ rit^mett. See App. 124.
' CUd^ — dat. of indirect ob j.
132 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [333-334
Weak Verbs
to know (intellec-
toiffen, tDugte, ge==
to comfort
\xd) troften
tually)
tpitgt*
to lose one's way
fic^ tjerirren, t)erirrte
to be mistaken \x^ irrett
fid^, ftc^ t)erirrt
to be called
fic^ nenneu
to remember
\xd) erinnern
to dress
fid) fleiben
to be ashamed
\xd) fc^amen
to boast of
fid^ riiiimen
to fear
fic^ fiird^ten
to be content-
ed with
ftc^ begnugen
to solve
lofen
EXERCISES
333 1. SSqs r^aben hie flettten Slinber getart?
2. SSie bel^onbelte ber fleine ^nobe ha§> 90^db(i)en?
3. Hm tDa§> bittet boS fletne 3ll?Qbd)en ben ^mhen? 2Sa§ toufelen
bie Qtmen ^inber md)t?
4. 2Sa§ tun bonn bie Mnber?
5. ©efd^rciben (Bie hie SSalbtceiblein unb il)r §au§!
6. 2Bq§ n^ar ber Unlerfd^ieb iti bem SSerl^oIten beg Sluoben unb
bem be§ 2)^abd&en§?
7. aSerben bie SBoIbtceiblein ben ^inbern l^elfen?
334 Translate: 1. I have lost my way in the deep dark
forest, and I shall ask the woodsprites to show it to me. 2. He
scolded the little girl. 3. They will comfort each other [fid^]
4. Guess these two riddles for me, and I shall show you
the way. 5. Do you not remember [fid^ befinnen] whence
we came? 6. I have forgotten it. 7. He was afraid, but he
liked to boast of his courage, so he stepped forward boldly.
8. I am afraid. You are afraid. He is afraid. They
will rejoice. 9. The little boy will say to the little girl, '*Do
you not remember the way we came?" 10. They had lost their
way and they were frightened.
* Compare fentten=to know, in the sense of "to be acquainted with."
335-330]
REFLEXIVE VERB^
LESSON 85
; 133
CARDINALS AND ORDINALS
335
Cardinal Numbers
1, ein^
11, elf
21, ein unb atDon^ig
2, 3tDet
12, ^xom
22, smei unb atDan^ig
3, bret
13, breiae^n
30, breifeig
4, bier
14, bierge!)!!
40, bteraig
5, fiinf
15, funf3€l)n
50, fiinfaig
6, fed)§
16, fed^sel&n
60, fed^aig
* 7, fieben
17, ficBgeSn
70, fiebaig
8, Qd^t
18, od^tselfin
80, atfitaig
9, Tteun
19, neunaefin
90, ncunaig
10, ael^n
20, ait^ansig
100, fiunbert
1,000
taufenb 1,000,000 cine SDiillion
1899, ein toufenb adjt Ifiunbert neun imb
ncunaig obcr Q(^t3cr)n
]&unbert nciin imb neunjig.
S(^ adl^Ie: ein§, atuei, brei u. f. to.
336 Sq§ ift ein 2^ann
eine grau
tm ^inb
2)a§ [inb atoei SD^dnner
atcei grouen
atuei ^inber
Observe that cittS when used with a noun drops the g
and is inflected like the indefinite article. The other cardinals
have no inflection.
134
337
EL
EMENTS
OF GERMAN r337-339
Ordinals
tin^
ber, bie,
ba§ crjlc
brci
fi
II Sh'eitc
„ tirittc
t)ier
n
fi
„ tiiertc
fiinf
neun§e^n
gtDanjtg
fuufunb^tuan^tg
i)unbert
ft
n
n
n
'1
n
1
1
1
. fiinftc
„ sttjauatgflc
„ fuufuubatDaitjigjlc
„ ^imbertftc
338 Observe: 1. That bet Ctfic and bcr brtttc are irregular.
2. That all other ordinals are formed regularly by the addi-
tion of a suffix.
3. That from 1-10, inclusive, this suffix is t, from 20 on the
suffix is ft. The ordinals are regularly declined (cf. App. 48.)
An old form of jtucit was attbcr (other) which is still
found in set phrases as anberti)alb = one and one-half, i. e., the
second less one-half, ber anbere, the other, the second.
339 giiWcn Sie t)on fed)3e^n bi§ jtnanstg! 3Sa§ ift mel)r,
[ieben ober fieB3eI)n? 2St€ t)iel mel^ir ift e^? SSq^ ift iDeniger, a^i
ober Qd)t3tg? SSie biel meniger?
3toct, bier, fcd}^ flub gcrabc S^Wcn; einS, brct, [icbcn finb
ungcrabe 3cil)Icn. 3BqS fiir S'^Bto finb bie folgenbcn: 1, 9, 11,
156, 58, 75, 89, 124?
3Sier unb slnel ift fed^S, stnel tjon ferf)§ ift t)ter. 2Bq§ ift 7 t)on
27? 8 bon 100? 10 t)on 100? 1 t)on 100? 2 t)on 80?
3X4=12, brei mal dier ift 3Ji3oIf, fed^§ mal fieben ift stnei unb
t)icr3ig. 2Bte btel ift 8X9? 10X12? ©ogeni Sie W^ ^xxmal-
cins^ t)on 5 t)er! bon 7! i^on 9!
2)rei in fed)^ ift stoei. '^vod in t)ier3el)n ift ficben. ©ieben in
t)ier3e]^n ift ^Xozx. D^eun in brei unb fed)3ig ift ficben. 3Sie t)iel
ift 8 in 48? 9 in 36? 4 in 84? ^
^ ^ftfttflen = recite.
^btt§ ^inmalctn8 = multiph'catiou table.
340-341] REFLEXIVE VERBS 135
340 2)ie a^erirrlctt
(fjortfelung)
®Q§ erfte ^lotfel loutete: 2Bie biele ©ternlem ftel^en am
§immel§3elt? 2)te Somber sogen ftc^ ein toenig guriiii urn
fid^ 3U Befinnen. ^otte nid^t ber fiefirer in ber ©d^ule babon
gefprod^en? ©ic erinnerten fid^ bunM,i bafe er etmoS gefagt
5 I)Qtte, oBer ber fleine ^itobc I^attc fic^ 5u ber 3^it gerabe mlt
ciiicr fummcnbcn SItcgc amiifiert, uub ba^^ flciitc Sll^abdOcn Wat
ciit menig ciugefdjlafcn.
2)a befam ber SInabe plo^Iid) emeu guten ©tnfaH, ben crftcn
an biefem ungIMIid)cn ^agc: ,Miv luoHcn luartcn, hh5 bie
10 Sterne l^erouBfommen, bann toerben toir fie 3dI)Icn!" „^a, ha^
iDerben n)ir inn, ctber id] fann nur bi§ I)iinbert 3dl)len!" ,/3d)a=
bet- nid^t^! ^d) fann bi§ toufenb 3dl3len unb noc^ taujcnb
fommt gleid^ im 33ud)e eine SO^iHion; iia§> ift fel^r, fefir t)icl.
3Ber^ eine SO^iHion l&at, l^eifet a^iHiondr, ber ift bid nnb fd^rt
I'V bierfpdnnig. 33effere^ gibt e^'' gar nid^t in ber SSelt." Sa§
a)Jdbd)en iDnnbcrte fid) iiber biefe 2Sei^^I)eit iljresi gnten SlamC'
raben unb fagte nid)t^ meljr.
Syiun fe^tcn fie fid) unter bie alte ©id)e unb n^artetcn anf
bie ©terne. ^od) bk famen nod) langc nid&t. 2)a finb fie ein=
20 gefd^Iafen, erft ba§> 9Wdbd)en, bann ber ^nabe. Sie I)atten aUe
beibe einen n)unberlid^en ^raum.
(f^ortfe^ung folgt)
341 iilttttm= faintly.
^ fii^attet = bttS f^abet — colloquial omission of neuter subject.
3 mer = he who. See App. 169a.
*8tftt c8 = there is. @8 glftt (sing, and plur.) takes the accusative
and denotes the existence of an object, or objects in general, as:
®# 9IM titele ^dume. @^ ifi and its plural eS flnb denote the existence
of an object or objects within certain local or temporal limits, as:
^^ flnti tJrei Siittme in biejcm ©ttrtrn.
136
342
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
Strong Verbs
[34'i-345
towithdraw ftc^ gurucf^te^en ^og fid^ ^uxM \\d) gururfgejogeu
to receive befommeit befam be!ommeu
to solve lofen
to sound, be laittCU
Weak Verbs
to buzz fummeu
to amuse oneself fic^ amiiftereu
343
EXERCISES
1. SBag tvax fein erfter (^infatt?
2. SSie hjeit fonnte ta^ SOldbc^en nur gdl^Ien?
3. fS^a§> ift bie nci^fte 3aI)I tm S3u^e na(^ 100?
4. 2Ble befc^reibt ber ^nabe ben TtiUiomic?
344 Translate: 1. The first riddle was very difficult. 2. The
second thing that the children did was to go to sleep. 3. A
millionaire has a great carriage (ber SBagen) and drives a four-
horse team. 4. The children will withdraw and the first child
will receive an inspiration. 5. The girl will go to sleep.
LESSON 36
FRACTIONALS
345 J = \i(i% ^rittet
i = "^a^ ^iertel
^ = ein giinftet
\ = ein 8erf)ftel
Note that the suffix fcl forms fractionals. SDrittel, ^iertet,
giinftel, (Sec^ftel, etc. , are neuter nouns.
An exception to this is: bie §alfte (the half). Tlie adjective
form of this noun is ^olb, which has the regular adjective
declension.
346-349] REFLEXIVE VERBS 137
345 half an apple
the half of an apple
ein ^alber 5l|)fel
bie §atfte eine^ 5IpfeI§
eineg ^alhtn ^\)^tU
ber „
einent ^alben 3(pfel
ber „
einen ^alben 5l|)fel
bie „
^alU tpfet
bie |)d(ften eine§ 5(pfet
^Iber S^fel
*^er „ „ „
^arben Spfein
ben
^albe ^pfel
'^i^
347 5d) ^dbe feinen gonaen 5IpfeI, id) I)Qbe nur ein ^rittel.
SSie t3iele SSiertel modjen ein ©angeg? SSenn man ein SSiertel
nimmt, tuie biele bleiben? 2)rei 35iertel bleiben. §Qft bu einen
gonaen 5l^fel? D^ein, id) l^abe nur einen ]f)alben. SSo ift bie
onbere $dlfte? SP^eine ©d^iDefter I)Qt bie anbere $dlfte, id^ l^obe
fie i!)r gegeben.
348 ^ic 95crtrrtctt
(Sortfefeung)
Sm ^roum erfd)ien if)nen^ il)r alter Sel^rcr. 5tber er ^atte
fid) tierdnbert. (Jr \vav ^treimal fo bid aU gen)dl)nlid) unb
an\iati eine§ §ute§2 trug er eine grofee ^^ed^enmafd^ine auf
bem ^op\e. ^-arauf ftanben aU hie QaW^t aE bie 33riid)e, unb
5 ha^^ ganae (^inmalein§. ^er Sefirer ful^r t)ierf|:)dnnig, tvie ein
3WiUiondr, aber anftatt ^ferbe r)atte er ^tvei ^ometen mit
fcurigen ©ditDdnjen, unb fein SSagen Wax ber grofee Sdr.
%n^ feine Meibung tvax fcl)r fonberbar. ^g^nv §dlfte''^ flei=
349 ^ X^nttl. In the inverted order the subject immediately follows
tlie verb, but an unemphatic pronoun or adverb may intervene, ^C^t
frctttc flri^ bag flctnc 2RttlJ(^ctt.
^ eittC§ ^Uteg, gen. with ttttftatt. See App. 126.
^gur ^alftC = one half.
138 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [860
bete er fid) in &olb ,unb 3iir anbcrcn ^dlfte in 8ilbcr. SobeH
10 tvai fein I^alber Uop\ mtt ©ternen befat. Xie ^inber tnunbcr-
ten fid) fel)r iiber ir)n. 2)od^ frcuten fie fid), aB er freunblid)
Uid^elte unb gong lieb^ mit il)nen fl^rad). „92un, fbnnt il)r ntd)t
rcd)nen?" fragtc er, ^ilir l)aU bod) fo tiid)tigen XInterridjt
ger)Qbt, befinnt end) bod)!"
15 9?un gob er i[)nen ©j:empel auf, nnb fie red)neten fie olle
au§. „SSie titel ift brei fiebjeftntel oon neun I)iinbert unb neun-
unbncunsig? SSenn ein ^onig brei 9J?itIionen ©olboten l)at
unb er berliert erft hk ^alfte, bann ein Drittel unb anient nod^
ad)t l^unbert ac^tunbad)t3ig, mic tiiele bleiben iibrig?" Sie
20 .<ilinber tDunberten fid^ felbft iiber bie 3d)ncEigfeit, mit bcr
fie ha^^ olle^ au5red)neten.
S)a Iad)elte ber Sel)rer, noftm fid)^' bie golbcne^ 33riIIe ah,
3og fid^^ bie filbernen 8d)ul)e qu§ unb I)oIte barau^> ein mcid)tig
grofeeS ©titdf ^$a):)ter. ^arouf ftonben un3dl)lige ^$un!tc.
35 ^iefe bilbet^n lange S'^ei^en. Sie erfte 'tRei^e tvav noc^ gan3
beutlid), bie jtneite fonnte man faum lefen, aber bet ben anberen
t)erging einem §bren unb ©el^en.^ „©o", fogte ber Se^rer,
„ba il^x eud) nun fo fc^bn auf ha§> ^o^fred)nen berftel^t, fo n)iK
xd& eud) ]&elfen. ^eht bte§ ben 2SQlbn)eibIein, fogt il^nen, ,,fo
30 t)tel€ $un!te auf bent Ropier ftel&en, fo t)iele ©terne gibt e§ tm
^itnniel."
(@d)tufe tolgt)
350 * bttbei = in addition.
5 (if J = lovingly, kindly.
^^^ bie . . . S3rtne= his glasses, dat. of possession. See App. 144.
^ golbcn — note suffix ett to form adjectives from nouns of material.
Cf. jllftcm. In analogy with fllbcrtt are formed l^oljent (wooden) and
fltttfettt (glass.)
^Uetglng . . . Sc^eit = one grew dizzy (literally, all sense of hear-
ing and of sight passed away.) \
351-363] REFLEXIVE VERBS 139
35 I Strong Verbs
to appear erfc^eineit erfc^ien erfc^ienen
to draw off an^k\)tn 5og an^ au^gejogeit
to understand fic^ Uerfte!f)eit ijcrftaub fid) fic^ tjerftanben
Weak Verbs
to change fic^ t)erdnbern to smiie lad^etn
to sow bef den* - to be abie !omten, !ouute, ge!oitnt
to be astonished ftd^ ttJUUberU to count red^ueu
to rejoice ftc^ f reueu to form bilbeu
EXERCISES
352 1. Sefd^reiben ©ie ben 2cl)rer!
2. SKarum erfd^ien er ben ^inbern aU SO^tGiondr?
3. 33efd)reiben Sie feine ^^3ferbe unb fctncn.2Saaen!
4. 2Sq^ Ijat er bie ^inber gefragt?
5. 2Bq§ fiir ©rcmpcl I)Qt er ir)neu aufgegeben?
G. 3Bic red)neten bie ^liuber?
7. SSoriiber !)oBen fie fid) getounbertV
8. 2Sie §Qt er fie belofint?
9. Sefd)retben Sie bog ^^3Q^:)ter, bag er f)erau§5og!
10. SSa§ tDor bie erfte 3lnttDort?
11. 28ie mar feine 33riEe? 2Sa§ fiir ©c^u^e l)aite er? Sft etn
SO^effer golben ober filbern? 2Sa§ ift ^olsern? SBog ift
tDoKen? 33ilben Sic Slbjeftitie aii§>: <Seihe, "^apkv, ^ols,
@oIb, ©ilber, ©la^.
353 Translate: 1. He wore his silver spectacles and golden
shoes. 2. The children will be surprised at (iiber) his
appearance. 3. He took off his glass shoes and his golden
spectacles. 4. There are as many stars are in the sky as there
* ]^c|at = studded.
140 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [354-355
are silver dots on this half of the paper. 5. Do the diligent
little children know the multiplication table? 6. Which half of
his hat was silver and which half was golden? 7. The old
teacher of the lost children had changed very (much). 8. He
smiles kindly, and gives them examples. 9. He came in a
wagon, which was. the Great Bear. 10. He was driving four
horses. He had driven a long way.
LESSON 87
354 ^ie aScrirrtctt
(SrfiruB)
®le SSalblDeiblein tDoren fcl)r erftaunt bariiber. ®a rief
ha% etne^: „& fdKt mtr ein,^ ha"^ \mx nod) etn 9^atfcl 511
fteHen iiaBen. %l\o^ ha% a^i^eite ^ai\tl ift foIgenbeS: ,,38ic
lange bauert e§, urn bte gange 3SeIt gu retten?" 2)iefe atoeite
5 grage f(^ien ebenfo fdjtDer tuie bie erfte, ho6) bad)ten fie: ,,©5
QxW iDolf)! nod) einen 5tu§rt)eg/' @ie sogen fid) iDieber nad)
bem SSoIbe guriic!, legten fid) nteber unb ftrengten fic^ an, um
red)t gut nad^gubenfen. 2)oc5 e§ fiel il^nen nic^t^ eln.
S)a fielen il^nen enbltc^ bie Suglein 3u. Stud) bie^mal trcium-
10 ten fie ettnaS jel^r ©onberbare^.^ 2)od^ tear e§ nic^t ber (Sd)ul=
Ie!)rer, fonbern €tne f)errlid^e grou mit einer golbenen ^rone,
'tAz gu tl^nen font. 2;a§ toor grou ©onne. ^\^ erfonnten fie
355 ^ iiaS eine = one. Note weak inflection of cin after def. art.
See App. 43, 44.
^ti fiillt wit Cttt — note impersonal verb with dative. See App.
249.
3 jlljo = well then.
* eS 9iBt tUOl^l = there is surely.
^SOttbcrbarcS — note strong declension after the indeclinable pro-
noun etttiaS, with which it is in apposition. See App. 43, 4.
356-357] REFLEXIVE VERBS 141
fogleic^, benn fo eine gtBt e§ nur etnmal in ber SBelt. ®ie
fagte: „©§ tut mir mrfltd) f€l)r lelb^ urn eu(f), tl^r £inbcr.
15 S)oc^ t(f) tviU end) I^elfen. SSifet il^r, mie t)iele ©tunben e^>
bauert U§> tc^ einmol um bte SSelt reife?" „5o!" fdjrieen Beibe
^inber laut. „®a§ l^at un§ bcr 2e!)rer er3Ql)It. 5IHe i^ierunb-
glranatg ©tunben fal^ren ®ie einmal mit xr)ren fd^onen ^ferben
um hie 2SeIt, ad^, nel^men 8ie un§> hod) etnmal mit!" ^a
20 Iod)te bte ©onne unb fang il)nen ha§> folgenbe Sieb t)or:
356 ^te ffctncn Stcrnlctti
Unb bte ©onnc, fie mac^te ben tceiten 9titt
nmbieSSelt; \
Unb bie (Sternlcin fprod^en: „SSir rci(cn mit
Um bie SSelt!''
25 Unb bie ©onne, [te fd)Qlt fie: ,,56^ IJl^cibct 3U $au§,
S}enn id) Brenn' eud^" bie golbenen ^nglcin au§,
33ei bem feurigen Witt um bie SBelt."
Unb hk ©ternlein gingen 3um lieBen SO^onb
Sn ber D^Jadit;
30 Unb fie fprad^en: „^u, ber auf SSoIfen t^ront
Sn ber Tiad)t;
Safe un§ tDonbeln mit bir, benn bein milber ©d^ein,
©r Brennt un§ nimmer^ bie ^ugelein!"
Unb er nal^m fie, (SefeEcn ber 9iad)t.
357 ^ eg iUi mtr lelb = I am sorry. See App. 249.
' CU(^ — possessive dative, See App, 144,
^ nimmer — poetic form of nle or ntemolg.
142 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [858-860
35 dlun miKfommen ©ternlcin unb cjuter 90^onb,
Sn ber 9^ad)t!
Sl&r berfte!)t, tDa§^ ftiE in ben ^eraen tDol^nt
Sn ber ^adjt
^ommt unb giinbet bte I)tmnilifd}en 2td)ter on,
« S)q6 id& lufttg mitfd^iDdrmeni^ unb fpielen !ann
Sn ben freunblid^en (Si^ielcn ber 3}a6:)t.
©oriiBer finb^^ bie ^inber erttjad^t. ©ie liefen gu \>zn 2Bolb=
hjeibtein unb riefen au§: ^SSer^^ ^^|t ber (Sonne fdf)rt, totrb in
24 ©tunben unt bie SBelt reiten!" (Sic ^atttn e§ rid^tig geralen
45 unb bie SSalbmeiblein jeigten i^nen nun ben 2Beg na6) §aufe.
358 Strong VERBi
to seem fc^eiueu fd)ien gefc^ienen
to withdraw \\d) juriicfjiefien ^og fid^ ^uvM fid) guriidge^ogen
to close gufaUen fiet gu gugefatten
Weak Verbs •
to make an effort fid^ auftrengcu ftreugte fid^ an fid^ angeftrengt
to recognize erfeuueu erfannte erfannt
to meditate nad^bcufeu to kindle anjiiuben
359 EXERCISES
1. Semen ^le ha§> ©ebid^t Qu^^rDcnbig!
2. 33efd)reiben ®ie bie (Sonne, tvk fie ben ^inbern erfd)icnen ift!
360 'ttitt§ = liag, ttag.
^° tnttfli||tt)atttten = to wander along. This word offers great difficult y
in translation ; it means, to dream day dreams or to indulge in fan-
tastic musings.
" flttil erttiaii^t — note the transition of condition implied, ^dii^cn
(to be awake) would take l^aBett, since no transition is implied. Cf.
fdllafett and elttf(^lttfett. See App. 70.
^2 ttjcr = tier, ber. See App. 169.
361-302] REFLEXIVE VERBS 143
3. 3Sie fatten hie ^inber tierjudjt, fid) 3u Befinnen?
4. 3Sie wax hex atueite Zxaum derfi^ieben t)on bem erften?
5. 3Sic t)iele Stitnbcn baucrt c§, bi§ bie Sonne urn bte SSelt
reift?
7. SStc t)iel€ SOttmiten finb in etner ©tunbe? tvk btele ©efunben?
8. llm tDtet)ieI ll^r ge^t bie Sonne je^t auf? Ungef^ifir urn jed&§
Itl^r. Hm n)ie oiel Uf)r gel)! fie im Sommer auf? Ungefdl)r
um bier U^v. Itm tDie t)iel U^x gel^t bie Sd()ule an? Itm ^alb
neun^ Ul^r gel^t fie an, unb nm ein W^x ge()t fie au§>. 5(Ber
mir finb immer fd)on ein 3SierteI auf ncun IHir I)ier, unb fom=
men erft um brei ^Biertel auf smei lU)r fort. Hm wk tiicl lU^r
gel^t bie ^ird^e an? ba§ ^r)eater? llm n)ie tiiel ltl)r gefien
fie au§? 3Sann finb Sie gen^ol^nli^ ha? 3Bann fommen Sie
nad^ $aufe?
361 Translate: 1. The beautiful lady with the golden
crown will appear to the little children in their sleep. 2. At
five o'clock they will have come home. 3. Their mother said:
*'When did the sun rise?" 4. They answered: "It rose about
[at] 6.30 and will probably set at 5.15. 5. Usually they
come home about [at] six o'clock. 6. I am sorry for you.
7. The children had fallen asleep and were dreaming of a
beautiful lady. 8. The little stars had gone around the world
with the gentle moon. 9. At eight o'clock little children go
to bed, but the old people go to sleep at half past ten. 10. The
little children said: "Please take us along!" 11. The sun
laughed and sang them a song.
362 ^ Be careful to note the difference between the English and Ger-
man methods of reckoning time. Thus: 10.30 = ^atb elf; 10.15 = etH
mcxtti auf elf; 10.45 = lurcl SBiertel auf elf.
144 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [363-365
LESSON 38
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
363 SE)er Wiawn \\i giemlirf) flein, W %xm tft fleiner, 'tia^ ^inb ift
am fkinflen. 5ft ^o§ ^iid^Iein fleiner ober grower aB bte ^enne?
28a§ tft am fleinften, ber ®al}n, bte §ettne ober ba§ ^iid^lein?
S}q^> ^iid^kitt ift am fleinften, ber ^al^rt tft am grofetett. SSa§
tft am btdfften, ha% Brautte, ha^ rote, ober ha^ iDeiBc ^ud)? 3SeI»
(f)e^ tft btdfer, bo§ beutfd^e ober 't^a^^ etigltfdie 33iid}?
®a§ groge S3uc^ tft beittf(^.
^a§ gro^erc 93ud^ ift englifd).
^a§ grb^te S3uc§ ift tateimfc^.
Predicate gro§ grower am grogten
Attributive i ^.^ 9ro|e bie grogm ba? grogtc
( etn groger etne grogere (metn) gro§te»
364 The comparative and superlative frequently have umlaut.
Note that the comparative and superlative are inflected like
the positive. But naturally the superlative can not be inflected
with the indefinite article.
365
Regular Comparison
With Umlaut
lang
furs
Icing er
fiirser
alter
Idngjl, am langjiett
fiirgeft, am fiiraefien
ortefl, am orteften
Without
Umlaut
flar
laut
bic!
flein
flarer
tauter
bider
fleiner
!(arfit, am !larflen
lauteft, am tautcflen
bidfl, am btdften
fleinft, am fleinfien
366-369] REFLEXIVE VERBS 145
366 Slightly Ikregular
gro§ grower grofet, am grogtcn
^oc^ ^o^cr ^oc^ft, ant fioc^ftcn
ita^ itd^cr ndd^ft, am ndc^ftcn
367 Irregular and Defective Comparison
gut beffev beft, am beftcn
t)iel me^r meift, am meiften
— — erft, am erften *
— — le^t, am le^tcn *
368 :^cutfd)e)g 3cf)nhucfcn
^Q§ UnterridjtC'tDefcn in 2)eutfc^lQnb oe()ort 311^ ben in=
tercffonteften ©rfdicinungen bee Sanbcc^. Tic nicifton ©lurid)-
tuncicn mei(en aitf alte I^iftortfdic 23rand)e iinb ^rabitioncn-
3uriirf, befonbcr^ an ben llnioerfitaten, and) §od)]d)nfcn'^ gc=
5 nannt, beren ciltefte, bie .*peibelbergcr^ Uniberfitat, ]d)on feit
bem ^softre 1386 ej:iftiert.
* From these superlatives, comparatives, tier erftetf, the former,
and ber le^tete, the latter, have been formed on the analogy of the
regular comparative.
369 ^ fiCprt gtt = belongs to, i.e., is a part of. @e^drett + dat. (with-
out preposition) = belongs to, in the sense of is property of , e.g.,
2)ttg Sur^ geprt mir.
- 2^railiti0tt'— a feminine noun of Latin origin. Note that the class
of nouns ending in ttOtt (pronounce ^iott) are all feminine and all
accented on last syllable, bie gcftiOtt', bic ®tttttOtt', bic 9lttttOtt'.
^ ^Od^jli^Ule — note difference in application from our ' 'high school. "
^OJ^f^utc is used to designate any institution above our high or pre-
paratory schools.
* ^CtbcIJerfiet — note suffix cr to form adjectives (always unin-
fiected) from names of cities, e.g. Jlety ^^xUx, G^liCttgoer, SoftOtter, etc.
146 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [370
®ie niebrigfte ©tufe he§> nnternc^t§tt)€jen^ ift bie ^Iem=
fhtberfd^ule, tno fid) bie giingften, im HIter t»on brei U§> fed)§
Salfl^en, burd)^ ©piel gur Orbnung getDo^nen.
10 :rte rtdd^fte ^Stufe Bilbet bie 33oIfc^fc^uIe, rt^o bie ettt)a§
altercn ^inber ben (JIementariinterrid)t auf ftantlid)e Soften
genieBen. ^ier lernen .^naben imb 90^abd)en geteilt bie ®Ie=
mentQr=5dd)er, Senlfd), Sf^eligion, 9fied)Tien, (55efd)i(^tc, Oco=
graphic, D^aturlef^re, 3SoIf§tDirtf(^aft, ©ingen, g^i^nen, 3:iir=
15 nen imb ^aiiborbeit. (2e^tere§ lernen nur bie 9P^dbd)cn.)
Ser llnterrid}t bauert mcift bon 8 ]6i§ 12 nnb t)on 2 Bt§ 4,
mit 5trei ^olbfeiertagcn, 9KitttDod)f> nnb 3amftag§. ^n bie
3SoIf§fd)nIcn gel)en meiften§ bie ^inber, bercn ©c^ulbefud) mit
bem bierse^nten '^aljice fc^Iiefet. 3Ser eine meitere 33ilbung fitr
20 jeine ^inber tDiK, fd^idt fie tiom nenntcn Softie an auf ha§>
(St)mnafinm. ^ier finbet l^auptfad^Iid) bie 35orI)ereitnng sum
Gintritt in hie llniberfitdt ober hie ted^nifdjen ^od^fd^ulen \iatt.
griil^er^ lag an alien ©Qmnafien^ ber §anptfd)tr)er^un!t auf
ben flaffifdjen ®prad)en, je^t legt man in ben fogenannten
25 9^ealgt)mnafien unb 91eformgt}mnafien tueniger @€n)id)t auf bie
atten 3prad)en unb mef)r auf bie neucren^ unb auf bie 9?atur=
triffenfc^aften.
((Scfihife folgt)
370 ^iltttd^ — preposition of means; cf. tlOll — preposition denoting
agency.
^ ^rul^cr — adverb, literally, earlier, translate formerly. Note that
adverbs in German are often simply uninflected adjectives.
' ©^mttttflen— pi. of ©^mnafittm— belongs to mixed decl. Observe
the Latin ending ittni changed to ten in plural. Cf. 218.
^ iJte ncueren ^^irar^cn = modem languages.
371-874]
REFLEXIVE VERBS
371
Strong Verbs
to direct,
point
toeifen
lt)ie§
getoiefeu
to enjoy-
geuiefeen
geno^
genoffeit
to sing
fingeii
fang
gefungen
to close
fc^Uegeii
fd)lofe
geid)tof)eu
Weak Verbs
to belong
ge^i
mn
to draw
'^dd)\m\
to exist
eiiftiereii
to take gymnastics tUl'lteit
to accustom geft)d()nen
to send
fc^icfen
to share
teilen
147
EXERCISES
372 328 ogu ge{)ort ta^ Unterrid)t§tDejen 5J)eutf^lanb§? (SJe^oxeu
hk 33oIf5i(^uIen 3u ben §0(^id)ulen ober ju ben ©Icmentarfc^ulcn?
SSarum? SSem ge[)oren bk Sd)ulbud}€r? SSa^ gel^ort ben 3d}u=
lern? 3Bac> ift ber Unterid)ieb aroifc^cn einer I)iefigen^ §od)fd)uIc
nnb einer beutfc^en? SSorouf tDeifen I)euttgc @el)rdud)e on hen
Uniberfitaten oft jnriid?
9^ennen Sie bie oltefte UniDerfitdt Seutfd^Ianb^ ! ©ett toann
Beftel^t biefelbc? 2Sa5 mad)t ba^> beuti'die UnterriditStcefen pdjft
intereffont? 5iennen Sie bie t)erfd]iebenen 8tufen ber ©c^ulcn
unb erflaren 3ie beren 9iu^en! 3So()in gcr)en bie jiingften, tooliin
bie diteren ^inbcr? SBoburdj unterjd)eibet \\ii) ber je^ige llnter=
rid)t in ben ©Qmnofien Don bem frii^eren?
373 Translate: 1. The students in a German school study-
very diligently. 2. A very interesting phenomenon in German
life is the good system of instruction. 3. Of all the schools
the gymnasium makes the greatest demand on the students.
374 '^teflfi=in this country; derived from adverb ^ier; so also
borttfi (from iJort), iC^ifl (from jc^t), ^CUttfi (from |cute).
148 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [375-37(i
4. From the lowest to the highest grade of German schools,
the children study the most difficult subjects (gdc^er). 5. Usu-
ally the instruction lasts from early morning to (M§) late in the
afternoon. 6. The hardest work is in the gymnasium. 7. The
technical schools and the universities are the most advanced
schools. 8. More emphasis is placed on the modern languages
than on the ancient. 9. But formerly the greater emphasis was
placed on the ancient languages and less on the natural sciences.
LESSON 39
375 2)cutf$c8 S^ttltncfcn
S)ie (Sc^iiler befiidjcn bie ©Qmnaiien im ^urd^fdjnitt Dom
neunten big gum neun^cljnten ^a^tz. ^n ben I^o^cren ^laffen
I)Qt ber 3d)iiler meiften§ bretfeig Itnterrid^tSftunb^n btc SSoc^e,
Qlfo fiinf Stuiibcu tdglid). 9JZQn ftcljt, bofe cr fidj aufg I)6d)yte^
B onftrengen muB.
2^er 3taat mad)t tiuBerft^ ftrcngc 5lnforbcrungen an xi)\\,
^ unb ha^ ©jamen, momtt ber ^wrfug fc^IieBt, tft pd^ft^ fd)tt)ic=
rig. 3SieIe 8tiibenteu, bte todfirenb ber ®d)ul5eit Quf§ an=
geftrengtefte^ ftubiert I)a]6en, fonnen bie ^ritfung fiir boS
10 fogenannte S^eifeseugnt^ nid^t Befteften unb fallen olfo burd).
S)Q§ tft ()od)ft Befdjdmcnb fiir fie unb tl^re 5(ngeprigen.
SSenn ober bos ©i-amen gliidltd) boriiber ift, bonn gel^t'^"^
luftig auf bie llntDerfitat. gier ftubieren fie 5uerft aufeerft^
376 ^ ttttf§ pri^fte = to the highest degree. \I This is called the
absolute superlative, since it does not suggesr comparison as does
the relative superlative am p^ftett. The phrase is adverbial. The
adjective (attributive) equivalent is seen in iiufeerft jirettfie ^ttforbentttgetl
(most severe demands), w^here the absolute degree is shown by the
superlative adverb au^etfi (sometimes P^fif). See App. 56,
^batttt geP'g luftifl = then they start merrily.
377] REFLEXIVE VERBS 149
incnig, bcnn e§ Ijeibtp fid) tnocjiid)]! jd}neE unb Grihtblid) in ba§
15 neue Seben einfiuben. SDer juuge ©intrctenbc I^etfet „3ud)s",
tuenn er fid^ einem dltercn v^tubenten anfdjltefet, I^elfet er ,,2eib»
fuc^s^". 9??ogIi(^ft^ fdjneH tritt er etner „SSerbinbung" Ul
^un lentt er „paiifen", ba§ l)et6t, fid) mit bem 3al3el fdjlagen,
tragi etne Bunte ^appe unb Befudit bie ,Mi^eipen". 5IEe ntd)t=
20 ftubierenben 33iirg€r ^leifeen ^'ip^iltfter", unb fiir biefe ^at ber
„^u6)^" dufeerft trenig 5ld)tung.
Sm britten ©emeftcr ge()t mctft ba^ ©tubteren (in ber
3tubentenf^rad)e ,,od)fen" ober „biiffeln'0 Io§. 9^un bereitet
cr fid) 3ur Softor^riifung t5or, unb ha gilt^ e§ oufS tiid)tigfte
25 ftubieren. "Bod) hei)alt cr immer nod) 3eit, fid) ju amii=
ficren im SBerein mit feinen ©enoffen, fo bofs fiir jeben
Xeutfd^en^ bie llniberfitats^eit 3ur gludlid)ften 3eit feine§ Se=
bcuij gel)6rt. SSenn er fifteiben mufe, fo fingt cr traurig:
£) alte !Surfd)enr)errIid)feit! '
30 SBo^in bift hu cntfd)h)unben?
9Zie fef)rft bu n)ieber, golbne Qeit,
3o frol^ unb ungebunben!
3Sergcben§ fpcil^e id) um!)er,
3d) finbe beine ©pur nid)t mel)r.
ierum, ierum, ierum, o quae mutatio rerum!^
377 ^ eg ^et|;t (= C8 fiilt) = now it is important.
* ficiftfu^g— somewhat equivalent to the "fag" of English schools.
^ mofiiili^ft fl^ttcff = as quickly as possible.
^fiir jcien ^CUtf^en— note that bcutfd^ has always the adjective
inflection.
^ »ttrfr^Ctt^crrU(^!elt = jolly student life.
*Such a Latin refrain occurs with many similar student songs.
150
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[378-379
78
Strong Verbs
to pass (exam-
ination)
befte^en
beftanb
beftanben
to fail
burc^faHen
fiel burc^
burc^gefallen
to enter
j \xd) eiufinben
1 eintreten
fanb fic^ tin
firf) eingefunben
trat ein
eingetreteu
to join
beitreten
trat M
beigetreten
to fight a duel
fi^ fd^lagen
Wn m
fic^ 9efd)tagen
to start, begin
lo§ge{)en
ging Io§
lo^gegangen
to retain
be^altcn
be^ielt
be^alten
to part
fc^eiben
frflieb
gefc^ieben
to disappear
entfc^njinben
entfc^ftjanb
entfd)tt)unben
Weak Verbs
to fight
paufen
to prepare
t)orbereiten
J od^fen
( biiffeln
to enjoy oneself fic!^ omiifiereu
to "dig"
to return
n)ieber!el)ren
to look about
umfierfpd^en
379 EXERCISES
1. 3So ftubieren bie (Hd)uler auf§ angcftrcngteftc, itnb iDarum?
2. 33€fd)reiben Sie bie erftcu Semefter best llnil^erfitdtslcbens !
bie f|)dteren!
3. 3Ba§ fiir 5tnforberungen mac^t man an bie ©tubenten im
^oftorejamen?
4. SSie benft ber ©tubent an feine Hnit)erfitdt auriicf?
1. A most difficult examination closes the course at the
gymnasium. 2. [The] studying begins in the third semester
and is carried on most severely. 3. The student now makes the
greatest effort of his school life. 4. He prepares himself for
the difficult doctor's examination. 5. But he amuses himself
also, so that his university life belongs to the happiest time in
his life.
380] REFLEXIVE VERBS 151
LESSON J^O
380 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. Reflexive Verbs require as object a reflexive persoual
pronoun either in the accusative or the dative. This pronoun
is often untranslatable. Many reflexives take a secondary
object in the genitive case. (See App. 124. )
2. The numerals are uninflected except citl, which is
inflected like the indefinite article.
3. Ordinals are formed from cardinals by the addition of
the suffix t from the numbers 1-19. From 20 on, the suffix is
fl. The ordinals are inflected like any other adjectives.
@rft-, Wxii- are irregular in the formation of their stems.
4. Fractionals are formed from cardinals by adding the
suffix tel. The fractional is a neuter noun of the first class,
strong declension. §alb, bic ^iilfte, and bal ^rtttel are
irregular.
5. Adjectives of material are formed from nouns by the
addition of the suffix cm (sometimes ctt).
6. The comparative degree of adjectives is formed by adding
cr, and the superlative by adding (c)fl, to the positive stem.
These suffixes often produce umlaut in the stem of the adjec-
tive. Some adjectives are compared irregularly. (See App.
60-52.)
7. When used attributively, the comparative and super-
lative are declined according to the regular adjective declen-
sion. Predicatively the superlative phrase ttttt — Ctt is used.
8. The absolute superlative, which represents a very high
degree of the quality and no comparison with other objects, is
formed attributively by means of the adverb pri^jl or du^crfl
4- the positive ; predicatively by the phrase ttufS c. (See
App. 56.)
152 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [381-382
REVIEW EXERCISES
381 Fill in:
Xic 3lDGi rUnbcr I)Q]6en — im 2BaIbe Derirrt. 2!ie
Wcmmx Qtniifieren — in ben erft — Semcftern bc;^^ lIniDcrf{tQt§=
Ieben§. ®te Unberfitaten gepren — ben §od)|d)uIen be§ Son^
beg. ®te ©onne fdjcint 5^ute auf§ — . ^ie Sonne fd^eint —
tm ©ommer. ®er flein — ^naBe \)Cii 'ba^^ fd^roer — ®i*empel im
^opfe Quggcrec^net. Ser fleinfte ^noBc tt)irb am — red)nen.
^ie licben fleincn 3ternlein o€]^cn cjern mit bem — 90^onb, fein
Sl\6)i \\i t)iel milber qI§ — ber ©onne.
382 Translate: 1. The small boy and the smaller girl had
lost their way iu the exceedingly dark forest. 2. "Shame on
you!" said the queer wood-nymph to the lost children. 3. The
children rejoiced at the riddles, and their old teacher helped
them with their mental arithmetic. 4. "In how many hours
does the sun go around the world?" asked the first wood-
nymph. 5. "In 24 hours," replied the little boy, who boasted
of his mental arithmetic. 6. The first half of the riddle was
hard to guess, but the second half was easy. 7. This half-
page (bte ^txiz) is full of little dots, the other half -page is
golden. 8. The silk gown of the beautiful lady was most
gorgeous. 9. The Universities of Germany are most inter-
esting. 10. The most interesting universities are the oldest.
11. The boys study hardest in the gymnasium. 12. The de-
mands are the most severe in the last two years. 13. The
children are the youngest in the kindergarten. 14. The chil-
dren enjoy themselves exceedingly.
383-385]
PASSIVE VOICE
153
CHAPTER VII
PASSIVE VOICE
LESSON J^l
383 Active
3^ fa^ iiin
3(^ ^abc if)n gcfc^cn
3d^ ^attc il)n gefc^cn
3d^ mcrbc il)n fc^cn
3(^ tocrbc if)n gefet)en ^aben
Passive
@r toirb t)on mir gcfe^en
@r tourbe tjon mir gefel^en
@r ijl Don mir gefcjen taotbcn
@r tuor Don mir gcfe^cn morbcn
©r tuirb Don mir gcfc^cn tucrbcn
@r tuirb Don mir gcf cl^en tQorben f cin
The passive voice of any transitive verb is composed of
some form of the verb toetben and the perfect active participle
of the required verb (see App. 78). In the- perfect tenses
of the passive, the augment of the participle gctoorbett is
omitted.
The German preposition of agent is Hon (by) and it
takes the dative case. ^ur^ is the preposition of means.
For complete passive inflection see App. 78; for syntax, App.
218-222.
384 2)eutfc^Ionb
2!eutfd^Ianb mirb jd^rlid] Don Dielen ^TuSldnbern bcfit(f)t,
tDeil e§ ))M)\i^ intereffonte (3iftorif(^e unb fultureUe ^pnomene
gu bieten ^at %u6) feine nQtiirltdjen ^Inlogen ftnb oft betDun=
bert hiorbcn. 9Wan finbet^ in bem fleirten Sanbe (e§ tDtrb
5 bcredjnet, 'ba'^ ganj 2;eiit]d)lQTtb ntd^t fo grofe ift tuie ber (Stoat
385 ^ ^dt^ft Itttercffattte— see App. 56.
^man flnbct— translate there is found. See App. 220.
154 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [386
Xeica^) erftaunlid) grofee llnterfdjiebc tm SUma unh tiielfadjen
SBec^fel ber Sanbfdiaft.
Sm 9^orben Breitet fid^ ha§> 2anh in meilenlangen, fanbi=
gen gldc^en qii§, bie fogenannte SOZarf^ beren'^ ^^oefie unb
10 ^^vb^t diei^^ )oon olelen norbifd)en ^id^tern befungen iiDorben ift.
®tefe grofeen 5Iad)en finb don einonber burd) magige
(Erf)ebungen getrennt. 3^^' treiter fublidi man fommt, befto
p^er liegt ba^ Sanb iiber bem SOZeeresfpiegel. .§ier beftnben
fic^^ hk grofeen SSiilber (ber ©c^tDaratDalb, ber 3:;6uringer=^
15 toalb, unb, iueiter oftlic^, ber 33olf)mertt)aIb^), jdo bo^ O^r
burc^ bog iHaufi^en ber ^annen, Sinben unb (Si(^en entgiidt
JDirb, unb rt)o ber ©inn tion bem SSalbgauber gefangen genom-
men mirb.'^CSn biefen bemolbeten ^ugelldnbern befinben ftd^
tounberf^bne ttefbloue 8een. v
20 ^n ber ^itte bes Sonbc^^, an ben Ufcrn ber ©Ibe, ido bie
l^errlii^e ^tahi Sresben liegt, ift hk ^anb(d}aft fo fd^on unb
grofeartig gefunben tuorben, ba^ man ber ©egenb hen DZomen
„hk fdd^fifd)e (Sd)n)ei3" gcgeben ]f)at.
2)ur(^ bie ©ebirge, bie ha^ Sanb burd^freugen, tvevben
35 2Bafferfc^eiben gebilbet, t)on benen fic^ bie grofeen 8trdme nadf)
t)er{d^iebenen Seiten ergiefeen. Siefe ©trome (ber 9^f)ein, mit
feinem romantifd^en Hfer, hie breite ©Ibe, bie blaue 2)onau,
386 ^ 3Rttrf— originally meaning boundary, territory, now specialized
in connection with Brandenburg.
* ticrctt = whose— refers to SRatf-
^ Berber ^Ctj = rugged charm.
^ jc tueiter befto ]^O^er=the farther the higher— both German
bcftO, and English the are remnants of an old instrumental
case.
' 0eft1t)ien fld^ = are found. See App. 220.
* These forests are renowned in song and story. Locate them on
the map.
887-388]
PASSIVE VOICE
135
bie geidjdftige SSefer unb bie 2Seid^feI) l^abert ^Inlofe gegeben
311 bem ©riinben t)on mdd)ttgen ©tdbten unb retaenben ®or=
30 fern. 3Si€le biefer ©tdbte finb fcE)on bor '^at)v^unhevten gegriin^
bet toorben unb finb beriil^Tnt megen ber ©rdfee i^rer Snbitftrie,
ber ^radit ii^rer ©ebdube unb ber (Sigenart unb be§ 2Serte§
if)rer S^unft. 2)Qbon h)irb in einer fpdteren Seftion nod) gef)an=
belt merben.
87
Strong Verbs
to offer bteten
bot
geboten
to sing befingen
befang
befungen
to rise mporfteigcn
ftieg empor
emporgeftiegen
to be found firf) befiiibeu
befanb ficb
\\6) befunbeu
'eil^tT' e^'9i^6^»
ergog
ergoffen
Weak Verbs
to admire benJUUberU
to rustle raufc^en
to calculate htV^(i)ntn
to delight ent^iicfen
to spread fic^ aii^breiteu, breitete
to form bilben
\id} au§, ficb au§gebreitet
to cross biirc^freujen
to separate treuiieil
to found griinben
EXERCISES
388 1. 33on tnem mirb 3)eutfd)Ianb oft befud)t? SSarum?
2. 9iennen ®ie einige^, toa§> barin gefunben tviibl
3. ^ejdjreiben ®ie bie £)berfldd)e be§ fionbe^!
4. SSa^ mirb tion ben ^ic^tem geton?
5. ^s[t ha^:^ fdjon lange getan tnorben?
6. 33cid)reiben Sie bie 3SdIber 8iibbeutfd)Ianb§!
7. 2S03U l^aben bie grofeen Strdme Slnlafe gegeben?
8. 2Ba§ tDirb on ben Stdbten geru()mt?
156 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [389-391
389 Translate: 1. Germany has been praised for its most
interesting historical and natural phenomena. 2. Great di-
vergence of climate is found in this little land, which is smaller
than Texas. 3. The rugged charm of the northern lowlands
has been sung by many poets. 4. We were charmed by the
beauty of the forests with their rustling oaks and firs. 5. By
the beautiful rivers will be found pretty villages and mighty
cities.
LESSON Ji2
WORD ORDER m
390 I. ®ie ^inber |oBcn ivXt%i bie 9?atfel geliift.
II. 3utefet Jttbcn bie ^inber bie "^ii^tX geloft,
III. ^og bie ^inber i\x\z%i bie 9fidtfel geloft §abcn.
Note that in
I. The clause is independent and begins with the subject.
Normal Order.
II. The clause is independent, but begins with an adjunct.
Inverted Order.
III. The clause is dependent. Transposed Order.
391 The verb (i. e., the inflected part of the verb) changes
its position according as the sentence is dependent or inde-
pendent, and in the latter case according as it begins with
subject or not.
I. If a sentence is an ordinary statement and stands by
itself, there is no especial reason for emphasizing one word
much more than another. Hence we say the order is normal
and we mention first the subject, then the verb, then all the
adjuncts.
II. If, for the sake of emphasis, some part of a sentence
outside of the subject is placed first (it may be an adverb or
the object, or, indeed, an entire dependent clause), then the
natural or normal order is disturbed, and attention is called
392-303] PASSIVE VOICE 157
to this phenomenon by an inversion of subject and predicate.
This is an extremely frequent usage in German. The inverted
order is also found in questions and commands.
(SJe^en @ie? ^e^en @te!
(^tWt>u? (SJe^e(bu)!
III. The dependent clause is parenthetical in its nature, and
in German is always set off by commas. A peculiarity of
the German dependent clause is the position of the adjuncts,
which are placed in between the subject and the verb, as if the
adjuncts were to be thus protected and kept by themselves.
The transposed order gives rise to a suspense of the idea,
expressed in reading by a suspension of the voice.
These main rules of order should be carefully studied since
they are at the foundation of German construction. It must,
however, be borne in mind that sentence structure can be best
learned by constant observation of good German.
392 (S 1 1 f n i g
SSer reitet fo fpdt burd) ^ad)t \mh SStnb?
@g ift ber 3SQter mil feinem ^inh ;
©r 1)ai ben ^aben idoIjI in bem 5lrm,
@r fofet il&n fid)er, ev ]f)dlt xf)n tnorm.
6 ,M^in SoEin, tt)Q^^ btrgft bu fo bong bein Oiefidjt?" —
„©iel)ft 3Sater;^ bu ben (Jrlfonig nid^t?
25en ©rlenfonig mit ^ron' unb !Sd)tx)eif?" —
„a^ein'©of)n, e§ ift €in S^ebelftreif."
„®u liebeS ^'tnb, fomm, gel^ mit nur!
JO @ar fd^one ©piele fpiel' i(^ mit bir;
393 ' tiJOg? = tiiarum? Cf. Latin quid.
2 flelft, S5ttter, bu— poetical arrangement for ^attx, fle^ft btt.
158 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [394
Tland) bimte 93Iumen finb on bem ©tranb;
Wleine Wluttei 1:)at mand) giilben^ ©etoanb!" —
„90^etn ^atet, mein SSaterl unb preft bit ntd)t,
SBq^"* ©rienfonig mir leife t)erf:prid)t?" —
15 „(Set rul^tg, Bleibe ru!)tg, mein ^inb;
Sn biirren 33Idttern foufelt ber SBinb!" —
„3StIIft, feiner ^nobe, hu mit mir gel)n?
90?eine Xbdjtev foGen bid^ iDarten^ fd^on;
^e\m Zbd)tex fiil^reTt ben nadjtlidjen ^cilj'n
20 Unb tciegen nnb tonsen unb fingen bid) ein!"*^ —
„90?ein SSater, mein Scoter! unb fte()ft bu nid)t bort
©rlfonigS ^od)ter om biiftern Ort?" —
,,a)^etn ®of)n, mein ©ot^n, xdj W e§ genou:
(^^"^ fd^einen bie olten SSeiben fo grau." —
25 "Sd) lieBe bx^, mid) reigt beine fd)one ©eftolt;
IXnb bifts bu nid)t tDillig, fo Brand)' id) (35etDaIt!" —
„2^ein Scoter, mein Scoter, ie^t fafet er mid) on!
©rifonig 1:)at mir ein 2eib§^ getan!-'
394 ^ Qiiltien = golden — note poetical omission of inflectional
syllable.
* toaS — see App. 1 70.
^ biri^ ttiarten = wait upon you — a somewhat poetic use. Cf .
tottttCtt + gen. App. 122.
^ ein— compounded with Uilegctt, tttttjCtt, ftttfiett in analogy with
etnfli^Iafen (to fall asleep) i.e. they will rook you, dance to you and sing
to you until you fall asleep.
^ e§ — introductory. Translate: It is the old willows that, etc.
^ ftift btt — inverted because in this conditional sentence, the con-
junction menu is omitted. See App. 188
^etn ficitig getan = has done me an injury. Cf. etttltti Jtt leitJ
gCtan* ficibS is an old genitive form.
395-397] MSSIVE VOICE 159
®em SSater groufet'S,!^ er rettet gefcf)tt)tnb ;
30 (gr fj'dlt in ben Slrmen ba§ dc^genbe ^inb,
©rrei(f)t ben §of mtt 2)?uf)' unb 9^ot; —
Sn feinen STrmen ba§> ^inh — tear tot.
395
Weak
Verbs
to rustle
faufetn
to use brauci^en
to rock
h)iegen
to groan dd^^eit
to dance
tansen
to reach erreictjeu (cf . reidjen
to charm,
orovoke
rei^en
to reach for)
396 EXERCISES
1. 1. ^eben Sic bic SBortftcHung (sentence order) eincr
icben Qeih an unb 3^re ^riinbe bafiir !
2. SSerdnbern (change) Sie bk atoci le^ten S^i^f^n im erften
9Ser§ fo, ha^ bie SBortfteflung jnr ^ntierfion mirb. Tlad)en ®ie bie
SBortfteEung in ber gnjeiten Qeih be§ britten SSerfeS gnr nor-
malen; ond^ in ber tiicrten Qeih be§ t)ierten 3Serfeg, nnb in ber
Stneiten S^ile be§ fiebenten ^ex\e^.
3. S5on toem tonrbe ber ^nobe fic^er gefafet unb getrogen?
28q§ ift Oon bem Slnoben gefe^en niorben? 3Son mem ift ber britte
^ex§> gefungen morben? 28q§ mirb bem ^naben t)on bem ®rlen=
!dnig t)erf|:)rod^en?i^ 3Son toem inirb ber ndd)tlid^e Zan^ gefiil^rt
iDerben? 3Sa§ h)irb fonft nod^ Oon ben ^oc^tern be§ ©rl!dnig§
getan tDerben? SSie tourbe ber SSoIb t)on bem SSoter ongefel^en
unb toie t)on bem ©df)nd)en? SSoburd) njor ber (Srifonig gereiat
morben? 2Bie ift ber §of bon il^nen erreid^t tcorben?
397 *°iiem Skater graufet eS— impersonal with dative. See App. 139.
Related to eS gtaut Wir. Translate : The father shudders with dread.
"The active form would be-^er ^rlenfiittig uer^irir^t bem ftnabcn
ettoaS; tierfJireii^Ctt takes an indirect as well as a direct object.
160 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [398-399
II. Translate: 1. In the father's arms the little child was
carried safely and firmly. 2. Why do you ride so rapidly
through the gloomy forest? 3. Upon the old willows the fog
appears gray. 4. Do you see my daughters in their golden
robes by the shore? 5. In the father's arms the dead child was
found.
LESSON JfS
TRANSPOSED ORDER
398 SSenn bcr grueling auf bic ^etgc ftetgt ,
SSettn ber grii^^Iitig auf bte ^erge ftetgt
Unb im ©onnenftrolf)! ber ©d^nee gerfliegt,^
3Benn bo^ erfte ©riin am 93aum \\6) getgt
Unb im ©ro^ ha^ erfte Sliimlein f^rtefet,^
5 SSenn t)orBei im %al
9^un mit einemmal^
5lEe S^egenaeit unb SStnterqual,
©djallt es^ tjon ben ^ol)'n
33t§ 3um ^ale meit:
10 „£), tDte inunberfc^on
Sft bte SruI)Itng§3€tt!"
SBenn am ©letfd^er Iieife bte ©onne ledft,
SSenn bte QueEe bon ben 33ergen f^ringt.
399 1 The ttjetttt belongs to both clauses. If it did not, what would
be the order of the second?
2 tttttt wit ettteminal=all at once.
3 Observe that the inversion here is caused by the precedence of
the dependent clauses. Note the same in ^rlfottig.
400 402]
PASSIVE VOICE
161
15
400
5lIIe§ rtngg mit jungem @run fi(% becft"^
Unb bQ§ Suftgeton ber 2SdIber flingt,
Siifte Itnb unb lau
aSiirgt bte griine 5Iu
Unb ber ^immel lad^t fo rein unb Blau,
(SdjaUt e§> t)on ben ^ol^'n
S3t§ 3um Sole tDeit:
„0, tvie n)unberfc£)on
Sft bie SruWing^aett!"
»oiicttftci)t.
to melt away jerfltegeu
to sprout f prie^en
to resound, *r' ^„„
ring tlmgen
to resound,
ring
to lick
fc^affen
teden
Strong Verbs
aerflo^
!(ang
Weak Verbs
to cover
to scent,
perfume
aerfToffen
gefproffen
geflungen
berfen
tDur^en
40 1 EXERCISE
1. 3Bq§ ift bte SSortfteEung in alien ©d^en, bte mit
„n)enn" anfangen? SSarum? SSeil fie S^ebenfd^e finb. 2Ba§
ift bie £)rbnung be^ ^auptfa^e^, (principal clause) bem ein
D^ebenfa^ t)orange]^t? ^ann man biefen §auptfo^ normal madden?
SSie? ^un ©ie e§> fo oft aB mdglid^! Sefd)reiben ©ie einen
@Ietf(f)er! 2So toerben ©letfc^er gefunben? 2Somit tuirb im 3^^iil&=
ling aVie§> gebecft? ©d^reiben ©ie biefeS @ebid)t unb aurf) ben
„@rI!onig" in ^rofa um!
402 *fl(!^ beift— one could say betiedt tiJtrb, but when agent is not
mentioned, a reflexive verb or utlltt + active is more usual.
162 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [403-404
LESSON U
CONJUNCTIONS
403 Coordinate (Followed by Normal Order)
( aber — copulative.
^^^ ■{ allein — adversative.
' jonbern — adversative after a negative statement,
or ober and unb for beiut
Subordinate (Followed by Transposed Order)
until
bi§
while
tod^renb
as, since
ba
because
xotxi
that
txi"^
( ttjenn*
in order that
bamtt
when
( al§
whether
ob
If
tpemi
although
obgteic^
after
nac^bem
as long as
folange
Adverbial Conjunctions
(Followed by Transposed Order.)
when?
iDann?
whence?
tDo^er?
why?
marum?
whither
Ujo^in?
wherefore?
tDe§f)atb?
with what?
iDomit?
how?
ft)ie?
for what?
tDofiir?
how much?
njieDiet?
in what?
tporin?
where?
h)o?
from what?
tDorau§?
®
i e
gf rtcb
404
5tu§ Idngft bergangener 3eit toirb bie folgenbe @efd)i(f)te
er3d]f)It. ©irtft tool^nte tm granfenlanbe etn tndd^tiger ^ontg,
* tuenn is used to express present time or repeated action ; al& to
express past time.
406] PASSIVE VOICE 163
namenS ©iegmunb, bem^ biele Sanbe^ untertan toaxen. 92un
trurbe hem ^ontg ein ©ol^n geBoren, ber fid) \d)on al§ ^nabe
5 bitrd^ QufeergelDo^nli^en ^ut unb burd^ ^elbenftdrfe au^*
seidfinete.
5ri§ (stegfrtcb, benn fo l^te^ er, noc^ ein bungling tvav, 3og
er f(f)on in hie SSelt nad) 5IBenteuern au§. SSdl^renb er
einft burd^ eitten finftern SSoIb 3og, in hem er bon Qllen
10 ©eiten t)on iDilben ^ieren, ©rod^en unb Hngetitnten he-
hvofjt iDurbe, tvaxh er l^Io^Iid^ eine§ ntdc^tigen ©rod^en^
getoa^r, ber einen ^ii^a1§ ^utete. ©ofort ftUrste fic^ ©iegfrieb
auf ha§> Ziex unb Balb tvax hex ©rod^e mit bem ©d^toert er-
JdilogenS ha^ t)on bem ^elben felbft berfertigt morben tear,
15 unb ha^ t)on niemanb fonft getragen n)erben^ fonnte.
5IBer beim ^am^fe n^ar ha§> 2^radienblut iiber iJin gefloffen,
unb n)o e§ il^n beriil^rt l)atte, tvax ex unt)ern)unbbar getuorben.
^TEein eine ©telle tear berfdiont geblieben;^ benn gJDifd^en bie-
©d^ultern tvax ilfim ein Sinbenblott gefaH^n, ha tvax bie ©telle
20 trodfen geblieben, tva§> it)m footer ha§^ Ceben foftete. 5(ber je^t
mer!te er nid)t§ babon, fonbern aog frol^Iid^ tceiter, nadftbem
er fid^ he§> ^d^ai^e^i^ bemod^tigt l)atte. villein er bemerfte gu
feinem grofeen ©rftaunen, bofe il^m bie ^pxadje hex SSogel nun
^Id^Iid) tjerftdnblidf) getDorben tvax, benn ha§> ^rad^enblut 'f^aite
25 iljm biefe Tlad)t gcgcben.
405 ^ tiem— dat. with adj. Utttertatt. See App. 146.
^ 8ttttilC— the more poetical form for gdttlier. See bttS SBort, with
its double plural, App. 26.
^ elttCg ^taii^m— genitive with adj. gcttltt^t. See App. 125.
*ttiar Ctjii^lafiCtt = was killed. Is this a passive? See App. 219.
^ Note form of passive infinitive. See App. 79.
^ttJttt Hcrf(i^Ottt gclbUcBen = had been spared. bleiBett is often used
where in English we use to he , to represent a stationary condition.
Cf. ili^ Blctfie fie^en, I stand still, id^ Btcifie fl^cn, I keep my seat.
^ tie§ Sd^a^cS — gen. with reflexive verb. See App. 224.
164 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [406
Solgenbeg Sieb erga^It hie @ef(f)id)te bon feinem <Bd)tt)exi:
Stegfrieb)^ (Sc^toert
Sung ©tegfrieb Voav ein ftolser ^nab\
(Sing^ bon be§ 3Sater§ 33urg !)€rQb,
• SSoEf ^ roften nid)t in 3Sater§ §qu§,
30 3SoIIt'^ iDQnbern in oEe SBelt ]^inau§.
33egegnet'9 il^m mancf) Skitter tuert
90ltt feftem ©c^tlb unb Breitem ©d^mert.
©tegfrteb nur elnen 'Bteden lrug;i^
S)a§ tear tl^m bitter unb Idb genug —
35 Unb al§ er ging im finftern SSalb,
^oni er 3U einer ©d&miebe bolb.
2)a fol^ er ©ifen unb ©taf)I genug;
©in luftig^i S^uer glammen fc^Iug. —
„£) SO^eifter, liebfter 9D?cifter mein,
40 Sofe^^ 'on mi(^ beinen ©efeEen fein;
Unb Iel)r bu mirf) mit Sleife unb 5I(f)t,
SSie man bie guten ©(^toerter mod^t!" —
©iegfricb ben §aninter rt)oI)I fd)tDingen funnt,^^
©r f(f)lug ben 5Imbo6 in ben ©runb.
45 ©r fd^Iug, ha% tveii ber SSoIb erflang
Unb Qll€§ ©ifen in (Stitc!e fprang.
Unb t)on ber le^ten ©ifenftang' \^
Tlad)V er ein ©c^tuert, fo Breit unb lang.
„9^un ^ab' id) gef(f)miebet ein gute§ ©(fitcert;
M 9^un bin id} tvie onbre Skitter trert.
9^un fd^Iag' icf) tcie ein onbrer §elb
®ie ^Riefen unb S)ra(f)en in 2SaIb unb gelbl"
igubttitg UPanti.
406 ^ filttfi — coordinate with mat, hence same relative position.
^BtfiCgttCt. In prose there would be no reason for inversion.
^" truft — such transposition is frequent in poetic usage.
^^ lufhg — poetic omission of inflectional syllable.
^' la^....feilt = do let me be your apprentice.
" funttt — archaic form of fottttte. For order see note 10.
407-409] Ly^ ' PASSIVE VOICE 165
407 Strong Verb"^
to pass t)er9e^en ttergiug oergangen
to bear gebftreu geBar geboren
to flow fliefeen flog gefloffen
to resound er!Ungen erflang erflungen
Weak Verbs
to threaten bebrO^en to rest rofteu
to make terferttgeu to forge fc^ntteben
to spare jjetf c^oneu
408 EXERCISES
I. 1. 3Serdnbern ©te aHe normalen (Sa^e ber oBigen
@ef(f)id)te4o ha% hie SSortfoIge aur Snt)erfion tDirb! (^teUen* ©te C^
in aEen ©d^en, bie 3nt)er[ion seigen, bie normale SSortfoIge l^er!
©d^retben ©ie aHe 92ebenfd^e au§ unb madden ©te btefelBen 3u
^Quptfd^en! ©rgdfilen ©ie bie 33QlIabe in ^rofa!
II. Translate: 1. The mighty king to whom many lands
were subject had become old, on which account he needed
his son at home. 2. The boy did not remain at home, but
went away in search of adventures. 3. When he became aware
of the dragon in the dark woods, he rushed upon him and slew
him. 4. A linden leaf fell between his shoulders, so that this
place was vulnerable.
LESSON Jt5
409 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. The passive voice is formed of ttierben and the past parti-
ciple of the verb. When used as passive auxiliary the past
participle of toerbett has no augment.
2. The substitutes for the passive are matt + active and
* Jerfictten = restore, \/^
/
166 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [410
reflexive form of verb. These are used when the agent is not
expressly mentioned.
3. The preposition of agency is tion (with dative), of means
is bur^ (with accusative).
4. The order of words in a German sentence is:
(«) Normal — Subject, verb, adjuncts.
(J) Inverted — Verb, subject, adjuncts.
(c) Transposed — Subject, adjuncts, verb.
a — Used in independent statements beginning with subject.
h — Used in independent statements beginning with an
adjunct (word, phrase, or clause); also in questions and com-
mands.
c — Used in dependent statements.
4IO EXERCISES
I. Write the third person sing, passive indie, of entjurfcn,
Befleigen, fe^en.
II. Write three sentences in normal order. Change them
to inverted order; to transposed order.
III. Translate: 1. The cities of which much (t)iete§) has
been said are situated on large streams. 2. Many men have
been charmed by the splendor of German cities and the beauty
of the villages. 3. By means of the mighty mountains great
watersheds are formed. 4. The moaning child is held fast
in his father's arms. 5. When the spring climbs the moun-
tains the snow melts in the sun. 6. The zephyrs are soft
and mild when the first flower of spring appears. 7. The
dragon was killed by Siegfried, who had always distinguished
himself by his courage. 8. Siegfried had been made invulner-
able by the blood of the dragon in which (tDortn) he had bathed.
9. The dragon was soon slain by the brave young knight who
had made the sword. 10. Then he went out in search of adven-
tures, although his father was old and feeble (fd^toad^).
411 412]
MODAL AUXILIAEIES
167
CHAPTER VIII
MODAL AUXILIARIES
LESSON J,6 ■
PRESENT TENSE
4 1 I The modal auxiliaries express the mood of the actor
toward the action. They are irregular in form, since the form
used to express the present is an old preterite of a strong verb,
the other forms of which have been lost. There are six:
fbnnctt (possibility), mogctt*^ (desire), muHeit (compulsion).
turfctt (permission), ttHJUctt (intention),
fottcn (d
esire from
without).
i^ !ann
mag
mug
barf
tt)ill
foil
bu fannft
tuagft
mugt
barfft
hjillft
foUft
er faitu
mag
mug
barf
h)ia
fon
toir fonneu
mogeu
miiffeu
biirfeu
njotteu
folleu
i^r fount
mogt
mugt
burft
moUt
font
fie fouueu
mogeu
miiffeu
biirfeu
moUeu
follen
©ic fonuen
mogeu
miiffeu
biirfeu
tDoHeu
foUen
Imperative
fijuue
moge
miiffe
biirfe
njoUe
foHe
4 1 2 Observe that the
personal
endings
are not those of the
present but those of the
preterite
tense of strong verbs, as the
correspondence
below will show
Present of fiJnttCtt
Preterite of fUttttlCtt
ic^
fauu
i
(^ f)3auu
\!i\x fauuft
bu fpauuft
er
fonu
er fpauu
^ For fuller discussion of meanings see App. 230-248.
168 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [413-415
4 1 3 The infinitive without ju is used with the modal auxil-
iaries and with laffen. This last verb, however, is not a preterite-
present. SBiffcn is a preterite-present, but cannot omit the
sign of the infinitive.
td^ n?ei6 . ton njtffen
bu meigt i^r tt)igt
er toeig fie (@ie) tuiffen
414 mttan btc 3)iutter
O fiifee Splutter, 2)er Srii!)Itng Qudet
^d) fann n\d)t fpinnen; §eE burd^ bie ©tfieiben;
S(^ iann ni(f)t fi^en 2Ber fann nun ft^en,
Sm ©tiiblein innen^ SSer fann nun bktben
3m engen §qu§. Hub fleiBtg fein?
©§ ftoc!t ba§ ^^dbd&en, O Iqb micf) ge:^en
©§ reifet ha§> 5db(f)en; Hub lafe mic£) fel)en,
£) fu(3C 9[y^utter, £)b trf) fann fliegen^
^cf) mufe !)tnau§.2 SSie .^dgelein.
£) lafe mid) fe!)en, 1
O lafe mic^ loufd^en, <J
2So Siiftlein toel^en,
3So 33a(^kin rauf(f)en,
SSo mixmMn bm!)'n!
Safe fte^ mt(^ ^flitcfen
Hub fc^bn mir^ fc^miicfen
2)ie braunen Socfen
2)?tt buntem @riin!
415 ^ itltlCtt — poetic tautological form. Translate : In the little
room.
2.mufe ^inattS— supply gc^en. See App. 230.
^ fann ^iegcn— note order. Cf. App. 90, III.
^ la^ flc mit^ JJplfcn = let me pluck them. The object of lafe is
Jttt^, of ))Hu^en is flc. Euphony decides this order.
^ mit— possessive dative with §orfcn- See App. 144.
416-417] MODAL AUXILIARIES 169
416 . Strong Verb
to tear reigeu rig geriffen
Weak Verbs
to stop ftocfen to blow, waft it) e^en
to peep guden to murmur rauf(f)en
to listen laufd^eit to bloom bluf)eit
4 I 7 EXERCISES^
I. S)Q§ iunge 9P?abd^en foE ft^en unh fpinrtcn, obex e§ tDtG
l^iuQuSgelfien unb fptelcn. S^orf C5 ge^en? 3Scnn il)re ftrcnge
SDiutter e§ tuilL Slber bie abutter fagt: „^u mu§t 511 §aufe bleiben
unb bid) QTi bie tdglic^e ^Trbeit mad)cn. 2)u bift cin faulc§ 2)^db=
djcn unb eine fd)Ied)te ^od)ter." SBa§ tt)ill bie ftrenge SO^uttcr
nidjt? 3Sq§ fonn bos a)?abd)cn ntd)t? SSa§ foK fie? SSill fie boS?
SSag triE fie tun? 2Sa?^ mag fie nid)t tun? 2:arf fie ()inQu§? 2m
hk ftrenge SO^utter bie junge ^od)t€r im griinen Selbe fpielen?
^ann fie gel^en, njenn fie tDiE? WaQ fie gel^en? orf fie gefien?
3SQ5 fon fie tun?
II. Translate: 1. You may go now if you wish. 2. Do
you want to go out or to remain in the house? 3. Young
Siegfried wants to make himself a strong sword. 4. He says to
the master: "May I forge a sword on your anvil?" 5. The
master answered: **If you can use this heavy hammer, you
may use the anvil, hut you must not strike it into the ground.'*
6. The young students at the German gymnasium are sup-
posed to study thirty hours a week.* 7. We have to stay in
the house, although all is green without. 8. While the little
children are permitted to run about (umt)er(aufen) the older peo-
ple must remain indoors and work.
*SeeApp 100,5.
170 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [418-420
4 1 8 Caution: German and English auxiliaries^ are cog-
nates, i.e., they are from the same root. But in the course of
time some have developed new meanings, so that they no longer
correspond in the two languages. For instance, mag cannot
usually be translated by may, nor does shall usually translate
fatten. The only safe method is to become acquainted with
the general meaning and translate from it. When the Eng-
lish word expresses permissioji the German will be barf, when
the English expresses desire the German will be mag. Note
especially the divergence of dare and barf. They are not
at all related. The English dare is expressed by the weak
verb ttiagen: He dared to go, er tuaglc e§, gu ge()en.
LESSOjV 47
PRETERITE OF MODAL AUXILIARIES
419 The preterite is formed from the infinitive stem on the
analogy of the weak conjugation, but if the infinitive exhibits
an umlaut, the preterite indicative does not retain it.
Infinitive Preterite Infinitive Preterite
fannen fanntc burfen burftc
magen inad^tc nJoHen tvoUit
miiffen mn^it fotlen fotttc
In translation care must be exercised to find proper
English equivalents, since the English language has not adopted
these new weak formations to make up for the wearing away of
old forms, but has left them defective. Thus the preterite of
must is rendered by tuas obliged to, had to ; f otten is rendered
by is to, falltc by was to, etc.
420 <S t e g f r t e b
(gortfe^ung)
"^Iflnn foUte^ ©iegfrieb fcin slneiteS unb grofeteS Slbenteuer
bcfteften. Sn ber Serne fonnte er einen madittgen geuerf(f)ein
^ fottte • ,j • fteftc|ett = was destined to encounter.
421-422] MODAL AUXILIARIES 171
fei^en. ^teugterig rttt er boraiif Io§,2 bamit er fe^en fonnte,
tDQ§ baS' War. ?iad)bem er cine ©trerfc gerittcn tvat, fam €r
5 an ein ftoIseS ©d^Iofe, ha§> rtngc>um t)on einer lobcrnben 5euer=
maucr umgeBen tvax. Tlan fonnte nid^t ijtnburd^.^ Obgletd)
ha§> ?>euer fc^recfltd) gen §tmmel flammte, gab ©iegfrteb, bem
5urd)t iinbefannt tvat, fcinem 9^o6 bie ©porcn unb iDoUte fid]
in bie Jlomme ftiir^en. ^llfcin foBalb er bie lobernbe S^onrme
10 berii^rte, fonf bicfelbe nieber, \o ba% ©iegfrieb ungel)inbert
l^inburd^ reiten fonnte.
2Sor il)m lag nun bno gel)eimm§t>one ©c^tog, wovin feiue
lebenbe ©eele an fein fdjien. 5IIIcin im Saal foUtc er fein
fd^onfteg 5lbenteucr finbcn. 2)q lag, in ticfem ©c^Iaf, eine
15 rtnnberfd^one 2Raib, gang in ^^^an^er gepUt. ©iegfrieb toolltc
fie genauer fcf)en unb biidte fid^ gu ir)r nieber, naljm it)t ben
(Bdjilh unb loderte b€n '^^^anjer. ®r fonnte il^re 5tugen nidjt
fel^en, ba fie feft gef(^Ioffen tDaren. ©o rief er: „2Sa(^e auf,
bu l^errltd^e ^aib, unb blide mid) an!"
20 ®od& er fonnte fie fo nidjt meden, fie fd^Iicf 3u feft. 2)a
fiifete er fie auf ben roten 90?unb unb fie mufete bie I^errlid^en
5rugen auffd)Iagen, unb burfte if)m i^ren ^amen fagcn.
42 I Strong Verbs
to surround uiTtgeben umgab umgeben
to sink finfen fan! gefiinfen
to open (eyes) auffd)(agen fc^Uig ouf aufgefd)tagen
Weak Verbs
to flare lobem to loosen toderu
to envelop i^uUeU to awaken \wdtn
to bend fid^ budeu to kiss fuffeu
422 ^ tiarauf lo8=rode up to it. The adverb Io§ (literally loose) is used
in many compounds to denote determined, sometimes violent action.
3 Supply fommctt-
172 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [423-426
423 EXERCISES
I. 8e^en @ie bie obtge ^efd^td^te in ha^ $rdfen§ urn!
II. @e^en (Ste ben erften Zdl btefer (^efc^i^te in ha§> ^mper*
fe!t itm!
III. ilberfe|en @ie: 1. He was to encounter a wonderful
adventure in the proud old castle that stood in the dark forest.
2. He had to ride through a flaming wall of fire before he could
reach the beautiful maiden. 3. The brave youth wanted to see
her face, but she was completely covered by her armor. 4. He
may loosen the armor and kiss her red mouth. 5. He is destined
to awaken her, if he will. 6. She cannot tell him her name, but
must love the man who can ride through the fire.
LESSON 4-8
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF MODAL AUXILIARIES
424 The perfect tenses of the modal auxiliaries are formed
by means of the tense auxiliary ^abtn and the perf . part, of the
modal. If no infinitive complement follows, this participle is
the ordinary weak form.
With an infinitive complement, however, the old strong
perfect participle is used. This has no augment and is identical
in form with the infinitive. Hence we have :
t^ ^abe ha^ gcfonnt t^ ^abe ha§> inn fotttten
tc^ ^aU ha§> gcmoi^t ic§ ^aht ha^ inn miigctt v
bn f)aft ba§ gcmup bu 1^a\i \)a^ inn muffcn <
er ^at ba§ gcbutft er ^at ha^ inn tiurfcn
tvit ^aben ha^ gettiollt n)tr ^aben ha^ inn toaUtn
it}v 1)aU ha^ gcfottt i^r 1)aU 'i)a^ inn fottcn
425 S i c 9 f r i c b
9^un ^at fie i;^m erga^Ien muffen, tner fie tvai unb tnie fie
in biefe Sage {)atte fontmen fonnen.^
426 ^ Note that in transposed order, the tense auxiliary is placed
just before the two complements, instead of, as usual, at the very end.
427-428] MODAL AUXILIARIES 173
,,'^dj l^eifee 33runl)ilb, unb bin fruiter eine SSalfiire geiDefen.
9P^it meinen ©dimeftern f^aht ic^ burd) bie Siifte^ fol^ren
5 biirfen, unb ^ahe ben ta^feren §elben anf ben ®d}lac^tfelbern
r)elfen biirfen. SScnn fie aber fielen, I)abe id) il)re ©eelen bon
hen ©djiadjtfelbern I)oIen-unb fie nac§ SBal^oUa,^ tDO bie ©otter
iDo^nen, bringen miiffen.
2)a follte id) einmol eincn ta^fercn ^elben I)oIen, aber id}
10 l^abe nid)t getoollt, benn er tvav mir gu lieb. S<^ ftt^be i!)n nic^t
tDoHen fterben laffen, fo l^abe id) il^m gel^olfen, gegen ben
SSillen SBobon?^.
5lber ben ©ottern^ barf man nid^t tro^en, fie fonnen fid^
furd^tbar rad^en. SSoban I)at nid)t getDoEt, bofe jener §elb
15 Icben follte, fo l)at er i^n felbft gctbtet unb mid) I)at er furd^tbar
geftraft. 3a!)r]^unbert€S I)abe id) fd)lafen miiffen, n)d!)renb
meine ©d^tceftern mit ben SSoIfen reiten burften, unb einem
2Renfd^en mufe idf) nun angel^bren, id), Ue ftolse SSalfiire!
2)odb €ine ©unft l^at mir ber 5lEt)ater gen)al)rt. ^d) l^abe
20 feinem (Sd^n)ad)Iing angepren mbgen, fonbern nur bem ftdrf»
ften ber 90^dnner, unb biefer ftdrf fte bift hu ; brum ^aft bu mm
hie S3runt)ilb meden burfen, ©iegfrieb, §errlid)fter ber 90^en-
fd)en!"
427 Weak Verbs '
to belong to aitgel^oren to punish ftrafen
to defy tro^en to grant gett)dt)ren
428 ^ Note plural form of bie Sttft, not easily translated. One might
say, through the clouds.
^ 28 ttl^ttff a— according to Germanic mythology, the abode of the
gods, where they meet for drinking bouts after days of happy hunting,
and whither heroes that die on the field of battle are brought by the
Valkyries.
*bCtt ©ottcttt— dative with tro^eit. Cf. App. 138
^ 3tt|r|tmJJCrte— ace. of duration of time.
174 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [429-431
429 EXERCISES
I. (Se^en <Bk biefe (S^efc^ic^te in ba§ 3m^erfe!t um!
ir. @ejen @ie bie ©ef^ic^te auf @eite 171 in ba§ ^erfeft um!
III. Translate: 1. The proud valkyrie had been obliged
to become subject to a mortal, but she was permitted to
choose the bravest for her master. 2. She had not been able
to defy the gods, for these can avenge themselves dreadfully.
3. The father of gods and men had not wished to let the hero
live, but the valkyrie wanted to save him. 4. She was com-
pelled to sleep for centuries, and could not be awakened except
(au§er) by the bravest of men. o. She was destined to kill the
hero, but she would not, hence she had to suffer (ieiben).
LESSON J^9 * ^
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT MODAL AUXILIARIES AND
PASSIVE INFINITIVES
430 The future tense of modal auxiliaries is formed regularly :
ic^ tDerbe fonnen, id) n^erbe geben fomten, etc.
The future perfect shows the same variation that we have
observed in the other perfect tenses: ii^ ttJCrbe gcfonttt ^abett;
i(^ ttierbe ^aben ge^en fonnen.
In the last example Ijttbcn precedes ge^cn and fiinncn
instead of following them. Note this tendency to end the sen-
tence with the modal auxiliary.
S(tf{cn is used like the modal auxiliaries, with the meaning
to have (something done). It may be substituted for the passive
voice. See App. 84 and 220, 221.
43 I The modal auxiliaries may take a passive infinitive com-
plement :
td^ !ann gcfc^cn tncrben
bu magft gclobt mcrbcn
er ttjitt bcrgeficn tuerbcn
Observe that the passive infinitive is simply the perfect par-
ticiple of the verb and tucrbcn.
432 433J MODAL AUXILIARIES 175
432 ^itmf)iihe§ Xxanm
3m ^urguuberlonbe^ lebte bamaB, aU ©iegfrieb ^run=
^ilb au§ ben lobernbcn Slammen '^att^ retlen biirfen, em
munberfd^one^ ^omgsfinb, nomen^ ^tieml^ilb-. 3!)re brei
^Brliber tDoren ^ontge unb alle t)ier tDo]()nten fie, sujammen
5 mit t^rer Tlnttev, 3u 2Sorm§.^ 2!a gefd^Qlj e§> etnmal, ha^ bte
^^Jrinaeffin ctnen ^raum t)aite, ber i^r md)t au§> hem ^opf
tDoIIte.^ ®en mufetc fie t!)rer SO^utter ergafjlen.
„5m ^raume l^atte ic^ einen tDunberfd^iJnen galfen, ber mtr
fel^r, fel^r lieb tt)ar. ^d) troEte i!)n immer bel^alten, bod} 5rt)et
10 ^Tore fomen unb loteten il)n bor meinen Sfugen. 2)q§ tat
mir furd^tbar tDe!)!""* Sa fagte i^re 9??utter: „S)er ^raum
Bebentet, bofe bu einen 9titter lieben mirft unb tl^n bein gan^e^
2eBen^ tuirft Bei bir Bel)alten n)oIIen. Stud) tDirft bu iDieber
t)on i^m geliebt. 5lber belfialten iDirft bu il)n nid^t fonncn,
15 benn er tuirb auf SIbcnteuer ouSgel^en tooVien. ©djlimme
geinbe nierben il^n ergreifen, unb bu trirft il^n t)€rlieren
miiffen." Sie Swngfrau aBer fpradj: „@]^€ mir foldf) ein Seib
gefd^e^en foE, toerbe id^ niemals lieben!" ,,'^a", fagte bie
toeife grau Ute, bie SO^utter ber Jungfrau, „o5 bu triEft ober
20 uid)t, tuenn bie 3eit fommt, luirft bu fd^on lieben miiffen,
ba§> tcirft bu nid^t t)crf)inbern fonnen!" llnb fo fam €§ oud).
2;enn ©iegfrieb, ber bie fd)one S3run!)itb t^erlaffen l)atte, um
meftr 5Ibenteuer 3u fuc^en, !am nad^ 2Borm§.
433 ^ SttrftUttiJerltttlbe = land of the Burgundians.
'^ Jtt 33orm§ — observe the use of the preposition.
^ tiiotttc— supply ge^Ctt. See App. 230.
* iia§ tttt mir tiie^ = that hurt me.
^ What accusative construction is this? See App. 169.
176
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[434-436
Srau Ute Itefe tftn einen Saubevtvani trinfen,^ ben fie t)on
25 einer Wlaqh l^atte Brauen laffen^. S)kfer mad)te, bafe feine
erfte SieBe t)on tlim tjergejfen tDerben mufete. 2!ann fal^ er
^rieml)ilb. ©te l^at bon il^m gelteBt trerben biirfen. STBer
bef)alten tvhb fie il^n nid)t fonnen; benn er tDirb t)on il^ren
eioenen Sriibern getotet tuerben.
434
to happen gefd)e!f)en
to keep bel^alteu
to leave terlaffcu
to mean BebeuteU
Strong Verbs
gefdia!)
bef)iett
uerlie^
Weak Verbs
to hinder
gefc^e^en
bef)atten
tertaffeu
t)eri)inberu
435
EXERCISES
I.'*' 1. S!Ba§ tr)irb ^riemftilb mcf)t tun iDoEen? SSarum nid)t?
2. SStrb fie e§ t)er!)inbern fonnen? SSer fagt boS?
3. 2Sa^ n^irb ^rieml&ilb berlteren miiffen? SSie? SSa§ tDirb
iI)nT gef(f)e!)en?
4. SKtrb fie il)ren treuen Skitter bel^alten biirfen?
5. SSie tt)irb e§ if)m ergel)en?
6. ^on tDem foH ©iegfrieb getotet merben?
7. SBoburd^ l^at 33run]&ilb bergeffen trerben fonnen?
II. Trmislate: 1. Siegfried will have to forget his first love.
2. He will be allowed to marry the beautiful Kriemhild. 3.
But he will be killed by her three brothers, who are the eagles
of whom (ttJObon) Kriemhild dreamed. 4. Brunhild will be
forgotten by her lover. 5. Kriemhild will not be able to keep
her lover.
436 ^ Itefe i^tt trittfen = had him drink.
^ Itttte irauetl laffen = had brewed. Observe difference in the two
constructions just noted. In the second, the braum has a passive
meaning. See App. 248.
437-438] MODAL AUXILIARIES 177
LESSON 50
437 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. The six modal auxiliaries are preterite-presents, i. e., the
present forms are lost and are replaced by the old preterites
which retain the strong preterite endings. New preterites and
participles are formed on the infinitive stems in analogy with
the weak conjugation. For full inflection, see App. 81.
2. The perfect tenses have two forms according as the
auxiliary is used with or without an infinitive complement.
See App. 82.
3. SlBiffcn is a preterite-present, but cannot omit the sign of
the infinitive. See App. 83.
4. Saffcn is not a preterite-present, but takes the same
construction as the modal auxiliaries and has an idiomatic pas-
sive meaning. See App. 84.
5. The modal auxiliaries may have a passive infinitive
complement, which is composed of the perfect participle of the
verb and tUCtben.
438 REVIEW EXERCISES
I. Translate: 1. The mother of the princess had a potion
brewed. 2. She will let the young knight drink it. 3. Brun-
hild will have to be forgotten by her lover because of this potion.
4. The brave valkyrie cannot ride through the clouds with
her sisters. 5. She must lie asleep for centuries until the
bravest of the knights can release her. 6. She had wanted to
disobey the father of gods and men. 7. One may not defy the
gods; they can punish dreadfully. 8. Siegfried was destined
•to awaken the most beautiful maiden with a kiss. 9. He was
destined to be killed by her brothers. 10. They were per-
mitted to kill him.
II. Relate the last story in the preterite and perfect tenses.
178 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [439-440
CHAPTER IX
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
LESSON 51
PRESENT THIRD PERSON SINGULAR
Indirect Discourse
439 The subjunctive is used in German to express not a
fact but a supposition. This supposition may be based on
fact or not, but if the speaker implies the slightest shade of
doubt or indirection as existing either in his own or another's
mind, the subjunctive is used. The most frequent use of the
subjunctive is in indirect discourse.
Fact— Indie Supposition— Subj.
er 9cjt fie glaubt, \>a!^ er ge^c
er ijl \)a fie fagte, 'lia^ er \>a fci
er fatt gel)en fie bac£)te, er foUc ge^en*
er ttiirb gef)en fie ^atte ge^offt, er luerbc ge^en
er ^ttt eg fie f)atte geglaubt, \ia^ er e§ {)abc
440 ^ic Sonne nnb bcr SStnb
©inft ftritten fid^ bie ©onne unb ber SBinb, tner )dox\ ilinen
am ftdcfften fei. ©ie famen iiberein, berjenige^ foUe bafiir
gelten,2 ber einen SSonberer am erften nottge, ben 90^antcl
abgulegen.
5 S)er SStnb bad^te, er moUe red^t ftiirmen, bann tocrbe ber
*The indirect clause may be introduced by tio|| (transposed order)
or may be without any conjunction (normal order).
' iierienlfie— see App. 35, 107.
'^ Translate : That he should be accounted (the stronger).
441-442]
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
179
dJlann fd)on \\a6f fetnem SSiEen tun. 2)0(^ al§> er fo ftiirmte
unb bites, xneinte ber Wann nur, ba^ q§> bod] red^t fait fei unb
bofe er feinen 'Mantel nur immer fefter umtun tDoEe. ©r flagte,
e§ friere i^n fo fel)r,unb ber Xaq fd^eine immer* falter gu mer=
10 ben. ^abei gog er hen SO^antel immer fefter an.
9Zun bad-jte hie ©onne, e§> fei bie dleilje an ilir,^ aber fie
moUe e» gan3 anberg mac^en. 9D^it milber unb fanfter (Slut
liefe fie il^re ©tralilcn ^erabfaHen. .^immel unb ©rbe murben
l^eiter unb aUe§> meinte, ha§> SSetter mad]e fid) ja gang I)errlid)^
15 unb ber ^ag fei gar nid}i fo itbel. ®er SBanberer glaubte, fein
9J?anteI fei il^m moI)I 3U marm, er nel)me il^n leii^ter auf ben
?Irm. ©r nal)m il)n ah unb erquidte fid] in bem (2d)atten
eineg 33aume§, inbeffen fid^ hie ©onne freute, bei bem (Seban=
fen, ha^ fie mit i(}rer Tlilhe mef)v ^raft jeige aU hex 3Sinb mit
23 feinem ©etofe.
441
Strong Verbs
to quarrel
fid) ftreiten
ftritt fi^
fic^ geftritten
to agree
iibereinfommen
!am iiberein
iibereingefomnten
to be worth
gelten
gait
gegotten
to blow
blafeii
btie§
geblafen
to wrap around
umtun
tat urn
umgetan
to freeze
frieren
fror
gefroren
Weak Verbs
to compel
notigen
to think
nteinen
to take off
ablegcn
to refresh oneself fid) er(^uideu
to storm
ftiirnteu
2 ^^idiS^feinem SSitlcnV according to his desire.
Mmmcrtttltcr JU ttJCriJcn = to be getting colder all the time.
442 ^ ^ .
Note
that the adverb immer gives the idea of the progressive tense.
^ C§ t^t = it was his turn.
^iia§ SBetter l^crtU^ = the weather was turning out beautifully
180 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [443-444
443 EXERCISES
I. ©e^en ©ie Me oBtge @efd)id)te in bte bireftc dtehe urn!
S3eif]3iele: (?irtft ftrttten ficft hie ©onne imb ber SSinb: „3Ser bon
«n0 ift am ftarffi^n?" ©ie fometi iiberein: ^^erjentge foU bafiir
gelten, ber u. f. ro."
II. ©e^en ©te folgenbe 9^eben in bte inbircfte D^lebe nm:
,Manm ^at ber ^lann nnr feinen S^lantcl fo feft um?'' 㩤
ift entf€^Ii(^ fait, idj tniH meinen 90?antel fefter umtun, e§ friert
mid& fo fel^r, ba% id) mtr gar nic^t mel)r I)elfcn fann!" „S<^ "^'^^^
e^ gan3 anber^ madden, ber 90^ann mufc jetnen 9JtanteI abtun, ob
er tnill ober nid)t/' „^d) tuiH ein (Sdjtuert I^aben, fo gut unb ftarf,
trie anbere D^itter, bann gel)e ic^ auf ^Ibcnteuer au§." „^annft*
bu mir eine Qai^l nennen? ^dj tvifl fie auf bie ^afel fdjreiben."
III. Write the following verbs in third person sing, indie,
and subj. Remember that the subjunctive is always formed on
the infinitive stem.
geben
ne^tnen
faUen
tragen
laufen
^ahtn
fein
tperben
fiif)Ien
ge^en
ftef)en
tun
benfen
tuiffen
raffeu
moUen
foHen
fonnen
mogen
leruen
LESSON 52
PRESENT AND PRETERITE
Indirect Discourse
The personal ending of the third singular we saw differed
in the subjunctive (c) and the indicative (i). In the first and
usually the second singular and in all the plurals the endings
* The indirect question will be introduced by the conjunction ol^
(whether). This takes the transposed order.
445] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 181
of the subjunctive are identical with those of the indicative
(c, jl, en, ti,^n). Hence we have:
Indicative
Subjunctive
ic§ ge^e
ic^ ge^e
\)n ge^ft
bu ge^eft
er gc^t
er gc^c
tt)ir gefien
toil ge^en
t^r ge^t
if)v gef)et
fie getien
fie ge^ien
Notice that only one form shows the difference between the
modes. The so-called thematic vowel c, in the second person
singular and plural is too unemphatic to be heard distinctly
though it appears to the eye.
Spoken language distinguishes the subjunctive from the
indicative by using the preterite subjunctive for the present
wherever the subjunctive forms are not distinct from the
indicative. In actual usage the paradigm of the present sub-
junctive reads :
i(^ gtngc instead of ic^ ge^e
bu gingcfl " '' 't>n geljeft
er ge^e
tviv gingen *' " wix ge^en
i^r gtnget *' " i^r ge^et
fie gingen *' "fie gef)en
445 This shifting has resulted in a weakening of the feeling
of time difference between present and preterite tenses in the
subjunctive, so that they are used interchangeably without
difference of meaning. Observe that there is no such thing as
sequence of tenses in German. The tense of the quoted sen-
tence has nothing to do with that of the leading verb. It is
182 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [446
simply a question of the tense of the action at the time it was
described.
Thus the speakers in the last story all used the present
indicative at the time of utterance. In quoting them the pres-
ent subjunctive was employed. It would be equally correct to
substitute the preterite subjunctive in every case, as has been
done below;
446 ^ic Sonne unb bcr 2Binb
(Jtnft ftrilten fid) ^ie ©onne unb ber SSinb, toer tion i^mw
am fldrfften tndre (fet). <Bie fomen iiberein, berientge foEte
(foEe) bafiir gelten, ber einen SBanbercr am erften nbtigte
(ubtige), ben Tlantel Qbgulegen. S)er SSinb bac^te, cr moUte
5 (tDoIIe) red^t ftiirmen, bonn tdte (tue) ber Tlann fd^on nac^ fet=
nem SStHen. Xod) al§> ex \o ftikmte unb blte§, metnte ber
Wlann nur, bofe e§ hod) red^t !alt tDdre (fet) unb ha^ er feinen
30^antel nur tmmer fefter umtun inoUte (tcolle). ®r flagte, e§
frdre (friere) il^n jo fel^r, unb ber Xaq fc^iene (fd)etne) tmmer
10 fdlter 3u merben. ®abei gog er ben 30^antel tmmer fefter an.
9^un bod^te bie ©onne, e§ Jndre (fet) hk diei^e an ii)v, aber
fie moUte (moGe) e§> gona onberS moc^en. SO^tt mtlber unb
fanfter ^lut liefe fie ii)xe ©traf)Ien l^erabfallen. ^immel unb
(Srbe murben l^etter unb aGe§ metnte, ha§> SSetter mad^te
t5 (mad^e) fid£) ja gans l^errlid) unb ber ^og mdre (fet) gar ntd)t
fo fd^Itmm. 2)er 2Banberer glaubte," fetn Tlanid mdre (fei)
tl^m lno!)I 3u marm, er natjxm (ne!)me) t^n letd^ter auf ben
STrm. ©r nalfim il)n ah unb erqutdfte fid^ in bem ^d)aiicn etne§
33aume§, tnbem fid) bte ©onne freute, bet bem ©ebanfen, baf^
20 fie mit tftrer S0?ilbe mel^r ^raft aetgte (setge) ai§> ber SStnb
mtt feinem ©etofe.
447-448] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 183
447
PRETERITE
(3rd Sing.)
Strong Verbs
Subjunctive
]
[ndicative
todre
irar
tate
tat
frore
fror
jc^iene
fc^ien
na^me
nat)m
Weak Verbs
fottte
joate
uottgte
notigte
tDodte
troUte
ma(^tc
mad)te
aeigte
aeigte
The preterite subjunctive of strong verbs is formed on
the preterite indicative by the addition of c and the umlaut
when the stem-vowel permits it. The preterite subjunctive of
weak verbs does not differ from the preterite indicative. For
a slight exception, see App. 81.
448 EXERCISES
I. Sc^reiBen @ie bie @aje auf 8eite 180 nun ntit bent ^on*
junttit) 3m))erfe!t anftatt be§ ^rdfen§ au§!
II. Write the paradigms of the present and preterite sub-
junctive of the following verbs:
fein ^aben rtierben tDoHen fotlen fonnen
ntogen fallen lieben taffen ge^en bleiben
III. Translate: 1. The sun said that it took (bauern) 24
hours to ride around the world. 2. The children told the wood-
nymphs that they could guess the riddles. 3. The teacher
asked the children whether they did not know (fonnen) the
multiplication table. 4. The little girl asked her mother
184 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [449-460
whether she might go out into the green fields. 5. She said
she could not stay in the house. 6. We want to know whether
'we may not listen to the birds. 7. The little stars wanted to
know whether they might not go with the sun. 8. But the
sun told them that they should go with the mild moon. 9.
The wanderer thought his cloak was too warm.
LESSON 53
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE
Indirect Discourse
449 The perfect tense is formed by the present tense of
l^aben or f ein + perfect participle, the pluperfect by the preterite
of l^aBcn or f cin + perfect participle. The rule for the substi-
tution of preterite forms for present forms learned in the last
lesson applies to the pluperfect forms and perfect forms also.
But in use, they are not differentiated and both tenses are used
indiscriminately for indirect quotation in past tense. See App.
184. Hence we have :
ic§ ^citte getan instead of \6:} ^aBe getan
bu f)abeft getau^
er ^n^aht getan
lt)ir fatten getan instead of Xoxx ^aben "
ii)r t)dttet getan " i^r \)CiUi "
fie tjdtten " fie l^aben "
Perfect
\6) fei gelt)efen^ tt)ir feien getoefen
bu feieft getoefen ' t^r feiet gemefen
er fei getuefen fie feien gemefen
450 ^ Because btt ^ttft is irregular.
2 Since the subjunctive and indicative forms in this tense are not
identical, no substitution is necessary. See App. 62.
461-452 J
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
186
Pluperfect
tc^ tDcire getDefen
bu tDdret getoefen
er tudre geti:)efen
i<i) ^dtte getan
bu ()dtteft getan
er ^ixttt getan
Wit todren gen)efen
i^r tDdret geftjefen
fie lt)dren getoefen
tvix Ijdtten getan
i^r f)dttet getan
fie ptten getan
Fact
Past Time
id) tarn, i^ bin gcfommcn
ic^ iai, id) ^atte getan
id^ gab, id) ^ak gcgekn
Supposition
iii) fct or ttjiirc gcfommctt
id^ ^abc or pttc getan
ic^ l^abe or ^dtit gegelien
45
^a^ trcne ^Hoft
/^
S(S I^ab' mein D^ofe berloren,
9P^€in Q^felgraueS D^ofe;
@§ ttiar fo treu im SeBen;
^ein treu're§ fonn e§> geBen^
Sm gangen 3«9 unb ^rofe.^ ^
Unb al§ e§ tuollte^ fterBen,
Sa blidt' e§ mid^ nod^ an,
STB fprad^'S mit feincn Tliemn:
„^Qnn^ bir nid^t tuciter bienen;
5(be,^ mein Sf^eitergmann!"
452 ^ fann e§ gcBcn = can there be.
^ 3ttg Wttil Xrofe = in the whole camp.
^ttJOttte ftcrbCtt = was about to die. See App. 245.
* fdtttl — note poetic omission of personal pronoun.
5 nlje = adieu, farewell (popularized French adieu).
186 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [46B-466
®a Qvnb W§> el^rltd) ein
SSol^I unter griinen Tlaiten
Sn eineg fitnbbQum§ ©c^otten;
15 ®Q§ joE fein 2)enfmal fein.
20
453
^a ft^en bie fletrten 356gel
Hnb l^alten bog ^oknamt
3^^ Braudf)t nid^t erft gu lefen,
2Sie treu nteirt 9^o6 getoefen^ ;
©ie fingen'^ inSgefamt.
Hoffmann tion
^alUx^Uhm,
Verbs
to bury eiitgrabeu ^
to serve bieneii (?^)«
grub ein eingegraben
454 In indirect discourse the poem would be told as follows :
1. 'l!cr 9?eiter erjciljlt, er I)Qbe (I^dtte) fein apfelgroueg dio^ t)cr=
loren; e§ fei (tcdre) fo treu im Qeben getnefen; fein treuere^^
fonne (fonnte) e§> geben im ganaen 3^tg unb ^rofc.
2. Hnb al§ e» l^abe (^atte) fterbcn tnollen, ha I)abe (f)Qtte) e§ i^n
no(^ einmol angeblidtt, unb Ijabe (I)Qtt€) mit feinen SD^ienen
gef^rod^en, bofe e§ il^m nid^t tneiter bienen fonne (fonnte).
3. Hnb qB eg geftorben tDore, l^abe (f)atte) er e§ el)rlid) unter
griinen 90^atten in eine§ CinbbaumeS ©(fatten eingcgraben;
ba§> foEe (foEte) fein S)cnfmal fein.
455 ^ Note incorrect order for the sake of the meter.
^ gClDCJeit (timt) — often in dependent construction the auxiliary is
understood.
466-458] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 187
4. 2)a fdfeen^ bte fleinen 3SogeI unb f)telten ba§ ^otenamt. 2Str
Brau(f)ten ni(f)t erft 311 lefen, tnte treu feln ^ofe gett)efen fei
(irdre); fie fdttgen e§ tnSgefamt.
456 EXERCISES
I. Change Brunhild's narrative (page 173) to indirect dis-
course.
II. Write the present, preterite, perfect, and pluperfect
paradigms of the following verbs :
^olen rufen ge^en fo(gen fingen laiifen
fein hperben fageit lieben lefen laffen
toiffen mijgeu biirfen joHen njolleu
LESSON 6J^
SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT
Indirect Discourse
457 Fact Supposition
©r toirb fommen. 2)er 9Jlann fogt, 'tio,^ er fommcn
tocrbc.
@r ttiirb bi^ baf)in gcfommen @te meinte, bi§ batiiu tucrbc er
fein. gefommcn fcin.
®u toirfl fc^cn. ®r fiir^tet, bit tncrbeft e§ fc^cn.
9ldc^fte§ Sa^r ttjirft bu e§ gcs @r t)erfpri^t bir, bag bu e§ ndd)=
fc^cn ^aBcn. fte§ Sa^r gcfc^cn ^aficn ttJcrs
bcft.
We have seen that the present subjunctive is inter-
changeable with the preterite, and the perfect with the plu-
perfect. Likewise in the future subjunctive for tuctbe + inf.
458 ^ fiiffett— could not be ji^en because of identity with indicative ;
so also ^icitm, ftrttttd^ten, fangcn.
188
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[459-461
we may substitute tourbc + inf. , which makes the form iden-
tical that of the conditional mode.
Fut. Subj.
er lt)erbe ge()en
Fut. Perf. Subj.
er tuerbe gegaugeu fein
I. Conditional
er tourbc gel^en
II. Conditional
er ttiurbc gegangen fein
459
Indicative
t(^ tvexhe geften
hu tnirft gel)en
er tntrb gel^en
intr tnerbcn ge^cn
i^r tmxhet gefjen
fie tcerben gelfien
td& tnerbe gegongen
hu tDtrft
er tnirb
tntr tnerben „
i^r tnerbet „
fie tnerben „
PARADIGM
Future
Subjunctive
tc^ tniirbe geften (tnerbe) ^
bit merbeft gelien
er raerbe ge(}cn
inir miirben gcI^en (tnerben)
iftr miirbct gel)en (roerbet)
fie tniirben gc^en (tucrbcn)
Future Perfect
fein id) tviivbc gegongen fein (tnerbe)
bit tncrbeft gegangen fein
er tnerbe gegangen fein
tnir tniirben gegongen fein
(tnerben)
il^r tnilrbet gegongen fein
(tnerbct)
fie tniirben gegangen fein
(tnerben)
460 ^cr Srfjafcr itnb bcr GJoIbfj^tnteb
©in ©d^dfer frogt einen ©olbfd^mieb, tnie t^iel tnoljl ein
fo unb fo grower ^lum^en @oIbe§i tnert fei. 2)er Oolbfc^mieb
^offte, ber ©deafer l^otte einen fold^en ^lum^en gefnnben nnb
46 I ^ettt ^Ium))en @olbc§ — it is more usual to employ a noun
in apposition, i.e. eltt tlumjiett ®olil.
462-464] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 189
tvexhe (jDiirbe) il^n sum 35er!auf Bringen. ^e^l^alB Betoirtete
5 er il)n ^rddjttg, urn i^n gefc^meiMg 3u mac^cn, benn er bad)te:
„2)er bumme ^erl bcnft getDiB, tc^ toiirbe il^m etne grofee
©umme bofiir Bieten, tcenn trf) if)n obex gefd^metbtg madje, fo
ift er auc^ mtt tDenig sufriebenr' ©r bot ilf)m olfo bon fetnem
Beften 3Bein, in ber ^offnung, ha% fie gu etnem guten (£int)er=
10 ftattbni^ fommen tDurben.^ ©nblicf), qB er badjte, bofe ber
Sauer nun ntcf)t mei)v fo flor int ^opf tcare, fragte er il^n, tDo
er benn ben ^Ium|)en gefunben l^aBe. 2Sie grofe tear aBer
feine ©nttaufc^ung, aB ber ^auer erfldrk, er l^aBe Bi§ je^
no(f) feinen gefunben; foBalb er oBer einen gefunben l^aBen
15 toerbe, tDiirbe^ er il^n bem lieBen^tourbigen @oIbfd)mieb
Bringcn.
462 Verbs
to offer bieten Bot geBoten
to hope l^offen (w)
to treat, entertain Bett)irten (w)
to explain, declare txUaVtn (w)
463 EXERCISES
I. Translate: 1. I thought you would offer me a large sum
of money. 2. We promised that we should have the work done
when you came. 3. They wanted to know (tDtffen) whether
you would come or not. 4. The charming goldsmith thought
that the foolish fellow would become pliable after a while (hk
SBeite). 5. The fellow was not so foolish as the goldsmith
thought that he would be.
464 ^ Could ttiettien be used here?
^ Note that here, where the same form of the verb occurs in two
places so closely adjacent repetition is avoided by using the future
perfect in one instance and the conditional in the next. They might
have been interchanged without affecting the sense.
190
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[465
II. Put into indirect discourse (with and without ba§) :
©r fogte:
liefer Wann I)at einen grofeen Sllum^en ®olh gefunben.
©r tDufete nid)t, 1dq5 er bomit mad)en foUte.
©r l^at i^n mir gebrad)t, um 3U fel)en mie t)iel er bafiir be!om=
men fonnte.
^d} l^atte aber fd^on t)on ber gansen ©efc^tdjte ge!)ort.
©r tDirb nad) einer SSeile fc!)on gefdimeibig tuerben, "bann
trerbc ic^ il^m etne fletne (aumme bieten.
SSenn id} tl^m bie ©umme ttierbe gebotcn b^ben, tt)trb er fcbr
frob fein.
III. Change t!ie poem „®a§ treue ^o^" to future in direct
discourse; then to future in indirect discourse.
LESSOR 55
SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE
Indirect Discourse
465 The use of the passive construction in indirect discourse
does not differ in principle from the active.
Past
Future
Fat. Perf.
iNDic. Pass.
Present er tDtrb gefd^tagcn
SuBj. Pass.
toerbe
er
er tDurbe gefc^lagen
er ift gejdilagen h)orben er
er XQdx gefd)tagen tporben
er rt)trb gefd^lagen tuer- er
ben
er hJtrb gefd£)lagen ttJor- er -< or
ben fein ( ^iirbe ) jein
gef^tagen
gefd^tagen n)orben
gefd^lagen merben
gefd^lagen tnorben
466-467] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 191
466 ^a^ mtoljknc ^^fcrb
©in ^auer ergdl^Ite einem greunbe, bafe i^nx^ t)or etner
SBodje^ ein ^^'ferb am^ bcm ©taEc gefto!)tnt iDorben fci. ©r
befc^rieb ba§ ^^Sferb genau. Sa fogte ber greunb, er f)abe em
foId^eS 9^o6,^ gona geiiQu n)ie e§ ber ^auer befdjrieben l^dtte,
5 benfelben SDZorgcn ouf bem Qol^rmarft in ber ndc^ften ©tabt
gefe]f)en; e§ fei i3on einem Sremben gum 3Ser!Quf angeboten
tDorben.
S)er 33auer fc^tuong fid^ auf ein onbereS ^ferb unb eilte
nocf) ber (Staht 9?i(^tig, auf bem 9Kar!tpIa^ fal^ er, tDte fein
10 ^ferb 3um SSerfauf angeboten tourbe. ©r eilte l^t^rbei unb
erfldrte, ba^ ha§> fein ^ferb fei unb ba^ e§> xf)m bor einer
3Sod)e gefto^Ien niorben nidre. ®er SP^ann, ber ba§ $ferb ber-
faufen tnoEte, erfldrte, bafs ein S^^^twnt borliegen miiffe, benn
er I)abe ba§> ^ferb fd)on jtDei S^ifire. SDamaB fei e§ il^m bon
15 feinem 33ruber berfauft tDorben.
SDa fagte ber 33auer: „9^un, n)enn ©ucf)^ ba§ ^^ferb bor
ginei So^^^^n berfauft tvovben ift, unb Sft^^ c§ fd)on fo lange
6abt, fo miiBt '^^x and) iDiffen, auf toeld&em Sluge e§ blinb ift."
"^abei I^ielt er bem ^^iferbe beibe 5lugen gu. Ser SO^ann fagte
20 fc^nelt: „5tuf bem redjtcn 5ruge!" Soc^ aB b€r Sauer Iad)te,
moUte er fid) berbeffern unb rief fd)nell: „9^ein, id) I)abe micft
geirrt, auf bem linfcn 5tuge ift e§ blinb I" S)a 3og ber 93aucr bie
§anb l^erunter unb aHe Seute fonnten fel)cn, ba^ ba§> $ferb auf
feinem 5luge blinb mar. 9tun mar e§> erfidjtiid), ba^ bev 33auer
25 t)on bem 93?anne beftoftlcn morben mar.
S)er 33auer erjdljlte bann feinem greunbe, ba% ber SO^ann
bor alien Seuten iiberful^rt unb berliaftet morben fei.
467 1 t^m— dat. of interest.
^ UOt eittcr SBor^C = a week ago.
3 Cttt fot(^c8 ^oii = such a liorse.
* ©ad^ — note use of ^f^x and (^u^ instead of Ste. This is usual in
country districts.
192 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [468-470
468 Strong Verbs
to offer anbieten bot an angeboten *
to vault fic^ f c^tt)tngen fd^tuang ftc^ fic^ gefc^tDungen
to hold shut gu^lten i)iett gu guge^atteu
Weak Verbs
to declare erflareit to expose iiberfu^reit
to err fid^ trrcu to arrest tjetl^aften
469 EXERCISES
I. Change all direct discourse in the above story to
indirect and all the indirect discourse to the direct.
II. Translate: 1. The former said that the horse had been
seen at the fair. 2. The friend told how the horse was stolen
from the farmer. 3. The people did not believe that the large
horse had been sold to the man by his brother. 4. The man
declares that the horse will be sold to the farmer. 5. The
farmer believes that the man is exposed and arrested.
III. 1. ^(^reiBen ®te an^ toa^ bem gremben bort bem
S3auer ersd^ilt ttiurbe!
2. 2So tourbe ha^ ^f^rb gefunben? SSeldje ©rflctrurtg \\i bon
bem gremben gegeben inorben?
3. SSq§ ]^at ber 33Quer feinem greunb eraol^Ien fonnen, qB er
l&eim fatn?
LESSON 56
IDEAL CONDITION
470 In the previous lessons on the subjunctive we treated of
Indirect Discourse, in which the subjunctive was used to repre-
present a thought or feeling without any reference to the
actuality of the fact. There was nothing in the form of the
verb to tell whether the quoted statement was based on fact
or not.
We observed further that, as the result of shifting the
preterite to take the place of present forms, the time sense of
471-472] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 193
the tenses had become weak and we no longer recognized any
distinction in time or meaning between the present sub-
junctive and the preterite; the perfect and the pluperfect;
the future and the conditional.
In the use of the subjunctive now to be studied only the
preterite and the pluperfect tenses are used. They express a
condition contrary to fact ; the preterite expresses such a con-
dition in present or future time ; the pluperfect in past time.
Present SSeitu e§ Mt txidvt, giugc 16) tn§ $au§
Past SSenn e§ fall gettiefen ttiiirc, toiirc i(S) in§ §au§ gcgangcn
; 47 I ^er glug bcr £ieBc
SBenn ic^ etn SSi3gIein tvat\^
Unb Quc^ glnei gliiglein l&dtl',
Slog' id) 3U bir;
28€tl €§ abet ntd)t fann fetn,^
meiV icE) QE^ier.
fBin t(f) glei(^3 ^^i^ j^jjj^ 5^^. 4
S3in id) boc^ tm ^raum Bei bir,
Unb reb* mit bit;
9Senn td^ ertnac^en tu',
S3in id) oHetn
@g t)erge]E)t fetne ©tunb' in ber 'iflaiijt,
I 2)a mein ^erge ntc^t ertt)ad)t,
Itnb on bid^ gebenft,
®q6 bu tnir biel taufenbmal
SDein ^erg gefdienft.^
472 ^ tiJiir', fliJg'— poetic omission of e.
2 f anti feitt— poetic for fcitt fann.
3 glcir^ (oftglei^) = although I am.
* Note the indicative in real condition throughout this stanza. See
App. 189. Note also the inverted order caused by the omission of
mentt. App. 188.
194 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [473-476
473 Verbs
to fly piegen flog geflogen
to awake ertDa(i)en (iv)
474 EXERCISES
I. ©e^en ©te obigeg Oebid)t in ^rofo um!
II. SSag ift hex Unterfd^teb atDtfdjcn ber 33ebingung im erften
unb ber tm smeitcn 2Ser§?
III. ©rad^Icn ©te bte^ ©ebic^t in inbirefter 9^ebe, foIgenber=
mofeen: ©in Tlann fingt feiner ©eliebten Dor: 2Benn er ein 3Sog=
lein mare, unb atuet Sliigel I)dtte, miirbe er gu il^r fitegen, u. f. rt).
IV. (^e^en ®ie bie unmogltd^e Sebtngung im erften 3Ser§ in
bie SSergangcnI)eit um!
475 Conditional
I. irf) miirbe fliegen ic^ toiirbe fc^reibeu
II. t(^ njiirbe geftogen fein ic^ tDiirbe gefd^rieben l)ahzn
28enn ic^ ein ^oglein njdre, pgc ic^ gu bir.
Past
SSenn i6) ein SSoglein n)are, tourbc ic§ gn bir flicgcn.
SBenn ic^ ein SSogtein getoefen mare, njare id) jn bir
geflogen.
SSenn i^ ein ^oglein gertjefen ft)dre, miirbc ic^ ^n bir
^ gcflogett fcitt,
476 1. In the apodosis of an ideal condition the conditional
mode may always be used instead of the subjunctive.
2. There are two tenses of the conditional :
Present time corresponds to the preterite subj. formed of
ttliirbc + present infinitive.
Past time corresponds to the pluperfect subj. formed of
ttiiirbc + perfect infinitive.
Notice the use of ^ttbctt and fcitt in forming the perfect
infinitive. See App. 77.
477-478] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 195
477 ^cr ^omg unb bcr Sanbmann
®er Sanbmann Icl)nt in ber ^iitte aHein
llnb hlidt iymau§> in ben Ttonhen\d)ein
Itnb f(^aut €m|3or 3u be§ ^6ntg§ ^alaft;
^r meife nid^t, tceld^^ ein ©efiil^I i^n fafet.
5 „5rd^, n)dr'2 1^ e^i^ ^onig nur eine D^ad^t,
^ann tooEf id^ fd)alten mit ntetner SO^adCit!
S^ann ging' id) uml^er bon §au§ 3U §an§
Unb teilte ben ©djlummernben^ ©egen qu§!
SSie ftro^Ite^ bonn ntorgen§ fo mancfjer 33IidE
10 2ie Sonne gum erftenmal !)ell gnriidf!
3Bie •ftannten'' einanber bte ©liidflidjen on
Unb meinten"^: ba§> l)at ein ©ngel getonl" —
4
®er ^ontg lel^nt im ^alaft oGein
Unb hlidt l)inau§> in ben 90?onbenfdf)ein
1? Unb \d)aut l)inab ouf be§ fianbSmann^ ^au^
Unb (atf5t in ha§> meite ©djmeigen-^ l)inQU§:
„Srd3, tvax' id) ein Canbmonn mir eine ^adjt,
2Sie gem entrief id^ ber briidfcnben Tlad)t\^
478 ^ ttiel^ — uninflected form usual in this construction. Cf.
foi(^ tin, mau^ tin.
2 Note omission of ttietttt. This sounds almost like a wish, but the
following clause showing what he would do under the above stated
circumstances indicates that it is an ideal condition.
^tien ^d^lltmrnerniJett = to the slumberers— a present participle used
as a weak adjective, with the noun (gcntCtt) omitted. See App. 217.
^ftra^ltc — subj. pret. of weak verb, coordinate in construction
with tijottt' jti^ttUen, line 6, above.
^iltt^ tiicitc St^tuetgCtt = the vast silence.
*ber briijfcnbcn 2)laii§t— dative with entraten. See App 133.
196 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [479-481
SSte le^rt' id) mid^ felber hie fditoere ^unft,
20 92t(^t irr' gu gel^en mit meiner ©unft!
SBie iDoEt' id) in§ eigene ^erg mir fel^n.
Urn tviehet e§ of fen mir felBft gu gefte^n F
SSa§ toufenb ®anbe tnir^ nic^t tioEBrod^t,
®a§ ttJoEt' id) geiDinrten in einer '^aii^tl" —
25 ©0 fd)Qun fie finnenb Beim ©ternenlauf,
®er ^onig I^inunter, ber Sanbmann !)inauf ;
©onn fc^fiefeen Beibe ben miiben 33Iid
Itnb traumen Beibe t)on frembem @Iiid.^
m- ®aBrtel SetbL
479 Strong Verbs
to be silent fc^tDeigen fc^tuieg gejd^tuiegeu
to dispense with eutraten entriet entraten
to win getDinnen gehjann getDonnen
to meditate finiteu faiut gefoimeu
Weak Verbs
to recline (e^Ueil to rule f (fatten
to glance bUcfen to reflect guriidftra^len
480 EXERCISES
I. Write out in full each of the two conditional state-
ments contained in the above poem, first with both parts in
the subjunctive, then with the conditional in the apodosis, with
and without the conjunction tuettn.
II. Give these conditions in the past tense.
III. (grga^Ien 8ie biefe§ (SJebi^t in ^rofa! r^
48 I ' ttW Q^fic^tt = to frankly face the secrets of my own heart
again,
^ wit — dative of interest.
^ tlOtt frembem ©liirf = of another's joy.
482-484] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 197
LE880N 57
SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH— UNFULFILLED
482 This corresponds very closely to the prota*sis of the ideal
condition. "Were I but king!" suggests "I should be happy
if I were king!" which makes a correct statement of ideal con-
dition.
Present 23Bdrc td) bt)(^ ^onig !
Past SBdrc \6) bo^ ^onig gcmcfcn!
Present ^^Ht \6) bie Ma6)i !
Past §dttc ic^ bte Wa^i gcJaBt!
Observe that the tense use corresponds exactly to that in
ideal condition. In fact, almost every wish of this kind could
be made into a conditional sentence by adding the apodosis,
and almost every conditional clause may become a wish, if the
apodosis is omitted.
483 «I)tc liter 2Sitttf(^c
^onnt' \6) ho6) ber gelfen fein,
^tef tm ©rurtbe ha^ Urgeftein,
^o6) tm §immel ha^ ^Tngefid^t,
©tntg ftel^ett unb tnanfett tttc^t!
6 ^onnt' \6) bod^ ha^ 33riinnletn fein
©|:)rubelnb^ au§ !u{)Iem ©runbe reitt,
©e^ienb^ burcf) griines Hfergefd^td^t,
@h)tg rtnnen uttb raften nic!)t!
^onitt' \^ bod^ ha^ ^dumleln fein,
10 2)te SSurgel geftrecft^ tn§ lifer l^tnein,
484 ^ f^lttttielttb and gc^Cttb— two present participles used adjectively
with Sriittttletn, uninflected because they follow the noun.
^ gefh^edt — a perfect participle used like the present participles dis-
cussed in note 1 ; modifies gSltrjel.
198 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [485-486
(StDiQ blii^en tinb tuelf en -ntcfjt !
^onnt' id) bod) ha§> SSoglem fetn
9tuf ben S^eigen tm ©onnenfd^ein,
15 S)Q§ ©timmlein toncnb sum ^immel geridjl't,
©tutg tonen nnb fdjtocigen nid)t!
485 Verbs
to run rinnen ranu geronnen
to bubble fprubetu (w) to sound tonen (w)
to rest raften (w) to direct rid^ten (/(;)
to wither WzlUxi {tv)
486 EXERCISES
I. 3[Bq!o finb bk bier SSiinfdje, bie l^ter au^gefproc^en ftnb?
Xcv Wlann niiinfd^t, er fonnte ein Selfen fein u. f. w.
II. SO^ac^cn ©ie btefe 3Bunfd]fa^e 5u Scbingungefatsen. SScnn
id) ein 3SogIein fein fonnte, n^iirbc id) auf ben Srocigcn fil^cn u.f.tt).
in. SSeld^e SSitnfi^e fatten ber Sonbmann unb bcr ^onig
(Seite 195)?
IV. ©e^en ©ie biefe§ (Sebid)t in ^$rofa um!
V. Translate: 1. Siegfried said: "Oh, that I were a brave
knight!" 2. Then I would go in search of (nad)) adventures.
3. If Siegfried had been a bold knight, he would have gone in
search of adventures. 4. He cried: "If I only had a isword!"
5. If he had had a sword he would not have gone to the smithy.
6. Charles the Great exclaimed: "Oh, had the rich men's sons
been as diligent as the poor men's sons!" 7. If the rich men's
sons liad been as diligent as the poor men's sons, the school
would have been much better. 8. What would the king have
done, had he been a peasant? 9. If the peasant had been a
king, he would have made everybody happy.
8 ttitegenti— see note 1.
487-489] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 199
LESSON 58
SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH— TO BE FULFILLED.— DESIRE OR
PRAYER
437 Fact— Indie. Wish— Subj.
©r ift glucflid^. @r fei glucfttc^! May he oe
happy.
@r ge{)t. (^e^e er ! Let him go !
S)em Sleid^ !ommt 2)etn Sletc^ !omme! Thy king-
dom come!
488 ^cr 9Jht ift gcfommcn
^er Wax ift gcfommcn, bic 23dume fdjlagcn au^,
Da bleibe, rt)er Suft I)at,^ mit ©oraen 3u §an§' !
SSie bie SSoIfen bort iconbern am I^immlifd^cn 3clt,
©0 ftel^t an^ tnir ber ©inn^ in bie tceite, tueite SSelt.
5 §err SSoter, Srau 9Wutter, bafe @ott eutf) Be!)iit' P
2Ber tueife, tro in ber gerne mein ©Iu(f mir nod) bliiljt?*
(5§ gibt fo manege ©tra^e, ha nimmer id) mar|(^iert ;^
®§ giBt fo manc^en SSein, ben \d) nimmer nod^ ^robiert.^
Srtfd^ auf brum,^ frifd) auf brum im l^ellen ©onnenftra^I,
10 2Bo!)I iiber h\^ 33crge, tDof)! burd) ha^ tiefe ^al!
2)ie £luellen erflingen, bie 93dume raufd^en all';
9D^ein ^erg ift mic 'ne Serdjc unb ftimmet ein mit ©d^all.
489 ^ iia Meibc, tticr fittfi ^at, etc. = let whoever desires stay at home.
'^ |o ^'WX = so does my mind turn to.
'bafe bc^itt'— supply i(^ tt)ittt|(i^e before this.
* ©liitf fttii^t = fortune Avill smile upon me. Note the [figure ;
bUt^ett is a favorite word in German to denote a flourishing condi-
tion, asbte Mit^enlic Stabt; cin Mii^cntJcr ^itngUng, etc.
^ ^abe is omitted.
^ %ti\iS^ ttttf brum = Up and away !
200
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
[4490-91
Unb QbenbS im (Stdbtletn, ha Uf)i' id) burfttg ein:
,,$€rr SSirt, ©err SStrt, einc Marine hlanUn SSein!
15 ©rgreife bie gtebel, bu luft'ger ®|)ieImQnn bu!
3Son metnem ©rf)a^ ba§ Siebel,^ ba§> ftng' id) basu."
Unb finb'^ id) feine ©erberg', fo lieg' icC) gur S^ad^t
SSol^I unter biQuem ©immel; bie ©terne l^alten 2SQd)t;
Sm SSinbe bie Sinbe, bie roufc^t mid^ ein^ gemac^;^^
20 (5§ fiiffet in ber grtil^e ba§ 2^orgenrot mid^ tvad).
O SSonbern, o SSanbern, bu freie 33urfd^enluft!
©a toel^et @otte§ Obemi^ fo frifdf) in bie ^ruft;
5)a finget unb jaud^get boS ©era gum ©immeBgelt:
SSie bift bn hodj fo fd^on, o bu tveik, tueite SSelt! /
Emanuel @eiBeI.
>o
Strong Verbs
to sprout au^fd^lagen
to resound erfliugen
to seize ergreif en
fd^tug au§
erflang
ergriff
Weak Verbs
au§gef^lagen
erflungen
ergriffen
to wander h)anbern
to guard be^iitcn
to march marf (^ieren
to try ^robieren
to rustle raufc^en
to join einftimmen
to enter tinU^XtXl
49 I ^ fiiclicl — a South German diminutive form ;
would be Stetlli^en or giciJicttt.
^ Note the real condition with the Uientt omitted.
^ rttttfii^t mx^ tin = rustles me to sleep.
^" gemttl^— old form of ficmiiji^Iiii^, comfortable.
^^ Obcm— old (poetic) form of %itm.
North German
492-494] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 201
492 EXERCISES
I. Translate: 1. Let his mind turn towards home (naci^
^aufe). 2. May God guard you! 3. Let the woods resound.
4, Let the host bring me a tankard of wine. 5. Let him lie all
night under the blue sky. 6. May the winds blow through the
trees and sing me to sleep ! 7. Let who will remain* at home, I
shall go out into the wide, wide world
II. (Se^en ©ie obige^ ^ebtc^t in $ro)a um !
LESSON 59
SUBJUNCTIVE OF DOUBT ^
493 Besides the subjunctives of indirect discourse, condition,
and wish, there are a number of subjunctive phrases and sup-
positions which are not easily classified. Some are remnants
of an older optative, others are parts of older conditional
clauses which have become stereotyped. See App. 192.
A very frequent use of the subjunctive is that after al8 ob
or oil tticttn (as though). Note that the q6 or tticnn maybe
omitted with the usual result upon the order. See App. 188.
@r ioi, at§ ob e§ immer ©ommer marc.
(Sr iai, aU tuiirc e^ immer (Sommer.
494 ^cr gitte ^atnerab
S(f) '^cdi' einen S^ameraben,
©inen beffern finb'ft \)Vi mi}
2)i€ trommel \6)hxQ aum ©treite,
©r gtttg on metner ©ette
Sn gletc^em ©d^rttt unb ^rttt.^
* See App. 197, 198.
^ ttit — South German form for ut^t.
^ 8«i^ritt ttttb Xrjit = in step.
202 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [495-496
©ine ^ugel fam geflogen;^
(Silt's mir obcr gilt e§ bir?*
S6n !)at eg toeggeriffen ;
@r liegt mir^ bor ben Siifeen,
10 5tB tDdr'g^ ein ©titc^ t)on mir.
SBiH^ mir bie §anb nod) rcidjen,
^ertoeil^ id^ eBen lab'.
,Mcinn^ hit hie ^anh md]t geBen;
Skib bu^^ im eh)'gcn Seben
15 9P^ein guter ^amerob!"
Sttbttitg U^lanb.
495 ^u Btft tnie cine 35Iuinc
S)u bift tDie einc ^lume
©0 l^olb unb fd^on unb rein;
Sd) fd^au' bid) on, unb 2BcI)mut
©d^Ieidjt mir xn§> $er3 f)incin.^^
mix ift,i2 Qig ^£13 1^^ ^ie ^^j^vjg
5tuf§ ^aupt bir^ legen foEt',
93ctenb, bofe ©ott bid) erl^olte
©0 rein unb fd}on unb ^olh.
Ptiwxitii pt'ttit.
496 ^ fam gejlOgClt — note adverbial use of perf. part, with verb fommett,
cf. 198, 1.
4 gilt eg = does it mean.
^ mtt . . . ten f^iifecit— what dative is mtt?
'^aU tt)ttr'§—Wiiat is omitted?
'm\n = tt tiJitt.
^ berttiCtl — modern literary form is ttttieitt.
^fatttt = ij^ fatitt.
^"S31etb tlU — emphatic imperative.
" ttt§ ^erj l^inettt — note tautological use of adverb.
^^ mir tft — short form of e§ ift mir = it seems to me.
13 Could oh be omitted? What change would that make?
497-500] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 203
497 Strong Verbs
to tear away ttjegrei^cit ri§ tt)eg n^e jgeriffen
to load laben lub gelabeit
to creep fd^leid^en f(^li(^ gef(^lid)en
498 EXERCISES
I. (Sr5ai)Ien 8ie ben 3n^It be§ obigen ^ebic^tS in inbirefter
9lebe!
II. SSie tear bem $Ulann ^n Tluk, aU er feinen greunb tot fa^?
III. 28er Wax £ubtt)ig Uf)lanb? §eutrid^ §eine?
LESSON 60
499 GRAMMAR REVIEW
^
I. Form of subjunctive. See App. 72-83.
II. Syntax of subjunctive. See App. 180-199.
500 REVIEW EXERCISES
1. Give present indie, and subj. active paradigms of fc^cn,
flc^cn, burfcn, mcrbcn, fcin.
2. Give preterite indie, and subj. active paradigms of
ge^en, ^akn, fein, tuottcn, fadcn.
3. Give perfect indie, and subj. active paradigms of
laufcn, gc^cn, Men, muffcn.
4. Give pluperfect indie, and subj. active paradigms of
burfcn, ^abcn, fcin, ttJcrfcn, Blcibcn.
6. Give future and future perfect indie, and subj. active
paradigms of (cfctt, ge^ctl, miigCtt.
6. Give synopsis 3rd sing, passive indie, and subj. of
fc^ctt, prcn.
7. Write out conditional paradigm active and passive of
fcljcn and ^brcn.
204 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
II. Put into indirect discourse all the direct discourse in
the stories on pages 189, 191.
III. Tell the story on page 82 in indirect discourse.
IV. Translate: 1. Once a rich man was addressed on the
street by a beggar (ber S3ettler). 2. The latter said: ''Brother,
give ine a penny (ber pfennig)." 3. Then the rich man asked
how long they had been brothers. 4. The poor man re-
minded him of the fact (baran), that we are all the sons of
Adam. 5. The rich man said that he was right and that he
had forgotten that. 6. Then he gave the poor man a penny.
7. But the latter thought that this was a very small present for
a brother. 8. However, the rich man said: "If all the sons
of Adam should give you a penny, you would be the richest
man in the world!"
V. %tht\\ (Sie ein SBeifpiel fiir \)t\\ SSunfc^fonjunftit), ben
93ebiugung§fouiun!tit), ben ^onjunftit) ber inbireften 3fiebe !
601-503] IMPERATIVE 205
CHAPTER X
IMPEEATIVE. COMPOUNDS. INFINITIVES.
PARTICIPLES
LESSON 61
IMPERATIVE
50 I Strong Verb
Wiam, giB mir bein S&\\6) !
SRarie unb ^arl, gcbt mir eure 93iid^er!
grdulein (Sd^mibt, bitte gcBcn Sic ntir g^r S3ud^!
502
f
Weak Verb
SBitf)etm, mtt^c bein 93itd^ auf!
^arl uub SSit^elm, moj^t eure
§err 93rauu, mai^ctt Sic 3^r
93iic^er auf !
93u^auf! ^
gib
lauf(e)*
Strong
Qebt
l)artet
lauft
geben (Sic
^alten @ie
laufen (Ste
ntad^e
Weak
ntac^t
mac^en (Sie
jet
Slightly Irregular
feib feien (Sie
503 / ^cjttfd^cr 9tat
3Sor oHern ein§, mein ^inb, fd treu unb tral^r!
fiofe nie bie Siioc beinen 932unb entiDetl)'n! *^
^^Jort^oIte^^^J^i im b€utfd)en 35oIfe toor
S)er pd^fte D^tul^m, getreu unb tcatir gu fein.
* * *
* See 154.
^ 95on ttUetS l^er = since olden times.
206 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN (504-505
Suerft ein 3^erg, ein dik\e iymiennad)f
2)o(^ bein ©etDtffen ^eiQt ben geinb btr an,
Itnb eitie ©timme ruft in btr: „©ei tDad^V
S)ann tt)Q(^ unb fant^f! ©§ tft^ ein geinb bereit —
13 ®ie Sitg' in bir, fie^ brol^et btr ©efol^r.
^inb, S)eutf(f)e fom^ften tQ|)fer oEejeit;
2)u bcutfc^e^ STinb, fet ta^fer, treu unb ma^r! Z
Sloficrt ^ctntif.
504 ^te Tla^nnn^
^iitet eure Sungen ^
9Sor 33eleibigungen !
Sofet fein Bofe§ SSort !)ert)orl
©tofet ben D^iegel t)or ba§ ^or!
6 (Stofet ben 9liegel t)or ba§ ^or!
Cafet fein bofe§ SSort !)ert)or!
35or ^ekibigungen
^iitet @ure 3wngen!
§iitet eure 0]^ren
10 Ober il^r feib ^oren!
Sofet fein Bofe§ 2Bort bQrtn;^
@§ berunel^rt euren ©inn!
©§ berunel^rt euren ©inn;
Sofet fein Bofe§ SSort barin
15 Ober il^r feib ^oren!
^iitet eure Ol^renl
505 ^ att8 ^erj j^eran— notice the tautology. Sje i:J)o. 11.
^ ^itttcnnari^ = later.
* ^8 ifi Citt ^txn'h = there is an enemy.
^ ^ic 8it9' .... fie— poetic tautology.
*iiaritt instead of |tnetti.
506-50a] IMPERATIVE 207
506 Verbs
to push f togen ftieg Qeftogen
to desecrate enttoeifien (w) to fight fdm^feti (w)
to point out an^^eigen (w) to dishonor Derune^ren (w)
to watch tuac^en (to)
507 EXERCISES
I. Express the imperatives in the above poems in singular
and plural.
SBenn man btefe 93efel^Ie in ber tnbtreften 9^ebe auSbriidfett
tntH, mufe man ha^^^ SOtoball^ilf^tnort f o 1 1 e u benu^ert, 3. 33.
Tcr Xidjiet fagt, etn Simh folle (follte) treii unb tna^r fcin inib
folle (foEte) nie eine Ciige fetnen 502unb entmetl^cn laffen.
II. (Se^en ©te Beibe ©ebid^te in bie tnbirefte 9?eb€ urn!
508 In addition to the regular imperative there are three
methods of expressing a command.
(a) The present subjunctive — a command in the third
person, as cr gc^c, let him go.
(b) The perfect participle ) - , ,
/ X rm . n -,■ > for brusque commands.
(c) The infinitive )
509 9? it ft t g ! c i t
Srifd) getan unb ntd^t gefdumt!
3Ba§ tm SSeg liegt, meggcrdumt!
SSa§ btr fel)let, ]ndj gefd^ininb!
Orbnung lerne friil), mein ^inb!
5tu§ bent 33ett unb ntd)t gefdumt!
9^id)t Bet l^eEent %aQ getrdumt!
i^rft bie ^TrBett, bann ba§> (Bpiell
m^ ber 9^ctf€ !ommt ha^ Qiell
208 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [610-512
(Sd^nell befonnen, md)t getrctumt!
^id]t§> bergeffen, ntu)t§ berfaumt!
^id)i§> Blofe obenI)m gemodit!
2Ba§ hu tuft, baraiif gib ad)t!
gr. 9ltt(fert.
5 I O Weak Verbs
to hesitate fautTten to miss berfdumen
to remove tDegrdunten
51 I Tlan fonnte aud) fagen:
grifd) tun unb nic^t faumen!
SBa§ tm SSeg liegt, tDegrciumen!
2Ba§ btr fe!)Iet, g€fd)tt)trtb fud^en!
Orbnung lerne bQ§ ^tnb,fru!)!
That is, a command may be expressed as follows —
QtB! gebe er!
gebt! gegeben!
geben ©ie! geben!
^riiden ©te bie 93efet)Ie tm obtgen ^ebtd^te auf jebe ntogltd^e
2Seije qu§!
LE8S0N 62
\^ COMPOUND VERBS
512 \ Separable
Present W\6)tl ttJCl^t §an§ ttttS,
Preterite ^ie 9Jlau§ l^oitgtc ber ^a^e bie (Sc^elle nic^t an.
Perfect %\t SSogleitt fittb im SSinter fcrtgcflogcn.
Pluperfect Siegfrieb l^tttte ben ^rac^en totgcfcjlagcn*
Future ^er ^olbfc^ntieb tuirb bent 93aner 'txi^ ©olb aBnel^nten.
Put. perf. ^er ^nabe tnirb jururfgcfotninctt f cin.
613-616]
COMPOUND VERBS
209
513
Present
Preterite
Perfect
Pluperfect
Future
Fut. Perf.
514
Inseparable
^er ^aufmann Umtxtt "oa^^ gaden ber S3orfe nid^t
SDie Siige cnttuci^lc ietnen SOlunb.
SDie ^aufleute l^aBctt ben 93eutel ticrlorctt.
SStele 3af)re ttjarctt tJcrgangcn.
®ie ^naben ttJcrbctt hk ^riifimg Bcftc^cn,
^te ^inber tticrbctt fi^ Bcfonncn ^aficn.
SYNOPSIS
er Hertiert
er fliegt fort
er flog fort
er ift fortgeflogen
er tear fortgeflogen
er njirb fortftiegen
er ttjirb fortgeflogen fein
er ticrlor
er ^at Hcrloren
er ^tte tJCtloren
er n)irb ticrlteren
er Wixh tjcrloren fiaBen
5 1 5 The separable particle, which is strongly accented, is
always an independent word (adverb or preposition), which
is closely associated with the verb. When it immediately pre-
cedes the verb as in the participle, infinitive, and always in
transposed order, the two are joined together as one word.
The inseparable particle cannot be used independently,
hence is always attached to the verb. .In the latter case, the
augment of the perfect participle is omitted, since more than
one initial short syllable is unusual in Grerman.
516 A few compound verbs are both separable and insepar-
able with change of meaning.
uficrfegen, fe^te nhtv, uBcrgefe^t
to ferry ^
ttttter^alten, f)ie(t untcr, nntcrs
ge^alten to hold under
buri^tanfen, lief buri^, bur^ge-
laufen to run through
ttBcrfe|en, ubcrfe^te, uBcrfe|t
to translate
untcrfialten, untcr^ielt, untcrs
flatten to entertain
burc^tanfen, bur^lief, burr^tau^
fen to peruse hastily n^-
210 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [617-518
Separable compounds more often express the original mean-
ing of the two parts, inseparable have more often taken on a
figurative meaning.
517 ©tn grteb^ofiggang
93eim ^otengraber |)0(i)t e^ an:
,Madj aiil mad) au\, bu gretfer Tlannl
Zu Qufi hie Zixv unb nimm ben ^tab,
Tlu^t^ seigen mtr etn leure§ OroB!"
» ©in Sternberg fprtd)t'g mit ftrupp'gem 33Qrt,
SSerbronnt nnb raul) nad^ ^riegerart.
^SSie I}ei6t ber ^eure,^ ber ^udf ftorb
Unb fic^ ein ^$fii(}I bet mtr evtvavh?''
„®te abutter tft eg, fennt S^r ntcf)t
10 ®er 9[)?Qrt{)a ©ol^n me^r am @efi(i)t?"
„^tlp (Sott, tote grofe, toie braun gebrannt!
^citt'^ nun unb nimmer @ud^ erfannt.
Xod) fommt unb fef)t! $ter ift ber €rt,
9^ad^ bem gcfragt^ nttd^ ©uer SSort;
518 Mtt ailf W Xitr— prose order would be ttt ilic ^iir ttttf.
^ 6ttt 3l*CWlier— note the substantive use of the adjective fremb-
* Sttli^ — dative of possession. Note that bu and i^r are used inter-
changeably — not uncommon in dialectic and poetic usage.
^^Uf ®Ott for ®oii ^elfe, the pres. subj. of pleading or prayer.
^^iitt'— what subj.? what is omitted? See App. 192.
^ gefragt— observe irregular (poetic) order. What is omittedlj
619-620]
20
COMPOUND VERBS
§ier tDol^nt, t)er!)uEt t)on ©rb' unb ©tein,
dlnn ®u€r tote§ 30^utterlein."
2)a fte!)t ber ^rieger lang unb f(f)iDeigt,
2)a§ $au^3t l^inab gur 33ruft geneigt.
@r fteljt unb flarrt gum teuren ©rob
30?it trdnenfeud^tem 33Ii(i ]f)iriaB;
S^ann fdjiittelt er fein $aupt unb fprid^t:
„^f}V irrt; I)ter mol^nt bie ^ote riidjt.
2Bie fc^Ioff'^ ein 9^Qum, fo eng unb flein,
^ie Siebe etner SDZutter ein?"
211
19
Verbs
to open
auftun
tat auf
aufgetan
to procure
emerben
erlDarb
emorben
to knock
an|30c^en
poc^te an
angepod^t
to open
aufmac^en
mad^te au{
aufgemac^t
to burn up
t)erbrennen
tierbrannte
t)erbrannt
to recognize
erfenueu
erfaunte
erfannt
to hide
t)er()u(Ien
t)erp(Ite
ter^iittt
^o^^^^e^f own ^tnabftarreu
ftarrte ^inab
^inabgeftarrt
520 EXERCISES
I. 2Bq§ tierlangte ber Srembe Don bem ^otengrdber? 2Sa§
tDoUte ber ^otengraber tDtffen? SSo^ fagte il^m ber Srembe?
SBarum J^atte ber ^otengraber ben Sremben nid^t erfennen fonnen,
nienn berfelbe fetnen D^amen ntd)t genannt l^dtte?
II. (Se^en ©ie 3Serfe 7, 8, 11, 12 in inbircfte 9^ebe um!
^ f^liiffc — dubitative subj. See App. 192.
212 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [621
LESSON 63
INFINITIVES
52 1 The main uses of the infinitive have been observed
incidentally in the preceding reading lessons. They fall under
three main groups :
I. Part of the verb.
II. To modify nouns or adjectives.
III. Substantive (when the infinitive takes the place of a
noun or a clause). The German infinitive is a verbal noun.
As such it translates sometimes the English infinitive, some-
times the English present participle.
Ex. — To be or not to be = Scin ober 9lit^tfetn.
\j Walking is wholesome = ^o8 @C^cn tft gefunb.
I. As part of the verb it is used (without ju) in forming
{a) The future tenses.
{h) The conditional mode.
(c) The complement of modal auxiliaries and a few verbs of
similar construction.
Examples
(a) Future — S^ tozv\)t a\l^t^tn,
(b) Conditional — @r tDiirbe e§ tutt, n)enn er fonnte.
(c) Modal s — (Ste h)iU nic^t f|Jtct^en.
Verbs like the modals — Sa§t mi^ gc^cn !
II. With nouns and adjectives the infinitive always takes jtt :
e§ ift fc^mer, ha§ jtt ttttt.
^te ^unft gut ju (cf en ift jelten.
The art of reading well is rare.
622-523] INFINITIVES 213
III. As a substantive, the infinitive is used either with or
without ju. When used for a clause, it always has ju.
Ex.— {a) ®eutf^ lefcn tft leister at§ SDeutfd^ f^rc^cn.
Or gut ®eutfc§ ju Icfen tft nic^t fo fe^r leid^t.
{i) 8tc ge^t in ben Garten, um SBIumen gu ^fiuifen (= bamtt
fie S3Iumen pfliicfe).
For complete statement, see App. 205-213.
522 2)te bctttfcfjen ^iaW
2In ber Mfte ber 9^orb= unb ber £)ftfee,i an htn mQd)tigen
(Stromen unb on ben lieblidfien gliiffen, bie in k^tere miinben,
finbet man groge §anbeBftdbte, gefd^dfttge ©etnerb^ftdbte unb
retgenbe altertitmlic^e £)rtfci)aften liegen.^ 3SieIe bcrfelBen
5 laffen fid^ ^\% gu mittelalterlidfien '^^\i^^\ aurii(ffiil)ren,3 unb
laffen an i^rem 33auftil unb an bielen ©inrid^tungen hit ©nt^
tnidlung ber ^al^rl^unberte erfennen.^
©in grower Unterfd^ieb tft 3u bemerfen jtoifd^en ben §on«
bel^ftdbten be§ 9^orben§ (Bremen, Sitberf unb ^amburg^), W
10 burd^ tl^ren Umgang mit ©nglanb unb ben anberen benad&=
barten Sdnbcrn ettna^ ^o§nto^oIitifrf)e§ an fid^ l^aben, unb
benen be§ ©iibenS, W ein etn]^ettlid[)ere§ 5Iu§fe]^en f)aben.
^Berlin, bte $au|)tftabt be§ S^atferreidf)e§, ift eine ber grdfe*
itn SSeltftdbte. ®a§ rafd)e ^Intnadifen ber ©intnol^neraal^I, ha^
15 fdineUe SSergrdfeern be§ SofalbesirB unb ha^ rege 3Serfe]^r§»
523 ^ 9loril« VLM^ Oftfec— note the manner of placing the hyphen to
form a double compound — in English we say the North Sea and the
Baltic.
^ matt f tttbct .... Ucficn = are. See App. 206 and 220.
' Ittff Ctl jlr^ pritrffii^tCtt = can be traced back. See App. 220.
* Ittff Ctt erfetinctt = show. See App. 212.
'^SBo liegen biefe ©tdbte?
214 ELEMENTS OP' GERMAN [524-626
toefen ertnnern on bic rocftlic^en ©table ber SSeretntgten ©taa=
ten D^orbomerifag. Tlitkn in ber ©tabt ift ha§> ^omgltdfie
©i^Iofe 3U fel}en6 — ein tnad^tiger 33au, ber ungefdl^r 700 ©die
unb Simmer umfd^Itefeen \oUJ ^ort nimmt bte Beriil^mte
20 ©trofee, „llnter ben Sinben", tl^ren 5tnfang; fie erftretft fidft tion
bem mdd^tigen S)enfmal griebric^g be§ ©rofeen ungefdl^r eine
englifd^e SO^eile iDeftlid^ unb enbet am „^ranbenburger ^or."
S)iefe§ ift eineg ber fc^dnften ^unftlDerfe 33erlin§. ®ie barauf
fi(^ Befinbenbe ©tatue tvmhe 1806 bon D^apoleon nadj ^an§^
25 gefiil^rt, ober 1814, Befonber§ buret) Sllidiers^ (Jinfd)reiten,
iDieber guriicfgebrad)!.
((Sd)fu6 folgt)
524 Verbs
lo grow anh)ac!^fen, tvud)^ an, ange- to interfere einfc^reiten, f(i)ritt ein,
tDad^feu etngefc^ritten
to empty miinben (tv) to recognize erfeuneu (w)
to increase tJergro^Cm (?^)
525 EXERCISE
Translate: 1. Along the coast of the Baltic Sea are
situated many busy commercial cities and many large indus-
trial cities. 2. Mighty streams and large towns are to be found
in Germany. 3. The customs of the people and the style of
architecture of many of these cities can be traced back to
medieval times. 4. x\ more uniform appearance can be observed
in the cities of the south than in the northern (ones). 5. A
rapid growth of population and a great increase in area is to
be observed in Berlin, the capital of Germany. 6. The capital
526 Mfi. . . in fe^ett. See App. 212.
' umfii^Ue^en foil = is said to contain. See App. 242.
* S3(itd^er — the Prussian general in the Battle of Waterloo.
527-528] INFINITIVES 215
of the empire is said to resemble the large cities of western
America. 7. By the intervention of Bliicher, the splendid
work of art was brought back to Germany in 1814.
LES80N 6Jf. /)
527 ^ic bcutfdicn ©tdbtc
(©cfitufe)
S)ie fiibltd^en ©tdbte tragcn tm aonacn ein ctnr)ettIt(^Gre§
(Se^rdge, inbcrn fie treniger ben au^Idnbifdjen C^infliiffen^ au§=
gefe^t tcoren, oB bte, hit ber Mfte^ naffer liegen.
Wm\&}Z\\, bie $QU|)tftQbt bec^ ^dnigrcidi^^ Sat)crn, ift bor
5 Qllem bie ^iohi ber ffinftlcr. ^§> mogen^ ha tnol^I einige
^aufenb^ Mnftler (arjaler, Silb^auer, ^upferftedjer u. a})
ttjofinen. ^rdc^ttge ^trc^cn unb ^^3aldfte, f)errlid)e S)enfmdlcr
unb grofee SO^ufecn finb ha 3U ftnben. ^ontg fiubmig I. I)at
hit grdfetcn ©iimmen Qu^gegebcit, urn 30?und^cn gur erften
10 ^unftftdtte 2)eutf(^Ianb§ 3U madjen.
STnftatt eine Mnftlerftobt 311 ^eifeen,^ mie 2)^tind)en, I)at
5Iug§Burg am 2ed) feit ^aftrljimbertcn ben D^omen etner ber
grdfeten ^onbeBftdbte ©iibbcutfd)Ianb§. Sm S^^^-e 1500 mar
5[ug§burg burd) fetncn 3Serfc[}r mit J^talien bie beriiljmtcftc
15 unb |)rd(^tigfte ber $anbeBftdbte, unb niemanb berei[te
2)eutfc^Ianb, o()ne biefen SO^ittelpunft be§ ^anbeB 3U befid)=
ttgcn.^
528 ^ ben tttt§tdttt>i)i^cn Cf titftitfiett— dat. with adj. See App. 145.
^ miigen — expresses possibility. See App. 234.
^ einige 2^ttU[entl = some thousands. Observe the singular form.
* tt. a. = ttttii ontiere.
^ anftatt • • • • p ^eifjen = instead of being called. obtte...ficPii§ti8ett=
without visiting. See App. 217.
216 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [529-530
Sm fubtt)eftlt(i)en ^eile bon ^ui\d}lanh tft bk Berii^mte
^taht ©trafeburg gu finben. ^ier liegt ber treltbefannte
20 ©trapurger SO^iinyter, ber toeit iiBer ba§ gange Sanb fd^aut,
unb ber ein au^gegetd^nete^ 33eif|)tel ber altbeutfd^en (fogenannt
gottfd^en) 33auart Bielet. 5tuc^ fann man f)ier bte toun-
berbore Hl^r beftd)ttgen, beren Sauen emem 30^enfc^en ha§>
Seben gefoftet I)aben foE.
529 EXERCISE
Translate: 1. In order to make Munich the greatest art
center of the world, King Ludwig I. expended vast sums of
money. 2. Without having seen the southern cities one does
not know the beauty of German art. 3. Augsburg was known
for centuries as a commercial city. 4. In Munich were to be
found great museums and splendid statues. 5. The building
of the Strassburg clock is said to have cost a man's life.
6. The southern cities are less exposed to foreign influence;
therefore they are more uniform in their style of architecture
and in the customs of the people.
LESSON 65
PARTICIPLES
530 As the infinitive is the verbal noun, so the participle is the
verbal adjective in German. As such it conforms to every rule
of adjective declension. It usually cannot be compared, and it
may have its object or adverbial modifiers with it. These are
always placed first. (See App. 214-217.)
The present participle is active in meaning: ®ie \iCi^ ^inb
rufenbe Wwiitx, the mother who is calling her child.
The perfect participle is passive: ®a§ t)on feiner SJ^utter
gerufene ^inb, the child that is called by its mother.
631-682] PARTICIPLES 217
S)ie ditefte un§> befonnte^ ©efdjtd^te S)eutfd£)lQnb§ ftnbet
ftc^2 ji^ 5ei^ „@ermanta" be^ %adtn§> (gefd^rieBen im ga^ire
98 n. ©]&r.3). ^Qcitu^, ber ein genau beoBad^tenber ^efuc^er
in S)eutfd^Ianb tear, berid)tet bon ben einfac^en ©itten, bem
5 tal^feren 9P?ut, ber munberbaren ^raft ber 2)eut{d)en. (Beit ber
3eit ©dfar§ toaren hk 2)eutfd^en in 93eru]^rung mit ben il^nen
itberlegenen S^tomern^ gefommen, o!)ne fic^ jeboc^ unterorbnen
3U lajfen.^
gm S(^?)i^e 9 n. (SI)r. ^otte ber fluge unb befonnene $er=
10 monn ben fii^nen aber leid&t berfiilfirten SSaru^ im ^eutoburger
SSoIbe gef(f)Iagen.
S)a§ ndd^fte gu berirf)t€nbe^ @reigni§ ift hie fogenonnte 25oI=
fertoanberung — biefe mddjtige 90^igration bon 9^orben nadj
©iiben, tooran gange 3SdIferftdnime teilno^imen. liefer nidd)=
15 tige, nie gang erfldrle 3ug in bie grembe bauerte ungefd^r
bom tiierten U§> gum fec^ften ^ol^rl^unbert unb berdnberte hie
gange biSl^er beftel^enbe fiage^ ber euro^dif(f)en 95dlfer.
3u einem sufammengefugten 3SoIfe iDurbe ®eutfd)Ianb erft
tDieber burd^ hie ©r!)ebung ^avU be§ ©rofeen, ber im ^Q^ire
20 800 n. Sl^r. ^oifer he§> berii!)mten ^eiligen 9^dmifcf)en ?flei^e§>
tvmhe. S)odf) balb noc^ feinem tief betrauerten Xobe gerfiel ha§>
bon il^m bereinte Sanb unter ben unbermdgenben §dnben feiner
fd^tcdd^Iid^en D^ad^fommen.
(©d)IuB folgt)
532 ^ mi8 fiefttttttte = known to us.
2 flttbct M = is found. See App. 220c.
^tt. e^r.=ttttr^ (^^rtfio (A.D.) Cf. tj. g|r. (B.c )
* ilCtt i|ttett itberlegcttCtt ^lomertt = the Romans, who were superior
to them.
5 See App. 217 and 220b.
^ Jtt fiettji^tmbc = to be related.
^ Bt§^cr Bcfte^Cttiie Sage = the situation as it had existed previously.
218 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [533-536
533 EXERCISE
Translate: 1. The oldest extant"^ German history is found
in the "Germania" of Tacitus. 2. Tacitus was a keenly
observant visitor in the Germany known to the Romans.
3. By him the bravery and simple customs of the Germans
were made known to the Eomans. 4. The Komans, who loere
superior to the Germans^ were not able to defeat them. 5.
Varus, lold hut easily misled, was defeated by Hermann in the
year 9 A. D. 6. Whole families, including men^ women, and
children, took part in the Tribal Migrations. 7. This migra-
tion, 7iever quite explained, lasted for two centuries. 8. Not
until (erft gur) the time of Charles the Great did the Germans
become a united people again. 9. His death, mourned deeply
hy all, caused (lie§) the land that had just been united to fall
to pieces.
LE880N 66
534 ^ic bcutf^c ©ef^i^tc
©rft tnit bem ©mporfommen^ be§ ^ofienftaufifcfien^ ^atfer=
l^aufe^ (1138 bi§ 1254) felfirte ber t)erIoren gegangene^ (SJIang
rt)entgflen§ ouf etne SSeile guriicf. ®od) )Durbe buret) bie
STreusgiige unb W ^dm:pfe stDtfc^en ben ^aifern unb ben $a|)=
5 [ten W Uxci\i be§ Sonbe^ erfd)o|)ft.
®ie ndd^fte grofee ©^0($e, bie man in 33etrad)t giefien foil,
* Translate all italicized expressions by participles.
535 ^ Srfi — ©m^iorfoinmctt = not until the rise.
^ ^O^Cttftaufljt^cn— note adjective formation from the stem ^oJ^en^
ftttttf(ett) — the name of a castle in Swabia, from which this imperial
family came.
3 ber dcrlorett fiefiangene ©lattj = the lost glory. Note the tautolog-
ical expression ticrlotett ge^Ctt = to become lost, i.e. to be lost.
536] PARTICIPLES 219
tft ha§> fed)3e]^nte ^a1:)tt)nnhQvi, mit ber alte ©itten unb tau=
fenbiQi)rige (^inrid)timgen umftiirsenben D^eformation.
SSieber tourbe ber erft^ eroberte (Slans gebdm^ft. 0!)ne \i6:}
10 t)oE auSleben gu fbnmn,^ tvuvhe bte neu ertoorbene ^taft burd)
ben fiirc^terlidien Sreifetgidftrigen ^ricg (1618 — 1648)
erfd^opft, tvohei Canb nnh Seute faft gu ©runbe gmgen.^
9^ac^ ber le^tgenonnten ^ataftro^!)e fom ba§ ^reufeifdje
S^dntgrcid), ha§> fpdter gang SDeutfd^Ianb 3ur 33Iute berl^elfen
15 foUte," langfam in bte ^dl&e.^ 2;er erfte Berur)mte unb tDoijt-
E)aft grofee ©profe biefe!§ §Qufeg tear jener ^urfiirft Srtebrid^
aSil^elm t)on 33ranbcnburg (1620—1688), bon beffen er|)rob=
ter ©trenge unb ^^3flid)ttreue tv'n in ber @efd)ic^tc Dom ^^ringcn
don ^omBurg gelefen I)Qb€n.
20 (Sein birefter ^lad)fomme Wax jener griebrid), ber am
Beften Bejeic^net tDirb burd) hen 9Zamen, ben i^m fein 3SoU'
gegeben, ,,ber alte gri^". Siiefer t^erl^alf bem lange gebemu=
tigten SSoIfe auerft toieber gu ©teg unb ©l^re, ha er bte ftolgen
^Irmeen SubtDig XIV fd)Iug (©djlad^t bei S^ofebad) in ©adjfen,
25 1757) in bein tDo{)Ibefannten t)on 1756 U§> 1763 bauernben
©iebenidf)rigen ^riege.
^od) eine bemiitigenbe ®^od^e l^atte S)eutfc^Ianb burd^au^
mad)€n. 2^ie Unterbriidungen he§> fiegenben ^apohon^, gtci^
fdjen 1795 unb 1813, brad)ten ba§ 2anb on hen dlanh be§ 9Ser^
30 bcrbenS. S)ie t)er]^dngm§t)olIe 9ZieberIage gu Qena (1805)
broI)te ben gdnalic^en Untergang. ®o(^ langfam em|)orftrebenb
crftoB e§ fic^ nac^ ber (^efangennaftme be§ Unterbriider^ gu in=
536 * Ctft — translate newly.
^ 0|ttC . . . . p fomtCtt. See 628, 5.
*5tt ©ruttic fttngett = perished.
7 lotttc = was destined.
^ in iic pof^t = to the front.
220 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
buftrteHer urtb ^oltttfi^er ©rofee, um fdiliefelid^ in bem beutfc^»
fransofifd^en ^riege (1870 — 1871) gu Betceifen, ha% es audj
35 fremben Tladjten g€tDQd)fen ift.^ ^er ©teg Bei ®eban (1870)
tnad^te bie oBengenannte D^ieberloge bet Sena (1805) iDieber
■ gut. Tin hex borauffolgenben llronung beg beutfc^en ^atfer§
■ SStl^elm I m 3SerfatEe§ tm Sa^re 1871 mt ha§ burd^ Saftr^
i^unberte geteilte beutfdje Sanb 3u etnem beretnten ®eutf(f)Ianb
40 erfldrt. SSte unfer §etmatlanb, fud)t e§ je^t jeine ©tdr!e in
feiner ©inl&eit unb bent fricblic^en ©nttcidfein feiner ^rafte.
3ur Qdt be§ eben genannten ^riegeS njurbe 'oa^ tm ^a^xt 1840
gefc^riebene (55ebtc^t „SDie SSad)t am 3flf)ein" oft nnb begeiftert
gefungen. ^iefe§ §ur beutfdien 9^ationalt|t)mne ert)obene 2kh
lautet:
^ic SSa^t am 9!^etn
©§ brauft ein 9tuf n)ie S)onner]^aII,
SSie ©d^tcertgeflirr unb SSogen^raH:
' ,,3unt ^!)ein, gum ^^ein, gum beutf(f)en 9^t)ein!
SSer tcia be§ ©trome^ fitter fein?"
5 Sieb SSaterlanb, ntagft ru!)ig fein:
Seft fte^t unb treu bie 3Bad)t, bie SSac^t am 9^§ein!
Surd) ^unberttaufenb sudt e§ fdinell,
Unb aGer 5lugen bli^en !)ell:
®er beutfdje SiinQltng, frontm unb ftarf,
10 33efd^irmt bie IjeiFge Sanbe^ntarf.
Sieb SSaterlanb 2c.
©r blidt !)inauf in ^immelBau^n,
2So ^elbengeifter nieberfd)au'n,
Unb jdeitDort ntit ftolger ^antpf eSluft :
15 „S)u, ^tliein, bleibft beutfc^, trie meine 93ruft!"
Sieb 35aterlanb 2c.
^ftcmtiett mWtn ftettltt^fett = able to cope with foreign powers.
637-638]
PARTICIPLES
221
25
537
„<Solanq' ein Zxopfen 33Iut nod) qIu%
9^od) eine gauft ben ^gen aiel^t,
Unb norf) ein Slrm bie 33u(f)fe f^onnt,
33etrttt fein geinb l^ter beinen ©tronb!"
SieB SSaterlanb 2c.
2)er (Sd^n)nr erfd^oEt, bie SSoge rinnt,
2)ie gQl^nen flottern l^odf) im 3Kinb:
,;3wm Df^^ein, gum 9^^ein, anm bentf(f)en D^l^ein!
mix aEe tDotten filter fein!"
2ieb SSaterlanb 2c.
2Rttj ®r^nei!ettbur0er.
Verbs
to rise
emporfontmen
to gain
ertuerben
to assist
tjer^etfen
to raise
erl^eben
to prove
betueifen
to swear
f^rtjoren
to set foot or
I betreten
to flow
rinnen
to exhaust erf cEjopfen
to overthrow umfturjen
to conquer tVOhtVn
to extinguish bdnt))fen
to live freely
\id) auSteben
to test
er:proben
to designate
bejeid^nen
to humble
bemiitigen
to strive
entporftreben
to resound
braufen
to thrill
5uc!en
to flash
ba^en
to protect
befd^irmen
to glow
glii^en
to hold
f^jannen
to resound
erfd^allen
to flutter
ftattern
538 EXERCISES
I. 1. Sdl^Ien (^ie bk obengenannten ®|)0(f)en ber beutjd^en
©efdfiid^te auf!^
2. 9^ennen <Bie bie Berii^intten SO^dnner ber bentfd^^n @ejc^id)te
unb fagen (Sie, iDe^tnegen jeber berii!)mt n^or!
3. ©rgaiilen ©ie dtDa§> t)on jebem ber oben genannten ^riegel
222 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [o3t»-640
4. 2Bk l^eifet hie hent\ii)e 9^ationQll3t)mne? SSann tour be fie ge=
fd)rteben? SSann ift fie toteber t)tel gefungen toorben?
5. ©e^en ©ie bie fiinftc 3^ile iinb bie fedjfte 3etle in ben 3m=
^erottt) um!
II. Translate: 1. Without being able to live itself out, the
land was exhausted by a new war. 2. The exhausted country
was humiliated by the proud conqueror. 3. The reformation
which revolutionized many old customs occurred in the six-
teenth century. 4. The Prussian Kingdom was destined to
raise the humiliated country. 5. The Watch on tae Rlmie
was made the German national hymn.
LESSON 67
539 GRAMMAR REVIEW
1. Imperative— See App. 200-204.
2. Compound Verbs — See App. 80.
3. Infinitives— See App. 205-213.
4. Participles— See App. 214-217.
540 REVIEW EXERCISES
1. 1. Let the Rhine be the boundary of united Germany!
2." Go, German youths, and fight for your native land !
3. Look at the beautiful cities, with their famous works of
ai t.
4. Without having seen the art of south Germany, one has
not seen the country.
5. The often praised scenery of the Rhine is said to be the
most romantic in the world.
II. 1. 93efd)reiben @ie bie fiibbeutfrfien ©tobte !
2. 8e|en @te bie 9^ational^t)mne in ^rofa um!
3. Semen @ie bie 9fiattonaU)t)mne augtuenbig!
APPENDIX
GERMAN ALPHABET
«
a
a
^'cy
all
a
»
^
^
bay
b
®
jr
..^^
tsay
c
2)
^
^
day
(1
e
??
/
/
ay
e
f
®
3
f
gay
liah
ee
g
li
i
3
«
7
r
^
yot
kali
J
k
8
=S?
^
ell
1
m
P^
in
^if^^^
em 111
111
Stt
^
n
^<r^>^
enn
n
^
.-^^
oil
o
GERMAN ALPHABET 225
X ^-^«^^ err in b^rry r
®
^
f«
/k^
ess
2
:r
t
V
tay
u
^
tt
oo
SB
^
t)
.-^/^
fow
2B
^^
to
.^^X-^^
vay
a^
^
f
■t
icks
?>
^
i|
-y
ipsilon
Modified Vowels {
a
Umlautc
r
tset
Diphthongs
u
w
U ^ it .^ «K^ ^^ f« ^^^^^
For the pronunciation of modified f||^| fjf* itl ^^^ ^^
vowelsanddiphtliongs, seeApp. 6-8. ^^ LxX-^^ III ^^tyC-^^
226 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
■-^/^^^
''/^^.^<^^>^<^^^
ti^//^f^^
Compound Consonants
APPENDIX
The following statement of the essential facts of German Gram-
mar falls under the heads (a) of Inflections, ^) of Syntax. Rare
usages, poetic forms, and complicated constructions have not been
treated, as this Appendix purports to be, not a complete reference
grammar, but a concise statement of those facts which are basic in
their nature and which should be committed to memory by every
student of German.
Inflections which resemble each other, as definite article and
demonstrative pronoun, indefinite article and possessive pronoun, etc.,
are placed side by side. Wherever actual usage differs from tradi-
tional forms (as found in most grammars) the former is given prefer-
ence. This is especially noticeable in the inflections of the subjunctive.
PRONUNCIATION
VOWELS
Quantity
I Vowels are long and short. Care must be taken to distinguish
quantity. Long vowels are drawn out to greater length than in Eng-
lish, short vowels are more decidedly clipped.
A few rules can be given for the quantity of vowels, but in most
cases the student must rely upon the authority of the teacher or the
dictionary, and must endeavor to train his ear to the correct sound.
(a) Vowels are always long
[1] when doubled— §aar, 9Keer;
[2] when followed by silent 1^ — ^cit)t, me^r;
[3] i when followed by silent c — l^ier, ikb,
227
228 APPENDIX
(b) Vowels are always short when followed by a double conso-
nant — f oUen, tiaden.
(c) Stressed vowels are generally long in an open syllable, i. e.
one that does not end in a consonant (remember that r*
single consonant always goes with the following vowel in syl-
lable division)— btt, ^a^ben, le^gen.
(d) Stressed vowels are generally short in a closed syllable — ba^/
©pCtling, tDcg (before t, VX, and k in the pronouns, the vowel is
long though the syllable is closed, bet, er, bent, ben).
(e) Unstressed vowels are generally short — bin, ntit, ^o'n'tg, 5lbler.
(/) Diphthongs are long,
Quality
2 Vowels are termed front or back-vowels, according as they are
articulated in the front part of the mouth (the hard palate), with
the tongue pushed forward, or in the back part of the mouth (the
soft palate), with the tongue drawn back. A fundamental difference
between German and English lieo in the fact that German abounds in
back vowels, and that such front vowels as exist are pronounced very
decidedly in the front of the mouth, with the tongue pushed far for-
ward, whereas in English, the tongue is more flaccid and the vowel
much more neutral. The effect upon German vowels is to make thetn
much fuller, clearer, and more sonorous than the corresponding Eng-
lish sounds.
3 It is impossible to present through the eye an adequate idea of
the sounds that make up a foreign tongue. An approximation is here
attempted, but it must be used with great caution.
Long Vowels
4 Long Vowels resemble the sounds that we give to Latin long
vowels according to the so-called " Roman pronunciation. " Remem-
ber always to articulate the vowels clearly, keeping the tongue more
tense and the lips more active than in English.
a resembles a in art
e resembles e in eight
i resembles i in pique
resembles o in slow
U resembles oo in swoon
APPENDIX 229
Short Vowels
5 The short vowels resemble the long ones in quality but are clipped
very short. ui • ^.-^ • i
a resembles a m artificial
e resembles e in yellow
i resembles i in tin
has no equivalent in English. Very much
like German long shortenejd. Not at all like English o.
u resembles u in pwt.
Diphthong
6 Diphthong is the combining of two vowels to form one sound.
There are three of these in German :
ai and et resemble i in bind
au resembles ow in how
cu (an) resembles oy in hoy (with greater stress
on second part of diphthong).
All diphthongs are long.
Umlant
7 Umlaut is the fronting of a vowel produced* by anticipation of
the front vowel I in the following syllable. The mind visualizes the
whole of a long word before a single syllable of it is uttered. If a
later syllable contains something remarkable, the fact is apt to so
attract the attention, that the tongue involuntarily seeks to form the
required sound before the right time. This may lead to a decided
modification of sounds by anticipation.
A front vowel immediately following a back vowel naturally
attracts the attention. The vowel nearest the front of the mouth is I.
If, therefore, an i is anticipated in a word, all preceding vowels are
drawn forward to meet it. For this reason
a becomes a
becomes d
u becomes ii
au becomes du
8 Observe that these vowels remain modified after the i sound that
caused the change has disappeared, hence the prevalence in modern
German of umlaut without visible cause. These sounds have no
exact counterpart in English (except iitt which, like eu, is pronounced
like oy in English). Hence they must be learned by continuous
practice. A few helpful suggestions may, however, be given.
a — very much like German e (as in they)
d — round the lips as though to whistle and articulate German e
ft— round the lips as though to whistle and articulate German i
230 APPENDIX .
CONSONANTS
9 With a few exceptions, German consonants are pronounced as in
English, only with more vigor. The lips are used more forcibly, the
glottis is closed more energetically. Especially is this true of finals,
which are rendered with a complete stopping of the breath so as
to produce a total break between words — the very opposite of French
liaison. For this reason the medials, b, h, are pronounced like
t, p, when they are found at the end of a word.
ttttb is pronounced like nnt, oB like op, etc.
f O SPECIAL DEVIATIONS FROM ENGLISH
(a) ^ — This has two different sounds according to the kind of
vowel that precedes it.
1. After the bad- vowels tt, 0, U, tttt, it is guttural (far
back).
2. After tho front vow Is t, \, a, 3, U, tttt, ett, t\, and after
all consonants, it is palatal (farther front).
A practical hint for pronouncing this difficult sound is as follows:
Sound the preceding vowel very distinctly, then suddenly cease vocal-
izing and c^ntinue breathing. The right sound will always follow.
(Caution — Do not pronounce if like ^. The former is simply ft, pro-
nounced as in English bacfc, but more forcibly.)
ip) Q — At the beginning hard as in go. Medially and finally it
approaches *he ^ sounds, with the variations noted in (a),
(c) j resembles y in young.
(c?) ti resembles /.
(c) tQ resembles English v (but more loosely articulated).
(/) f(^ resembles sh in sTiould.
(g) f — At the beginning like English z, medially und finally like
escaping steam (so also ^ In combination with t, p, it
approaches f^ (but not qjite o forcibly).
(h) g = fs (this must be carefully observed, as the English z sound
is used for initial [ in German).
(i) Jig is nasalized as ng in singer, never like ng in hunger, except
in a few proper names. , ,
U) i\cn (from Latin) pronounced as though jtOtt, i.e., tsion.
(jc) ^g = X as in fox.
APPENDIX
231
DECLENSION
THE ARTICLE 1,l:»t«"«e.
If I. Definite— (a) Every case has a characteristic ending.
(6) Like the def. art. are declined the demonstra-
tive, relative, interrogative and indefinite
pronouns and strong adjectives.
(c) The def. art. and these pronouns are followed
by the weak declension of the adjective.
Definite Article
Demonstrative Pronoun
Singular Plural
Singular Plural
m. f. n. m. f. n.
m. f. n. m. f. n.
NOM.
bcr bie ta& bie
biefer biefc bie[c§ biefe
Gen.
be§ ber t>c^ ber
biefeS biefer bicfcS biefer
DAT.
bem bcr bent ben
biefem biefer biefem biefei?
AGO.
ben bie boS bie
biefen biefe biefeg biefe
II, Indefinite — (a) Three forms (nom. masc, and nom. and
ace. neut.) are uninflected.
(6) Like the indef. art. are declined the pos-
sessive pronouns and fctll.
(c) The indef. art. and the poss. pron. are
followed by mixed adjectives.
Indefinite Article
Singular
m. f. n.
N. ein eine ein
G. eineS einer eineS
D. einem einer einem
A. einen eine ein
Possessive Pronoun
Singular Plural
m. f. n. m. f. n.
mein meine mein meine
nteineS meiner meineS meiner
meinem meiner meinem meinen
meinen meine mein meine
232 APPENDIX
NOUNS
GENDER
13 As a rule the gender follows the natural sex. Ex., bct SD^ann,
tie d^au, Jio§ ^inb.
Exceptions: — (a) All nouns in ^cn and lein are neuter, regard-
less of their meaning: ba§ SWdbc^en, ba§ f^routcin, ha^Wann6)tn
(the little man).
(6) Occasionally one word forms an exception, as ha^ SBeib (the
woman).
14 Endings determine gender:
(a) Masc. : ct, Ultfi, i^ tfi — bcr S3Qc!er (baker), bcr grueling (spring),
hex SSiiterid^ (tyrant), bcr ^cifig (cage).
(5) Fem. : Ic, el, l^cit, itli, ft^ttft, «tt9, e,* in, if, ton — bic Sortie
(company), bie S3dcferci (bakery), bie f^rei^eit (freedom),
bic 2)an!barfeit (gratitude), bic f^reunbfd^oft (friendship),
bic SSo^nung (dwelling), bie g3lumc (flower), t>k ^0(i)in
(woman cook), bie £t)ri! (lyric poetry), bie ficftton
(lesson).
15 But few additional rules can be given. Most nouns must be
studied with the proper article without regard to rule.
(a) Masc. : 1. Names of seasons, months, days of week, ber ^rii^"
ling, ber ^anuar, ber 2)onnerjtag.
2. Monosyllabic nouns derived from the stems of strong
verbs, ber @ang (from ge:^en=walk).
(5) Fem. : Names of trees, flowers, most German rivers, bie ©idje
(oak), bie 9?ofe, bie SScfer; but bcr U^tin.
(e) Neut. : Substantive infinitives, and collectives formed with
prefix ge: ha^ 6e!^en (seeing), ha^ ©cbirge (the mountain
system). Almost every word ending in niS and fal:
ta§ ©e^eimnig (secret), ha^ S^idfal (fate).
16 A few nouns have two genders with difference of meaning
ttt S3anb (volume) tier 93unb (league)
bag S3anb (ribbon) bttS 93unb (bundle)
ber ©ee (lake) ber Xeil (part)
bie ©ee (sea) bag 2:eil (share)
•For masculines in C cf. 23 c.
APPENDIX
233
DECLENSION OF NOUNS
GENERAL.
1 7 (a) All feminines are uninflected in the singular.
(6) All nouns add n in the dat. pi.
iS
19
NUMBER OF DECLENSIONS
Sing. Pl.
I. Strong Gen. (e)8 i—,C,tV
II. Weak G. D. A. (c)rt All cases i (c)n
III. Mixed Gen. (c)8 ( (e)tt
I. Strong Declension
Endings: Gen. Sing. (e)§
Plurals — , t, tV
Plural, no ending (umlaut rare)
" e ( " more frequent)
"ft ( " always)
Classes
(3
20
tiass 1 1 Plurals —
Membership: (ct) Polysyllabic Masculines and Neuters ending in
cl, tn, tt.
(b) Polysyllabic Neuters ending in i^cn, Icin, and e.
(c) Two Feminines, bie aJJutter and bie Xod^ter.
Examples
(a)
(&)
Sing.
PL.
Sing.
PL.
NOM.
ber ©arten
bie ©arten*
t)a^ fjraulein
bie graulcin
Gen.
beg ©arteng
ber ©orten
be§ f^rciuleing
ber ^rdulein
DAT.
bent ©arten
ben ©drten
bent graulein
ben ^roulein
Ace.
ben (3arten
bie ©arten
Sing.
ha^ fjraulein
(c)
PL.
bie §raulein
NOM.
bie muttex
bie ajiiitter
Gen.
ber aJJntter
ber aJJiitter
Dat.
ber aJiutter
hen ajJiittent
Ace.
bie abutter
bie ajJuttec
♦ A number of nouns in this class take the umlaut in the plural. No rule
cao be given. Observe each noun carefully.
234
APPENDIX
21
Clas8 2p-«^-?^'^g-
Plurals
Membership: (a) Monosyllabic Masculines.
(6) A few monosyllabic feminines and neuters, as btc
^anb, bie SBanb, tie Wlau^, bie 8tabt, ba§ ^-a^r, ha^
^aax, ba§ ^f erb.
(c) A few polysyllabic masculines in Ig, tttg and Htlfl
and neuters in nU and fal, ber Sii«9ii"9/ ^^^ ^onig,
t>a& ©e^eimnig, ba§ ©c^icffal
NOM.
Gen.
DAT.
Ace.
(a)
Sing.
ber ©ol^n
be§ (Sotinetf
bent (So:^n(e)*
ben ©ot)n
PL.
bie ©ol^ne
ber (SoQne
ben ©o|nett
bie 8o^nc
(&)
sing,
Sing.
btc SSanb
ber SSanb
ber SKanb
bie SSanb
The omission of this C is a
PL.
bie SSanbet
ber SBcinbe
ben SBcinbett
bie SSanbc
♦ Monosyllables may take an t in the dat.
matter of euphony.
t AH feminines and many naasculines of this class take the umlant to form
the plural.
N.
G.
D.
A.
22
Sing.
be§ Sa^re§
bent ^a^r(e)
PL.
bie ^a^xt
ber Sa^re
ben Sat)ren
bie ^a^rc
Sing.
ber Mngting
be§ §iingUng8
bent ^iingling
ben ^tingling
(c)
PL.
^ungltnge
"iinglinge
iinglingctt
bie ^iinglingc
Class a J ^®^- ^^^S- (^)^
Liass 6 J Plurals tV
Membership: (a) Monosyllabic Neuters.
(6) A few monosyllabic masculines as ber SQiann, ber
aSolb, ber ©eift, ber SSurnt.
(c) Nouns in tttlll (mostly neuter, sometimes masculine).
(a)
Sing.
NOM.
ba§
§au§
Gen.
be§
§aufe8
DAT.
bent
§aufe
Ace.
bag
§aug
PL.
NOM.
bici
baufcr*
Gen.
ber.
|)aufcr
DAT.
ben
panfcnt
Ago.
bie,
gaufcr
Examples
(P)
Sing.
ber SlJJann
be§ 9!JJannc8
bent SO^anne
ben SD^ann
PL.
bie Wanntt
ber aPcanner
ben SKdnncrn
bie Wlanntv
(c)
Sing.
bo§ Stitertum
beg Slltertuntg
bent 5lltertunt
ha^ 2lltertuni
PL.
bie Stitertiintcr
ber 5tltertiintcr
ben 2tltertumettt
tie Slltertiimer
•Plurals always have the umlaut If the stem vowel permits. This class con
tains no feminines.
APPENDIX 235
23 n. Weak Declension
Singular (c)tt (except in nom.)
Plural (e)tt
Membership: (a) Polysyllabic Feminines (except WlvLitex, Sod^ter),
(6) Some monosyllabic feminines — bie U!^r, bie i^rau,
bie Slrt, bie S3a^n, bie i8urg, bie ^flic^t, bie ©aat.
(c) Masculines in e, ber ^nabe, ber -Su^ge, ber ®attc, ber
9?abe, ber §afe, ber fiotue, ber §eibe.
(d) A limited number of masculines that have lost this
e, ber 9Jfenfc^, ber ^etb, ber ^irt, ber giirft, ber ®raf,
ber ^err, ber ^axx, ber £)d^§, ber S3ar, ber %ou
(e) Masculines of foreign origin with the accent on the
last syllable, as ber ©tubent, ber eiefant, ber tatnerab,
ber mutuant
Examples
(a) (6) (c) (d)
Singular
Nom. bie geber bie %xavL ber ^nabe ber 9Kenf(!^
Gen. ber fjeber ber grau t>e^ ^nabett beS 9[Renicl(iett
DAT. ber gebcr ber grau bent ^nabcn bem 90^enfd^ett
Ago. btc geber bie fjrau ben Sl^nabctt ben aJienfd^ett
Plural
Nom. tie gebcrti bie %xautn* bie ^nabcn bie ^en\6)tn
Gen. bet fjebem ber graucn ber tnabcn ber SD^enfc^en
DAT. ben fjebern tim %xautn ben ^naben ben SKenfdiett
Ago. bie geberti bie iJrauett bie ^nabcn bie SKenfd^ett
♦ The weak nouns never take the umlaut to form the plural. No neuters
are weak.
Singular (e) Plural
Nom. ber (Stubent bie (Stubentm
Gen. be§ ©tubentm ber ©tubentcn
DAT. bem (Stubentctt ben ©tubentm
Ace. ben ©tubentm bie ©tubentctt
®er ^err (the gentleman or the master) takes tl to form the G.,
D., A. singular and ett to form all the cases of the plural.
ber fierr bie §errctt
be§ |)ecrn ber ©errcn
bem ^errn ben ^errm
ben ^errn bie £)errm
236 APPENDIX
24 III* Mixed Declension
Singular Strong Gen. Sing. (c)8
Plural Weak Plural (c)tt
25 Membership: (a) Masculines in e that have become contami-
nated with Strong I., ber ©laubc, bcr ^ame, hex
S3u(^[tabe*
(6) Some monosyllabic masculines, ber ©c^merj,
ber ©ee, ber ©taat, ber ©tro^t.
(c) Some neuters, t>a^ ^uge, bo§ Df)r, bo§ S3ctt,
t>a^ ^emb, ba§ @nbe.
Examples
(a) (&) (c)
Singular / — ^^s
NoM. bcr 9?ame(tt) ber ©Amer^ ba§ §erj ha^ 5Iugc
Gen. beg Sf^amend* beg ©c^mergeg beg ^er^ett^* beg Stugeg
Dat. bem Seamen bem ©c^tnerj bent ^ergctt bent 5Iuge
Ace. ben Seamen ben ©d)nter5 bag ^erj bag 2luge
Plural
NoM. bie SfJontent ^ie ©c^ntergctt bie feergett bte 5lugen
Gen. ber S^iantcji ber ©c^ntergcn ber ©ergctt ber Slugeji
Dat. ben S^Jamett ben ©d)tner§ett ben ^ergctt hen ^lugen
Ace. bie ^anten bie ©d^ntergeil bie ^ergett bie Slugeu
*Note that the contamination of these two classes has produced in all the
nouns under (a) a genitive in tlS. In the noun Ptt^, the genitive form is
analogical with that of (o).
t No umlaut in plural; nofeminines.
A few nouns form two plurals with difference of meaning :
bie SSorte = (connected speech) bie S3onfe = (benches)
bie SBorter = (disconnected words) bie $8anfett = (banks for money)
26 PROPER NOUNS
Places— Gen. g. S)ie ©inttJO^ner Serling (the inhabitants of Berlin).
If the noun ends with g, g, or j no case ending is affixed. The
relation is expressed by means of a preposition — bie @intt)£>^ncr
tion^atig.
Persons— {a) With the SLTticle—uninflected.
^tv Seinridb
M ^einriq
bem ^einrid)
bctt §einri^
(&) Without the article— Genitive in g or (c)tt8t ^einric^g,
gran^igfag, Souifcng, SKarieng, ^^ri^cnS, ^anfens.*
♦ If the noun ends in t, 8, J, or J, (e)ng is added to form Xi^e genitive, la
all other cases only g.
APPENDIX
237
(a)
ib)
declined like definite article.
Plural
toir i^r fie (©ie)*
un[er euer il^rec (^l^rct)
ung eud^ i^ncn (^l^ncn)
un§ end) [le (@ie)
27 PRONOUNS
Personal and Keflexive.
Possessive declined like indefinite article.
Demonstrative
Indefinite . . .
Interrogative
Relative ....
28 ^Ii6 Personal Pronoun
Singular
ra. f. n.
N. id^ bu er fie c§
G. meiner beiner feiner i^rer feiner
D. mir bir i^m i^r il^m
A. mic^ bid^ i^n fie eg
♦ Used In conventional conversation for 3d pers. sing, and plural.
Reflexives
29 Singular Plural
m. f. n. m. f. n.
NoM. — — _ _ _ _
Gen. _ _ _ _ _ _
DAT. mir bir fidb unS euA fii
Ace. mid) bid) fiq ung tuq \i
30 The other pronouns may be divided into two classes, according
as they follow the declension of the definite or that of the indefinite
article (cf. 11 and 12).
Possessives
31 The possessive pronouns follow the declension of the indefi-
nite article (cf. 12).
f. n. Pl.
unf(e)re unfer unj(e)re
nnf(e)rer unfer(e)§ unf(e)rcr
unf(e)rer unfer (e)m unfer (e)tt
unf(e)re unfer unf(e)re
* When two unaccented C's occur in successive syllables, one may be omitted.
32 The possessives are : mein, bein, fein, i!^r, unfer, euer. In inflection
they agree in number, gender, and case with the noun which they
modify. For the possessive + noun may be substituted : ber, bie, t>a^
meinige; ber, bie, ba§ meine; meiner, meine, meine§. The declension of
these forms is given under adjectives (cf. 43 and 44).
33 Possessive compounds— With the prepositions UieQett and l^aKcV
and itm . . . MUn (on account of, for the sake of) the genitive stem
and the suffix ct forms a compound:
meinettoeaen, meinetfialber, um meinetioitten (for mv sake).
NOM.
Gen.
DAT.
Acc.
m.
unfer
unfer(c)g*
unfer(e)m
unfer(e)tt
238
APPENDIX
34
Demonstratiyes and Indefinites
Sing.
PL.
ber
beffen
bem
ben
bie
berctt
ber
bie
beffen
bem
ba§
bic
beretl
benett
bie
The demonstrative and indefinite pronouns are: ber, biefcr, jcncr,
felber, foli^er, mandjer, jeber, jebtoeber, jeglicfier, einer. The only deviation
from the inflection of the definite article is in Jjer which has taken on a
distinctive su^x.in the genitive singular and genitive and dative plural.
The Demonstrative Pronoun
Sing. Pl.
N. biefer =e =e^ biefc
G. biefeg =er ^e§ biefer
D. biefem ^er *em biefen
A. biefen =e -e^ btefe
35 For regular demonstratives may be substituted berfelbe, ber^
jcnige. In the declension of these compounds the first part takes
the declension of the article, the second of the weak adjective (cf. 42).
Other indefinites are: jemanb (somebody), jebermann (everybody),
niemanb (nobody), man (corresponding to the French on, not easily
translated, man fagt=they say). These are generally uninflected,
though they may take (e)§ in the genitive (except mtttt, which is used
only in the nominative, taking eittem and etttett in dat. and ace).
Ex. —Gen. jebermann^; niemanbe§, jemanbeg.
36 Relative and Interrogative
Relative: toclAer, toex, tt)a§, ber.
Interrog.: tt)elc6er? tt)er? ttjaS? ttJa§ fiir etn?
Relative
Sing.
Sing.
m. & f . n.
Sma.
N. toetd^er toeld^e njetc^eS
ttjer h)a§
ber bie ba^
G. beffen
beren beffen*
meffen (ttjeffen) beffen beren beffen
D. ttJelA
A. ttjclc^
em n^elcber n)eld)em
en toelc^e melc^eg
mem mem
bem ber bem
men ma§
ben bie ba§
Plural
Plural
Plural
N.
hjeld^c
—
bie
G.
beren
—
beren
D.
tt)elAen
toeldhc
—
benen
A.
—
bie
♦The genitive of the relative tiiel^et is not used; the genitive of the relative
Oet has taken its place. For other deviations from inflection of def: art. cf. 34.
Interrogative
37
Sing.
Without Noun
NOM.
n?el(her 'C ^eS
mer and ma*
ma§
iir einer -e =e8
Gen.
welAeg ==er ^eS
same as rel.
ma§
iir eineg -er *e8
DAT.
njelffiem =er *em
mag
iir einem 'tt 'tm
Ago.
ttjeld^en 't =c8
ma§
iiir einen =e t&
PL. (m. f. n.)
With Noun
NOM
tt)elAe
ttja§ fiir tin, eine, eltt
Gen.
tt)el*ef
ma§ fiir eineS, ^er, ==e§
Dat.
ttjelAett
ma§ fiir etnem, -er, -m
Ago.
ttJeiSc
toa^ fiir
etnen, -t, cm
APPENDIX 239
38 ADJECTIYES
r Strong — when used without article or pronoun.
8 Declensions j Weak — after definite article or pronoun.
\ Mixed — after indefinite article or pronoun.
39 Strong adj. — without article; declined like definite article
Singular
N. guter 9Kann gute f^rau guteS tinb
G. gutc^ 9D^anne§* gutetr f^rau gutc§ ^inbeS*
D. (iuUm SPfJanne guter i^tau gutem ^inbe
A. guten SQJann gutc %tavL guteS ^inb
Plural
N. gutc Wl'dnnex, f^rauen, ^inber
G. gutct aJldnner, grauen, ^inber
D. gutctt SO^annem, i^xauen, ^inbem
A. gutc Wlannex, fjrauen, ^iuber
♦ In gen. sing. masc. and neut. the weak ending (Ctt) is often used instead of
eg to avoid recurrence of the sibilant. -Fa;.— f(f)ted)tCtt SBaffer^.
40 Weak adj. — after definite article or pronoun (inflectional syl-
lables e or Ctt).
Singular
N. ber gutc SO^ann bie gutc %tau bag gutc ^iub
G. beg gutctt "ifRanne^ ber gutcn grau beg gutctt ^iube8
D. bcm gutctt SJiauue ber gutcn %xau bem gutcn ^inbe
A. ben gutcn SD^ann bie gutc fjrau bag gutc ^inb
Plural
N. bie gutcn Wannex, grauen, ^inber
Q. ber gutcn 9Jianuer, §rauen, ^tuber
D. ben guten SD^aunern, ^rauen, ^iubern
A. bie gutcn SJidnner, ^rauen, ^inber
4 1 Mixed adj.— a/^er indefinite article and pronoun. {Weak when
article is inflected, strong when article is not inflected.)
Singular
N. cin guter 9JJanu eine gutc i^tan eiu gutcS ^inb
Q. eiueg gutcn Wanned einer gutcn gtau etneg gutcn ^iubeg
D. eiuem guten SD^aune einer guten §rau einem gutcn ^inbe
A. cinen gutcn aJiann eine gutc i^xau ein gutc0 ^inb
Plural
N. feine gutcn Wdnmx, i^xauen, ^inber
Q. feiner gutcn Mannex, grauen, ^inber
D. feiuen gutcn SQidnueru, grauen, ^inbern
A. letne gutcn 2Jidnuer, g^^auen, ^inber
240
APPENDIX
42 The demonstrative compounds that are composed of hex, tie, hai,
plus the adj. felb or jenig are declined like weak adjectives. (Not in
frequent use.)
N.
G.
D.
A.-
berjentge
be^jenigett
bemjenigett
benjenigen
Singular
biejenige
berjenigeii
berjenigen
biejenige
bagjenige
be^jeuigctt
bemjenigett
ba^jenige
PL.
biejenigett
berjenigett
benjenigett
biejenigett
43 1. So also are declined the possessives ber, tile, bttS tttettte or
meitttge and the indefinite tier ettte.
Singular
N.
G.
D.
A.
N.
G.
D.
A.
ber meine
be§ meinett
bem meinett
ben meinett
bie meinett
ber meinett
ben meinett
bie meinett
bie meinige bfl§ eine
bee meinigett be§ einett
ber meinigett bem einett
bie meinige • bag eine
Plural (all genders) v
bie meinigett " bie einett
ber meinigett ber einett
ben meinigett ten einett
bie meinigett bie einett
2. ^and)ex, melc^er, [oli^er are occasionally used without the end-
ing: manc^, tt)e(d), [old^. In that case the adj. following would have
the strong ending.
Singular
N. manc^ guter Wami
G. manc^ guteg(ett) Tlanne^
D. mond^ gutetti SO^anne
A. manc^ gntett 3Kann
Plural
mand) gnte 3Kanner
mand) guter Wannet
mand) gutett Tlannetn
mand) gate 9)ianner
3. The strong declension is also used after a personal pronoun :
ill armer 2Kann! SSa§ l^at man bir-, tn armeg ^inb, getan?
4. Also after the indeclinable pronouns and numerals: etttia^,
ttir^tS, afferlet, etc: etnjag guteS 2Ba[fer; aUerlei fc^one ©ac^en; nic^t^
SBa^reg.
APPENDIX
241
44 The possessives and the indefinite pronoun clllCt when used
without preceding article or following noun are inflected like the
strong adjective.
Singular
N.
meincr -t "t%
eincr
einc
eincg
G.
meineg -tx ti
cincg
eincr
eincg
D.
nteinem=er=cm
eincm
eincr
eincm
A.
meinen 't =e8
einctt
einc
eincS
Pl. (all genders)
(No Plural)
N.
meinc
G.
meincr
»
D.
ntetnctt
A.
meinc
■ bcr, biC;
\)a^ meinc
// //
„ meinigc
us:
This is mine, etc.=
• 3)a8 \\i ■
mciner
=C 'C^
mcin, bein, fein, unfcr, cuer
t (but never hai ift i^r).
The pronominal adjectives oHetlei, tjielerlei, mand^crlci, bcrlci,
fotc^ctlci, attcr^anb were originally attributive genitives (as the gen,
ending cr still shows). They are now used as simple, indeclinable
adjectives or as substantives. Ex.—^HtxU\ Scute, ^ii) l^abc dielfTlei
ju tun.
5
Ifnmerals
1 cin8
13 brei^e^n
50 fiinfsig
2 3tt)ci
14 bierge^n
60 fec^aig
8 bret
15 fiinfjc^n
70 [iebaig
4 bier
16 fec^se^n
80 acfitgig
5 filnf
17 [iebge^n
90 neungig
6fed)g
18 ac^tge^n
100 ^unbert
7 fieben
19 neungel^n
121 ^unbert einunbjnjanjig
8 a6)i
20 attjansig
200 gnjei^unbert
9 neun
21 einunbgnjangig
1,000 taufenb
10 ge^n
22 gtoeiunbgWangig
1,121 taufenb ein^unbert cin«
11 elf
30 breifeig
unbgttJcfngig
12 8tt)oIf
40 bierjig
1,000,000 einc Shimon
242 APPENDIX
46 The cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except eltt?, which,
when used adjectively, has the forms of cttt, CittC, Citt, the same as the
indefinite article. (Occasionally gtuel and bret are found inflected in
gen. : gttJcier ; and dat. : breictt).
47 ^unbert and taufenb may be used substantively and are then
declined. Ex. — ^unbcrtc toaxen ba (Hundreds were there). @r f^at XaU''
fcnben unred^t getan (He did wrong to thousands). They are then
declined like the plural of the definite article (e, er, eil, C).
48 Ordinals
Ordinals are formed from cardinals by the addition of the suflSx
t to all numbers from 2 to 19 — bcr neunge^^nte, and ft from 20 on—
bet stponsig^e.
The ordinal of eitlS is erji (ber crfte)
" brel " britt (ber brittc)
They may be declined strong, weak, or mixed, but can not be used
without an inflection.
Henry II = §einri(i) ber Bh^eUe
§einricf)§ beg S^^itetl
^einric^ bent Bl^^itm
^cinrid^ ben 3^eitctt
The ordinal adverbs are: crftcttS, 5tt)eiteil8, brtttettS (first, secondly,
thirdly, etc.).
49 ADTEBBS
Adverbs do not differ in form from adjectives, except that they are
not declinable. Often they may be compared like adjectives.
50 Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs
The regular comparison of adjectives is formed by adding er and
(e)P to the stem of the word, and is usually accompanied by umlaut.
lang
Ifinger
langft (ber langfte, am langflen)
9ro6
grbfeer
gr5§t (8 omitted for euphony)
hitj
fiirger
fiirseft
tniibe
miibcr
miibeft
APPENDIX
243
51 Without umlaut:
flat flarer flarft
fd^Iau fdjlauer fc^lau(c)ft
bunfel bunfler bunfelft
52 Irregular Comparison
(a) Change of 1^ and ^ (d) is used finally and before CQOSonants, ^
is medial) :
na^c nd^er naii^ft
(b) Change in stem: ^
gut bcffcr beft
btel mel^r mcift
53
Declension of Comparative and Superlative
The Comparative is declined like the
syllable being added to the er. ^a?. —
Strong
beffcrer SBein
befferc8(ett) SBeineg
befferem SBeine
bcfferen SSein
beffere SBeine
beiferet 28einc
befferen SBeinen
bcifere SSeine
Weak
bie frf)onerc %xan
ber [c^onerctt Stau
ber fc^oneren f^rau
bie [d^onere grau
bie fd^onerm t^i^auen
ber
ben
bie
positive, the inflectional
Mixed
ein ^5^ere8 ^Ci\x%
eineg l^o^eren ^aufeS
einem p^eren ^aufc
ein l^bl^ereg ^auS
^o^ere §aufer
^o^erer ^aufer
l^ol^ercn ^aufern
l^o^ere ^aufer
54 The Superlative can be used regularly only with the definite
article, hence is always weak.
Ex.—\itx nodifte g^ii^ling bie ndc^ften f^i^ii^Ungc
beg ndd^ften iJrii:^ling§ ber nddijictt ^rii^Ungc
bent ndd^fien ?5i^ii^Ung ben nddjftm f^rii^lingen
ben ndcl)|ien grii^ling bie nddiften fJ^ii^linQC
55 In the predicate the phrase am en may be substituted.
Ex—^axi ift icr Btofetc
or
^arl \\i am orofeteti
8m gtii^ten, originally adverbial, can be used only in the predicate^
never attributively.
244 APPENDIX
56 Both bcr fitdfetc and am GrofftCtt are relative in meaning, i. e.,
they suggest a comparison with other objects of the same class, ^atl
tft bet fitdfete or om grdfetctl means that he is larger than the other boys
before mentioned. When the superlative is used to designate merely
a high degree of the quality, vsrithout definite comparison, we substi-
tute for the attributive superlative fttt^etft or pii^ft "1- the positive.
{Ex.—%Vi^tx\i Grofec SSaume toadifen im ®orten, or pci^ft anocttc^mc Seute
toaren gugcgen.) For the adverbial phrase am Ibcftett we substitute atlfS
fiejie, but this can never be used adjectively. {Ex.—<B\t [ang aufS Ibefte.)
Hence we have four forms of the superlative—
Relative Absolute
Attributive ber beftc QU§erft (^od^ft) gut
Adverbial am beften auf§ befle
Relative
@r tft ber bcfle ©chiller in ber ^Ia[fe (He is the best pupil in the class)
©r ijt am ficfJett (He is the best)
Absolute
(gr ift ein ait|;erft gutcr Si^iiler (He is an exceedingly good pupil)
(£r ftubiert aufg bcfte (He studies his very best)
Caution
It is to be observed that this difference is not so distinctly marked
in English, hence great care must be taken in translation.
Thus, "A most remarkable man appeared , " becomes in German:
„@in iiufecrft tnerfttJiirbiger Wann erfd^ien."
But, "The most remarkable man I ever saw," is:
^er merfttiiirbifliJe SO^ann, ben id^ je gefe^en.''
The English " She sings best of all," " She is the best," and "She
sings her best" are carefully distinguished in German:
„<B\t fingt am beften/'
„@ie ift bie befte" or ,,am beften/'
;,(5ie fingt auf§ befte."
**She sings most delightfully" is:
„(Sie fingt auf§ ^errlic^fte»"
APPENDIX 245
57 VERBS
r Weak — Tense change produced by suffix le, t
Two Conjugations j Strong — " " " by vowel altera-
( tion in stem
58 PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERB are Pvcs. Infinitive, Preterite, Perf.
Participle.
Weak loben lobte gelobt :jj^. ,.
Strong fingen fang gefungen
(Note that in both conjugations the infinitive ends with ett and the parti-
ciple begins with gf.)
59 There are five modes; indicative, subjunctive, conditional,
IMPERATIVE, infinitive
present
preterite
PERFECT
PLUPERFECT
FUTURE
FUTURE PERFECT
60 There are six tenses:
{ Simple
( Auxiliaries ^aben or feln + perfect participle of verb
J Auxiliary tuerbctt + infinitive
6 1 Tense Auxiliaries
Principal Parts
tfahen l^attc gc^abt
fein tvax gemcfcn
mcrbcn ttjurbe (marb) geworbcu
1. I^abett is weak, but slightly irregular in the preterite, the
stem consonant being assimilated to the following t. The same
irregularity will be found in the 2d and 3d sing. pres. indie, (btt l^ttfi,
cr ^at).
2. tuetbtn has two forms for the pret. sing. ; tDUrbc is preferable
in prose.
8. All three verbs are used as independent verbs, or as auxili-
aries. As verbs they have full inflection in all modes and tenses and
mean respectively to have, to be, to become.
4. Observe that j^aftctt (the verb) takes j^aftett (the auxiliary) to
form the perfect tense, while fcitl and Uiettiett take feitt (cf . 62).
W o
fa B
W «
0. « Si
a fi
tj 'i* r*
ii >-> 5^
fi ^;^
1=1
o
cu
fi
w
^
C
i
jp
fe
fi fi
fi
!f^
*->
fi^jE
ft: fc
g
f
S
a
M
M
P
OQ
o
o
i
fi s a
fi fi
fi'^fifil fifis^sfia 2
% &
7Q 1
fi a
H g
W 05
fc fc ft t
No^oiH-^"^^^ fi fi a
fa § •
Oh CSS ^
*^ «-> "IT
^ « « a
fc t fc
rf ^ s fis^
r§^^
^ a K «^ •'^ *->
«
« e iti
HH >o >o '^— - *"" i^
£ ^1^
I"
Si
« rt *-»
a ^ix.
fe ft ft
■9 -^ ^
^ '-» w
g fi fi fi g fi fi
Is
>g S ^ 3 ^ !^
fc fc ft
«a-SsC^«a P^-g-s fian
sErj3-^j_^^=*^sS3-p^i3i5a v»fi
« ^
a a
IS
fie
aS'ig.
a a
» a
» b-
g 03 ti ma
53 fits tt'^
5 S fii^-iE
'B^ 5 H
f^ >o 1" ** -e S J
f^ fi fi e ? s -
if
eS g a a a * ft
o
■g ft fe ft ft ft
go «
K a -i^ S -M s
S fi B
^-■^U ^ B S3
»• ft e ft « a
^ a t^ ^ ,, ja jB ^
>0 »0 vO S
^^^ e^ * * * * *
J ' ' I t ^ ' a ft . H «. ft ft ft ft ft
•lSrB-g|?^i|iSB5§i
*« ^ -c^
,000
O vO >0
> — sC^ -iS-
--*2 'B ^ :« ."S 53
C
o
^ -
'B' 5 M p S& .2i
jti- o •*:* rs D '** <u
.-*: .-^ t: ••« =« ** -^ fc* «-
:a :<3 rs
«^2
>Q S
„ -Si
M-^
/3 .
Bis
fi i^"^
248
APPENDIX
63 Conditional
I. tc^ njurbe tjahen* \6) ttJurbe fein (etc.)
IL ic^ touvte Qet)aht tjahcn* id) tvuxhe genjefen fein (etc.)
I. ic^ luiirbc merben (etc.)
II. ic^ toiirbe geirorbcn [cin (etc.)
64 Imperatives
t)ahe (bii) fei (hu) toerbe
]^ab(e)t (il)r) fcib (i^r) hjcrbet (xp)
^aben ©ie [eien ©ie toerben ©ie
65 Infinitives
Pres. Ijahen fein hJc^rben
Perf. gc^abt l^oben gcircfen fein 0cn)orben fein
66 Participles
Pres. l^obcnb fcienb hjerbenb
Perf. ge^abt gettefen genjorben
67 Use of Tense Auxiliaries
I. V ■ y form perfect and pluperfect tenses.
{forms future and future perfect tenses,
passive voice,
conditional mode.
68 Use of labctt
^ 1. All active transitive verbs.
l^dbftt \ 2. All intransitives, except those that express
\ transition of place or condition.
69 llcpresentative Verbs that take fcltt
1. Transition of Place
abreifcn = to start on a journey
auffte^en = to get up .
bcgegnen = to meet
cilen = to hurry (but fld^ cilctt
takes ^aben)
erfd^einen = to appear
f al^ren = to ride, to go
faKen = to fall (but the causative
f dttctt takes I^aben)
♦The full paradigm is:
tc^ tDiirbe Ijaben (ge^obt l^aben)
bu tt)iirbeft „ „ „
ettciirbe » « »
flicgen = to fly
fliel^en = to flee
flicgen = to flow
fofgen = to follow
ge^en = to go
gfeiten (ou§gtciten)=to glide, to slip
frimmen = to climb
ffettern = to clamber
fommen = to come
njtr ttJiirben l^aben (gel^abt l^aben)
i^r ttJiirbct „ h n
fie toiirben „ „ „
APPENDIX 249
frlcd^cn = to crawl fc^ttjimmen = to swim
laufen = to run finfen = to sink
reiten = to ride < f|)ringen = to spring
rennen = to run fteigen = to climb
rinnen = to flow fturgen = to fall, to dash
frf)feicf)en = to creep treten = to step
fcf)reiten = to step toeid^en = to withdraw
jie^cn = to wander (but jie^en = to draw, takes ^aben)
70 2. Transition of Condition
aufttJQC^en = to wake up (but ttja^ gebeit)en = to flourish
d)en takes ^aben) gelingen = to succeed
einfc^Iafen = to go to sleep (but genefen = to recover
fj^lafctt takes l^aben) gtiicfen = to succeed
entbtii^en = to burst into bloom fd)eitern = to fail
(but Un^tn takes l)ahen) fc^melgen = to melt
entfcf)Iafen = to go to sleep, to die fterben = to die
ertrinfen = to drown tjerarmen = to become impover-
erujac^en = to awaken ished
erfrieren = to freeze to death tjer^ungern = to die of hunger
tDai)\en = to grow
The verbs fcitt and blei^Ctt also take the auxiliary feitt, although
the transition idea is not so plainly apparent as in the other verbs of
the above lists.
7 I Inflection of Verbs
(a) The inflection of weak and of strong verbs is identical, except
in the formation of the preterite and of the perf. participle as shown
above. The personal endings and tense auxiliaries are the same for
both.
(5) Exception — Strong verbs with the stem vowel c change this
e into I or ie in 2d and 3d pers. sing, indie, pres. and 2d imper. ; those
with the stem vowel a change this to a in the 2d and 3d pers. sing,
indio. pres., but not in imperative. So also tttt in verbs becomes iiU-
72 Subjunctive Mode— The present subjunctive shows none of
the irregularities of syncopation or umlaut that we have observed in
the indicative. It is formed regularly upon the present stem.
In the preterite a distinction is observed between the strong and
weak verbs, the former taking the umlaut, the latter not (except in
Note— On the following pages will be found the indie, and subj. conjugation
Of weak and strong verbs side by side to emphasize the difference in ending; one
▼exb in each case illustrating the l^aBctt verbs and one the f eiit verbs.
250
APPENDIX
73
Weak Verb with j^aBm
Indicative
SUBJUNCTIVB
PRES.
i^ licbe
bu liebft
er liebt
i(^ liebte (licbe)
t>vi Uefitcft (liebeft)
er liebe
toir lieben
t^r liebt
fie lieben
tPtr UeBtett (lieben)
t^r llcfttet (liebct)
fie Ucbten (lieben)
Pret.
i(^ liebte
bu liebtcft
er liebte
id^ liebte
bu liebtcft
er liebte
ttJtr liebtcn
i^r liebtet
fie liebten
toir liebtcn
il^r liebtet
fie liebten
Perf.
td^ f^ahe gelicbt
bu ^aft „
er iiat
tt)ir liaben „
i^r i)aU „
fie ^aben „
ic^ Wit gelicbt (^abe)
bu ^abeft „
er i)cCbt „
toir ptten „ (^aben)
i^r^iittft . (^abct)
fie liittm ,, (^abcn)
Plup.
\<S) ^attc gelicbt
bu^attcft „
ex ^atte „
xoxx fatten „
i^rl^attet „
fieliatten „
id^ l^atte gelicbt
bu ^<iMt\i „
er ^cittc
toirpttcn „
i^r ^attct „
fie fatten „
Put,
\6) ttjerbe lieben
bu toirft ,,
er ttjirb „
ic^ ttiiirbe lieben (tocrbe)
bu toerbcft „
er tocrbe „
ttjirwerbcn „
i^r ttJcrbct „
fie ttjerben „
toirtoiittiett „ (tocrben)
i^r toitrbet „ (tocrbet)
fie murlictt „ (tocrben)
FuT. Perf
. \6) werbe geliebt ^aben
bu ttJirft „
er hJirb „
id^ ttiiirbe gelicbt ^aben (tocrbe)
bu toerbcft „
er tocrbe „
ttJir toetben „
i^r ttJcrbet „
fie ttjcrben „
toir toitrben „ (tocrben)
i^r ttiiirbct ,, (tocrbet)
fie toiirben « (tocrben)
APPENDIX 251
'4
Strong Verb with ^ahttt
Indicative
Subjunctive
Pees.
tc^fe^c
hu fie^ft
cr [ie^t
id) ftt^e (fcfic)
bu fe^eft
er fe^c
ttir fefien
i^rfe^t
fie fc^en
tDir fii^en (fetien)
i^r fii^ct (fefiet)
fie fft^tn (fe^cn)
Pret.
crfa^
id) fd^e
bu fa^efi
er fa^c
ttJir fa^cn
t^r \ai)t
fie fa^en
iDir fa^en
i^r fo^ct
fie fa^en
Perf.
id} f)ahe gcfe^cn
bu W n
cr ^at
id) Ijattf gefc^cn {^aU)
tvi ^abeft „
er ^aU
ttjir l^oben „
i^r fiabt „
fie ^aben „
tDir \}iiiit}x „ (^aben)
it)r \iiiiti „ (fiabet)
fie Hfitten „ (^aben)
Plup.
id} ^attc gefc^en
bu^attcft „
er ^atte ;,
id^ ptte gefe^en
bu ^Qtteft „
er ptte
tuir fatten „
t^r^attct „
fie fatten „
tDirl^Qttcn „
i^r ^attet ,,
fie fatten „
Fur.
id) tDcrbc fc^cn
\iVi tDirft „
er tDirb „
id^ tuitrbe fe^en (tDcrbe)
\iVi tDcrbeft „
cr tDcrbe „
tDir tDcrben „
i^r tDcrbet „
fie tDcrbcn „
tDir ttiitrliett „ (tDcrben)
i^rttiitrbet „ (tDcrbet)
fie tuitrliett „ (tDcrben)
FtJT. Perf
. id} tDcrbe gcfe^cn ^abcn
bu tDirft „
er tDirb „
id^ ttiiirtie gefe^en ()aben (tDcrbe)
\iVi tDcrbeft „
er tDcrbe „
tDir tDcrben „
i^r tDcrbet „
fie tDcrbcn „
tDir toiiriJCtt „ (tDcrben)
i^r ttiiirbct „ (tDcrbet)
fie ttitrtim /, (tocrben)
252
APPENDIX
75 Weak Verb
Indicative
Pres. id} folgc
bu folgit
er folgt
toix folgen
i^r folgt
fie folgen
Pret. \6) folgtc
t>u folgteft
er folgte
hJir folgten
il^r folgtet
fie folgten
Perf td^ bin gefolgt
bu bift „
er ift
n)ir finb „
i^r feib „
fie finb „
Plup. id^ wax gefolgt
\)u toacit „
er ttjar „
njir ttjaren „
it|r tt)ar(e)t „
fie njaren „
Fur. x6) ttJerbe folgen
bu n)irft „
er njirb „
h)ir ttjerben „
i^x tt)erbet „
fie ttjerben „
Fur. Perf. id) toerbe gefolgt fein
bu h)irft „
er toirb „
ttJtr tt)erben „
il^r tuerbet „
lie njerben „
with feltt
Subjunctive
id) folfitc (forge)
t'u folfitcft (foloeft)
cr folgc
h)ir folgtm (folgen)
il)r folgtet (forget)
fie folgten (forgen)
id^ forgte
bu forgteft
er forgte
ftir f orgten
i^r f orgtet
fie forgten
id) fei geforgt
bu feift „
er fei
h)ir feien „
i^r feiet „
fie feien „
td^ ware gefolgt
bu hjareft „
er todre ;,
n)ir ttjoren „
i^x n)Qret „
fie ttjaren „
id) tttitrbe forgen (ttjerbc)
t)u ttjerbeft „
er njerbe „
toir toitrtiett « (ttjerben)
tl^r toiirbet ,, (werbet)
fie ttjiiriiett „ (werben)
id^ tturbe geforgt fein (njerbe)
bu ttjerbeft
er tt)erbe
njir toitrbett « (roerben)
i^r ioitriiet „ (toextet)
fie tourben „ (njcrben)
APPENDIX
253
6
Strong Verb with feltt
Indicative
Subjunctive
Pres.
ic^ fane
icf) fide (fafle)
bu faUyt
\iVi f afleft
er f oEt
er faHe
toir fallen
hJir flcIen (fallen)
i^r faUt
ilir fldet (faCet)
fie fallen
fie Helen (fallen)
PRET.
i^fiel
ic^ fiele
bu fielft
bu fieleft
erfiel
cr fielc
toir fielen
hJir fielen
i^r fielt
i^r fietet
fie fielen
fie fielen
Perf.
id} bin gefaHen
id^ fei gefoHen
bu bift „
bu feieft „
er ift
er fei
toir finb „
XQ\x feien ,,
i^r feib „
tf)r feiet „
fie finb „
fie feien „
Plup.
id) war gefallcn
id} ttjore gcfallen
bu njarft „
bu toareft „
cr toat „
er ttjare „
Xoxx xoaxtn „
ft)ir tt)aren „
i^r tt)ar(e)t „
i^r ttjoret „
fie waren „
fie ttjaren „
Fur,
icf) ttjerbe faOcn
id) toitrbe fallen (ttierbc)
bu njirft „
bu toerbeft ,,
er tt)irb „
er hjerbe „
ttJir ttjerben „
toir tnitrben „ (werben)
t^r luerbet „
i^r ttiiirbct „ (njerbet)
fie ttjerben „
fie ttiiirbett „ (luerben)
FuT. Perf
. id^ ttJerbe gefaflen fein
id} toiirbe gefaflen fein (n)erbe)
bu ttjirft „
tw. tt)erbeft „
cr toirb „
er toerbe „
toir ttjerben „
tuir ttiiiriiett „ (ttjerben)
i^r n)erbet
i^r ttitrbet „ (luerbet)
fie ttierben „
fie mitrben „ {xo^titn)
254
APPENDIX.
77 Conditional
Weak
I. i^ njiirbe UeBctt*
II. id) tciirbe gcUeBt laBttt
I. id) iDiirbe folgett
XL ic^ iDiirbe gefolfit feltl
Imperative
liebe (bu) fotge (bu)
neb(e)t (i^r) forg(e)t (i^r)
lieben ©ic folgen @ie
Infinitives
KcBen fofgen
gelicbt ^obm geforgt feln
Participles
liebcnb fofgcnb fel^enb
geliebt gefotgt gefe^en
78 Passive Voice
Strong
id) ttJiirbe feljctt
ic^ iviirbe Qeje^en ^attn
id) tuiirbe faHen
id^ ttjitrbe gefttaeu feln
Pres.
Perf.
Pres.
Perf.
fie^ (bu)
fe^(e)t (i^r)
fel^en ©ic
fel^en
gcfc^en j^aHen
faUe (bu)
fall(e)t (i^r)
faflen ©ie
faKcn
gefollen feln
fallenb
gefaHcn
Form: conjugation of toerben -j- perf. part, of verb.
Indicative
Pres. id^ toerbe gel^ort
bu tiiirfl „
er tiilrb ,,
ttjirtoerben „
il^r ttierliet „
fie ttierlictt „
Pret. id^ tQurbe gc^ort
bu ttmrlieiii „
cr ttmrlic „
ttJir ttiitrliett ,,
ii^r ttittrbct „
fie tottrbm „
* The full paradigm is :
id^ ttJiirbe liebcn
bu ttJilrbeft „
er tDiirbe „
tt)ir toiirbcn liebcn
i^r hJiirbet „
fie tuilrben „
Subjunctive
id^ ttiiirbc ge^ort (toerbe)
bu ttifrbeft „
er toctbc „
toir toiirliett « (tuerbcn)
il^r ttiiirliet ,, (tuerbet)
fie touthtn „ (toerben)
id^ toiirbc ge^ort
bu toiltbcfii „
er toiirbe „
toirmiitbctt „
i^r ttiiiriiet „
fie tiiiiriieii ,,
id) tDiirbe geliebt ^oben
bu ttJiirbeft „
er toiirbe „
ttir hJlirben geliebt ^aben
il^r ttJiirbet „
fie hJiirben „
\6) tt)iirbe gefaHen fefn
bu tDiirbeft „
er tt)iirbe „
toir ttJiirben gefoUen fcin
il^r ttJiirbet „
fie tuiirben «
APPENDIX
255
Indicative
Subjunctive
Perf. xO) h\n ge^ort ttjorben*
\^ fei ge^ort ttiorbctt
bu m n
«
bu fcicjl „
w
criP
/»
ct fcl „
/i>
\o\xm n
n
toir feten „
^#
t^r fcm „
tt
i^rfeict „
}f
fie Pnb ,,
It
ficfetctt „
II
Plup. id^ toar gci^ort tijortm
id^ to'dre geprt tooriim
bu ttiarfi „
n
bu totttefi „
11
er tour
ct
er toiirc
II
toir ttittrett „
tt
toirtoiirett „
II
i^r ttjttrt ,.
n
i^r ttidret „
II
fie tijaren ,,
tt
fie toiirnt „
It
FuT. id^ ttcrbc ge^ort uierbttt
id^ toiirtie ge^ort toerben (tocrbc)
bu tiJirft
tt
'tiVi toerbcfr „
If
er ttjirb
It
er tocriic „
It
njir ttierben „
tt
toirttiirbctt „
„ (tocrben)
i^r ttjcrbct „
It
i^rttiurbet „
„ (n)erbet>
fie tticrbtn „
It
fie tottrten „
„ (toerben)
F. P. td^ ttjerbe gei^ort luorben feln
tc^ toiirbe ge:^5rt
toorben fein (toerbc)
bu ttilrfi n
tt It
bu ttierbeft „
It It
er tijlrb ,,
tt It
er tuerbe „
It n
ttjirtoerben „
It It
toirmurben „
„ „ (toerben)
i^r ttjcrbct „
It It
i^r tDiirbet „
„ „ (toerbet)
fie tticrliett „
It It
fie tourbeit ,,
„ (toerben)
79 Conditional
I. id^ ttiirbc geprt merbeti II. tdf) tnurbe ge^ort ttiorbctt fcltt
Imperative
ttcrbc (bu) ge^ort merbet (il^r) ge^ort
Infinitives
Pres. gel^drt toerbm Perf.
Participles
Pres. ge^5rt toerbenb Perf.
80 Compounds
An adverbial particle modifies the meaning of a verb and changes
its form according to certain laws.
♦Observe tbat the perf. participle getoOtben loses its augment xn the passive.
ttierbctt <Sie ge^rt
gef)ort hiorbctt feltt
gept>t ttiorben
256
APPENDIX
Example
fragen=to question ]befra8Cit=to interrogate
These compounds may be :
Ott8fragen=to draw out
1. Inseparable
(a) Accent on root syllable — Befragcn
(5) No augment in perf . part. — bcf ragt
( (c) Not separated in infinitive — gu befragcn
i (a) Accent on prefix — auSfragen
Separable J (5) Augment between part, and root — au^geftagt
( (c) Separated in infinitive — auSgufrageu
Principal Parts
1. Inseparable Jefragen Jbcfragte befragt
2. Separable ougfragen fragte ttuS ttUggefragt
Synopsis of Compounds
Indicative
Separable
Inseparable
i(i) befragc
i^ befragtc
i^ f^cthe befragt
ic^ l^atte befragt
id) tDcrbe befragen
ici^ hjerbe befragt l^aben
ic^ frage ottS
i^ fragte aug
ic^ ^abe a«8gefragt
id) i^atti: auggefragt
id) toerbe au§fragen
id) toerbe auggefragt l^aben
Pres.
Perp.
befrage (bu)
befrag(e)t (i^r)
befragen ©ie
befragen
befragt f)ahen
Imperative
Infinitive
rage (bu) ou5
rag(e)t (i^r) au^
ragen ©ie au9
augfragen
OttSgefragt ^aben
Pres.
Perp.
befragenb
befragt
8i
Participles
ttUSfragenb
auSgefragt
Modal Auxiliaries
ftiinnett, mofien, biirfctt, miiffeu, fottcn, mUtn, These (all but moffen)
are preterite presents, i.e., they have the form of the preterite (of
strong verbs) while they are used as presents. Hence \6) fatltt (I can),
t(5 barf (I may) correspond in form to i6) fatttt (I thought), id) ttiarf (I
threw). The infinitive, weak preterite, and participle now in use were
formed in analogy with weak verbs. This accounts for their peculiar
form, which must be memorized with care.
The singular and the plural present differ in form, and the new
infinitive, preterite, and perf. part, are formed on the plural stem.
APPENDIX
257
f5nnen
fonnte
gefonnt
ntogen
ttiod)te
gemoc^t
biirfen
burfte
geburft
tttiiffen
ntu^tc
gemu^t
foHen
foEte
gefoKt
nJoCen
tooUte
gehJoUt
Present
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
id) lann
fonne
mag
moge
barf
biirfc
bu fannft
fonneft
ntagft
mogeft
barfft
biirfeft
er tann
fonne
mag
moge
barf
burfe
tt)tr fonnen
fOtttltCtt*
mogen
miji^ten*
biirfen
biirften*
i^r fdnnt
ronntet
mogt
tniiiltet
biirft
biirftct
fie !6nnen
ronntctt
mogeit
mof^tm
biirfen
biirften
Preterite
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
i(f| fonntc
fonnte
moc^te
mod^tc
burfte
biirftc
bu fonnteft
!onntcft
mocf)te[t
moc^tcft
burfteft
biirfteft
er f onnte
fonntc
moc^te
moc^te
burfte
biirftc
ttjir f onntcn
fSnnten
mod)ten
mod^ten
burften
burften
i^r f onntet
fonntet
mo(f)tct
mod^tet
burftct
biirftet
fic fonnten
fi3nnten
mod^tcn
mod)ten
burften
biirften
Present
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
id) mu§
miiffc
foK
folic
hJill
toollc
tn tnu^t
muifeft
foHft
foneft
toittft
ftjoUcft
ermug
nmjfc
fott
foUe
njill
hjollc
icir ntiiffcn
miigtttt
follen
fomen
njoHen
mHitn
i^x mii^t
mitpet
font
foatet
hjont
tooatet
fie muffcn
mtiitett
foflen
foaten
n)oIIen
mUitn
Preterite
Indic.
SUBJ.
Indic.
SUBJ.
INDIO.
SUBJ.
id) mufetc
ntiifetc
foUte
fonte
toonte
UJoIIte
bu mufeteft
ntiifeteft
fonteft
foateft
hjonteft
hjoflteft
er mu^te
miifete
fonte
foUtc
hjonte
njoKte
tt)ir mufeten
nt listen
foHtcn
foUten
moHten
hJoHten
il^r mufetet
ntiifetet
foHtet
fontet
hJoKtet
hjolltet
fic mufeten
miifeten
foEten
fottten
hjoflten
hJoHtcn
* Preterite forms Instead of presents which are identical with indicative; cL
footnote.
258 APPENDIX
82 In the formation of the perfect tenses we distinguish between
the use of these verbs as pure verbs and as auxiliaries. When used e j
pure verbs the participle is weak . Qefotttti, etc., when used as auxiliary,
with an infinitive complement the old strong participle (without aug-
ment) is used : f onnctt.
\(S) f)aJ)e gcfottttt id^ f)Cihe ge^en fottttCtt
(I have been able) (I was able to go)
id) l^abe gelittrft ic^ ijd^^ \pxe6)en bitrfctt
(I was permitted) (I was permitted to speak)
i^ f)ahe gefottt id) 'i)aU ge^en foffctt
(I was supposed to) (I was supposed to go)
id) \)aU gcttJOfft id) i)ahe ge^en ttJOffctt
(I wished to) (I wanted to go)
ic^ l^abe geittttfet id) f)ahe ge^en niiiffm
(I was compelled) (I had to go)
id^ 'i)ahe gemoi^t id) l^abe fd^reiben tttiifiett
(I wanted to) (I felt like writing)
The future tense and the first conditional are formed regularly:
id) irerbe mogen ic^ wcrbe fc^reiben mogen
id) njiirbe mogen id) hJiirbe [cfireiben mogen
The future perfect and the second conditional are too long and
clumsy for use.
83 Another preterite present but not a modal auxiliary is toiffm:
ttJiffen hJu^tc gett)u§t
Indic. Subj.
id) ttjeig id) njiffe
bu toeifet bu;n)iffeft
er ttjetg er ttJiffc
ttJtr toiffen voix tiiitfetctt (tt)i[fcn)
i^r toi^t i^r tiju^tet (wiffet)
ftc toiffen fie ttiitfetett (toiffen)
Th3 other tenses are formed regularly.
84 Like the modal auxiliaries in use is the verb Ittffett:
id) laffe ein ^leib madien I have a dress made '
„ lie§ ;, „ „ I had a dress made
„ l^abe „ „ „ laffen I have had a dress made
„ f)aU ba§ ^nd) gclaffen I have left the book
APPENDIX 259
85 Cansatiyes
Causatives are weak transit! ves formed from strong intransitive
verbs. They represent the object as being made to do the action
implied in the verb.
liegen (lie) legen (lay)
[i^en (sit) fe|en (set)
fte^en (stand) fteflen (put, i. e., make to stand)
trinfen (drink) trdnfen (give to drink)
finfen (sink) fenfen (make to sink)
86 Reflexive Verbs
Reflexive Verbs require a pronominal object that refers back to
the subject. In the first and second person this object is the regular
personal pronoun in the dative or accusative. In the third person it
is fl^, both singular and plural.
Present Future
iNDic, SuBj. i^ ttjerbe mid) freucn, etc.
ic^ freue mid^ freutc mid) (f rcue) Fut. Perf.
bu f reuft bii^ fteutefi bic^ (freucft) ic^ merbe mic^ gef reut ^aben, etc.
er freut fid^ freue fid) Imper.
tuir freuen unS freuten un§ (freuen; freue (bu) bid)
i^r freut ettr^ freutrt eud^ (freuet) freuet (i^r) euc^
fie freuen {id^ [ freuten fid) (freuen) freuen 6ie fid)
Preterite Infinit.
i^ freute mid), etc. ^'^ ^^^"^"' ^'^ Sefreut ^aben
^^^J^^^ fic^ freuenb, fid) gefreut
id^ %Oibt m\6) gefreut, etc. ^^^^
Pluperfect id) ttJiirbe mid) freuen
\6) ^atte mic^ gefreut, etc. „ „ „ gefreut ^abcn
87 Impersonal Verbs
Impersonal Verbs have e8 (with no definite antecedent) for sub-
ject. They usually represent a condition (mental or physical) and
have many idiomatic constructions.
Physical Mental
e§ regnet e§ grout mir
e§ fd)neit e§ freut mic^
e§ frtert mic^ e§ argert mid)
260
APPENDIX
Idiomatic
CS gibt (there is, or there are)
e§ gitt (it is a question of)
e§ fragt \\6) (the question arises)
e§ ^anbelt ftc^ urn (it is a question of)
e§ lol^nt fid^ (it is worth while)
c8 Idfet fid^ tun (it can be done)
88 Irregular Verbs
Seven weak verbs are irregular in appearance, since the infinitive
has undergone an umlaut change because of a suffix (now lost) which
did not affect the other principal parts.
brcnnen brannte gebramit
fenneii fanntc gefannt
ncnnen nannte genannt
rcnnen rannte gerannt
fenben fanbte gefanbt
ttjenben njanbtc genjanbt
bcnfen* bad)te gebttdjt
♦ Observe that the last named has lost the nasal before (jh and has undergone
a consonant change. So also:
89
bringen Ua6)it gebrac^t
Table of Strong Verbs
Two forms used interchangeably are connected by a brace. If one
is less frequently used it is in brackets. If a verb is sometimes weak,
this is indicated by a (w) after the infinitive form.
Pbes. Indic.
INF.
PRET. IND.
Pebf. Pakt.
3bd Pebs.
Pbet. Subj.
IMPER.
Ibaden
buf
gebaden
bQdt
biife
bocf(e)!
ficfe^lm
befall
befo^Ien
befie^lt
befotjle
befle^ll
^eflei^en
befliB
befliffen
befleiBt
befliffe
befleifee!
Beginnen
begann
begonnen
beginnt
begonne
beginn(e)
fteifeett
btfe
gebt[fen
beifet
biffe
beife(e)!
Bctfiett
barg
geborgen
birgt
biirge
birg!
fietftctt
barft
geborften
birft
borjte
birft!
bettJCBCtt(w) bettJog
betDogen
betuegt
bettjogc
bett)eg(e)!
biegen
bog
gebogen
biegft
boge
bieg(e)!
Meten
bot
geboten
bietet
bote
biet(e)!
(tntien
banb
gebunben
binbet
banbe
binb(e)i
bitten
bat
gebeten
bittet
bate
bitte !
tlafen
blieS
geblofen
bliift
bliefe
blaf(e)!
APPENDIX
26]
PRES. INDIC,
INTT.
Pbet. Ind.
PsBF. Part.
3rd Pers.
Pret. Subj.
IMPER.
himtn
blieb
geblicbeu
bteibt
bliebe
bleib(e)!
hxattn
briet
gebraten
brat
briete
brat(e)!
Hrei^en
brac^
gebroc^eii
bric^t
hxa6)C:
brirf)!
btngeti (w)
bang
gcbuiigen
bingt
bingte
binge!
brcf(i§ett
j brafcfi
i [brofrf)
gebrofrf)en
brifc^t
brofcfie
brifc^!
]
tirtngen
brang
gebrungen
bringt
brangc
bring(e)I
emiife^Iett
empfo^l
empfol^Ien
empfie^It
empfo^le
cmpfiel^n
erbletj^ett
erbtic^
crblic^en
erbteic^t
erblid^e
erblei(^(e)!
erlijfri^ctt
erlofc^
erlofc^en
erlifdit
crlo[cf)e
crtifc^!
ClfCtt
aB
gcgeffen
ifet
o^e
ife!
fa^rctt
fu^r
gcfat)ren
fa^rt
fit^re
fa^r(e)!
faactt
ftel
gefaHcn
fdllt
ficlc
fall(c)!
fattfictt
fing
gcfangcn
fangt
fingc
fang(e).'
fci^ten
fodit
gefoc^ten
m
foc^tc
fic^t!
flnbett
fanb
gefunbeu
finbet
faube
finbe!
Her^ten
floc^t
gefloc^tcn
fltc^t
flotfite
flicgt!
fiiefien
flog
geflogeii
flicgt
floge
flieg(c)!
fitelen
flo^
geflo^cii
flie^t
P^e
flie^(e)!:
fliefeett
Po§
gefloffcn
fliefet
floffc
flie6(e)!
freffett
fra&
gcfreffeu
frifet]
frafee
fn§!
frictctt
fror
gefroren
friert
frore
frier(c)!
prctt (w)
gor
gegoren
gart
gore
gare!
flcfiiirctt
gebar
gcboreu
gcbiert
gcbarc
gcbier!
Qe6en
gab
gcgeben
gibt
gabc
gibl
Oeliei^en
gebie^
gcbie^cu
gebei^t
gcbie^c
gebei^(e)!
fie^en
fling
gegangeu
ge^t
giiige
gc^(e)!
fieUttfiCtt
getang
gehiugen
gelingt
gelduge
ftclten
gait
gegoUen
gilt
golte
gilt!
fteucjen
gena§
genefen
geneft
gendfc
gcnefe !
gente^en
genofe
genoffen
genieBt
genoffe
genieB(e)!
Oefii^c^m
gefc^a^
gcfc^e^en
gefc^ic^t
gcfc^d^c
fiettJittttCtt
gettjami
gcttjonnen
gcnjinnt
getuonne
gettJinn(c)!
fitefeett
goB
gegoffen
giefet
goffe
gieB(e)!
flkti^ctt
gticf)
geglid)en
gteicfit
glid^e
gleic^(e)!
fllciten
glut
geglitten
gleitet
glittc
gleit(e)!
gUmmen
gtomm
gegfommen
glimmt
glommc
glimm(e)!
grabctt
grub
gegrabcn
grobt
grubc
grab(e) !
ftrcifcn
griff
gegriffeu
grcift
griffe
greif(c)!
lalten
^ielt
ge^altcn
^alt
^ielte
^alt(e)!
262
APPENDIX
Prbs. Indic.
Inf. Pbet. Ind.
Perf. Part.
3rd Pers.
Pret. Subj.
IMPER.
^angeit
^ing
ge^angen
tiangt
^inge
^ang(e)!
^auen
tjieb
ge^ouen
l^aut
l^iebe
^au(e) !
ithm
^ob
ge^oben
^ebt
pbe (pbe)
^eb(e)!
mtn
^ieB
ge^eifeen
IieiBt
^iefee
I)ei§(e)
mtn
^alf
ge^Dlfen
^ilft
Plfc
^ilf!
ftefett(w)
for
(ge)foren
fieft
fore
fiefe!
Htmmen (w
) flomnt
geflommen
flimmt
flomme
flimm(e)!
fltngeit
flong
geftungen
flingt
flange
fting(e)!
fnctfen
fniff
gefniffen
fneift
fniffe
fneif(e)!
fommen
lam
gefontmen
fommt
fame
fomm!
ttmtn
!rifc^
gefrifcJjen
frcifd^t
frif^e
freif(f)(e)I
ftlt^tn
froc^
gefroc^en
friecfit
frdd)e
friec^(e)!
fitrctt(w)
for
geforen
flirt
fore
fiire!
Ittben (w)
lub
gelaben
labet (labt)
labete (liibe)
lab(e)!
laffett
m
gelaffen
lofet
liefee
lafe!
laufen
lief
gelaufen
lauft
liefc
rauf(e)!
leiben
titt
gelitten
leibet
litte
leib(e)!
lei^ctt
tie^
gelie^en
lei^t
lielic
lei^(e)!
lefeti
Ia§
gefefen
Heft
tofe
lie§!
Ilegeti
lag
gelegen
Hegt
tagc
liege !
imn
log
gelogen
lugt
loge
mg(e)!
mcibett
mieb
gemieben
meibet
ntiebc
meib(e)!
mcffctt
mo§
gemeffen
ntifet
ma§c
mi§!
ttc^mctt
no:^tn
genommen
nimmt
na^nte
nimm !
^ifetfett
^ftff
gepfiffen
pfeift
^ftffe
^feif(e)
Ijftegctt (w)
Pflog
gepflogen
^flegt
^floge
^flege!
Jjretfett
pvk§>
ge^riefen
preift
Ijriefe
^reif(e)!
^MtUtn
quoU
gequoKen
quint
quoHe
quill !
ttttett
riet
geraten
rat
riete
rat(e)!
vtlttn
rieb
gerieben
reibt
riebe
reib(e)!
tt'i^tn
rife
geriffen
reifet
riffe
rei6(e)!
relten
ritt
geritten
reitet
ritte
reit(e) !
tlcd^ett
rod^
geroc^en
ried^t
rdd^c
rie(^(e)!
rlttgett
rang
gerungen
ringt
range
ting(e) !
rttttten
rann
geronnen
rinnt
ranne
rinn(e) !
rwfctt
rief
gerufen
ruft
riefe
ruf(e)!
faufett
[off
gefoffen
fauft
foffe
fauf(e)!
fttugen
[09
gefogen
faugt
foge
faug(e)!
fi^affett(w)
[d)Uf
gefc^affen
fc^afft
fc^iife
fd)aff(e)!
fj^ttHCtt (w)
fc^oa
gefcfjoUen
fctiam
f(f)6ne
fci)alle(e)!
APPENDIX
263
Pres. Indic
Inf. :
Pret. Ind.
Perf. Part.
3rd Pers.
Pret. Subj.
IMPER.
fi^eitteu
fcfiieb
gefc^ieben
fc^eibet
fc^iebe
f(f|eib(e)!
fi^etnen
(C^ien
gefc^ienen
idjeint
fd^iene
fcf)ein(c)!
ji^elten
ftfiart
gefc^olten
fc^irt
fd^oUe
f^ilt!
fr^ereii (w)
frfior
gefd)oren
fd)iert
fc^orc
fd^ier!
Witltn
fdiob
gefc^oben
fd)icbt
fc^obc
fd^ieb(e)!
mtfitn
fdloB
gefc^offen
mm
fc^offe
fc^icB(e)!
f(^ittiictt
fd)unb
ge[d)unben
fc^inbet
fc^iinbe
fd)inb(e)!
jt^Ittfen
fc^Iief
gefc^rafen
\m\t
fdtiaefe
frf)Iaf(e)!
fr^tagen
fc^Iug
gefc^ragen
fdjldgt
frf)tugc
fc^rag(e)!
ft^Icii^ett
Wi^
gefd^Iid)en
fd)Iei(^t
frf)Iid)e
fcf)tei(f)(e)!
f«^lclfen(w
) fc^ltff
gefc^liffen
fd)reift
fc^affe
fcfifeif(e)!
|(^lte^en
fcf)lo6
gefc^Io[fen
fef)Iie§t
mm
fci)Iie6(e)!
fd^Uttfictt
f Chiang
gefc^rungen
fd^ringt
fciirange
fd)ang(e)!
fi^meigen
fc^mife
gefc^miffen
frf)mei§t
fd^miffe
fc^meiB(e)!
fi^tncljett (w) fc^mol5
gefc^molaen
fc^mit^t
fdimol^e
frfimir^ !
ir^ttaubett(w)fcf)nob
gefc^noben
fd^naubt
fdinobe
fd^naub(e)!
fc^ttctiJCtt
frf)nitt
gefd^uitten
fc^neibet
fc^nitte
fc^neib(c)!
fi^rerfctt
fcfiraf
(ge)fc^ro(Ien
fc^ricft
fdirafe
fcfiricf!
f^retben
f(i)rieb
gefc^ricben
frfireibt
fc^riebe
fc^reib(e)!
fj^reten
fdiric
gefc^riecn
fd)reit
fd^riec
fcf)m(e)!
f(^rettctt
fc^ritt
gefc^ritten
fc^reitet
fc^rittc
fd)rcit(e)!
fi|to)aren
fc^ttjor
gefd^njorcn
fcfttuiert
fc^iDort
fc^trore
j fcbttjore !
1 fc^njier!
1 fjlttlCtfiCtt
fc^iBicg
gefd^ttJicgen
fc^tueigt
fdjttJiege
frf)tucig(e)!
ft^ttjeUeii (w) fc^mott
gefc^iDoUen
fd)h)iat
fc^tuotte
fc^ trill!
f(^tt)tmmen
[d^tDaitint
gefcf)h)ommen fdjmimmt
fc^ttjommc
fd^ttjtmm(e)!
fi^ttimtien
fc^tuanb
gefdjirunbcn fd)tt)inbet
fcf)tt)dnbe
fc^njinb(c)!
fl^ttltttfiCtt
fc^tcang
gefc^njungen frfiiuingt
fdjtDQngc
fc^h)ing(e)!;
fii^tDdren
( frf)tt)ur
} \a)tt)OX
gefd^ttjoreii
fd)tt}ort
fc^ttjiire
fc^n)or(e)!
fc^en
fa^
gefe^en
fie^t
fS^e
[ie^!
fetn
mar
gettjefcn
ift
ttjare
fei!
fiebett (w)
fott
gefotten
fiebet
fotte
fieb(e)!
jittflctt
fang
gefungen
fiiigt
fange
ftng(e)!
finfeit
fanf
gefunfen
fin!t
fan!e
finf(e)!
finneit
fann
gefonnen
ftnnt
fanne(fanue)finn(e)!
ft^ett
faB
gefeffen
fi|t
fafee
file!
f^ICiCtt
f^ie
ge[))ieen
fpeit
fpiee
fpei!
fjilnnen
fpann
gefponnen
fpinnt
fponne
fptnn(e)!
Hirct^ctt
fprac^
gefproc^en
[priest
fprdc^e
fprid) !
{)irie|en
[profe
g»f|)ro[fen
fprielt
fproffe
fprieB(e)!
264
APPENDIX
Pres. Indic.
t Inf. Pbbt. Ind.
Perf. Part.
3rd Pers.
PRBT. SUBJ.
IMPEB.
fjirinfien
fprong
gefprungen
fpringt
fprdnge
fpring(e)!
mtn
\tad)
geftoc^en
fticfit
ftad^c
ftirf)!
fierfen (w)
\ial
geftedt
ftedt
ftQ!e
ftecf (e) !
ftc^en
ftanb
gcftanben
fte^t
{ ftdnbe
I ftiinbe
fte^(e):
fte^lett
rta^i
gefto^fcn
ftie^rt
fto^Ie(ftd^Ie)ftiet)l!
fteigeti
ftieg
geftiegen
fteigt
ftiege
fteig(e)!
fterktt
ftarb
geftorben
ftirbt
ftiirbe
ftirb!
fiicBeit
ftob
geftoben
ftiebt
ftobe
ftieb(e)!
ftittfm
ftaitf
geftunfeu
ftinft
ftdnfc
ftinf(e)!
Mtn
ftteB
geftoBen
ftoBt
ftieBe
ftofe(e)!
ftrcii^ett
ftrid,
geftrid^eu
ftrcid)t
ftric^e
ftrei(f)(e)!
ftretten
flritt
geftritteu
ftreitet
ftritte
ftreit(e)!
trttficn
trug
getragen
triigt
triige
trag(e)!
treffctt
traf
getroffen
trifft
trdfc
triff!
irciktt
trieb
getriebeu
treibt
triebe
treib(e)!
trcten
trot
getreten
tritt
trdte
tritt!
ttlcfett(w)
troft:
getroffen
trieft
troffe
trief(e)!
trittfeit
tmnf
getrunfeu
triiift
trdnfe
trinf(e) !
triifictt
trog
getrogeu
triigt
troge
triig(e)!
tm
tat
getan
tut
tote
tu(e)!
tierMcti^ett
tjerblic^
t)erblid)en
tjerblei(^t
Oerblic^e
t)erb(ei(^(e)!
Ueriicrften(w) derborb
tjerborbeii
tjerbirbt
Derbiirbc
berbirb !
tiertirie^eu
t)erbro§
tjerbroffen
berbrie^t
Uerbrofee
t)erbrieB(e) !
tjctfleffen
Dergafe
Dergeffen
Dergi§t
Dergdfee
t)ergi§!
ticrliereit
berlor
tjerroren
berfiert
t}erlore
t)eraer(e)!
tiJttt^fCtt
tt)ud)§
gehjac^fen
ttJdc^ft
ttJiic^fc
Jt)act)f(e) !
ttiiiften (w)
tt)og
gettjogen
ttJogt
tt)6ge
tt)dge(!)
ttiaf(^en
tDUfd)
genjofd^en
luafd^t
n)iifd)e
n)afc^(e)!
mhtn (w)
tt)ob,
gelDoben
ftjebt
tcobe
n)eb(e) !
tueit^en
tt)ic^
gettJt^en
meic^t
njtc^c
ttjetc^(e)!
tueijen
h)ie§
gehjiefen
hjeift
njtefe
hjeif(e) !
ttierftett
luarb
gett)orben
n)irbt
njiirbe
n)irb'
toiertien
tt)arb
rtlllfhp
gettjorben
ttJirb
njiirbe
ttJerbe!
tticrfm
lUUtUt'
njarf
gettjorfen
hJtrft
tt)iirfe
Wirf!
toiegm
ttjog
geiDogen
tuiegt
n)ogc
n)teg(e)!
ttitn))en
ttjanb
genjunben
n)iubet
h)dnbe
tDinbe !
xei^eit
5te^
ge^ie^en
aei^t
gie^e
3eit)(e)!
jle^en
309
gejogen
Sie^t
goge
aiet)(e)!
attilnfictt
5tt)ang
gestt)ungen
gtutngt
5tt)dnge
5ttjing(e)!
APPENDIX 265
SYNTAX
90 THE SENTENCE— ORDER
J. JVbrmaZ-Subj.Terb Adjuncts, obj. { ^^^.^P^^^^^* °^*"f^ ^'
^ gmning with subject.
) Question.
Independent clauses not begin-
ning with subject.
III. TVansposed—S, Adjuncts. O. V,— Dependent clauses.
Examples
I. ©r Itefl je^t ha^ SSuc^. (£r f^at je^t t>a§ md) gclefen.
II. ^ei^t \it^ ex ))a^ 93ud). ^at er je^t t>a^ S3ud) gelefen?
III. Scf) fe^e, boB et je^t t)a^ mci) Ilej}. S^t^ fe^C/ ^ofe er jcfet ba8
58uc^ gelefen |ot.
It is only the inflected part of the verb that changes its position.
MINOR RULES
91 Of a number of adjuncts the most important comes last. Hence ;
92 The infinitive, participial, or adverbial complement always
comes last in the sentence :
@r ftjiU nai) ^aiife %t^tn,
®r ift md) ^au\e gcBangett.
@r fc^lagt ha^ ^u6) auf.
93 An infinitive phrase (with ju), together with its adjuncts,
comes last :
(Sr ging au§, um ba§ ju fcl^eit.
3c^ bad^te, ba§ er auggegangen fci, um i>a^ ju fe^etl.
94 The negative adverbs u\^i, UXt, UlttadU come last, unless the
negation applies to one especial word, in which case the
negative adverb immediately precedes it. Ex. — ©in ebler
SUJann bergi^t fein SSaterlanb niri^t (A noble man does not for-
get his fatherland). But : ©in ebler ffftann Dergifet aUe^, nur
ttid^t fein SSaterlanb (A noble man may forget everything, but
he never forgets his fatherland).
96 An adverb of time precedes all othei*s:
®r fiel^t petite morgctt langfam jur ©d^ulc.
266 APPENDIX
96 A pronoun precedes a noun object. @g and ^^ precede all
others. When both objects are nouns, the indirect usually
comes first.
er gibt c8 tcm Wlann.
er toxU flr^ bem Manne nid^t anbertraiien.
er njin bem SRanne tiag ©c^cimnig nidjt ant)ertrauen.
When both are pronouns, the direct takes precedence : @r gibt
i^tt und.
97 -<4fi/ecfives — As a rule adjectives precede the nouns they mod-
ify. If the adjective itself has adjuncts, it is preceded by
them.
^Ir.— 3)cr gttte ^nabc.
S)er fe^r %uit ^nobe.
S)cr ton feincr abutter 8c|(^oItettc ^nabc.
S)er wit lanitv ©timwe ein IciUgeg fiieb flnfienbe SKart^rcr.
98 An adjective word, phrase, or clause may follow its noun,
especially in elevated diction :
3)tc junge grau, fii§an llttll llcbettSttiiirblfl* toJte ein enficl, er[rf)ien on
ber Xiir.
S)er ©anger wit ben ml^tn 8odfen, ergriff bie §arfc.
®er ^onig, ber lanfle flefr^miegen ^atte, fing an ju reben.
♦The adj. in this position, like the predicate adj., is not inflected.
Only the modifiers of the noun may intervene between subject and
verb in normal and inverted order. Thus for the English: She never
saw him, we must say : ©le |at tl^n nle gefel^en.
USE OF ARTICLE
Definite
99 As in English, the definite article is used to individualize.
1 OO Deviations from English—
1. GENERIC — With abstractions, verbal nouns, and nouns of mate-
rial,* where the English omits the article, the German
inserts it. J^ttS 2ehen i[t ber ©iiter l^oc^fteS nic^t (Life
is not the greatest of blessings). ^aS ®el^en ift bir
gcfunb (Walking is good for you). $^a8 ©ifen ift ba§
nii^lid^fte TletaU (Iron is the most useful of metals).
In all these cases the noun is generalized by its article, i. e., the
particular noun stands for the entire class.
APPENDIX 267
2. CLASS, OCCUPATION, NATIONALITY — Here the article is omitted
when the noun represents an abstract idea rather
than a particular individuality. Ex.—^x \\i %tf\t\itt
(He is a workman). (Sr hJtrb ^rjt (He will become a
physician). ^6) bin ^merifanet (I am an American).
8. WITH PROPER NOUNS— (a) Familiarly: ^ennft bu betl Xctt? ^^
fe^e iiett ftarl.
(6) With a preceding adjective: bet jungc ®oet^c.
(c) Names of countries are usually not preceded by the
article, (Snglanb, 2)eutfc^Ianb, but those ending in el
always take it, as: bie Xiirfei, bie Xaxtaxei; also bic
©c^njcij, bic ^falj, bic SfJicbcrfanbc.
(d) Names of rivers, mountains, and seas take the article:
ber 9l^cin, bic S)onau, bcr fjclbbcrg, bic D[tfcc.
4. INSTEAD OF POSSESSIVE — When the relation is very clear. ®r
nimmt ten $ut tiom fto)lfe (He takes his hat from
his head).
6. DISTRIBUTIVE — Where in English we use the indefinite. ^aS
Sanb f oftet l^unbcrt Xalex ben Sfttfe (The land costs one
hundred dollars a foot).
f O I There are many deviations which can not be classified. Certain
phrases have become stereotyped :
nadb Sfiorbcn, ©iibcn, etc.= towards the north, south, etc.
nam ^au8 = home na6) bent ^au3 = to the house
gu ^au§ = at home gu bcm ^aug = toward the house
f^olgcnbe^ = the following
With©acl^c,@runb, Urfac^c, etc., the article is often omitted.
102 Contractions — The dative and accusative cases of the definite
article are often contracted with a preceding preposition
so as to form one word. No apostrophe is used. Ex. :
uhex tai ^a^r = iiberS ^a^x untcr bo§ ^au3 = unter8 §au§
ju bcr ©d^ule = gut ©d)ulc in bag ®cbirgc = in§ ©ebirgc
m bent ®cbirgc = im ®ebirgc bei bent SSater = beim SSatcr
103 This contraction takes place very frequently in familiar lan-
guage, but can not be used when the noun is particularized by a fol-
lowing clause or phrase. Ex. :
®r Qtf)t 5ur ^ird^c, but, @r gcl^t gu bet ^ird^c, gu bcr and) fcin SSatcr ging.
®r lebt im ©cbirgc, but, @r lebt in bem ®ebirge, t)a^ man oon ^ier fcl^cn fann.
104 Where several noims in the same construction follow each
other, the article must be repeated before each : The father and mother
were at home = 2)er SSatcr unb bic SKutter toaxtn ju §au[e.
268 APPENDIX
NOUNS
Syntax of Cases
GENERAL
105 Appositives — Nouns in apposition with other nouns or pro-
nouns are in the same case. They may stand without connecting
particle or with the particle ttl0 or toie.
dx tritt aU filacer auf.
(£r fie^t i^n al§ fctnctt ffftnti an.
er ^at ijen ©cncral, ben crftcn Wlann be§ fianbeg gefe^en.
NOMINATIVE
1 06 !• Subject (and vocative) — as in English.
1 07 II. Predicate Noun— with or without aU,
1 08 III* Absolute.
II. Predicate Noun
109 After the verbs geltett (to be valued at), erfii^clnett (appear),
l|ertiorfic|ctt, oufjie^ett, Itbtn, ^tthtn, fie^en, the participles anficjieHt
(placed), krufctt (called), erfiiirt (explained), ttUgoeflCbCtt (declared),
ftcfUttbctt (found), gefit|U (felt), erfattttt (recognized), gcfitri^tct (feared),
Hege^rt (desired) (i. e. , verbs which are synonymous with to be in a
wider sense), we use the predicate nominative with the inter-
medial particle dU.
Ex.—(^e^t ^^x itic^t aU cine tonigitt ^crtjor?
er toax aU rettcnber ^ngel erfc^ienen.
S)er S3auer fonnte aU Wontv 2Rtttttt gelten.
I lO After the verbs fcitt, ttJCrbctt (become), bleiftctt (remain), fji^ela
nett (seem), iJiittfftt (imagine), ^cifectt (to be called), gcjri^imjjft tocrbctt
(to be called in a bad sense), in fact, after all verbs denoting condi-
tion, the predicate nominative is used without the intervening particle.
Ex.—^x tft cltt pter SKatttt geBIieben.
er h)irb cltt tttficr ©ofcmitl^t gefc^im^ft.
SBit^elm tjon ber S^orntanbie tuirb bcr 6rokrcr gcnannt.
es ift nic^t jebem gegeben, citt flrofecr ^clb gu [ein.
The English construction after to be elected, nominated, created,
etc., appears in German in the form of a prepositional phrase:
gu -f dative. Ex.—lELe is elected president = (£r toirb inm ^riifliietttett
APPENDIX 269
The same is true after the active form of these verbs. Ex. — They
nominate him mayor = (Sie ernennen x^n jum ©itrgermeificr.
The predicate after tDCrbett may also be expressed with ju and the
dative — Seiber ift btr bie ^eitnat gur Srcmbc getnorben, instead of: S)ie
^eintat ift bie i^xem'be gettjorben. This is especially the case when Uierlien
expresses a complete change in substance as in the above example.
The English, "I consider him to be a good man," where man
would agree with him in the objective case, is expressed in German by
means of a preposition, fiir — ^d) italic t^n fiir elttCtt fitttctt 9kam.
Ill III. Absolute
The Nominative Absolute is not very frequent in German. It is
used mainly for vivid description.
Ex.—'^^ie STrmce 5og iihev bie 93ruclen, affc ©ejlii^ter bilfter, Jebet SWuttli
tjerfc^Ioffen. — 2)ie ©rafin ging gurilcf, in i^ren Hugen flebcr^after ©Ittttg.
In all these cases some part of the verb to be may be supplied.
I 12 GENITIVE
I. Attributiye — modifying nouns.
Ilk Partitive — denoting the whole from which a part is taken.
III. Objective — after verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions.
IV. Adverbial— used instead of an adverb.
V. Appositional— with another genitive.
I. Atiributive (expressed in English by of).
113 A genitive is attributive if it modifies a noun. It may then
express a variety of relations*
I 14 POSSESSION — S)ie ^eimat bc8 ^InM toar unbefannt. — 2)o8
@elb ift M SttifcrS.
I i 5 IDENTITY— ^ag Softer M Xtnntti,
Proper nouns are placed in apposition, instead of in the genitive:
ber momi ^pxW, bie Stabt gJarlS.
I 16 QUALITY OR MATERIAL— ^et Sijulctt ©IttTtj (for bic granjenbcit
©aufen). — @in SSec^er cblcn ©olbcg.
117 AS OBJECT OR SUBJECT OF THE ACTION IMPLIED IN A VERBAL
NOUN— 2)ie Xeilung tier 6rbe, bie Siebe @otte0, bie gutd^t
270 APPENDIX
I 1 8 Instead of the genitive we may use tlOtl + dative in certain
cases :
(a) To avoid ambiguity where no article can be used and where
no inflection of the noun designates the case : Ex. — S)ie
©tra^en ton Sonbon, bie S3cforgung t)on ©cfc^aften (but, bic
SSeforgung mand^er ©efc^afte).
(6) In the designation of ranks and titles: Ex. — 2)er ^onig t)on
©ad^fen.
(c) To avoid a series of genitives: Ex.—'^ex ^at)re§tag toon Sl^afe*
fpearg Xob (not be§ XobeS S^afefpearg).
I 1 9 The relationship as expressed by tlOtt + dative is less close
than that of the genitive. ^eutf(||lanb§ ^aifet indicates a unity of
interest, while hit St(il\tX tlOtt ^Cttt|(i^(tttttl merely expresses the title.
II. Partitive
1 20 Denoting the whole, from which a part is taken,
(a) After numbers— Qtoei bet <SoIbatett
(6) After adjectives denoting quantity (usually plural) — tjtele,
inancf)c, fein, etlic^e, genug.
Ex.—^eine^ bet ftittbct f^atte eg gcprt.
(StUd^e bet Wdnntt famen gelaufen.
These adjectives may be followed by the noun in the same case, as:
^ein ^inb ^atte e§ Qef)'6xt, (Stlid^e Wdnnet famen gelaufen.
(c) After any substantive adjective, especially in comparative
and superlative degree.
^ic glitdEIic^ytc bet ^ttttfiftttueii.
^et (©lege gottlic^fter \\t ha^ SSergeffcn.
III. Objective
121 1. After verbs. — Certain verbs take the genitive as a direct
object. These verbs originally represented the action as
affecting not the whole but only a part of the object.
Ex.—Qx ttanl ben SSetn = He drank the wine (all of it). (Sr
tranf be§ 2Beine§ = He drank of the wine (some of it). This
use of the genitive is decreasing and is found most fre-
quently in elevated discourse, poetry, etc. In ordinary
speech it is often superseded by the dative or accusative,
used directly after the verb or with a preposition. Follow-
ing is a list of verbs that frequently govern the genitive,
together with permissible substitutions.
APPENDIX 271
1 22 Representative Verbs with Genitive as Sole Object
ad^ten=heed (auf, ace. ) gebenf en=think
bebiirf en=need (ace. ) genefen=give birth to
6ege^ren=desire (ace.) ]^arren=wait (auf, ace.)
E)rau(^en=need (ace.) iad)en=laugh (iiber, ace.)
ben!en=think (an, ace.) fc^onen=spare (ace.)
entbe^ren=lack (ace.; f|)Otten=mock (iiber, ace.)
• ertt)a:^nen=mention (ace.) t)erge[fen=forget (ace.)
fro^roc!en=exult (iiber, ace.) n)arten=rule (iiber, ace.) ^
tt)arten=wait (auf, ace.)
Ex. — ©potte feltter uicf)t (Do not make sport of him).
®ebenfe meitt (Think of me).
1 23 Genitive as Secondary Object
A number of verbs are followed by the accusative of the persoq
and the genitive of the thing. Such are :
(a) Verbs denoting separation or deprivation, as :
beraubcn=rob cntlaften=relieve
entt)eben=deprive or relieve entleb{gen=exempt
entfleiben=divest entfe^en=dispossess
entlaffen=dismiss (au§, dat.) Uerttjeifen=banish (au8, dat.)
Ex.—^ev ^aifer ent^ob ben ©eneror feineS %mit^.
The emperor deprived the general of his position.
(&) Verbs denoting accusation, acquittal, etc., as
anflagen befc^ulbigen begiditigen freifpred^en
iibcrfiil^ren iibernjcifen geil^en
Ex.—^et 9?ic^tcr befdjulbigte ben aTJenfc^en iie§ ^leBWtt.
The judge accused the man of theft.
124 Some reflexives take the genitive as secondary object, as'
\[(i) bemad)tigen = to get possession of
jicf) bebienen = to make use of
fid^ entfinnen = to recollect
fid^ erinnern = to remember
fid^ ermel^ren = to keep from
ftcfi berfel^en = to expect
£!».— ®r bentac^tigte fid) beg Itinbeg.
He got possession of the child.
(gr !onnte fic^ ber Ubermttji^t nid)t ertuei^rctt.
He could not resist the superior power.
I
272 APPENDIX
125 2. After ad/ec^tves.— Adjectives which express pow?er, knowl-
edge, plenty, capacity, and their opposites, govern the
genitive, as:
Bar = bare Icbtg = free
bebilrftig = in need tnad^tig = able to control
betuugt = conscious miibe = tired
Uo^ = bare quitt = done
eingeben! = mindful fatt = sated
fret = free fc^ulbig = guilty
f rol^ = glad fid^er = certain
gebenf = mindful t)oK = full
gewfirtig = expectant Wert = worth
genji^ = certain tciirbig = worthy
126 3. After prepositions. — Certain prepositions always govern
the genitive. These are :
(a) Old noun forms which have acquired a prepositional force —
anftatt = instead of unterl^alb = beneath
bie§feit(§) = on this side of urn toiHen \
inf olge = in consequence of luegen [ for the sake of
jenfeit(§) = on that side of l^alber )
oberl^alb = above tjermittefft = by means of
fetten§ = on the part of Dermoge = by means of
tro^ = in spite of guf olge = in consequence of
(h) Old participles which have acquired a prepositional force —
imbefc^abet = in spite of
ungead^tet = notwithstanding
njdl^renb = during
(c) Old ad jectives— unf em = not far, untoeit = not far.
This use of the genitive is growing less frequent in spoken Ger-
man. Phrases in which a preposition governs the dative or accusa-
tive are frequently substituted.
Ex.—Vintotit beg XorfcS = nic^t weit tion bem ^orfe.
1 27 IV* Adverbial Genitive (used mainly in poetry).
The Adverbial Genitive is used like any adverb to express:
PLACE — ^e^t gefie jeber feineS ISSegeS (Let everyone now go
his way). S)a§ ijt beg fittttbeg nii)t ber S3rauc^ (That
is not customary in this land).
APPENDIX 273
128 TIME— (Indefinite) XttgeS 5lrbeit, 9((tnt)3 ©afte (during the
daytime, work; at night, guests). @inc§ fc^onen
XageS (on a beautiful day).
For definite time the accusative is used : bte^ett 9[benb ging er a\x^.
Instead of either, conversational German employs the preposition tttt
with the dative : ont Xage, an biefem 5lbenb.
1 29 (a) MANNER— 9Jac^ nri fa^r' ic^ jie^cnbcn iJufecg (I shall proceed
to Uri at once), ^c^ foge e§ otteS 6rnf^cS (I say it
in all earnestness).
(6) CAUSE— ^ttngerS fterben (to die of hunger).
Related to the adverbial is the exclamatory genitive: D iie§
ItnglitifUi^en Xage§! We may substitute: ber unglutflid)e Xag! or iiber
ben nngliicf nd)cn %clq I
1 30 DATIVE
The main use of the dative is that of the indirect object. This
must be regarded in a rather wide sense, in which the dative is used
to represent the person or object towards whom or which the action
is directed, or from whom or which it is removed. Hence the dative
can be used with :
I. Verbs
II. Adjectiyes (Participles and Adverbsy
III. Prepositions
131 I. With Yerbs
1. IMMEDIATE object — Certain verbs which in English take accu-
sative (many impersonals and reflexives).
2. INDIRECT object — designates for whom the action is done.
3. INTEREST — designates the person for whose advantage some-
thing is done.
4. ETHICAL — person whose feelings are concerned in the action.
5. POSSESSIVE — showing a very close relationship.
1 32 1. IMMEDIATE OBJECT
Certain classes of verbs which in English take the direct object,
in German govern the dative. The Germans recognize by this use
a distinction between the action which affects the object as directly
as in the sentence id^ f^ldgC bi^, and that which represents an
approach or a feeling towards it, as : ic^ nd^ere ntic^ blr and id; JianfC
\^\X, The verbs that govern the dative directly, express:
274 APPENDIX
133 Approach or Departure: as an^toeidjen (avoid), begcgnen
(meet), fel^Ien (lack), folgen (follow or obey), nad^geben
(yield), nal^en (approach).
Ex. — gr tuid) bcm Sf tttbc au§.
He avoided the enemy.
@§ fel^It mix an bent S^Zotigften.
I am in lack of the most necessary things.
S)ie ajJutter gibt bem ftinbe su \e\)x nac^.
The mother yields to the child too much.
1 34 Similarity or Identity : gteid^en, ai^neln, or o^nlid^ fcl^en (to
resemble), ent[|) redden (to correspond).
Ex.—dx a^nelt fettter Mntttt, or er fie^t feiner SJJutter a^nlid^.
He resembles his mother.
S)o§ ent[^rid)t nic^t bett ^atftti^ctt.
That does not correspond to the facts.
S)u gleicfift bcm @cift, ben bu begreifft, nirfjt mlr.
You resemble the spirit that you comprehend, not me.
135 Appurtenance: angel^oren and gel^oren (belong), gebiil^rcn (to
be owing to), gegiemen (to be proper), itberla[fen (to leave to),
5uf ommen (to be due to).
E'ic.— 2)iefe e^re gebii^rt i^m nid^t.
This honor does not befit him.
S)a§ iiberlaffen toir beittem ©utai^tett.
We leave that to your judgment,
liefer 9?ang fomntt tntr nitf)t ju.
I am not entitled to this rank.
136 Inclination or Repulsion: bel^agen (to suit), gefallcn (to
please), l^ulbigen (to pay homage to), ftjiberftel^en (to resist),
giirncn (to rage at), gufagen (to suit).
iJoj.— 2)a§ SBettcr gefallt m\t ^ar nid^t.
The weather does not please me at all.
8ie l^ulbigen bcr Siitttgltt.
They pay homage to the queen.
®a§ ^attS fagt mir gu.
The house suits me.
137 Utility and its Opposite: beiftel^en (assist), bicncit (serve),
nii^en (benefit), ^elfen (help), [d^aben (injure), Untcc^t tun
(do wrong),
APPENDIX 275
Ex.— (Bin guter SO^enfc^ ftel^t tim ^vmm bei.
A good man succors the poor.
^a§ fc^ttjere SBerf ift t|m gelungcn.
He succeeded in the diflacult task.
Tlan foU fctttCtt Jliiti^ftett nid)t Unred^t tun.
One ought not to wrong one's neighbors.
138 An Attitude of Receptivity and Obedience (and the opposite):
folgen, ge^ord^en, laufd^en, ju'^oren, bci' jtintmen, banfen, tpiber*
fpre'cfien.
£Jr.— Einber foUen iieti ©Item gel^ord^en.
Children should obey their parents.
3)ic 3u^orer ^aben bcm 9tetiner bcigeftimmt.
The audience agreed with the speaker.
e§ i[t unpflid), dlteren ^tuitn S" hJtberfprec^cn.
It is impolite to contradict older people.
139 Impersonals with the Dative
eS a^nt mir = I have a presentiment
cS efelt mir = I am disgusted
e§ gelingt mir = I succeed :
c8 bel^agt mir = It suits me
c§ gefant mir = It suits me
e§ graut mir = I have a horror of
c8 liegt mir an = I care
c2 fcf)tt)inbeU mir = I am dizzy
eg fdjeint mir = It seems to me
e2 tut mir leib = I am sorry
c8 tut mir ttje:^ = It hurts me
140 After Reflexive Verbs
Some reflexive verbs take the dative as secondary object.
fid) ergeben = to submit
fic^ f iigen = to yield
\id) na^ern = to approach
fid) n)iberfe|en = to resist
£ic— er fiigt ftc^ meittcr 5(ttoriinttttfi.
He yields to my arrangements.
^ ©ie ttJiberfefet ftd^ felnem Sefep.
She resists his command.
276 APPENDIX
141 2. INDIRECT OBJECT
The indirect object shows to or for whom the action is performed.
It is found after the verbs of giving, communicating, showing, com-
manding, taking, etc.
Ex.— ^6:) gebe btr ba§ 93u(^ (I give you the book). ®r ergai^It t^m
bie @efd)ic^te (He tells him the story). ®r na^m i^m fein re|te§ @ut (He
took his last possession from him). ^6) geige l^m ben red^ten 28eg (I
show him the right way). @r gebot i^m gu fc^n?eigen (He commanded
him to be silent.
Sometimes the dative expresses the object of the prefix of the
verb — ^rf) lege "ba^ @elb bem S3riefe bei (I enclose the money in the
letter). Here bem S3riefe is the object of bei and ©elb is the object of
the entire verb.
I 42 3. INTEREST OR ADVANTAGE
SBie gel^t e§ ^j^nen? (How are you ? How goes the world for you ?)
2Rtr ift afleS ein§ (It is all one to me), ^c^ beforge t^m bie[e§ ©efc^aft
(I attend to this business for him). 3Ktr gefd)ie!^t red)t (It serves me
right); and many of the impersonals mentioned in section 139).
I 43 4. ETHICAL DATIVE
This dative is very difficult to translate. It represents the person
whose mental interest in the action is solicited. Ex. — 'S^len 2Ipfel fcf)iefet
ber SSater bir t)ont SSaum (Father will shoot an apple off the tree, if you
want him to). 9Jiac^t niir nur feine folc^en ©efd)id;ten me^r (Don't, I beg
of you, perform any more such tricks).
I 44 5. POSSESSIVE DATIVE
In speaking of parts of the body, or of anything very closely
related to the person, as honor, life, home, friends, etc., we often use
the definite article instead of the possessive pronoun and express the
idea of appurtenance by the dative.
Ex.—%ti SBinb bla[t iltr ben ^Vii bom ^o|3f (The wind is blowing
your hat from your head). ^Ci\6)t bit bie ^(ittbc (Wash your hands).
145 II. With Adjectives
Adjectives (participles and adverbs) govern the dative in cases
where the meaning is similar to the verbs (cf. 133 to 138) that gov-
ern the dative, i.e., approach, similarity, inclination, utility, obedience,
and their opposites: na^e (near), feme (far), a^nlic^ (similar), l^olb and
gut (kindly disposed), nii^lic^ (useful), ge^orfam (obedient).
Ex.—^xn 9Kdbd)en in ber S3urg \\i mxx I^olb [or gut] (A maid of the
castle is fond of me).
APPENDIX 277
III. With Prepositions
f 46 Certain prepositions always govern the dative.
ah = away from nad) = after
au§ = out of md}\i = next to
au§er = outside of (except) neb[t = besides
bei = near or with famt = together with
binnen = within feit = since
cntgegen = towards t)on = from
gegeniiber = opposite 5U=:to
tnit = with guttjiber = against
1 47 Prepositions which denote either position or transition govern
the dative when the verb does not express motion towards
the object, i.e., when the phrase answers the question tOO ?
These prepositions are :
an = at ncbcn = beside
ouf = upon iiber = over
l^inter = behind itnter = under
in = in t)or = before
5h)ifrf)en = between
Ex. — Ace. (5r ge^t an belt X\\^ (He goes up to the table).
Dat. er \tc\): an bcm Zi\^ (He stands at the table).
1 48 ACCUSATIVE
I. Direct Object of Transitive Verb (many impersonals and
reflexives).
( (a) Two Nouns;
II. Double Accusative i {b) Factitive;
( (c) Noun and Infinitive.
III. Cognate Accusative (intransitive verb).
IV. Adverbial.
V. Absolute.
VI. With Prepositions.
I. Direct Object
149 Transitive verbs take the direct object in the accusative
case — er fj^tefet tictt ®oliittten.
i50 Verbs that are intransitive ir their simple form are some-
times made transitive by a prefix which limits or directs
the meaning — ;5(^ tttttttJOrtc btr auf bie forage; ic^ bcttttt*
ttJOrte Die 3^rage. ^c^ banfe bir; ic^ htHntt mx^ bei bir. ^6)
f olfie bent 9?at ; ic^ befolge ^^n diaU
278 APPENDIX
151 Certain impersonals (mostly representing a physical state)
take the accusative.
e§ biinft m\6) (also c§ bilnft mir) I think
e§ biirftet mid^ I am thirsty
c8 efelt mid^ an (but e§ efelt mir bat)or) I am disgusted
e§ friert mid) I am cold
e§ l^ungert mid^ I am hungry
e§ fd^ldfert mid^ I am sleepy
In many of these, the eS is often omitted and the accusative placed
first, as though it were the subject, i.e., mic^ l^ungert, biirftet, fc^liifert,
etc.
1 52 Reflexive verbs take the direct object in the accusative.
^d) \d)ame ttttii^ I am ashamed
^^ freue mtr^ I rejoice
^d) furrfjte tnii!^ I am afraid
^6) erinnere mld^ I remember
^6) fe^ne tlttd^ I long
^d) befinne mid^ I recollect
II. Double Accusative
f 53 Some verbs take two accusatives, the person affected and the
thing produced.
154 The second object may be a noun, or pronoun, as: Sef)re tJlC
8(^ttlcr iiie ttjo^tc 2Bei§|eit. ^c^ frage eg iitri^.
155 When the object is the result of the action, it is called /ac^i-
tive, i. e. , (£r nennt i^n eiuett bttmmett Sungett, Verbs which take this
construction are : nennen, ^ei^en (to call), fc^tmpf en, [d)elten, tauf en.
1 56 The secondary object may be an infinitive (without jtt). ^d)
pre l^tt flnfien. Verbs capable of this construction are : pren, fe^en,
finben, (e^ren, (ernen, l^ei^en (to command), laffen.
III. Cognate Accusative
I 57 Intransitive verbs may have an object that expresses the idea of
the action in the form of the noun. Sometimes the two are formed
from the same root : (St ttdumt einen f d^onen Xraum.
er lebt ein gotttic^eS ficBen.
Sometimes merely synonymous in meaning:
©r \iixU einen [c^onen Xob.
APPENDIX , 279
^ TIME
IV. Adverbial Accusatiye < measure
( DISTRIBUTION
1 58 Like the genitive, the accusative may express certain adverbial
relations.
159 TIME— The ' accusative expresses a definite time, as btefett
Witnti toav ex auSgegangen; or duration of time, as liett gattfl
jm Xag blieb er gu ^aufc. [Note that the genitive expresses
indefinite or habitual time; cf. 128 (b).]
160 PLACE— eJel^e ticinm ffiJcg, bctt giuft l^inab.
1 6 1 MEASURE — After certain adjectives that express size, weight,
or quantity, the accusative is used to designate the amount,
i.e. , 2)a§ ^aftcfjen ift ctnett ^off ^o6). (£g ttjiegt gtucl ^funb.
®ag ipeer ift toufenb aRann ftarf.*
1 62 DISTRIBUTION— ®§ !oftct f unf Xaler ben 3Rctct.
♦ In the accusative of measure the noun is used without inflection, giving the
appearance of the singular form— 4 ^funb ^affec, 7 QoU ifod), 3 2)U|enb.
In the neuter nouns this is the old form of the plural, the masculines and femi-
nmes follow by analogy.
V. Absolute Accusative
1 63 More frequently than the nominative the accusative is used
vvrithout grammatical connection, for the purpose of vivid description.
©r ging l^inauS, ben fto)if ^od^ er^oben.
VI. With Prepositions
1 64 Certain prepositions always govern the accusative. They are;
burc^ (through), um (around), ol^nc (without), bi§ (until), fiir (for), gegen
(against), ttJtber (against). Prepositions denoting both position and
transition govern the accusative when motion towards an object is
implied (cf. 147).
A i SBol^ttt ift er gegangen?="Where did he go?
■ i @r ijt in iia0 ^ttU§ gegangen=He went into the house.
jN j 2Bo i[t cr gett)efen?=Where has he been ?
* ( @r ift In bcm ^aufc gen)cfen=He has been in the house.
280 APPENDIX
PRONOUNS
Personal
I 65 USE OF btt AND ®lc
^tt is the natural form of address and is used whenever no con-
ventional restraints are felt, as is the case when we address animals,
children, members of the family, or very intimate friends, and in
prayer. (©tC (really third person plural) is used in all conventional
conversation, both in singular and plural.
Ex.—^axi, gib mir bettt 33u(^! (SJott, tuir banfen ^ir fiir beine
@nabe !
©eben ©ie mir ^:^re ^anb! Segen 6ie aHe ^^xc SSiic^er nieber!
1 66 Demonstrative
The demonstrative pronoun is often used in German where, in
English, we would employ the personal.— ^c^ fe{)e ^axl, ber f ommt gerabc
red)t (I see Charles, he is just in time). The demonstrative pronoun
produces greater stress and emphasizes the relation to the preceding
word. The only difference between a demonstrative clause, such as
the above, and the relative clause is in the order of words, which,
however, changes the emphasis : ^(i) fe Je ^axl, bcr gerabe rec^t f ommt
fj. see Charles, who is just in time). This is much less emphatic.
1 67 The demonstrative \i\t\tV is used for the latter, and Jencr for
the former.
Ex.~Wax\e imb i^re SlJJutter finb im Garten, biefc mit ^df)en, jjene
init (Spielen befdjoftigt (Mary and her mother are in the garden,
the latter busied with sewing, the former with playing. )
Occasionally, to avoid ambiguity, the demonstratives berfelbe, ber-
jenige are used. Ex.—'^a^ S3uc^ liegt in hex S^ahe, ber 2)erfel be^felben ift
aufgefd^Iagen. But this somewhat stilted form is usually avoided.
1 68 Relative
The relatives bet and tuell^et do not differ in meaning, ^ct
is used more frequently ; good writers use toclli^Ct to avoid a weari-
some repetition of ber. Ex- — X\t, tOtl^t tcf) gefefjen, instead of bte, bie
ic^ gefe^en, although the latter also is often used. The genitive of
tceld^er, U)el(ipe§, is not used relatively, except in comparatively rare
cases in which the pronoun is used adjectively, as : Si^elli^e§ SDianne^
©oI)n er and) fei (No matter whose son he be). But here the word may
be considered as interrogative. For the relative toMt& we now
substitute beffeil (the genitive of ber). S)er ajJann, beffett ©o^n ©ie
f ennen (The man whose son you know).
169 9Ber and tuag as relatives
The indefinite toer is used as a relative in tKe following cases:
(a) When it includes both antecedent and relative : 9Ber nic^t ^oren
tDxU, tnu§ fitt)Ien (Whoever will not obey, must suffer).
(6) Indirect question: ^<i) tt)ei§ m6)t, mx e^ iff.
APPENDIX 281
f 70 The indefinite ttiaS may be used (instead of ba8) after ottc§,
ttld^tS, etttlttg, bag, and the indefinite adjectives, tttterlcl, tllclerlel,
mtttlii^erlet, and any other neuter adjective used indefinitely ; as, bttS'
®Utt, JlttS SJcfte, etc. 2Ba§ also represents an antecedent clause.
Ex.—'$iUe^, bia§ id) t)abe, fte^t bit §ur SSerfiigung (All that I have
is at your disposal) ®r fa^ feine (5i)ulb etn, tiia§ aber nic^tS mef)r
gut mad^te (He recognized his fault, which fact, however, did not
mend affairs.
Pronouns with Prepositions
1 7 I When demonstratives and relatives as objects of prepositions
refer to animals or things, they are usually compounded with the
preposition, the pronouns being reduced to ba(r),* ttlO(r),* respectively.
Demonstrative babei, barin, baburd^, baneben, etc.
Relative tootjon, ttjobet, tooburd^, wotan, hjorin, etc.
Ex.—(Sx l^atte jtnei ^ferbe, tt)Ot)on tia^ eine \d)tDav^, ta^ anbere toeife ttat.
♦The r is inserted to keep two vowels apart
1 72 Xa may point forward to a following clause or phrase:
(Sr tDarb baburd^ bcleibtgt, t>a% t^n niemanb bemerfte.
He was offended at nobody's noticing him.
@S lag i^m nid)t§ baran, ettoaS gu berbtenen.
1 73 ^atnit may be either the compound {demonstr. -f mlt) or a
conjunction introducing a clause of purpose.
@r !^at ba§ ^elb; batnit tann man t)iele3 anfangcn.
He has money; with it one can do much.
dt Derbicnt ta^ ®clb, bamit cr ettoaS an[angen tann.
He earns money in order to be able to accomplish something.
1 74 ^(l and tbO are also contracted with the adverbs l^in (thither)
and |ct (hither) to form demonstrative and relative compounds.
These compounds may be used as subordinate conjunctions.
@r ge^t ba^ltt, ttiol^cr feinc SSorfal^ren gefommen finb.
He goes to the place whence his ancestors came.
SBo bu bij"t, ba^irt toiU id) and) gef)en.
Where you are, thither will I go also.
175 The prepositions l^alb and tuegCtt are compounded with the
genitives of the demonstrative and relative pronoun, forming beSi^alb,
be^tOPfiCn^ tbeSl^alb, tocStiJefietl, which are used as causative conjunctions.
(kt Wax Ixant, be^^db blieb ex ju |>aufe.
He was sick, therefore he stayed at home,
©r war franf, ttieS^alb er §u ^aufe blicb.
He was sick, for which reason he stayed at home.
Tenses
Past Time < perfect tense
282 APPENDIX
VERBS
Mode
INDICATIVE— Statement of fact.
cSZtionI^ i statement of a supposition.
IMPERATIVE— Command.
INFINITIVE — General statement of the action.
Indicative
176 Direct statements or questions are expressed in the indic-
ative mode.
1. Present Time — present tense
preterite tense
perfect tense
pluperfect tense
I 3. Future Time } ^^^^® *^"f \ ,
I future perfect tense
1. Present Time
(a) To express an action taking place at the time—^d) gc|c je^t aug.
(6) To express a general truth— ^etcn Ifi ©ilber, (Sc^tueigen ifi ©olb,
(c) To express a very vivid future— WtoxQen ge|t er fort (To-morrow-
he will go away).
(d) To express a state of affairs beginning in the past and con-
tinued in the present (expressed in English by the perfect
tense)— ^d^ bin je^t gtoet ^al^re in ©l^icago (I have now been two
years in Chicago).
In German ^6) Bin JhJei ;^alf)re in ©l^tcago Qettiefen vt^ould mean, I
was in Chicago for two years. Such a use of the perfect indicates
a cessation of the action or condition in the present, hence: er i)at
gelebt = he is dead.
(e) To express a very vivid imperative — ®ic ^ontgin fprad) junt
$agen: 2)u Xm\\i einmal unb |oIfi mir ben S3eutel gum ©^iele.
This use of the present indicates that the speaker is very sure that
the order will be carried out.
(/) Historical present for very vivid past descriptions — ^ann mat*
fii^lert "^(^i^ §eer im rafd^en %tmpo weiter unb jeber ©olbat fji^U fid^
gel^oben (Then the army marched on at a rapid pace and every
soldier felt himself uplifted).
APPENDIX 283
( Preterite
2. Past TimeK Perfect
( Pluperfect
1 77 Past time may be expressed by the preterite, the perfect, the
pluperfect, according as the action is considered as absolutely or rela^
tively past. If a simple statement of a fact that has taken place in the
past is made without any reference to an accompanying fact, it is
more usual to employ the perfect tense.
^c^ Bin geftern bort QctDCfen (I was there yesterday).
^d) f^aht bag gefagt (I said that).
If this is limited by some other fact, the preterite is preferable:
21I§ er in§ 3^1""^^^^ txat, gtttft fein S3ruber l^inauS.
When he stepped into the room, his brother went out.
This rule is not absolute, as the best writers show great divergence
of use, but it will be found a safe working basis.
The pluperfect tense represents an action that has occurred previ-
ous to some other past event —
®r ^tttte fc^on fein Sdud) tmrd^gelefeu, e^e ber Scorer lam.
He had read his book through before the teacher came.
8. Future and Future Perfect
1 78 The simple future tense is used (as in English) to express an
event about to take place from the standpoint of the present-
er ttiirii morgen fommen.
179 The future perfect expresses an event completed from the
point of view of the future—
©r tolrb big ba^in %ttommtn fein (By that time he will have come).
For the future we may substitute the present [cf . 1 76 (c)]. For the
future perfect we may substitute the perfect—
S3i§ ba^in ifi er fdjon (jefommen.
These substitutions give a greater vividness.
The future and future perfect have an idiomatic use to indicate
probability —
eg mirb njo]§t tier U^r feitt.
It is probably four o'clock,
©g toirb tuag anbereg tt)o:^l ht'^tutti l^aBen.
It probably meant something else.
SBo ttiirb er bie ^aci)t jugebrttt^t ^aftm ?
Where can he have spent the night ?
284 APPENDIX
Subjnnctive
1 80 The subjunctive, in contrast to the indicative, expresses not a
fact but a thought, often a thought for the truth of which the speaker
assumes no responsibility.
KINDS OF SUBJUNCTIVE
I. Snpposition.
(a) INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
(6) CONDITION (UNREAL),
(c) DOUBT.
II. Desire.
(a) UNFULFILLED.
( COMMAND,
(6) POSSIBLY FULFILLED \ PRAYER AND WISH,
( CONCESSIVE.
I. Supposition
(a) INDIRECT DISCOURSE
1 8 I This use of the subjunctive occurs most frequently and must
be carefully studied. It is used after verbs of saying, wishing, think-
ing, feeling, asking ^ etc., whenever the quoted sentence is not stated
^s a positive fact. Thus we say, (5r glaubte, W^ e0 ric^ttg fei (He
thought it was right), but @r tru^te, ba§ e§ rid)tig torir (He knew it
was right), because in the second sentence is implied the actuality
of the fact.
182 The conjunction bttft is frequently omitted in ordinary con-
versation. In that case the order becomes normal, and the sub-
junctive mode is used to show the indirect discourse.
Ex.—^x tDu^te, c§ fci tt)a^r.
Tense Use of Indirect Discourse
1 83 In ail uses of the subjunctive tenses we find a weak sense of
time. The various tenses are used to express a variety of relationship
of the speaker towards the thought expressed. In indirect discourse,
the tense of the quoted sentence has no dependence upon that of the
leading verb, i. e. , there is no sequence of tense as in Latin. Each tense
of the indirect discourse may correspond with the tense of the
direct quotation, except in the preterite. The preterite, as shown in the
paradigm (cf. 62, p. 2.) has, in many instances, crept into the present,
to take the place of those present forms which, because of similar-
ity with the present indicative, have lost their subjunctive force.
Thus the preterite subjunctive has lost the significance of past time
and stands for the present. For the preterite we use the perfect in
indirect discourse.
APPENDIX
285
1 84 Hence we may have the following correspondence
Direct Quotation
Indicative
Present tense
Preterite tense
Perfect tense
Pluperfect tense
Future tense
Future Perfect tense
Indirect Quotation
Subjunctive
( Present tense
■j or
(Preterite tense
Perfect tense
Perfect tense
Pluperfect tense
Future tense
Future Perfect tense
This shifting has tended still further to weaken the sense of time
in the tenses, so that good authors use present and preterite, perfect
and pluperfect, future and conditional, interchangeably to avoid
wearisome repetition, without any feeling of difference in time.
Examples
Direct
Indirect
( fic^e )
^t ge^t ^eim
6r -J or ■ ^eim
( fiinfie)
^^ fitttg ^cim J
( ^P^ )
(£r ifi ^eim gegangen !■
©r -j or ()cim gegangen
er ttittr ^eim gegangen )
(ttittrc)
er ttiirb l^eim ge^cn
(5r mettle ^eim gel^en
er ttiirb ^eim gegaitgctt feiit
er merbc ^eim %t%m^tn feitt
When the present subjunctive is identical in form with the present
indicative, or similar in sound, the preterite subjunctive is to be pre-
ferred. This is always true in the 1st person singular and in the plural.
iNDic— ^d^ ^abe t)a^ 93u(^. Subj.— (Jr fagt, ta^ \^ bag S3u(^ f^dite
(not l^ttBe). Indic— 2Btr ^aben ha^ 93u(^. Subj.— ©r fagt, ba^ n)ir ha^
^VLii) J^iittCtt (not |akn). For insertion or omission of tittfe cf. 182.
(b) UNREAL CONDITION
1 85 This levelling out of all difference in meaning between present
and preterite, perfect and pluperfect subjunctive has not extended to
the other uses of the subjunctive. On the contrary, there is here a
very sharply drawn distinction in meaning.
1 86 The present and perfect are used for the expression of thoughts
which may be true to actual facts ; the preterite and pluperfect for
suppositions which are known to be unreal. This is illustrated in
unreal conditions.
286 APPENDIX
Present time = Preterite subj.
Past time = Pluperfect subj.
Ex.—^enn i^ ein SSoglein toiit', flog' id^ 3U bir.
If I were a bird, I should fly to you.
aSenn id^ ein SSoglein %mt\tn ttrire, ttiire i^ gu bir geffogm.
If I had been a bird, I should have flown to you.
1 87 In place of the subjunctive in the apodosis, the conditional
mode may be used (cf. paradigm 63).
Ex.—fS^enn i^ ein SSoglein toare, toiitrtie \^ s^ bir fliegett.
SSenn icf) ein SSoglein gettJefen ttjare, tuittbe id) ju bir geflogett fclit.
1 88 The ttientt may be omitted, in which case the order is inverted :
SBiire idi ein SSoglein.
1 89 A real condition is a statement of fact, hence is expressed by
the indicative: SSenn e§ tt^ntt, tttmmt man einen 3fiegen[cf)irm (When-
ever it rains, one takes an umbrella).
1 90 Occasionally one of the two parts of the condition is made espe-
cially vivid by being placed in the indicative: Wlit biefem $feil tutrd^^
fd^O^ i^ (Sud^, ttJenn id^ mein liebeS ^inb getroffen t)dtte (With this arrow
I should have shot you, if I had hit my beloved child).
(c) DOUBT
1 9 I After nU oh (as though) —closely related to the conditional
subjunctive — @r \at} au§, al8 ob er ein Unred^t Ibegangen
l^dtte (He looked as though he had done a wrong). (£r tat
alg fd^Uefe er (He acted as though he slept).
192 Dubitative or Diplomatic (also known as subjunctive of
weakened assertion), i.e., a modest statement of a fact
which, by being put into the subjunctive, receives a ten-
tative air, as though the speaker were open to conviction
on the subject. (This may be considered a part of an
unreal condition. )
Ex.— ^d) bac^te boc^ = I should really suppose
^\6)i ha^ id) ttJiifeie = Not that I am aware of
^d) moc^te njo^t = I should like
^6) pttc e2 lieber = I should prefer
®§ ware too^l an ber 3ctt = It is about time
2)a§ biirfte gef al^rlic^ fein = That might be considered dangerous
28er toilfete t)a§ nicf)t? = Who doesn't know that ?
2Ba§ l^atte ic^ gu fiirc^ten? = Of what should I be afraid ?
2)a§ toaxe tt)a^r? = Could that be true ?
©ie l^attc ba^ fietan? = I cannot believe that she has done that
APPENDIX 287
II. Desire
f 93 The difference in meaning between the present and preterite,
perfect and pluperfect tenses of the subjunctive (cf. 186) is further
illustrated in the subjunctive of Desire.
1 94 A desire may be of two kinds :
r ,/»„ ^ j Preterite subj,
(a) Impossible of fulfillment | pluperfect subj.
(6) Possible of fulfillment— Present subj,
Ex.^{a) SSenn er hod) noc^ am fieben ttJire I
Oh, that he were still alive!
SSenn er t)oc^ nod^ einige ^diixe gelcBt f^Uit I
Oh, that he had lived a few years longer
As in case of the conditional subjunctive (cf. § 188) the ttJeittl may
be omitted and the order become inverted: Wdtt er boci^ nod^ am
Seben ! §dtte er borf) itoc^ einige ^a!^re gcIcBt !
(&) Desire that is expected to be fulfilled.
195 1. COMMAND— 1st and 3d person.
2. PRAYER OR WISH— 1st and 3d person.
3. CONCESSIVE.
1 96 !• Under the desire that is expected to be fulfilled we class
the command addressed to the first and third persons (represented in
English by let and the infinitive).
Let us go home ! = ®tf^tn tiJir nad) §aufe !
Let him not forget ! = JBcrgeffe cr nic^t.
197 2. Forms of prayer or beseeching: S)ein 9leid^ fomntel (Thy
kingdom come!)
Since the third person plural subjunctive is identical in form
with the corresponding person of the indicative (cf. § 62, p. 2 .) we often
substitute for this construction the modal auxiliary tnogPIt + infinitive.
Ex.—JXtttiltn SBeifere iiber bie forage = SBetfere tnoQcn iiber bie forage
itrtcileti.
1 98 3. Concessive — This represents a willingness on the part of the
speaker to grant certain claims as not affecting the validity of his
main contention. It is always in the present.
Ex.—Wie§ anbere, fct e§ tt)a§ e§ fei, gilt nid^ts.
Everything else, be it what it may, coimts for nothing.
e§ fel fo tote bu gefagt J^aft. ( )
Let it be as you have said.
288 APPENDIX
1 99 The same idea is sometimes expressed by the modal auxiliary
mogm + infinitive.
Ex.—Q^ tnag fo fein, trie bu gefagt t}a\t
Granted what you have said.
Imperative
200 Strictly speaking there are but two forms of the imperative,
the second person present singular and plural —
Btfi Bcfi(e)t
20 1 But the use of the third person plural pronoun (©ie) for
the conventional form of address has introduced a new form into the
imperative (cf. 105): gebett ®lc (always with the subject expressed
after the verb).
202 These three forms are used for direct command addressed to
another person or persons.
203 An indirect command referring to a third person may be
expressed by the subjunctive (cf. 196).
204 Extremely emphatic commands in familiar speech are often
expressed by the indicative present (cf. 176e), by the perfect participle:
\d)neU gelaufen! (run quickly) and by the infinitive: nirfit fo laut fprec^en!
(don't speak so loudly).
Thus we may express commands in eight ways —
Imperative jtt»*5f»^f(^«)J
( axWttti (i^r)!
( ar0eiten ®te I
Subjunctive ■] at!6ette cr !
Indicative— titt tttbettefi I
Participle— fij^neff fiCttrtettctl
Infinitive— f^ttctt ttrbclten!
205 Infinitive -Yerbal Noun
I. Part of the Yerb (without ju)
II. With Noun or Adjective (with pi)
III. Substantive (with or without jn)
206 !• Part of Yerb
The infinitive is used to form (a) the future tenses, (b) the con-
Mlitional mode, (c) the complement of the modal auxiliaries and
(d) of a few verbs of similar construction. In this use the infinitive
without |tt is the rule.
APPENDIX 289
(6) ^d^ ttjiirbe BcganGCtt fcin.
(c) (S§ mu§ gefttgt meriJett.
(d) The other verbs that admit of this construction are : finben,
fiil^Ien, t)ei^en, l^elfen, l^oren, ta[fen, le^ren, ternen, ntad)en, feften.
;Sc3^ laffe ba§ bon ber 9JJagb tun (cf. 212).
er mtt^t tnic^ t)or bent gangen |)ofe erroten.
He makes me blush before my entire court.
(e) After a few verbs the infinitive (without gu) is used idiomat-
ically to express duration of condition.
Ex.— dt Ut'ibi fl^etl. He keeps his seat.
6r Itttte t>a^ ®elb tm ^aften lit^tn. He had the money lying
in the box.
@e^', lege t)i6) fiJ^lofenl Go to sleep I
©C^C ftlttjicrcn ! ®C^C Pfd^cri I Go for a walk! Go fishing 1
207 Command — In familiar language this infinitive is used to
express an emphatic command, especially in prohibition, correspond-
ing to our English don't : %ie Wluttn fagt gum ^inbe : „^\<i)i fo laut
fc^reien! ©till fi^en unb effen!" (Don't scream so loud, sit still and eat!)
208 II. With Noun or Adjective
Infinitive phrases (with p) are used (a) to modify nouns very
much in the sense of the attributive genitive (cf. 1121).
%ie ^unfl pt IeBett = The art of living = 2)ie ^unft be§ SebenS.
(b) To modify adjectives — 2)a§ \\i \djtoex ju fajjcn (hard to say).
( Noun
209 III* Substantive] or
( Clause
As a substitute for noun or clause, the infinitive may be subject
or object of the verb.
When the substantive infinitive is used instead of a noun it may
be pure (without ju) or prepositional (with gu).
Ex.— '^a§ ©cl^en toirb i^r fe{)r fd^tuer.
Walking is very difficult for her.
(£r ^flegt ben SSogen raftf) p f^ittttttett.
He is accustomed to stretch the bow quickly.
2 I O It is difficult to give a rule that will apply in all cases for the
insertion or omission of ju in this use of the infinitive. When the
verbal property of the infinitive is made emphatic by a modifying
adverb or an object, the p is usually inserted.
29a APPENDIX
JKr.— ^ung fur t>a^ SSaterlanb ju fterten ift em tul^mfid^er %oh.
To die young for one's fatherland is an honorable death.
When the substantive use is the more emphatic, the ju is omitted.
Ex.^x gog eitt fj^netteS (©terpen bem MnriilmUii^ett 8eften 5>ot»
* He preferred a quick death to a dishonorable life.
When the substantive infinitive is used for a clause of purpose or
direction the JU must always be inserted.
©ie ging nm Slumen p iiprfcn (bamit [ie SSrunten p^Me),
2 If ■ Sometimes in exclamations a connecting word is omitted and
the so-called elliptical infinitive appears to stand alone in the sentence.
Sld^, auf ba§ tnutige 9io^ m\6) p f^ttitngen ! (we might add, to com-
plete the sense: ift ntein fel^nlicifter SSunfci^.=To mount the brave
charger is my dearest wish.)
^6) ta^ im ! (for ic^ foE \>a§ tun! = I do that!)
2 1 2 After loffm, Mcrt, prett, fit^lctt, as well as after the verb fefel,
the active infinitive may have a passive meaning.
Ex. — @§ ift t)iel p tJItt (There is much to be done).
@r I'd^t e§ ttttt (He has it done).
Wan t)5rt bict) lobtn (One hears you praised).
213 Precaution
The use of the infinitive with subject accusative, so common in
English, is not found in German. The infinitive must either have the
same logical subject as the main verb: id) tt)iinf{f)e i:^n ju fcl^en (I wish
to see him), or must be the direct object of the verb: id) befal^I il^m
nac^ ^aufe gu gefjen (I commanded him to go home).
Such constructions as, I wish him to go, or I believe him to he a
good man, must be translated by a clause :
, . :Sd) iDiinfc^e, bttfe tx ge^e.
^d) glaitbe, baff er eitt outer Wtmn ifi.
214 The Participle— Terbal Adjectire
In use, the participle conforms entirely to the adjective, being
declined like the latter and employed, attributively, predicatively, or
substantively like it. The only difference is that the participle may
have a verbal or objective modifier which always precedes it. The
present participle is active, the past participle passive in its meaning.
Ux.^^a^ ben roten Sl^jfel mit gro^em SSergniigen tjerfjieifettiie ^inb.
• The child who was eating the red apple with much pleasure.
. « ' '©cr^bcn tierfjjelfte ^pfel befatn i^m nid^t.
The apple that had just been eaten, did not agree with him.
APPENDIX 291
2 15 The participial noun common in English, is not fouiid in
German. In translating, either an infinitive or a clause taust be sub-
stituted.
216 If the participle is used as subject or object, the substantive
infinitive (without ju) is used in German.
The rain made walking very difficult.
The rushing of the water.
^ttS ^IttUfi^Ctt be§SSa[jer§.
217 If the English participial noun is governed by prepositions, it
is translated by a prepositional infinitive or a clause.
1. The prepositions alette, attfiatt ttitt govern the infinitive phrase,
Kx.— Without seeing his friend = ot^nt ^^ineux^xeunt) pt \t^tn.
Instead of going home = ttttfitttt nad) ^aufe pi p|eii.
For the purpose of seeing her once more= ttllt fie nod) ein*
mar in fc^en.
2. When prepositions other than these three govern the English
participial noun, the phrase must be turned into a clause in German.
Ex. — After seeing his mother = 9la^beHt cr feine SUiutter gefe^ett ^diit.
By saying this = 3ntlcm er bie§ \a%tt.
The participle as such can not be substantivized in German. It
is primarily an adjective with the full adjective declension. As an
adjective it may be used without a noun. Ex. — dx freute \i6) iiber ^rig
(Bejli^el^ene (He rejoiced at what had happened). Here ba^ ©efd^eljtne
stands for bttS gefl^e^CtlC ^Ittfl, just as tag @tttc may stand for ttt^
pte Xing.
The participle may be used to express an emphatic command:
SfJicfit gefadelt, [c^neE an§ SBerf gCQangm ! (No fooling there, go to work
quickly!)
The Passive Toice
2 1 8 Every transitive verb can be made passive as in English. The
preposition of agency (English by) is tiott.
Active— @r fti^ldgt ben ^naben.
He strikes the boy.
Passive— S)cr f nabe ttirb ijon i^m %t\fi^la%m.
The boy is being struck by him.
292 APPENDIX
219 In German we distinguish carefully between the real passive,
i. e., an action of which the subject is the sufferer and not the agent,
and a mere condition of the subject, arising out of some former action.
®a§ papier miril ^ettiffm = The paper is (being) torn.
S)a§ papier tfi jerrtffen = The paper is torn.
Observe that jettiffett in the second sentence is only a predicate
adjective.
220 SUBSTITUTES FOR THE PASSIVE
(a) man + active.
(&) M ittffen + active infinitive.
(c) Reflexive Form of Verb.
22 I The passive is often clumsy and is used less frequently in Ger-
man than in English, especially in cases in which the agent is not
named.
Ex.-^{a) aj^an offnete eine Xwc (A door was opened).
(6) ^a^ Idfet fid) tun (That can be done),
(c) %xt %nxt offnete fid^ langfam (Slowly the door was opened).
This substitution is especially frequent after modal auxiliaries,
where a passive infinitive would cause unwieldy length.
The door could not have been opened = 2)te Xitr ^Hit nid^t geoffltct
toetben UWXVX, or better:
(a) Wan pttc bte Zux nid^t dffneti fottiictt.
(5) %\t Xitr Ittttc \v^ nid)t offnett laffcn.
222 When the object of the active verb is in the dative, it can not
be made the subject of the passive. An impersonal subject must then
be substituted and the dative object remains unchanged.
Active— ©te ^at i^m fie^olfett.
Passive— @g ift i^m t)on i^r ge^olfett tiiorlictt.
Modal Auxiliaries
223 They express the mental attitude of the speaker to the action
implied in the verb. There are six.
fiittttett = possibility (physical, moral, or intellectual)
Qtogen = desire (always a mental attitude)
bitrfcil = permission (on the part of an outside power)
Wiiffen = necessity
fotten = the desire or declaration of an outside power
ttlOtten = the desire or declaration of the speaker himself
224
I.
225
11.
226
in.
227
IV.
228
V.
229
VI.
APPENDIX 293
From these general meanings various allied uses have been derived.
I. fotttten = possibility
230 ^(^ tatttt t>ci^ nid^t tJtn (I can not do that).
The infinitive of the verb may be omitted if the meaning is clear
from the context: ^6) fann e§ nic^t.
23 I An original meaning of fdnttett was to know. This is still
preserved in phrases like: ^attttfi t)U beine 5lufgabe? (Do you know
your lesson?) ^attttfii buS)eutfd)? (Do you know German?) etc.
II. mofiCtt = desire
232 2Ber mo^tt fofd^ cin Sebcn fiil^ren? (Who would care to live
such a life ?)
After ntdgeit, also, the infinitive may be omitted.
^6) tnag nid)t (I don't want to).
^6) mag e§ nid^t (I don't like it).
233 The original meaning was to be able. But this is now found
only in the compound tiermogen: @r tiermag ba^ nid^t ju ttttt (He can
not do that).
234 SD^ogen occasionally translates the English may, with the idea
of possibility or probability.
Ex.— fBa^ ag wol^l brinnen fein?
What may be in it ?
6r tnag ein bofeS @ett)i[fen l^aben.
He may have a bad conscience,
©r tnoc^tc gttjet ^al^re bageiuefen [cin.
He may hav'e been there for two years.
But the English "May I go"? is „2)arf id^ gel^en"?
III. bitrfen = permission
235 ^n bet ©d^ule barf man ntdf)t f^jred^en (One is not permitted to
speak in school). (The English you must not do so is also bu batfft
ha^ nidf)t tun.)
236 The original meaning to be in want of is now found only in
bebiirfen. ajian bebarf manc^eg in ber SSelt (One needs many things in
this world).
237 The preterite subjunctive of Diirfen (biirfte) is used idiomatically
to express probability. S)a§ biirftc 5U fd^mcr fein (That is probably too
hard).
294 APPENDIX
IV. miiffett = necessity (from without)
238 ^(S) tnufetc nad^geben (I had to submit).
er tDirb e§ tun miiffett (He will be obliged to do it).
239 A derived meaning is found in the following usages:
9?un mu^tc e§ and) nod^ regnen ! (Now fate would have it rain !)
S)er mni^ ein SO^orber fein! (He must be a murderer!)
V. foffett = desire or statement (from without)
240 S)ufoaftnic^t Mien! (Thou Shalt not steal).
2)er ^onig foH leben! (Long live the king!)
®r fott einen 2tuf fa^ fd^reiben (He is to write an essay).
24 I Without the infinitive—
SSaSfjjaber^nabe? (What is the boy to do?)
242 Hearsay—
2)a§ foff ein reigenbeg Sanb fcin (That is said to be a charming land).
243 In the subj. pret. it represents a conditional meaning—
Wan foUte glauben (One should suppose),
©r fottte ge^en (He ought to go).
Note that this is the only exact rendering of the English ought.
VI. tiiottett = desire or declaration (from within)
244 SBittfi ^n eth)a§? (Do you want anything?)
er ^at ta^ nidjt tun tooKcit (He did not want to do that).
245 It is not to be confounded with the English "wiir'=futurity.
For this purpose the German employs ttierbett. But sometimes it is to
be translated with to be about to^ or on the point of, but always
expressing volition.
(Sr toiU gel^en = He is about to go (makes a motion of going).
246 With non-personal verbs ttiottett has many idiomatic uses, aJl
of which rest on personification.
S)a3 miff btr nicf)t gefaUen (That does not suit you).
S)a§ tultt ntdf|t§ fagen (That is of no importance).
^a§ ttJtff tuol^r bebad^t fein (That requires careful consideration).
247 ^oHett may express a claim on the part of the speaker.
@r ttiiff ein reic^er ©nglanbcr fein = He claims to he a rich English-
man (cf. with a similar use of foUen 242).
APPENDIX 29S
VERBS OP A SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION
248 loffctt = permission or command.
j^ei^ett = command.
^d) lic^ @uc^ ftet§ entttJifcfjcn = I always let you escape.
Wlan breitet au^, [tc fc!^ttjinbe, la^t fie franfcrunb txanler: toexhen, enblid^
ftifl fierfd^eiben. (One can spread the report that she is declining, make
her grow worse and worse, and at last quietly fade away).
^^ Ittffe ntir ein neue§ ^leib mac^en = I have a new dress made
(order it to be made).
j^ei^en = command (to be carefully distinguished from l^ei§cn = to
call or be named),
6t ^ctfet bie Oolbaten bic SBriiden tjerbrennen.
He commands the soldiers to burn the bridges.
Impersonal Verbs
249 Many verbs which have a personal subject in English are
impersonal in German, i. e., the person concerned is regarded as being
affected by the action rather than as the agent. The subject is the
impersonal c8, while the person affected is represented by a dative or
accusative noun or pronoun.
e§ bauert mid) = I am sorry
e§ efelt mic^ an = It disgusts me
e§ erbarmt mid^ = I pity
cS faUt mix ein = It occurs to me
e§ fdHt mir auf = I notice (my attention is attracted)
c8 freut mid) = I rejoice
e§ gefallt mir = It pleases me (I like)
c§ gelingt mir = I succeed
e§ gcniigt mir = It suflaces me
e§ jammert mi(^ = I take pity on
e§ rent mic^ = I repent
eg fd^minbelt mir = I grow dizzy
eg tut mir leib = I am sorry
eg tut mir mel^ = It hurts me
eg oerbrie^ mic^ = It vexes me
VOCABULARIES
VOCABULARY
EXPLANATORY NOTE
1. Words not marked with the accent are to be accented on the first syllable.
2. The principal parts of strong and irregular verbs will be found in Section 86
of the Api)endix.
3. Verbs that form the perfect tenses with the auxiliary [eill, are indicated as
follows :
bleiben, to remain, (fein)
4. The endings of the gen. sing, of masculines atid neuters and of the nom.
plur. of all nouni^ are given. A dash indicates that the plural is formed without
additional ending.
5. Irregular comparatives and superlatives are given.
6. The parts of speech are indicated only when the translation might lead io
misunderstanding.
ABBREVIATIONS
ace. = accusative
adj. = adjective
adv. = adverb
App, = Appendix
art. = article
aux. = auxiliary
of. = compare
cond. = conditional
conj. = conjunction
dat. = dative
def. = definite
dem(onstr.) = demonstrative
dim. = diminutive .
Eng. = English
ex. = example
fem. = feminine
fut. = future
gen. = genitive
imper. = imperative
indecl. = indeclinable
indef . = indefinite
indie. = indicative
inf. = infinitive
inter. = interrogative
interj. = interjection
intr(ans.) = intransitive
irr. = irregular
masc. = masculine
neut. = neuter
nom. = nominative
num. = numeral
obj. = object
part. = participle
perf. = perfect
I)ers. = i)erson(al)
plup. = pluperfect
pl(ur.) = plural
poss(ess.) = jxjssessive
pred. = predicate
prep. = preposition
pres. = present
pret. = preterite
pron. = pronoun
refl. = reflexive
reg. = regular
rel. = relative
sing. = singular
str. = strong
subj. = subjunctive
subst. = substantive
superl. = sui>erlative
tr(ans.) = transitive
w. = weaik
GERMAIS^-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
bcr 2Cai:, -(e)S, -c, eagle X
ti^, away, from
bag SlbcttbUeb, -(e)^/ -«r. evensong
bag 2lbentcucr, -§, — , adventure
ober, but, however
ttbjjerlffcu, shabby
a b' (eg en, «'., to take oflF
ttb'nefjmen, sir., to take off
ttb'reifeit, «'., to depart (feitt)
ab'f<i)(iefKnf s'r., to shut off, lock
a^/ oh ! alas ! well then !
oj^t, eight
bie 9lcf)t, care ; — geben, to take care y ^
bie 91(f) tuns r regard ^^ /
ii^jett, «'., to groan
abe, adieu ! farewell !
bag 9lbiefttb% -g, -c, adjective
tttt, every, all
fttteitt', alone; but
allesi, everything, all the world
ttHejclt, always
tHUbatcr, -g, Odin, father of gods and
men
bie 2ltWe), -en, Alps
ttt§, when, as, than, but
ntfo, so, therefore, that is to say
Olt, old
bag Sitter, -g, — , age
bag Slltertum, -g, ^er, antiquity;
pluT., relics of antiquity
altettitmlit^ ,
ber Stmboft,
ber 2lmcrtfo'ttcr, -g, — , American
btc Slmcrifa'ttettn, -nen, American
ber 5lmtmatttt, -(e)g, -^er, burgomastpr
Qmitfteren, w. reft., to amuse oneself
tttt, p^ep. with dat. and ace,
I, antique «L—
-f1'«^, -ffe, anvil
2., at, tOfhyl (
'299
anf bitten, str., to offer
an'binben^ «^r., to tie ;
tttt'blicfen, «., to look at ^
anber, adj., other
anberi, otherwise, differently
ber Stnfoitfl, -(c)«, ""e, beginning, com-
mencement
tttt'fonBcn, str.^ to begin
on'fofTen, «'., to seize, take hold of
bie ginforbcruttfl, -en, claim, demand
on'Beben, str., to tell ,
an' fl el) en, str., to concern, beg A/^^
on' B ebb rem w., to belong to ^
ber Slnflebbrifie, subst. adj., relative y
bag ^ngefil^t, -g, -e, face, counte-
nance
anoeftrenst, bard, with great exer-
tion
an'b(inoen> ^o., to hang on to, attach
to
on'f ommen, str. , to arrive (fein)
bie3lnl0fie, - talent, disposition,
advantage
ber 9ln(a^, -ffeg, ^fle, occasion
an'tio^en, w., to knock
an'f^tie^en, str. rejl., to attach one-
self to
on'feben, str., to look at
bag Slnfeben, -g, — , renown
on'ftannen, «>., to stare at
aii'ftrcnflen, «•. re/l., to strain, make
an effort
btc ^nttvovt, -en, answer
ont'niorten, w., to answer
on'bertrttnen, w., to entrust to
on'maibfen, str., to grow, increase
bag Slnmadilfen, -g, increase, growth
«in''selflen, w., to report
ttn'jitnbett/ w., to kindle, light
300
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
ber 2H>fct, -§, •", apple
ber 9l^felbaum, -ie)5S, ^e, apple-tree
O^JfclBtOU, dapple gray J
bie 2UtJCit, work /
atbcitctt, w., to work
ber ^vbtitev, -§, — , workmao, laborer
ber Slrget, -^, vexation
axm, poor
ber Slrni, -(e)§, -e, arm
bie 2lrmcc', -n, army
bie 2lrt, -en, kind, sort
au^, also
bie 2lu{c), -en, meadow
auf, ^J'ep. wilh dat. and ace, up, at,
upon ; adj. or adv., open
auf'bemoIjtCtt, w., to keep, guard
ouffrcffcttf «<^., to devour
bie ^lufsabCf -n, task, exercise, lesson
ftltf gebcitf sir., to put to ; give up
auf'ficfien, sir., to rise (fein)
auf'ftcbcn, J<r., to pick up
QUfmodjctt, «^., to open
bie Slttfmcrffomfcit, -en, attention
bie 3lufttabmc, -n, shelter, reception
auffoflCtt, w., to give warning (to a
servant)
OUf'ffttOflCtt, str.,io open
ttUf flJcrtcil, w., to open wide
auf ftct)cn, str., to get up (fein)
auf'ma^ett, w. t'w^r., to awaken
auf Siil^tenf w?., to name, enumerate
auf'SCljrCtt, w., to consume
ba§ Slufic, -S, -n, eye
ba§ SiugteiU, -S, — , (iim., little eye
au§, prep, with dat., or adv., out, out
of, of
au§'bretteu, w. refl., to spread out
auS'btiirfCtt, «'., to express
OU§SCba(fen> thoroughly baked, done
auS'fiCbCU, str., to give out, spend
auS'flCljcn, str., to go out (fein)
auSflcfc^t, exposed ^
auSflcjcidjnct, excellent <
bie 9ru§fUttft, ^C, information
ber 9lu§lan»er, -§, — , foreigner
auS'lanblfdi, foreign
au§'(eben, refl., to live oneself out
au§'red)ncn» w., to reckon, work out
au§'fd)auen> w.,ixi look out
ttttS'felllttflCtt, 5<r., to sprout
auS'feljctt, str., to appear, look
ba« 2ltt§feftcn» -S, appearancie
i;
ber SluS'tties, -(e)^, -e, device, way out
aug'meidjen, 5<r., to getiout of the
way (fein) "^
ausmeubtg, by heart \ — lernen, to
learn by heart /
auS'Seidjneu, w. refl., to distinguish y
aU^erBettibbultd), extraordinary
iiu^erftf extremely
aUS'jieftcu, str., to draw oflf
ber ©ai!|, -(e)g, ^e, brook
bag 93a(f)lcin» -§, — , <fm., brooklet
bacfcn, str., to bake
ber JBorfofctt, -§, ^, oven
balb(c), soon
bie lBaQa''be, -n, ballad, poem
bans, afraid ; eS ift mir — , 1 am afraid
bangen^ «'. refl., to be afraid
bie 3)anf, ^e, bench
ber ©ar, -en, -en, bear
ber ©art, -(e)g, ^e, beard
ber ©ou, -(e)g, -e, building
bie 93auart, -en, style of architecture
bauen, w., to build
ber ©auetr -§ or -n, -n, farmer, peas-
ant
ber IBauetniunse, -n, -n, farmer's
boy
ber aSaum, -<e)§, -^e, tree v
ber ©aufttt, -§, -e, style of archite&^^^^V'^
ture ^"^
bebc'rfcn, «'., to cover
bebCU'tcn, w., to mean
bie ©ebinguuo, -en, condition -"i,
bcbro'bCttr «'•> to threaten '
ber IBcfcftt', -§, -e, command f
bcfcb'tcu, «</■., to command
bcftn'bcn, str. rejl., to be
beftci'cn, w., to set free
begeben, str. refl., to betake oneself
bcecfl'ncu, w., to meet, happen
bejlCtftert, enthusiastically
bcflitt'ttcn, str., to begin
bcjjnu'flCtt, w. refl., content oneself
Benrii'^en, w., to salute, greet
bcbal'tcn, str., to keep; to remember
bcban'bcltt, w., to treat
bcljauij'tcn, w., to insist
bie ©c^outJ'tUUfi, -en, statement,
declaration
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
301
bcfterrfiftt', self-controlled, composed
bcljcrjt', brave
btWttn, «'., to guard
bci, prep, with dat., with, by, at; —
mir, at my house
t)eil>C, both ; aUe — , both of them ;
bie beiben, the two
fici'ieite, aside, to one side
bei'fteUen, w., to set aside
htx^tn, sir., to bite
bci'trctctt, str., to join (fetn)
htlawxxt' , known, acquainted
bcfotn'mcn, str., to receive; e§ 6e*
fommt mir gut, it agrees with me.
bic iBctci'btfiunB, -en, insult V
^cUcn, tf'., tobark ^
htioli'ntn, w., to reward
btm'ddt^tiRcn, w. refl., to get posses-
sion of
bcmet'fctt, w., to notice, remark
bie fflcmcr^funfl. -«"> remark, obser-
vation
bcnath'bavt, neighboring ^ '
htnu'litn, w., to use.
htob'aiittn, w., to observe
bereifi'nen, «"., to take into account,
reckon up
ietclfen, w., to travel through
btxtW, ready *^
ber ©ergf -(e)^» -«/ mountain
Bernettr *<»"., to hide
ber ©criiftt', -§, -e, report
btx'WXtw, w., to report
beru'fcit, «<r., to call
6crit^tnt', famous
bcriifi'vctt, tt., to touch %/^
bic aScritfi'ruttB, -en, touch
btld'en, w., to sow
bcfot', studded
btWa'mtnb, humiliating
bcfd)ir'mctt, w., to guard
bcftf)tci''bctt, s<r., to describe
befdjit'ftctt.u'., to protect
befl!)tt)Ct'««f|, difficult, hard
bcfcc'Iett, «'. , to fill with life
Bcfltfl'HftCtt, to., to view, examine X
bcfin'eett, sir. trans., to sing, cele-
brate (in song)
befln'ttClt, str. refl., to recollect, recall
bcfott'bcrS, especially
bcfott'nett, calm, composed ^
ftcfOt'BCW' w., to care for, look after
beffer, better
beffern, u\ refl., to improve
beft, best
bt\tf\it\\, str., to pass (.examination) ;
— au^, to consist ot
bcftclj'len, str. to rob
befu't^en, w., to visit, attend
ber JBefu'fter, -s, — , visitor
beten, w., to pray
btttXX'tXW, w., to protest; to affirm
solemnly
ber ^tiXdiiX', -§, consideration
betrau'etrn, w. trans., to mourn
bttXt'ttn, str., to enter, step upon
bag »ett, -e§, -en, bed
btuitn, w., to bend ; ficl^ — , to bow
ber ^tntti, -S, — , money-bag, purse
bttoaVbtX, wooded
bemei'fen, str.. to prove
betuir^ttn^ -v., to entertain
ber S3e)tlO^'ner, -S, — , inhabitant
bie S3enio^'nerin, -nen, inhabitant
beitiun'bern/ w., to admire
bejat)'(en, w., to pay
bejeiifi'nen, w., to designate
ber iBejUS'> -^, "^e, reference, regard
btetettf str., to offer
bag S3ilbr -(e)§, -er, picture, reilectiou
bilbett, w., to form /
ber 93i(bb(iutv, -§, -^,^ sculptor
bie SBt(bunSr education
biaiB' cheap
binbem «^r., tobind
bi§, until, up to
bii^er'r up to now, formerly
bie 93itte, -n, prayer, request
blttc, please ! -^
bitten, str., to request, ask
bitter, bitter
bittcrli*, bitterly
blanf, bright, sparkling
blafen, str., to blow
baS ©tott, -(e)g, -^er, leaf, page
bteiben, str., to remain (fein)
ber S3IidF, -{e)§, -e, glance, look
blidfett, w., to look
blittb, blind
bHt^cn, w., to fiash
blitljen, w., to bloom, flourish
ba§ 93Iiintd)ett, -§, — , rfuft., flowret
bie ©Iltmc, -n, flower
ba§ ©Ittt, -(e)§, blood
|/
302
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
y
bic S&tntt, -H, blossom, flourishing
condition
bcr Soben, -^, ^, ground, floor
ber iBbljnicrttialb, -(e)^, Bohemian
Forest
bic ©orfc, -n, purse
ftO^, bad, wicked, angry
hH^avtii, malicious
Btrateit/ sir., to roast
ber JBraucft, -(e)§, ^c, custom
htdXtiiitXtt w., to use, employ
hvamn, i^., to brew
firaUtt, brown
hV(lU\cttf «'., to roar, resound
hvtditnt sir., to break
hxtit, broad
hvtnntn, irr to burn ; cf. App. 88
bcr «Brtef, -{e)§, -e, letter
bic ^riUe, -n, spectacles
brinoett, t/*?"., to bring, take ; cf.
App. 88
ba§ Sdvot, -(e)^/ -C/ bread
bcr IBru*, -(e)^, ^c, fraction
bcr IBruber, -^, ^, brother
hvummtn, w.^ to grumble
bcr Srutttten, well
ba§ S^ritnnleiUf -S, — , rfm., little
spring
bic Stuftr ^c, breast, bosom
ba§ JBu*, -(e)§, ^cr, book
bie aSiidjfe, -n, rifle
hudtn, w. refl. , to bend
Ibuffeitt, to study, •' dig"
boS ©uttbet, -3, — , bundle
hunt, gay, varicolored
bie 93urBf -en, castle
ber 93urscr, -3, — , citizen
ber Surf^e, -n, -n, student, lad
bic SSnfiitttnlitvv'UitiUit, joyous
student-life
bic 93utf$entuft» ^e, joy of youth
bcr Gfiarol'tcr, -8, -c, character
bic ^OttWnt, -n, cousin
s
bo, adv., there, then ; coraj., aa
babel', adv., with that, over it
ba§ So^, -e3, -^cr, roof
bofur'f for that
bftficr', hence, from there
ba^in', thither, there
bdtttalS, at that time
bamit', iu order that, with that
batn^fen, «'., to subdue
bonn, then
batauf, thereupon, on it
barin'/ in that, therein
bftru'bcr, at it, about it, at that
borum', therefore, about it
barun'ter, under it
boft, C071J., in order that ; that
bau'cm, «?., to last
babon, adv., from that, away '
batJDt'', before that
bQ3tt'» at that, in addition, besides
beifen, w., to cover, set
bcitt, thine, your
ber Segen, -3, — , sword
bcrfcl'be, that one, he
beftittie'ren, w., to decline
bemittisen, w., to humiliate
benfen, in-., to think. Cp. App. 88
ba§ 2)enfma(, -3, -"er, monument
beim, conj., for
bcr, bie, ba§, the; this; who
berienige, dem. pron., that one
bertuetr, while, meanwhile
ber 2)crhilfjft, -8, -C, dervish
bc^, archaic for beffen
beS^albf therefore, on that account
befto, adv., the
bCUtUd), distinct
beutfA, German; ber, bic 2)eutfcfte,
the German
beutfft'frottjbflf*, Franco-Prussian
ba^ 2)eutffttonb, -(c)g, Germany
ber Xi^ttv, -3, — , poet
btrf, thick ; fleshy
bienen, w., to serve
ber ^ten^r, -§, — , servant
ber Sicttft, -<e)§, -c, service
blcfcr, this ; the latter, he.
ba§ 2iitt8, -e5» -e» thing
bircft% direct
boft, but, yet, nevertheless
ber 2)o!tor, -§, -en, doctor
bie Xonau, Danube
bcr XonntvfiaU, -§, -e, sound of
thunder
baS Sotf, -e3, -"er, village
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
303
ber Sum, -e3, -en, thorn
bottr there
borttg, adj., at that place
ber StO^C, -n, -n, dragon y
bve^en, «'., to turn
btci, three
bretftlfi, thirty
brclfttfliaftrtB, adj., thirty years'
btitt, third
ba§ artttcJ, -§, — third
btO'^eUf w'., threaten V^
btitcfetty «'-, to oi)pres3
btuntr see barum
bvuntcn, below, down below
brutttcr, below
bit, thou, you
butbeit, w., to suffer, bear
bumm, stupid
bunf c(, dark, obscure ; faintly
bttt^, prep, with ace, through, by
means of
bur^'fallctt, str., to fail
buriftfrew'jcn, «>., to traverse
bUVt^^maiQen, «'., to pass through, ex-
perience
bur(6fc^au^cn» «'., to see through,
penetrate
burdrfd)(QSen, sir. refi., to make one's
way
ber Uurftfdjttttt, -(e)^, -e, average y
btttfen, w., to be allowed
biirr, thin, withered
burfttQf thirsty
bitftet, dark, gloomy
e(en, adv., just now ; adj., level
cbcnfo, just as
bic ®cfc, -n, corner
cftc, ronj., before
bie ©five, -n, honor
t\^X\\^, honest
bie €^rnd)fcit, -ctt, honesty
ei, why !
bie 61^ c, -n, oak
ber ©ib, -{e)^, -e, oath
ber ©ifcr, -3, eagerness, zeal
elftcn, adj., own
bic ©tflcnart, -en, peculiarity
ba§ ^iflCntUW, -^, ^ev, property
eilCtt, M'., to hurry (fein)
elit» one, a, an
etltatt'bcr, one another, each other
etu'6t{ben, w. refl.^ to imagine
ber ©tttbrurf, -{e)g, ^e, impression
ctnfa^, simple
ber ©infnil, -8, ^c, scheme, idea
ein'fftHctt, sir. rejl., to occur; to in-
terrupt (fein) ; e^ faUt ntir ein, it oc-
curs to me
Ctu'flttbcn, str. rejl., to come, to join
in
ber ginflu^, -ffe§, ^ffe, influence
Ctn'flCllCtt, str., to agree (with)
etn'flrobcn, str., to bury
bie Ginficlt, -en, union
eintjettn^, homogeneous A,
eitttR, ivt one, unified
etntgef several, a few, some
eiittge§, some
ctn'ft^rcit, "'., to lodge with, stop
(fein)
ctum(t(, once ; once upon a time
ba^ @tnma(eins)', — , multipMcatloH
table
bie @inr{ti)tun(}, -en, arrangement -,^-3
— treffcn, to make arrangements
(infant, lonesome, alone
eln'fdjtftfcn, str., to go to sleep (fein)
eln'fdjHcftCtt, sir., to enclose
cln'frftreltcn, str., to intervene (fein)
Ctn'fcftcn, str., to admit
elnft, once, at some time
etn'ftccfctt, 10., to pocket
eln'trctcn, str., to enter ^
ber ©intritt, -(e)§, -c, entrance v
bag ^intierftiittbnid, -ffe^, -ffe, under-
standing
ein'minigen, w., to consent /
bie (Stntno^nersofil, -en, population \/
einjifl, only, sole
bag @ifcn, -g, — , iron
bie ©if cnftonec, -n, iron rod, staff ;
ber ©lcfrtnt'» -en, -en, elephant
bag ©tementar'fad), -eg, ^er, branch
of elementary instruction
ber e(cmcntar'nntcrrid)t, -3, ele-
mentary instruction
elf, eleven
bic ©Item, plw., parents
cmtJOtTommcn, str., to rise (in the
world) (fein)
emtior'f^auen, «'., to look up
304
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
tm\i0V'Uvthtn, w., to seek to rise
bag (Sttbe, -§, -n, end
euben> w., to end
cni»H«ft, final ; finally
enB(c), narrow y,
bcr @nact, -3, ~, angel
bag eufilottb, -§, England
CltBlifft, English
CtttfleB'ncn» w., to reply
Ctttftat'tCtt, *«r., to contain
entra'ten* sir., to escape
bie ©ittfftcl'bUttBf *cn, decision
Cntf^tittJ'fen, w'., to escape; to slip
away (fein)
entflftttJltt'bCtt, str., to disappear (fein)
Ctttjc^'Utft, terrible [ment
bie @nttau^f^unBf -en, disappoiut-
enttoei'l^en, w., to desecrate
ettttui'rfeltt, w., to develop
bie @ttth>irf'(e)IUttB, -en, development
entju'rfett* w., to charm
bic Stio'llge, -n, epoch
er, he
tvbt'btn, V}., to tremble
bie @tbe, -n, earth
baS @rctB'nt§, -ffe§, -ffe, event
bie @irf al^'vunB' -en, experience
tX^Xt'^tXi, sir. refl., to pour forth
crBrel'fcn» sir., to seize J^
etr^al'ten, str., to receive ; to maintain
tt\tt'htXl, sir. refl., to rise
bie ©rfie'fittttBr -en, rise, uprising,
ttln'XlttXt, w. refl. , to remember ^^
etfctt'ticn, irr.f to recognize ; of. App.
88
crfto'rctt, w., to explain, disclose
bie @tf((irunBr -en, explanation
crfUn'BCttf str., to resound (fein)
ertau'fiett, w., to permit
ber ^v\V6nx%, -3, -e, erl-king
ernft, earnest
tXQ'htvn, to conquer
ertiro'Ben, w'., to prove, to test
crpttttfcn, tf., to refresh
crrei'djcn, 'w., to reach
crf^al'tcttf^f . to resound (fein)
crfdjci'ncn, str., to appear (fein)
bie @tf$ci'nunB> -en, phenomenon
erfftto'flett, str., to slay
et;flftb|)'fcit, M*., to exhaust
etf^tCCfCtt, w. trans., to frighten;
str. intrans., to be frightened
crflftt'lteft, evident
Crft, first, only
ba§ @tftaunen» -§, astonishment
erftOUtt'tlft, surprising
etftaUttt', astonished
crftcnS, first
erftrc'rfcn, w., to extend
ettva'djotf w. i»/r., to wake up
tXiOdV'Xtn, w., to expect, wait for
CrItiar'tUttfiStJOn, expectantly
erttjcr'bcn, str., to earn
er)a^'(en, w., to relate
bic ©rjie^'unBr -en, education
C§, it
ber @fet, -§, — , ass, donkey
effctt, sir., to eat
bag @fTcn» -8, food, victuals
ettUQ^r something, somewhat
cucr, your
eurojjo'tfd), European
CtuiB' everlasting, ever
bag ©la'mcn, -g, — , examination
bag ©icm'tJCI, -g, — , example
tlWtWxtn, w., to exist
bag Sftftf -(e)§f ^er, branch
bag gobftCtt, -§, — , fH»«., slender^
thread
ber Sabcn, -g, "■, thread
bie Softue, -n, flag
fa'^ten, str., to go, drive, ride (fein)
ber {^Ql^ritieB' -<e)g, -e, road
ber 3il(f(> -"/ -"/ falcon
ber 3f«»Hf -{e)g, ^e, case
fatten, «<n, to fall (fein)
bie gonii'ltc, -n, family
foUBCtt, 5/r., to catch; flefanflcn nel)«
men, to take prisoner
bie garbe, -n, color
fftfTctt, w., to grasp s/
fftft, almost I
faut, lazy
foulcnjctt, to idle
bie gouft, -^e, fist
fcfttctt,5<^., to fight
bie 3cber, -n, pen
bag (^ebetbett, -g, -en, feather-bed
fcfttCtt, w., to be lacking; loag fel^'t
bir ? what ails you ?
feiern* w., to celebrate
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
305
bcr Setertofl, -e§, -c, holiday
fcin, soft, delicate; thiely, well
ber 3ct§, -cn(S), -en, rock
ber O^ciut), -e§, -e, enemy
ba§ gclb, -(e)^, -er, field
bag gcttftcr, -§, — , window
bic 5ctttC, -n, distance^J^
ba§ 3tft, -{e)^/ -e, feast, celebration
fcft, fast, firm
bag Scucr, -§, — , fire
bie gcucrmoucr, -n, wall of fire,
fiery circuit
ber Seitetf^etn, -g, glare of fire J^
fcurift, fiery N
bie 'S'tthtl, -n, fiddle, violin
fintten, str., to find
ber Sinber, -S, — , finder
dnftcr, gloomy, dark
ber Stf(6, -(e)g, -e, fish
bie ^i'ddit, -n, surface
bie t]^(ammc, -rt, flame
flammen/ iv., to flame
flattnn, «'., to flutter (fein)
ber gtcift, -eS, diligence ; '^-^
fictftifl, diligent, industrious
bie 3ttCBe, -n, fly
fliegen, s<r,, to fly (fetn)
Ptefteit, s/r., to flow (fein)
fllnf, quick
ber Stufl, -eg, "e, flight
ber t^nincl, -g, — , wing
bie 3(ur, -en, meadow i j^
ber "Shift, -ffeg, ^ffe, streihm, river
folficn, v., to follow (fcin)
fort, away, on
fort'Bcl)cn, .?/?•., to go away (fcin)
fortfommcn, str., to come on, get
along
bie {^ortfct^uud, -en, continuation
bie SraQe, -n, question
fraoen, 10., to ask [Dame
bie Stan, -en, woman, wife, Mrs.,
frcmb, strange
bic Srembe, foreign lands
frcffen, sir., to devour
bie greitbc, -n, joy
frcuett, refl., to rejoice
ber i^reunb, -eg, -e, friend
ftCUnbU^, friendly, pleasantly
bcr t^tteb^of, -g, ^e, cemetery
ber 3rtcbf)of§BattB» -(e)g, ^e, walk to
the cemetery ^^
fricbltd)/ peaceable
ftictCtt, sir., to freeze, be cold
frif(!ft, fresh
frot), glad
froI)lt^, cheerful, joyous '
friJmm, pious, gentle '^ '
fnt^tbor, fruitful
frill), early
bic Sti't^C, early morning
fritftct, formerly, earlier
ber ;5riil)n«n, -g, -e, spring
bie griifjliiiflSjctt, -en, springtime
ber 3uif)S, -eg, ^e, fox ; freshman
fiiftlctt, w.,io feel
fitfirett, "'., to lead
ber gUDrer, -g, — , guide, leader
bie 'Sn^lici\te,phir., wagoners
fiiuf, five
fitnftn^rtnf five-year-old
fiittffiun'bcrt, five hundred
bag giinftrl, -g, — fifth
fiir, prep, ■with ace, for
bic 3itrtf)t, fear /\
furdjtbor, terribly
fiird)tcn, w. rrjl., to fear
fiirdjtcrHtf), adj., dreadful
ber Siitft, -en, -en, prince
ber 3u6, -eg, ^c, foot
bog gutter, -g, food
ber ^an(\, -(c)g, ^c, walk, way
nouj, quite; ciu ©anjcg, a whole, a
unit
nnn^n^, altogether, cotnplete
Bar» entirely, very
bic @nrbc, -n, sheaf
ber (ijortCU, -g, ^, garden
ber Ooft, -(e)g, -^e, guest
ber (*)ftttc, -n, -n, husband
bag ^thdn'tte, -g, — , building
iltben, sir., to give ; eg flibt, there is
bag ©cbir'flC, -g, — , mountain system
Bcbo'rcn, born
bcr ©cbon'fc, -ng, -n, thought icf.
A pp. 25)
bag ©cbttftt', -g, -c, poem
BCbttCbtB' patient
bie «jcfof)r', -en, danger V*
flcfnijr'lttf), dangerous
ber ©effi^r'tc, -n, -n, companion x
306
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
bic ©cfoftt'titt, -nen, companion
BCfal'tm, sir., to please
BCfat'tifl, obliging
bic ©cfon'SCnUQlbntC, arrest, capture
ba§ ©cfottfittiS, -ffc§, -fjc, prison-
ba§ ©cflc'bcr, -§, plumage
ba§ ©CfttJlC -S, -C, feeling
BC9Ctt,i>?"ep. ■Jft'^A ace, against, toward
bic @escnb, -en, region
ba§ @cftcim'tti§,-ffeS, -flc, secret
Rtfitimni^tioU, secret X
St!^cn» 5<r,, to go, walk ; fare (fein)
flcftor'djcn, w., to obey ' ^
RtWtm, w., to belong
BCftOt'fam, obedient
bcr @etft, -<c)§, -cr, ghost, spirit ; in-
tellect
flclott'BCtt, w., to reach, get to (fctn)
Bctb, yellow
bag @clb, -(e)§, -cr, money
aeVm'ncn, sir., to succeed
gelten, sir., to be worth; to mean;
bag gilt ntir, that means me -I^
Qentd^^f softly, comfortably /I
BCn, prep, w/<A ace, toward /
BCttOtt'r exactly f
Benie'f^en, sir., to enjoy
ber ©cnof'fe, -tt, -n, companion
BenUB'/ enough
bic @eOBtatlIne^, geography
bag (^tpva'^t, -g, — , imprint, stampw
BCta'bCf just, straight, even *
QtVttht', just, honorable
ber ©crcdj'ttBfcitSfltttt, -(e)g, -c,
sense of justice
bcr @eriif>t§'btcttct, -g, — , beadle
BCttt, lieber, liebft, gladly ; ic^ l^abc
— , I like ; i<S) tuc eg — , I like to do
it
Qtvufttt', touched, moved
BCfftof'tlB, busy >^
Qe^(f)t'f)tn, sir., to happen (fein)
BC[ftctt', smart, clever
bag @cfftcnf% -{c)g, -c, present
bic ®t\{iiWtC, -n, story, history
BCfd)tncrbiB, pliable
BCfdjhJtttb', quick V-^
ber ©cfcl'Ie, -tt, -tt, companion
bag ©cfldjt', -<e)g, -er, face
bic ©cftoU', -eit, form T
BCftc'ftCtt, sir., to confess
flefunb', healthy, well
bag @ctb''fc, -g, racket, roar
BCtrcu', faithful
BCtWOftr', aware
BCtuH^'rcn. w'., to grant
bic &CtvaW, -ett, power, violence,
force
QCtvaVttQ, powerful, violent
bag ©ChJOttb', -{e)g, -^er, garment ^
bag ©chicljr', -g, -e, gun
bic ©CtocrbS'ftabt, ^e, commercial
town, industrial city^_,,^
bag ©ehiiftt', -eg, -e, \^?ght
BChJitt'ncit, sir., to wiu
bag ©CttJif'fCW, -g, — , conscience
BCltJlfJ', certain
QCttiOli'nen, w. reft., to become accus-
tomed
nttnoWliih, "sual
ber @i})fc(, -g, — , summit
ber ®lani, -eg, sheen, glitter
bag @(a§, -eg, -^cr, glass
Blafcrn, adj., glass
Btauben, «'., to believe
ber ^(ctfttier, -g, — , glacier
Btci(!ft, «<(/., like; at/y., immediately
bag (i^Iitlf , -{e)g, luck, hai)piuess
Bliirflid), happy; luckily
Bluljcn, w., to glow
bic (91ut» -ett, glow
bic ®naht, grace, pardon
bag ©otb, -eg, gold
BOlbCtt, golden
ber ®oWvtUCn, -g, shower of gold
ber ©otbfdjmicb, -(e)g, -e, goldsmith
bag @olbftii(f , -eg, -e, gold-piece
BOttfA, gothic
ber ^ott, -eg, -^er, God
bag ®vah, -(e)g, -^cr, grave
uvahen, sir., to dig
Bvabe, see gerabc
bcr @taf> -ett, -ett, count, earl
ber ©rantf -(e)g, sorrow
Btfttt, gray
bag (Bvauen, -g, horror
Btaufen, w., to shudder ; eg flvauft
il^ttt, he shudders
bag @rauf en, -g, horror
Btei§, old, hoary
ber @tobtan, ruffian ; lout
Broft, large, great
BtofjarttBr grand, magnificent
bic ®viifit, -tt, greatness
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
307
bic ®VOfitUttn, plur., grandparents
bie ®tOfnnuttCV, ^, graudmother
ber ^ro^tiatcr, -^, ^, grandfather
Btiitt, green
ber @runb, -(e)§, -^e, ground, reason
Qtiinben, «'., to establish, found
Btunbttftr thoroughly
Brilftctt, w., to greet
gutfctt, w. , to peep, gaze slyly
BUtbcn, golden
bie @unft, favor \
gut, good, well
ba3 (iitjmna'fium, -§, -ien, prepara-
tory school
6
bag ^aav, -(e)§, -c, hair
IjaOcn, w., to have
ber fyabidit, -3, -e, hawk
ber Qal)n, -(c)^, -"e, cock, rooster
Iiald, (idj-, half l^iay
bee ^QltifctcrtOfl, -{e>3, -c, half-holi-
bie J&otftc, -n, half
ftalten, sir., to hold, stop; — toon,
think of
ber jammer, -3, ^, hammer
bie ^anbr ^c, hand
bie Qant>axbtit, -en, fancy work, sew-
ing
ber Iponbcl, -3, trade ; fight
Iianbcdt, w., to treat, act
bie OaUbc(Sftabt, ^e, commercial
town
fian^tn, sir. inlr., to hang
tliinoen, w. Ir., to hang
I) art, hard
ber ©afe, -n, -n, hare
fiaffcn, w., to hate
ftofjU*, ugly
ber Qauih, -e^/ breath
!0(tU(f)Cn, «'., to breathe
bag fyau\it, -(e)§, "er, head
ftoit^tfa^lid), principal
ber ^ttU^tfolj, -eg, "e, principal clause
ber ^au^t^(ht*)Cvt>miU, -(e)§, -e, main
emphasis
bie OoutJtftobt, ^e, capital city
bag ^au§, -eg, ^er, house; 5u §auf(e),
at homo ; nad) ^auf(e), home(ward)
bag ©ftuStlct, -(e)g, -e, domestic ani-
mal
I)Ct(ia, holy, sacred
bag Qeim, -eg, home
I)Ctnt, adv. (towards) home
bag ^cimattanb, -<e)g, -e, home coun-
try
bie ^ctmlcfjr, return (home)
ber ^cimttics, -g, -e, way home
bag ^cimiue^, -g, homesickness
IjCift, hot
I|Ctf;en, str., to be called ; to command
licitev, gay
ber J&clb, -en, -en, hero
ber j&clbcnncift, -eg, -er, heroic spirit
ftclfClt, sir., to help
ficU, bright, light, clear
bie ^cnne, -n, hen
Ijcr, along, here, hither
l^crab'f down, downward
ftcroUS', out, forth
l^crb, severe, harsh
fictbci', hither, up to
bie i^tvhtvtie, -n, inn, tavern
ber iocvb^t, -(c)g, -e, autumn
Ibcrciu', in
ftcritic'bcr, down, downward
ber ©err, -n, -en, Mr^, Lord, master
I^errUtf), glorious T
Iftcr'fOBCtt, tv., to recite
ficr^ftcUcu, t«?., to restore.
ftcrum', around
(jcrum'fommcm sir., to knock about,
travel
btVltn'tev, down, downward
Jicrtior', forth, forward
fittbOV'bvciittn, sir., to break forth
(fein)
bag OcrJf -eng, -en, heart, cf. App. 25
l^crjinntB, heartily
ftCUtC, today
ftcutlB, a(/y., today's
IftiC, archaic for ^ter
I)tcr, here
^icflfl. locaJ
ber (piinmcl, -8, — , heaven, sky
:^tmmc(D(au, sky-blue
bie C>immcts(aM{c), -en, elysian fields
bic fyimmtl^^avbt, -n, heavenly
sheaf
bag ©immctsadjt, -(e)g, light of
heaven
bag .€)tmmct§jclt, -eg, sky
InmmUfd), heavenly
308
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
Jiin, away, along, on, thither
IjtUOb', down
l)inbuird)', through
t)inein% in, within
IliltUseU, w., to lay down; refl., lie
down
l)tnteir, prep. tv'Uh dat. or ace, behind
bei- <&ttttcrBrunb, -(e)§, ^c, back-
ground
fiilt ttttb !)Cr, to and fro
Innmi'tev, dowu(ward)
lliftor'ifd), historical
Iiodi, high (^b^er, l?0(f)ft)
bie ^ocflfdiulc, -n, university, tech-
nical school
f)bd|ft, extremely
ber i5of, -e§, ^e, court, yard
Itoffen, w., to hoi>c
bie i^offttuitn, -en, hope
bic ©bljc, -n, height
ber i^o^lroeo, -(e)^, -e, gorge
f)Olt>, gracious i
f)o(en, w., to get, fetch
ba? Qolh, -e^, wood
Ijdljcrn, wooden
tt'oven, w., to hear
ba§ j&of^Jitat', -3, "^er, hospital
hiibftfl, pretty
ba§ ©iificUottli, -e§, "er, hilly country
I)itncn, 10., to veil, cover, clothe
ber jOujib, -(e)§, -e, dog
Jmitbcrttoufenti, 100,000. Cf. App. 47
ber QmxfitV, -§, hunger : — Ijabin, to
be hungry
I)ttnan8» hungry
l)it))fcit, w., to hop. juinp(fein)
ber J&ut, -e§, "e, hat
bie ^Ut, care, protection .,/
I)ittcn, w., to guard, take care of '
ber J&utcr, -§, — , guardian, shepherd
bie ^ittte, -n, hut
inbeffeu, meanwhile ; while
ber ^fUtiifatttl^ -^, -e, indicative
bie ^iibuftrie', -n, industry
inbuftricU', industrial
ber Ont)nltf -§, conteutsv
imtCtt, within .
iuSflCfomt', altogether X^
ber Snf^cftor, -^, -en, inspector
iutcrcffOttt', interesting
ilttcrcffie'tCtt, w. rejl., lo be interested
bie ^nucrfiou', -en, inversion
iro'nifd), ironicj|l
ivvit), wrong IT /*
trrctt» ^t?. »"e/Z., to err, be mistaken /
ber ^ri'tum, -^, "er, error, mistake
ba§ atn'Ucu, -§, Italy
italic'ttifrf), Italian
io» yes, indeed
{nflCtt, "'., to hunt, chase
ber ^Hflcr, -§, — , hunter, huntsman
ba^ 3rtl)r, -e^, -e, year
bic 3nl)rcsjnl)l, -en, date; year
bag 3rtt)Cl)im'ticrt, -g, -e, century
iiiljrlicl}, yearly
ber 3al)rmnrft, -§, ^e, fair
bev Oammcr, -§, pain, sorrow, long-
ing
initduett/ w., to shout with joy f"^
ic . . . bcfto, the . . . the
Jcbcr, every, each
jcb0d)'» however
ientanb, someone, somebody
iener, that, the former, he
ic^tB, present
UHt, now
iunfi, young
ber Suttfic, -n, -n, boy
bie ^uuflfvnu, -en, maiden
ber ^uuBtittB, -§, -e, youth
iihlBft, recently
3Iir» your; you
iftr, her ; their
immcr, always
tmmcrbor, ever
ber SmtJcrtttiU', -§, -e, imperative
ba§ 3m|)crfcft, -§, -e, preterite
itt, prep. iot7/i dat. or ace, in, into
inbem', while; in that
ber Sotfcr, -§, — , emperor
bag S!atfcrrct*, -g, -e, empire
fftU, cold
ber ^omcrab'r -en, -en, comrade
ber ^om^Jf, -e8, -"e, fight, struggle,
battle
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
309
fiimtifem w., to struggle, fight
bie JJanilC, -n, can
bie UapH, -n, cap
bie Uavtt, -n, map
bie Sotoftro'iJ^c, -n, catastrophe
bcr Soter, -^, — , male cat
bie Jialfc, -n, cat
faufett/ M'.,to buy
ber Slaufmann, -{e)g, ^er, merchant
(^aufleute)
laum, hardly, scarcely
tef}Vtn, w., to turnj
feitt, no, not any
icuntn, irr., to know, be acquainted
with, Cf. App. 88
ber tcrr, -(e)§, -e, fellow
fif crlfif cockadoodledoo !
ba§ ^ittb, -eg, -er, child
ber ^ittbcrRittt, -{e)g, -e, child's mind
bie ^irdde, -n, church
ber Sirftturm, -3, H, church-tower,
steeple
flor, clear
bie ^(affC/ -n, class
f(affifd), classical
fleibettr w'., to clothe
bie ^leibuuB, -en, clothing
fltin, small, little [school
bie tteinftnberfditttc, -n, elementary
iUttevtt, w., to climb (fein)
bag ^lima, -§, climate
fUltSen, str., to resound, ring
bag ^(oftet, -§, "; convent
Hufl, wise, clever
ber $$(umt)eu, -«, — , lump
ber ^nabe, -n, -n, boy, lad
bie Slneiiie, -n, tavern C^
ber Sod), -(e)§, ^e, cook
toUttn, IV., to boil, cook
bie Sodjin, -nen, cook
fol)Ifd)ltiOtJ, black as coal
ber Somet', -en, -en, comet
fommen, str., to come (fein)
ber Sbnifl, -8, -e, king
bie JliintBttt, -nen, queen
fontBttdl, royal
bag tottiBtCtft, -g, -e, kingdom
ber Soniunfttb', -g, -e, subjunctive
fbnnen, w., to be able, can, may
bcr So^jf , -eg, H, head '[tic
bag SoDfredmettf -g, mental arithme-
bag Sortt, -<«)^, ^er, grain, corn
bcr SbrtJcr, -g, •-, body
foimotlDti'tU^/ cosmopolitan
foften, w., to cost
bie JlofteiU pi-, cost, expense
ber SlroflCttf -g, — , collar
bie Jlraft, H, strength, force V'
froitf , sick, ill
ber Sl'reusjus, -g, ^e, crusade
fried) en, str., to creep
bev S^ricfl, -eg, -e, war
friCflCtt, «'., to get, catch ^^.-^
ber JJriCflcr, -g, — , warrior
bie ^rottC, -n, crown
bie R'rbUUng, -en, coronation
bie Sriicfe, -n, crutch
bag Siitftlcltt, -g, — , chick
bie KuficJ, -n, bullet
bie Sul), ^e, cow
fiifti, cool
fitl^n, brave, daring, bold
fulturcU', cultural
bie Sunft, 'e, art
ber Siinfttcr, -g, — , artist
bie Suttftftattc, -n, home of art
bag Sunftitierf, -g, ~t, work of art
ber SiH)fcrftcd)cr, -g, — , steel en-^V/
graver
ber S^urfurft, -en, -en, Prince Elector
lurU'reu, w., to euro
ber SutrfuS, ^urfe, course
furj, short
fiiffen, w., to kiss
bie Sitfte, -' .coast, shore
((id)e(n, w., to smile
Iad)Cn, w., to laugh
bie SoflC, -n, situation, site
bag !i!anb, -eg, ^er, land, country
bie fianbc§morf, -en, border (of a
country)
ber Sanbtttann, -<e)g, ^er, farmer
(fianbleute)
bie fianbfdittft, -en, landscape
lana, long
lanne, adv., long, for a long time
lansfam, slow
lanaft, long since, long ago
lunnmctltB, tiresome
loffctt, atr., to let, to leave, to make;
madden — , to have done
310
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
latei'ttif $» Latin
lait, soft, mild
ber 8auf, -(e)g, ^e, course
loufcn, str., to run (fcin)
bie Saune, -n, mood ; bei guter — , in
a good humor
laujtfiem «>., to listen
laut, loud
laxtttn, w., to run ; sound ; be
lauitv, sheer, nothing but
ItbtXt, w., to live
baS ficbCtt, -^, life
le6ettbf living
bie fieben§art, -en, mode of life,
good manners
bag Selien§icil|ir, -(e)§, -e, year of one's
life
leifen, w., to lick
leiftnem «'•, to lean
(elbtcttf «'., to teach
ber gcljrcr, -§, — , teacher
bie gcftrcrittf -non, teacher
ber ficibfudjS, -(e)^, ^e, fag
Ici^t, easy, light
ba§ gcib, -eS, sorrow, harm
ba§ gcibCtt, -3, — , suffering
Ictb tun, to hurt, harm
Icifc, soft, gentle
bic ficftion', -en, lesson
bie ficrftc, -n, lark
Icxtltn, w. , to learn
IcfCtt, sir., to read
ber fief cr, -g, — , reader
bic ficfcrittf -nen, reader
lc^t» last ; le^tereg, the last-named ^
ICttthUn, w., to shine ^
bie fiettte, plur., people
ba§ fit*t, -e§, -er, light
lieb, dear
bie fitc6e> -n, love ; beloved
licbeit, w., to love
UcbenStoitrbtB. charming
liebliA, lovely, charming ^
ba§ fitcb, -eg, -er, song
bag fitebetf rfim., little song
liegen, «<r., to lie
Itttb, gentle
bie fiinbc, -n, linden-tree
littf, left ; IxnU, to the left, at the left
bie fiorfc, -n, lock, curl
bag fiorfcn, -g, enticement
lotitvn, w., to loosen
(obern> w., to flare
ber fiol^n, -{e)g, -"e, reward, pay
ber fiofat'bcjirf, -g, -e, local district »/"
bag fio!^, -eg, -e, lot, fate ^
Ibfeit, ^t'-, to loosen, solve
losS'flCften, s<r., to start for, to make
for
bie fiitrfe, -tt, gap, flaw
bie fiuft, -"e, air, breeze
bag fiuftlctn, -g, dim., breeze
bie fiitflc, -n, lie
ber fiiignet -g, — , liar
bie fiitfiuerittf -nen, liar
bie fiuft, ^e, joy, desire
bag fiitftQCtblt, -g, joyful sound
luftig, jolly, gay, merrily ,
(
f
m
tnadjen, w., to make, do ; eg tnad^t fld^,
it will do
bie UJiaftt, ^e, power
intidjtifl, powerful, mighty
bag mdtihtn, -g, — , girl
bie 'MaffMUm, -en, warning
ber mai, -(e)g. May 4—^
bie 9J{aib, maid
bag maU -<e)g, -c, time
ber Wlaltt, -g, — , painter
lit an, indef. pron,, one
man A, many a
moneljcr, many a
ber 9JIann, -eg, ^er, man, husband
ber artantct, -g, ^, cloak
ber TiavUpla^, -eg, ^e, market-place
tttarfil)tcrcn, w., to march along
ntri^tQ, moderate
bie 9)lattt, -n, meadow \
bie ^lan§, ^e, mouse
bie SUicbtsin', medicine
ber aWccrcsifiJtCBci, -g, surface of sea
mcljt, more
bie Wflc\)na\iU plural
bie 9)tcUc, -n, mile, league
incin, my
metncn, «'.,to mean; to think; to
say
tneift, mostay)
tltciftcnS, mostly
ber ^ItiHtv, -g, — , master
niCttcntanB, adj., for miles
ber ajicnfdl, -en, -en, human being
S
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
311
Ittctfctt, w., to note, observe
bag mc^tv, -8, — knife /
bic 9JUCUC> -n, mien, manner*-^
bie WiQvation', -en, migration
mitb, mild
bie 9Jti(tie, mildness, generosity
bte WiUion', -en, million
ber WlUion'dv', -8, -e, millionaire
bie WtnWtt, -n, minute
niit, prep, with dat., with; adv.,
along
tnttchtait'ber, together
bag UJattclb, -§, pity
niit'fdjJUOrmCtt, w., to wander along
bag arattet, -g, — , means
mittclnltcrllrf), mediteval
ber 9jattclDunft, -<c)g, -e, center
mittlerr middle, central
nitttlcrnieilc, meanwhile
ber 9JItttltl0d). -g, -e, Wednesday
bas> yjiobei, -8, — , furniture
bag iWiobarijilfShiort, -(e)g, ^er, mo-
dal auxiliary
tltOBClt, «'., may, like
mofl(td), possible; nxbfllic^ft flut, as
good as possible
ber a^oitb, -(e)g, -c, moon
ber artonbcnfdietiu -g, moonshine,
moonlight
bag 9)toos>, -eg, -e, moss
IttOOfin. mossy
ber iUtorb, -{e)g, -e, murder
ber iUtorber^ -g, — , murderer
tuorncn, tomorrow
ber 9JiornCtt, -g, — , morning
bag SWorncntrot, -<e)g, dawn
morQenS, arfv., in the morning
mitbC, tired
bie BRutte, -n, trouble ; fi^ — fleben, to
take i)ains
ber Munb, -eg, -c or ^er, mouth
mituben, w., to empty (said of a
stream)
bag aWiinftcr, -g, — , cathedral ^
muntev^ brisk, cheerfully
bag ajtufc'um, -g, a«ufe'en, museum
iniiffcn, ^o., to be obliged to
ber ''Mut, -(e)g, mood ; courage ; guten
SWutg fein, to be of good courage ; eg
ift mir ju aJhtte, I feel
bte Whtttcr, -, mother
bie aJiuttcrlicbe, mother's love
Itad), prep, with dai., to, toward ;
after ; according to
ttotfi'blicfctt, w., to look after
nadibem, co7ij., after
nddi'tcnftn, w. irr., to consider, me-
ditate
ber 9}aAfomme» -n, -n, successor
nddift, next
bie 9laHit, ^e, night
nS(fttttft, nightly
bag 9}aAt(icb, -(e)g, -er, even-song
Urtf) (na^er, ncid^ft), near
bie 9{(i6c, -n, neighborhood
ber 5lamc(n), -ng, -n, name
Uftmeit^, by name of, named
bie 92ationari|t)mnc, national hymn
bie 9latliV'lefiVC, -n, nature-study
bie 9iatur'niifTcttfdjnft, -en, natural
science
ber 9!e6e(, -g, — , fog, mist
ber 9Iebclftrcif, -g, -en, wreath of fog
ItetiCU, prep, toith ace. and dal., beside
ber 9^e6ettfa^, -eg, ^e, subordinate
clause
ber 9icffe, -n, -n, nephew
neftnttn, sir., to take
neioeit, w., to bend, incline
neln, no
nenttcn, irr., to call, to name, cf. App.
88
bag 91 eft, -(e)g, -er, nest
ncu, new /
UtUiltCrin, curious, inquisitive
Utun, nine
licuujcfint, nineteenth
Mltftt, not
Ut^tS), nothing
nlc, never
ntcber, adv., down
bie 92tcber(aae, -n, defeat
uicbrifl, low
ulcmnrsi, never
nicmnnb* nobody, none
nimmer, never
nod), still, yet; nor; — einmol, once
more
UOtf) cin, another
ber 9lorbcn, -g, north
UOtbtfll), northern
novnxaV, normal, natural
312
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
bie dloi, "c, need, trouble ; e^ tut — ,
it is necessary
niittQCU, IV., to press, insist, compel
ba^ ^lotn^bntti, -(e)g, -^er, notebook
nn, well !
ber 9lu, moment, trice, jiffy
bte 9lummer, -n, number
nun, adv., now ; iiUerj., well!
nur, only
bie 9m, ^f[e, nut
Ob, whether, if (I wonder) if
Obtn, overhead, above
ObcnhtU', superficially \/
bie Dbcrflitdjc, -n, surlifce
ObQirtti)', although
Obiflf cidj., above ; '
OAl\tn, w., to study, " dig "
ber Cbcm, -^, breath
obcr, or
ber Dffi3t«•^ -3, -e, officer
ijffncn, w., to open
^\\\\t,j>rep. with ace, without
bag Cftr, -{c)§, -en, ear
ber Dnfct, -§, — , uncle
orbentdd), proper, orderly
bie Orbnung, -en, order
bie DrbtC, -S, command, order
ber Drt, -{c)§, ^er, place <X-
bic Drtfj^oft, -en, village J
ijfttil!^, eastern /
ba§ ^ft«xr, -(e)g, -e, pair
cin Danr^ a few, a couple
ber «PaIttft', -e^, ^e, palace
ber ^anjcr, -§, — , armor /C
ba§ ^obicr', -(e)§, -e, papdt
iJU^Jtc'ren, af^J., paper
ber ^o^jft, -(e)§, ^e, pope
Jjunfcn, w'., to fight
ba§<)3ctf),-(e)§, pitch
bag ^crfcft'f -§, -e, perfect tense
ber «Pfob, -(e)§, -e, path
ber ^f (trrcr, -§, — , pastor
ber $faUf -^, -e, peacock
ber ^fcnntJl, -§, -e, farthing, pe^ny
bag ^fcrb, -(e)g, -e, horse
iJftonjCtt, w., to plant
bie ^fltdltttCUC, conscientiousness
<jflutfcu» w., to pluck, pick J
ber ^flttfi, -(e)g, ^e, plough i
bag *4?fubt, -(e)g, -e, pillow 'T**
ber »i<l)ili'ftcr, -g, — , Philistine
4)ltfcn, «'., to pick
ber *P(att, -(e)g, ^e, plan
t)IaOeu, «'-, to burst
»)lblfUd), sudden
bie *-l.»ocf!c', -(e)n, poetry
ber *|Joct', -en, -en, poet
iJOli'tlfd), political
ber ^.^dften, -g, — , post .
bie ^radlt, glory, splendor /
\ivM)i\^, splendid(ly)
bag ^riifcnSr ^rafen'tia, present tense
tireu^tfd), Prussian
ber ^ricftcr, -g, — , priest
bev ^rinj, -en, -en, prince
bie *4Jrtnjcf'fln, -nen, princess
Vrobtc'rcu, w., to try
bie 4)rofa, prose
4)titfen, w., to test, to prove
bie ^-Priifnun, -en, examination, test
bag qjult, -(c)S, -c, desk
bev 4^uuft, -(e)g, -e, dot, period
bie Clunl, -en, torture, trouble
bie Ciucnc, -n, spring, source
ber 9Inbe> -n, -n, raven
rtidicn, w., to avenge, take revenge
bag Siiibliien, dim., wheel ^k
ber JRanb, -{e)g^^er, edge, margin
rrtfd), quick Y
troftcn, to., to rest
ber '^ai, -(e)g, advice
tntcn, .'itr., to guess, advise
ber Statgebet, adviser, counsellor
bag9fiatf(fr,-g,—, riddle
roul), rough
ber JHaum, -(e)g, H, space, room
riiumcn, w., to clear
tftufdien, w., to rustle
bag Sicorntjmnofinm, -§, -ien, high-
school (scientific)
bie 9iei!^enmaf^ine, -n, counting-ma-
chine
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
313
rcdiltCU, «'., to reckon, do
ba^ dieifinen, -§, — , arithmetic
Vttht, right
bie dicbe, -n, speech, discourse ; eine
— I^alten, to malve a speech
rcbettf w., to speali, tallc
bag iHcfortn'Qtjmnafiuitt, -S, -en,
high-school
rCflC, active
bcr dUfitn, -t. — , rain
bic 9{egen)eit, -en, rainy season
bag dicidt, -(e)g, -e, reahn, empire
ret*, rich
retdjenf «'., to reach, hand
ber 9{eiff|tum/ -(e)g, ^er, wealth, riches
rcif, ripe
bag 9ieife)ettnnt§, -fteg, -ffc, final ex-
amination ; graduating diploma
bie Mcifte, -n, row, turn
ber 9ictf)CU> -g, — , dance
rein, clean, pure
bie JRcifc, -n, trip, journey
rcif en, «-., to travel (fcin)
ber 9ictfent»e, -n, -n, traveller
ret^en, sir., to tear, snatch
ber 92ettergmoun, -{e)§, ^er (-Icute)
rider, cavalryman
rctten, sir., to ride (horseback) (fein)
ber 9ieij, -eg, -e, charm
reijcn, «'., to charm ; to aggravate
rctjcnb, charming
bie ateHfiion', -en, religion
bcr die\t)cU\ respect
retten, «'., to save, rescue
rtd)ten, »'., to direct
ber SHirtjter, -g, — , judge
ridjtlji, right
ber 9Ji(fttfDru*, -{e)g, -^e, sentence,
judgment •
ber JRieBcI, -§, — , bolt^ v
ber JRicfc, -n, -n, giant ^
tinoen, str., to wrestle, wring
rins§, <tdv., around V^
rtttBSnm', adv., all arAund ^
tlnnen, sir., to run (said of water)
ber 9iitt, -(e)g, -e, ride, journey
ber miiiev, -g, — knight
roman'ttfdi, romantic
ber 91bmcr, -g, — , Roman
rbmtftfl, Roman
ber 9idfenfranj, -{e)g, ^e, rosary
*1 bag 9ioff, -fjcg, ^ffe, horse, steed ^
rot, red
ber 9Jnf, -eg, -e, call, reputation
tnfcu, sir., to call
bie Stulje, rest, peace
ruljen, w., to rest
rnfiifl, quiet *^ y
bcr 9inl)m, -eg, fame r
riitimen, tf., to praise, boast
rittjren, «<'., to touch, move, stir/^
runjltO, wrinkled
bie aiiitftiafeit, -en, activity, energy
?^
bcr ®aal, -eg, ©ale, hall, audience
chamber
ber S'dbeU -g, — , sword, saber
bie Sadie, -n, thing ; case, cause
frtftflfrflr «'0-. Saxon
fnnen, ?<'., to say
ber SamStog, -g, -c, Saturday
fnubtfl, sandy
fonft, gentle ^
ber Sfinoer, -g, — , singer
ber So^» -eg, ^e, sentence
fauer, sour, hard, bitter
bag Sauerfrant, -(c)g, sourkrout
fiiumcn, tv., to linger, hesitate
fdufefn, to., to rustle
fdiaben, w., to harm, hurt
bag ©iftnf, -(e)g, -c, sheep
ber 'ZHt'dUt, -g, — , shepherd
ber ®d|(tn, -(e)g, -e, sound, ring
ff^aUen, w., to ring, resound
fdiatten, «'., to rule, hold sway
fdiamen, refl., to be ashamed
bie iSdiontie, shame
ber <S(f|atten, -g, — , shadow, shade
ber Sd|a0, -eg, -"e, treasuie '^'^
ftfjoucn, «'., to look, see -^ ."
bie Sdieibe, -n, pane, disk 1/
fdieiben, -f^n, to depart (fein)
ber Sdietn, -(c)g, -e, appearance;
sheen, light
fdieinen, sir., to seem, appear
bie ©(HeUc, -n, bell
fdjelten, sir., to scold
fd)enfen, w., to present, give
f^trfen, «'., to send ; re/?., to beseem,
be proper
f^teben, sir., shove, push
fiftlef, crooked
^
314
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
f thicken, str.f to shoot
ber ©*Ub, -<e)g, -e, shield
bic ^^{a6;ii, -en, battle
ber iS^taf, -{e)3, sleep
f^Iafen, s^r., to sleep
f tbtaseUf 5^?'. re/?. , to fight ; kill, strike
f*lC(I)t, baday), evil(ly)
\^U\6)t\x, str., to creep (fein) Vp
ftfttic^Ctt, 5^n, to lock, close, conclude
fftttcfttidj, finally
fftliinm, bad ^
baS ©cljtoft, -ffe§, ^ffer, castle '/
(^(umtncrn, w., to slumber, doze
ber <Sd)(u^, -ffc§, -^ffe, end, conclusion
fdjmcrfcn, ^/^.j to taste
bie iSdjmictie, -n, smithy
fcftmlcbCtt, w., to forgo /
f^mitrfen, w., to adorn, decorate 'v
f«J)lttU^t0, dirty
ber <S$na6et, -§, ^, bill, beak
ber 'S^xxtt, -§, snow
\^\Xttht't>tdt, snow-covered
bie Sdinccfloife, -n, snowflake
ber (©tftttcibcr, -§, — , tailor
fc^nctcn, w., to snow
fdjllcH, quick
bie ©dmcHiflfcit, rapidity
ber 8d)nitter, -§, — , reaper
bie (©fthtttcrin, -nen, reaper
fftttitrctt, v)., to strap, lace up
ftfinttrrctt, «'., to hum
fdjOtt, already
fd) bu, beautiful ; interj., very well !
bie <SA)'6xx\itxi, -en, beauty
ber <Bil)Q^, -e§, "-t, lap, bosom
ber @$tcdfen, -S, — , terror, fright,
horror
fdjrcctnd), dreadful ^ '
fdjreiben, str., to write
ft^reten, 5<?'., to scream, squeak, yell
ber ©tfjritt, -W, -e, step
ber ®d)ulb, -(e)3, -c, shoe
ber ®d)U()ma^er, -§, — , shoemaker
ber (S*utbcfuft, -(e)§, -e, school-at-
tendance
bie iS^utb, -en, debt, guilt
bie 8$ule, -n, school
ber <B^Xx\tX, -§, — , pupil, student
bie 6d)iiterin> -nen, pupil, student
ber (SdjuIIe'^rerr -§, — , school-teacher
bie (Scljultcr, -n, shoulder
ba§ iS^U(n)Cfcu> -§, school-system
bie 84u()eit, -en, school-time
ber 6lf)Uftcr, -^, — , shoemaker, cob-
bler
f^Uttcftt, w., to shake
ber (S^U^, -{e)§, protection
fd)it)ad)U^f weakly
ber ©^mStftlittB, -§, -e, weakling
ber (SdltvaQCt, -§, -^j brother-in-law
bie iSd)tutiocrin, -nen, sister-in-law
ber ©ifttMOttj, -e§, % tail
fdimarmcn, w., to gush ; express
enthusiasm ; wander (fein)
f^tuarj, black
ber ©(fittJarjhuilb, -(e)g, ^er. Black
Forest
ftfltucbcttf ^f'., to hover (fein) ^
ber Sijjjtjctf, -(e)§, -e, tail •''^
ftf)tUCtncn> «^n, to be silent
ba^ ®ii)it)eiocnr -S, silence
bie S^tveij, Switzerland
f Atuer, heavy, difficult
ber @(l)tvcrt)unft, -e§, -e, centre of
gravity
bn^ (edliuert, -(e)§, -er, sword /
bag Sdltticrtscflttt, -«, rattling of
swords
bie Sdinieftet, -n, sister
fd)tuiens, difficult, hard K
fdltDUtgen^ 5^r,, to swing, flutter ; refl.,
to vault
f d)tt)0ten, */r., to swear, vow]
ber SdittJttt, -(e)§, ^e, vow, oath
fcft§, six
bag ©ctfjftcl, -§, — , sixth
fC(I|Siunbfie&3tn, seventy-six
fcdljel^n, sixteen
ber ©cc, -§, -n, lake
bie ©cc, -n, sea
bie ©cctc, -n, soul
ber (Scoettf -g, — , blessing 4^
\t\stXX, str., to see /
fcljr, very
bie iSeibe, -n, silk ,
fclbCtt, silken
fcitt, his
fcttt, str., to be (fein)
f etnctltienenr for his sake
fcit, prep, with dat., conj., since '
bie Scitc, -n, side
fcttCttS, prep, ivith gen., on behalf of
bie (Scfun'bc, -n, second
fclbcr, fctbft, self
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
315
fcWcn, seldom
ba§ Scmc'ftcr, -§, — , semester
ber (Sena' tor, -§, -en, senator
fe^cn. It}., to put, set; refl., to sit
down, be seated
feufjCtt, w., to sigh
fl^, liimself, herself, itself, oneself,
themselves
fi^cr, sure, safe
fie, she; they
fleben, seven
flefienftUttbert, seven hundred
ba§ <B\thlt\i\\it\, -i, —, seventeenth
fieben, sir., to boil
ber <£iCB, -(e)^, -c, victory
ficgeitf "if., to be victorious, conquer ^
flcl), behold! lo! ?
ba§ <Stt6er, -§, silver
fttberljen, bright as silver
f fib cm, adj., silver
finoen, sir., to sing
finteu, str., to sink (feln)
ber Sinttr -(e)§, -e, sense ; mind
finnen, x<r., to meditate
bic 8ttte, -n, custom
fit^en, sir., to sit
ber 8mar(iob' -(c)^, -e, emerald
fo, as, so, then, thus, indeed
fobaitt', as soon as f
fofott', at once, immediately ^**
fogat', adv., even
fogcnannt, so-called
foSletd)', immediately
ber iSo!)n, -(e)^, -^e, son
fold), such
ber (eo(bnt^, -en, -en, soldier
fdUett, «'., shall, ought ; be to, be said
to
ber <eommcr, -3, — , summer
fonberbar, strange, queer
bie Sonne, -n, sun
ber Sonncnfrtiein, -§, ramshine
ber Sonncnftraf)!, -i, -en, sunbeam
fonnin, sunny
f onft, otherwise ; at other times ;
formerly
iSonntttflmorfJcn, -§, — , Sunday
morning
bte Sorge, -n, care, worry, sorrow
fornenfrct, care-free
f^ii^en, w., to look, search, peer
f^annen, w., to stretch ; interest
f))rit, late
ber SDai^, -e§, -en, sparrow
ber StJOjicr'fiana, -(e)§, -^e, walk,
stroll
ber ®t>C^t, -§, -e, woodpecker
ber S|)erltns, -^, -e, sparrow
ber StltCgct, -§, — , mirror, surface
ba§ 8t)iel, -eS, -e, game
ftJtclcn, w., to play
ber SiJtctmonn, -(e)g, ^er (-leute),
fiddler, player
fptnncn, sir., to spin
ber S^orn, -(c)§, ©jjoren, spur
bie S|)rad)C, -n, speech, language ;
einc — [?alten, to make a speech
fprc^cn, sir., to speak
fVticftcn, sir., to sprout (fein)
fliringcn, str., to spring ; leap (fein)
ber («Dro6, -ffe§, -ffe (bte e^nofie, -n),
scion, shoot, sprout.
f^rnbeln, «'., to gush forth (fein)
bte <St)n(c, -n, shuttle
bte ®|)nt, -en, trace, track
f))tircn, w., to trace, scent; notice,
feel
ber 'Z\(iti\, -e3, -en, state
ftaot(id) adj. (belonging to the) state
ber Stab, -(e)3, "c, stafl", rod
bte Stabt, "e, city
ber Staljl, -(e)^, -"e, steel
ber ^XtiVi., -W, H, stable
ber Stantnt, -(e)g, ^e, stem, trunk ;
race
ftorf, strong
ftarren, »/>., to stare, glare, gaze
Si^Wt prep, with gen. instead of
ftatt'flnbcn, sir., to take place
ftc^en, str., to prick, stab
ftetf en, "'., to place, put ; be
ber Stetfcn, -§, — , stick, staff, rod /
ftclftcn, str., to stand
ftcljtcn, str., to steal
ftciflcn, str., to climb (fein)
ber Stein, -(e)^, -e, stone
bie Stede, -n, spot, place
ftedcn, w., to place, put
ftcrbcn, str., to die (fein)
ber Stern, -(e)^, -e, star
bag Stcrntcin, -§, — , dim., little star
ftctlA, steady, continual
bag Sticffinb, -e§, -er, stepchild
bie Stiefmutter, '^, stepmother
316
ELEMENTS OF GER'MAN
'3--
ftill, soft, quiet, silent
bic <Stimme, -n, voice
ber iStotf , -{e)^, -"e, stick
ftOCfCU, w., to stop, stick
ber <StoU, -c§, pride /^
ftotj, proud - [field
bag (Sto^^elfclbr -{e)§, -er, stubble-
ber <Stovil), -^e)^, ^c, stork
itoffcn, sir., to push, nudge, jar
ftrofcn, w., to punish
ber @tral)(, -(c)§, -en, beam, ray
ftrableUf w., to beam
ber iStranb, -{e)§, -e, strand, shore
bic ^tva^t, -n, street
bic ©trcrfc, -n, distance ^
ftrcrfettf «'., to stretch, reach .
ber ©trcit, -(e)§, -e, fight, quarrel )(
ftteltCtt, str. refl., to quarrel
ftrCttfl, severe, harsh ,
bic Strengc, severity, harshness V
ber @trom, -e^, -"e, stream, river ;
current
ftntfl^iS, unkempt, rough _
bie Btubt, -n, room
ba§ @tu6(etn, dim., little room J
bag 6tU(f , -(e)g, -e, piece '
ber Stubent', -en, -en, student
bic Sttti»Ctt'tcnf|)roiJ)C, -n, students'
slang
bic StUben'tim -nen, student
ftubie'rcn, w., to study
bag Stttbium, -g, -ten, study
bic 8tttfe, -n, step ; grade
ber <StU^(, -(e)g, ^e, chair
fttt(^en> IV., to put, jam
bie <SUtn'OC, -n, hour, lesson
ftutmen> uk, to storm, rush
ftitrjcn,' w., to fall (fein); refl., to
plunge (
ftit^en, w., to support
fU^tn, w., to seek, look for
ber iSitbeu, -g, south
fitblt^, southern, south
bie ^nntmt, -n, sum, total
fitft, sweet
bag <St)ttoni)m'. -(e)g, -e(n), synonym
btcSjettCrie', scenery
bag Xa\, -{e)g, "er, valley, vale
bic Safeir -n, blackboard
to divide, share V
tit, sir., to take part \
ber Jan, -(e)g, -e, day
bag ^naemerf, -(e)g, -e, day's labor
tasHtil, daily
bic Zaxmt, -n, fir-tree
bic Xantt, -n, aunt
tonjCtt, w., to dance
tat)fcr, brave
bie Xaulie, -n, dove
tftUfftCtt, M'., to exchange
toujcttb, thousand
taufcubial)rtQ, a<]j., a thousand years
old
tauf enbmat, a thousand times
tcrJittlflJl, technical
bag (ber) Sett, -{e)g, -e, part, share,
portion
UUcn, u\,
tclt'neftmctt,
tCltcr, dear, expensive ; beloved
bag Xf)ca'tev, -g, — , theatre
tfiVOnm, «'., to be enthroned
SfturiiiBcriuotb, -{c)g, Thuringian
Forest
ticf, deep
ttcfblrtU, dark blue
bag 3;tcr, -(e)g, -e, animal
ber 3;iffli, -{e)g, -e, table
bie Zothttv, "-, daughter
ber lob, -(e)g, -e, death
bie Sobcsftunbc, -n, hour of death
toU, crazy, mad
tbuettf w'., sound
ber JoDf , -{e)g, ^e, pot, kettle
ber %ov, -en, -en, fool >j^
bag 2;or, -(e)g, -e, gate
tot, dead
to ten, w., to kill
bag Xotenamt, -(e)g, ^er, burial ser- f
vice '
ber JotettBrrifier, sexton '*-*
ber SotfditOBf -^, ^C/ murder, man-
slaughter
bie 2robitton', -en, tradition
tvagen, str., to bear, carry ; to wear
bic %xa\it, -n, tear
tcHnenfeu^t, damp, tear-bedewed ^
ber Svauitt, -<e)g, H, dream
ttdumen, w., to dream
ttaurid, sad
trcffcit, str., to meet ; to hit.
tretben, str., to drive
tventtettf w. to separate
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
317
trcten, sir., to step (fetn)
trcu, faithful
bie Ircuc, faithfulness, fidelity
triufcu, sir., to driulc
ber 2;ritt, -(e)§, -e, step, footstep
trot* en, dry
bie !X:romntc(, -n, drum '^
bev Xvom\ft^ttv, -^, — , truiupeter
bev !Ivot}fen, -^, — . drop
ber Xroft,-ffe^,-ffc, (cavalry) company
trbftcn, w,, to comfort
tro^cn, w., to defy
tiidltig, thorough ; splendid .
inn, sir., to do \
bie liirc, -n, door
bev Xurrn, -(e)^, ^e, tower
turncit, w., to takeKymuastie exercise
ber lt)t)fltt§, typhoid fever
It
iiliel, evil, bad
iibev, prep, wilh ace. and dnt., over,
above
nbtvtinftommcn, sir., to agree (fein)
itticrfUli'veH, w., to couvict
ubtvtom'mtn, sir., to come over (fein)
nbevlt'ticn, superior
iibcrtc'flCU, «?., to consider
itbcrfdiut'tcit, w., to cover
itberfc^'cit, w., to translate
itl)tt(l, adj., over, left
bag Ufcr, -g, — , shore, strand
bag Ufcrnefditdit -(C)^, reedy shore
bie llljr, -eit, watch, clock
nw, prep, wilh ace., about; wilh inf.,
in order to
itmat'wctt, «;., to embrace
ier Untnano, society, intercourse
nm^t'btn, sir., t» surround
umljcr', around, about
umftfjne'f^en, sir., to contain, bound
UW'fc^CU, 'w., to change, turn
Mlttfdttft', adv., in vain >y
unt'ftiitjen, w., to subvert, overturn
Um'tUtt, sir., to wrap
Itttbcfottttt, unknown
unb, and
ungebunben, unrestrained
unnefiifir, about /
unncfttltbcrt, uuhinderedV
ttltflcljorfom, disobedient J,
Itnncrftbc, uneven, odd Z
bass Uunctiim, -g, -C, monster 1/
ttuntittfltd)/ unfortunate, unlucky
bie UntUcvfitot', -en, university
bag XlniucrfltatS'tcfiCtt, -g, university
life
UnmoB'Hrfl, impossible W
Uimitl^ useless
>ag Unredjt, -<e)g, wrong, injustice
v/nnfcr, our
Mtttcr, prep, with dat. and ace., be-
neath, below, under
ittttcrbriirf'cn, w., to oppress
ber Utttcrbrii'rfcr, -g, — , oppressor
bie Untcrbvit'cfitUQ, -en, oppression
wntcrflC'bett, adj., subject
Un'tcracftCtt, to perish, go under
ttn'tevotbncn, ?"., to subject,
ber Unterri^t, -g, instruction
bie Untcrri^tftuitbc, -n, lesson, les-
son period
bag Unterri(i)t§tucfcn, -g, school-sys-
tem
UUtcrfdiei''bcn, sir. reft., to differ, dis-
tinguish
ber lltttcrfdjicb, -g, -e, dilference
UMtcrtnu, adj., subject -^
unUcrmbBtnb, dowerless; upable
UnUcrluunb'&ar, invulnerable v<'
uniiilins, uncounted, innumerable
bag Urscftcim -(e)g, -e, primitive
rock
bo8 Uv'teU, -g, -e, judgment
ber JBotcr, -g, ^, father
bag JBotctlonb, -(e)g, ^cr, native
country
tjcrou'bcrn, w., to change, alter
bcrbcf'fcrn, w., to improve, correct
tjcrbtn'bcn, sir., to unite
bie SJetbiu'bUUQ, union, connection,
society
bCtbteit'ncn, irr., to burn. Cf. App. 88
bag JBcrbcr'bCtt, -g, destruction \r
tjcrbtc'nctt, w., to deserve, earn . "
bag JBcrbicttft', -(e)8, -e, desert, earn-
ings
toerbin'fien, w. refl., to hire oneself
bev 93crcltt', -g, -e, club, association ;
union, company
318
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
betei'nettf w., to unite, join, unify
Ucrct'tttaen, w., to unite
tJCrfet'ttacttf 10., to make, prepare,
produce
tjetffte'ftctt, str., to melt, flow away ;
pass (fetn)
t)Crful)'rCtt. W', to lead astray
tJCtfiOtt'fiCtt, past ,
bie fBevQan^Qtnl]t\t, past time "/
tJCrflC'fiCtt, s^'-., to forgive
DCrflC'tlCttS, af^y., ill vain w
tjerflc'tiett, ««n, to pass (fein)^
tjcrflcffcit, «<n, to forget
tjcranufit', joyous, happy
ticrfirb'ftcrtt, w., to increase
iJCrf)artcn, «'., to arrest
bft^ aScrljat'tCtt, -§, behavior
tocr^icl'fcu, «^;-., to assist, raise
t)Crfiitt'bcrtt» w., to prevent, hinder,
stop [hide
t)tviiul'ltn, IV., to cover from siglit,
tJCrlr'rcn, iv. rejl., to lose one's way
bcr JBctirr'tc, -n, -n, lost (one)
ber JBcrfrtitf, -^, H, sale
tjcrfau'fcn, «., to sell
ber JBccfcftt', -§, association, society >/
bag ascrfcljrfe'hjcfcn, -g, social iuter-
course f —
Ucvfcfjrt', inverted ; wrong
tJCrlOtt'nCtt, Ji'., to demand
bag iBertan'ncn, -g, demand -+•
Ucrtaf'fCtt, 5^r., to leave, desert I
tJCtUe'rcit, 5ifv., to lose
ber ajcrluft', -(e)g, -c, loss
bcrmirfctt, «., to miss
ber SJetSr -eg, -e, stanza, verse. Hue
uerfSu'mctt, w., to miss
tJCrftfjaf'fCU, "'., to procure
Ucrfdjic'ticn, diflfereut
bie ajcrfrfjic'bcnljctt, -en, difference
UCl'frfllic'ffCtt, sir., to lock up, shut off
Ucrfdjo'ttCtt, «'., to spare
Ucrf^rct'bCU, «<r., to make a mistake
in writing; deed to, prescribe
tlCrf^rc'djClt, str., to promise
Uetftdltb'ddilr comprehensible
tJCrftc'ftCtt, 5<r., to understand
tJCrfu'djCtl, w., to try
tJCrtrci'facil, str., to drive away
bcntu'cljrcit, w., to dishonor
tjerur'tctlctt, «>., to condemn
bert)3unt>'barr vulnerable
Ucrjci'lftCtt, sir., to forgive
ber JBcttcr, -g, -n, cousin
Ijict, much
Uielfrift, manifold
t)teQet^t% perhaps
Dtcr, four
Uierf^annta, four-in-hand
bag aSicrtcl, -g, — , fourth, quarter
uicrunbulcrjin, forty-four
btCt-Unb)tuaiUt(l, twenty-four
Ulcrjcftu, fourteen
iJicrjtfl, forty
ber JBoact, -g, ^, bird
bag 2$oae(d)en> -g, — , dim., little bird
bag S^onUitt, -g, — , dim., little bird
bag 5Kolf» -eg, ^er, people ; nation
bte JBiJlfcrnianbcrUttfl, -en, migration
of races
bie S^oltsfi^ute, -n, public school
ber JBoHsftamm, -(e)g, ^e, tribe
bie 58otf5hlittfd)oft, political econ-
omy
tJOa/full
tloIIbrtn'nCU^ irr., to accomplish \
Mow, prej>. with dat., from, of, out of
tiOt, ]>rep. with dat. and ace, before,
in front of ; out of, because of
tjorbci', adv., past
UorliCl'CttCU, w., to prepare
bie iSorbcrcitung^ -en, preparation
iJOr'fiubcn, str., to discover, iind
Dor'fommcu, sir., to occur (jein)
bor'HcflCtt, sir., to lie before; ein
;3rrtum liegt Dor, a mistake occurs
Uor'traflCtt, sir., to recite
tiotit'ber, adv., past
as
ttiriA, wakeful
bie 9Sad)C, -n, watch, guard
tuadjCU, w., to"watch, guard
tvadlfctt, str., to grow (fein)
bie S3ftlf)tf -en, watch, guard
tuaantf w., to dare, venture
ber SSJftflcn, -g, — , wagon, carriage
hjanbrttflR, reckless
ber ^abtf^tudlr -^^, ^^i watchword,
battle-cry
toahv, true
tttcifirenb, ndv. ccnj., while ; />re/). wtVA
P'en,, during
GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
310
ttJaftrfjuft, truthful, truly
toaffvliih, truly !
bte SSaifc, -n, orphan
ber SBalb, -eg, -"er, woods, forest
bag aSotti'njcititcitt, -§, — , wood-
nymph
ber aSatbjOUbCt, -§, — , forest charm
bte aBatftot'tft, Walhalla (the palace
of departed heroes)
bte aSalfu're, -tt, valkyrie
tnattcn, «'., to wander, drift (fein)
bte gSottb, ^e, wall
njanbetttf side form to toanbern
ber SBonbcrcr, -§, — , wanderer
nianbcrm w., to wauder(fein)
tuanfcUf w'., to waver, swerve
Joontt, when?
tuarnu warm
njortctt, w., to wait
tuarum', why?
twos*, what, that which
hias fitr eiit, what sort of
bag JCSoffcr, -g, — , water
bte aajoffcrfdicibe, -n, watershed
ber aBc(!)fct,-g,—, change; bill of ex-
change
totdcn, w. trans., to awaken
Uiebec . . . nocfl, neither . . . nor
mcfl, adv., away
ber aSJcfl, -{e)g, -c, way
toCflCll, prep, vnth gen., because of, for
the sake of
tucg'raumeu, w., to clear away
ItJCfl'rciftCtt, sir., to tear away
tticljcn, w., to wave ; blow .
bte i£8e^mut> wistfulness, nielancholy)o
mcfl'tun, str., to hurt
n)Ctd)Ctt, str., to yield (fetit) ^/
bte SEBciiftfcl,- Vistula (river)
bte JKQcibc, -n, willow
bte 9Beit)nad)t, -ett, Christmas
hjeit, because
bte SBcitc, time; while
ber SSctlt, -(e)g^ -c, wine
meinen, w,, to weep
ttjctfc, wise
h)Ct''fctt, str., to show, point
bie SScisfjcit, -ett, wisdom
Jtjcift, white
tucit, far, wide
bte aScttC, -n, distance
meiter, farther, on
tvcC4ier> which
melicn, w., to wither (fein)
bte $Sc(t, -ett, world
bag SSc(tQett)U!f)(, turmoil of the world
bte aScttftabt, ^e, metropolis
hJCtttfl, little, few
tuenigftcnS, adv., at least /
tUCUtt, when, if
toier, who, he who
tuetbett, str., to become
ttietfcnf str., to throw, hurl
bte SBcrfftott, (-ftatte), ^eit, workshop
to ett, worth
ber aScrt, -(e)g, -e, value
bag SScf en, -g, — , being
toesliatbr why, wherefore
toeftltl^^ westward, west
totbev, prep, tvith ace, against
hjtbtift, disagreeable
toic, as ; than ; how
tuiebcr, again
tutrnrit, "'., to rock
bie JUJicfe, -it, meadow
njitb, wild
ber 3BtQe(n)> -ttg, will, determination
iuidtR, willing
niiafom'mett, welcome !
ber SBinbf -(e)g, -e, wind
ber JCBittter, -g, — , winter
UliujtB, tiny
ber 9[9tpfe(, -g, — , tree-top
totrbcln, to., to eddy, whirl
hiirfCid), real, true
ber aStrt, -(e)g, -e, landlord, boat ^
toiffeu, irr., to knov*r
bie iCQitme, -it, widow
too, where
bie SSodie, -it, week
toobur^'f by means of whicb ; by
what means?
ioofiir', why? for which
bte SBone, -n, wave
ber aSoBcntJrott, -g, surf
tooljet', whence
toollitt', whither
tooftt, well; truly, probably, I d:.re
say, I suppose
toolitaemut, cheerful
tuoiiueu, if., to dwell, live
ber aBolf , -(e)g, -"c, wolf
bte 953 If c, -n, cloud
ber aSotfcttflrauS, -eg, black clouds
320
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
tOoUtn, w., to wish, desire, want to
tDOttttt'r with which ; with what?
tOOVan', at which, at what?
tttOtHUf'f upon which ; upon wliat?
ttiOtauS'f from which ; from what?
ttJortn'/ in which ; in what, wherein ?
bag SBott, -e§, -^er or-^, word, speech
bie gBortftcttUttB* -en, word-order
XOOVn'htX, at which ; about what?
tuobor'f before which ; before what?
tUOJU'f for which ; why ?
tuunberbar, wonderful
nJttttbertli!^), queer
tounbetn, •w. refl., to wonder
tounbctf $bu, wonderfully beautiful
ber SSQunf^, -eS, "-t, wish, desire
toiittftfjctt, ti'., to wish
ber SBurm, -(e)8, -^er, worm, serpent
bic JEButjct, -n, root
ttlitrien, w., to season, fill with scent
ba§ JEBurjteitt, -3, — , rfim., little
root
)»VLUn, w., to rage
3
blc Bttfil, -en, number
joljlcn, i*., to count
ber 3ol)tt, -{e)§, -^e, tooth
ber 3onf , -§, quarrel
jatt, tender
ber 3ftttbettrftttf, -(e)^, "e, magic po-
tion
XCl^ttCtt, w., to draw
jetsen, w., to show
bie 3ctlc, -n, line
bie 3cit, -en, time
bie 3citlan8, stretch of lime
JCrfal'len, str., to fall to pieces ; to
decompose
3Crflic'fjCtt# «^., to melt away (fetn)
^
aiel^en, str., to draw, pull ((;aben); go,
wander (fetn); in Setrac^t — . take
into consideration
bag 3tct, -s, -e, goal
jicmlid), pretty, rather, somewhat
bag 3intntcr, -g, — , room
joruta, angry
3 It, to ; too
jUifctt, w., to thrill, start
aucrff, adv.^ at first
iW\<i\Xtn, str., to drop, close
JUfaHiSr accidental(ly)
Jufrtc'bCtt, contented
bie 3ufrte'bcnftctt, contentment
ker 3uB, -(e)g, -^e, impulse; feature,|
procession
XUfic'flCtt, a(/u, present
ber 3uR((' -^, —, bridle
attgetan, favorably inclined
iuUaV, at last
ju'ntQ^en^ ■««'., to close, shut
bie 3unfic, -n, tongue ^^>\^
iUvM\ adv., back
JUturf'ficftcn, str., to go back (fetn)
iUritrf'slcIlCtt, 5/7-. re^., to withdraw
jufom'tnctt, together [join
jufont'mcttfitacit, w., to put together,
}U'f|ire^en, s'?"-, to encourage; pro-
nounce judgment
ju'traucn, w., to entrust, believe, to
be capable of
jutiot'r adv., before
jtwci, two
ber 3hJci6, -<e)§, -e, branch, twig
itntintn, w., to branch, grow
Jtwelt, second
itocitenS, secondly
ber 3ltJCtfi» -(e)g, -e, dwarf
3hJUtf)cn,i?rep. tviih ace. and dat., be-
tween
3njotf» twelve
/
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
a, an, ein, eine, ein.
able, be able to, fonnen, w.
about, adv., imgefa^r, etttja; jprep.
um (ace), tjon (dat.).
according to, \\a6) (dat.).
account, on account of, tuegcn
(gen.); on that account, be§^olb,
be^tcegen; on which account,
tueS^alb, tt)c§n)egen; on my ac-
count, meinetiDcgen. -
act, l^anbcln, w. ; tun, str.
A.D., na6) efjrifto, n. e^r.
Adam, 5(bam, — §.
address, an ' rcben, w.
advance, tior'fc^reiten, str. (fcin);
most advanced, t)orge[c^ritteiift.
adventure, bag Slbenteuer, — §, — .
afraid, adj., bang; be afraid of,
ftc^ fiird)ten tjor, w.
afternoon, bcr 9fJad)mittag, — §, — e.
again, njicber, noc^ cinmal.
age, bag 5(Itcr, — g, — .
all (=all of), all; (= whole),
gan§; all day, ben ganjen Xag;
all sorts of, allerlei (indecl);
(= exclusively), laiiter.
allowed, be allowed, biirfen, w.
along, mit; entlang',
also, auc^.
although, obgleid^'.
always, immer.
America, \i(k% Slme'rifa, — g.
American, ber Slmerifa'ner, — §,
— ; bie ?lmerif a ' nerin, — nen ; adj.
amerifa'nifcf).
amuse oneself, \i6) antiifie'ren, w.
ancient, alt, altertum'lid^.
and, unb.
animal, \ia^ Xier, —{t)^, — e.
answer, antttjorten, w. ; bie 5lntn)ort,
—en.
anvil, ber %vxho% — ffe§, — [fe.
anything, etmag; not anything.
nicl)tg.
appear, erfcfjei'nen, str. (fcin).
appearance, tk erfcf)ei'nung, —en;
ha^ Slugfe^cn, — g.
apple, ber Slpfel, — §, — .
architecture, bie ^aufunjl, bie
Slrd^iteftur'.
area, ber ^lodjenraum, — (c)g, — e.
arithmetic, "HOi^ Oiecljnen, — g ; men-
tal arithmetic, bag ^opfred)nen,
— g.
arm, ber 9lrm, — (e)g, — c
armor, ber ganger, — g, — .
aronnd, nm (ace).
arrest, tjer^af ' ten, w.
art, bie ^unft, — e; art centre,
bie ^unftftdtte, — n,
as, conj., alg, "Ha, tt)ie; as, so. . .as,
fo...alg, ttJte; as if, alg ob; as
many, [o t)iete.
ask, fragen, w.
at, an (ace. and dat.); gu (dat.);
(of time), um (ace); with, at the
house of, bei (dat.).
Augsburg, bag 5luggburg, — g.
autumn, ber §erbft, — (e)g, —^.
avenge, rod) en, w.
321
322
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
awaken^ ertre'cfen, w.
aware, getca^r'.
away, fort, ttjeg.
back, juriid',
Baltic Sea, bie £)ft[ee ; ha% baltifcl)e
bark, beHcn, i^.
bathe, baben, i/j.
battle, bie ©c^(acf)t, ~cn.
be, [ein, str. ([ein) ; there is, are, e§
ift, e§ finb, eg gi bt.
be, is to, follen, w.
bear, ber SSar, —en, —en.
beautiful(ly), fdjon, rcigcnb.
beauty, bie ©c^ou^eit, —en.
because, njeil.
become, hjcrben, str. (fcin).
bed, Us> S3ett, — (e)§, —en.
before, otdij. , e^e; prep. Dor (ace.
anddat.); (= hitherto), bi§l)er'.
beg (= request), bitten, s^r.; (for),
um with ace. ; (= beg for alms),
bettein, w.
begg-ar, ber SSettler, — §, — .
begin, an ' f angen,sfr. , begin ' nen,sf r.
believe, glauben, w.
bell, bie ©dieUe, — n.
belong (= be in the possession of),
gel^o ' ren, w. (dat. ) ; (= appertain
to), getjo'ren gn (dat.).
bench, bie SSan!, — e.
Berlin, S3erlin',—§.
best, beft, ber befte, am beften; auf§
bcjte, au^erft gut.
better, bejfer.
between, gtoifc^en (ace. and dat.)
bird, ber SSoge(,-§,-^.
birdling, ta^ SSogeld^en, — §, — .
black, fd^njarg.
blood, ha^ mm, — (e)§.
bloom, blii^cn, w.
blow, blafen, str.
blue, blau.
board (= blackboard), bie XafeC,
— n; (= wooden board), ba§
SSrett, — e§, — er.
boast of, \id} rii^men, w., (gen.).
bold(ly), be^er5t',fii^n.
book, ta^ mid), — (e)§, — er,
boundary, bie ©renge, — n.
boy, ber ^nabe, — n,— n; ber^unge,
— n, — n; ber 93urfrf)(e), — (e)n,
(e)n.
brave, ta:pfer, fiil^n.
bravery, bie 5ra:pfer!eit.
brew, brauen, w.
brightness, ber @(an§, — e§.
bring, bringen, irr. cf. App. 88.
brook, ber SSac^, — (e)^, — e.
brooklet, t)a§> S8ad)Iein, — §, — .
brother, ber 33rubcr, — §, — ,
brother-in-law, ber (3d)n)ager, — §,
brown, braun.
busy, ge[d)aftig.
but, conj., aber; fonbern; aUein;
adv. nur.
buy, fauf en, w.
by, an (dat., ace); neben (dat.,
ace); bei (dat.); (= agency), Oon
(dat.); (= means), burd^ (ace);
by myself, fiir mid^,
call, riifen, str.
can, fonnen, w.
can, bie ^anne, — n.
canon, ber ^o^Iweg, — (e)§, — e.
capital, bie ^aiiptftabt, — e.
carriage, ber SBogen, — §, — .
carry, tragen, str.
castle, bag ©d)lo§, — ffe§, — ffer.
cat, bie ^a^e, — n; tom-cat, ber
^ater, — g, —
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
323
catch, fangen, str.
cause, laffen, str. ; cause to fall,
fallen laffeu.
century, ha^ i^a^rfiim'bcrt, — §,
— e; century old, t)uubcrtjdl)rig.
chair, ber <Btut)l, — (e)^, — c.
change, fid) berdn'bern, w.
Charles, ^arl, — §.
Charles the Great, ^art ber ^irofse,
^arB be§ ©rofeen.
charm, eutp'c!en, la
charm, ber dici^, — e§, — e.
charming, liebcnSWiirbig, rei^cnb.
chase, jagen, w.
chick, t)a§> ^iic^Icm, — §, — .
child, t)a§> ^\nt>, — (e)§, — er.
choose, tt)af)Ien, if?.
city, bie ©tabt, — e.
climate, bag ^lima, — g, — tc.
climb, fteigen, str. (fein); flettern,
m (fein).
clock, bie Vit)x, —en.
close, t)erfd)Iie'feen, str., fdjlie'feen,
str., §u'mad)en, w.
cloud, bie SBolfe, — n.
coast, bie ^iifte, — n.
coat, ber 9?ocf, — {e)g, — c.
cock, ber ^at)n, — (e)g, — c.
cold, fait; catch cold, fid) erfdl'tcn;
a cold, eine ©rfdl'tnng.
come, fontmen, str. (fein).
comfort, troften, w.
command, befcl^'len, str.
commercial city, bie ^anbclSftabt,
— e.
compelled, be compelled to,
miiffen, w.
completely, ganj, tioHftanbig.
conqueror, ber @ro ' berer, — g, — .
contain, entljal'ten, str.
contents, ber i^nl^alt, ~(e)§.
convict, iiberfii^'rcn, w.
cook, ber ^od), ~(c)g, — e; bie
^oc^in, — nen.
cost, !often, w.
councilor, ber 9?atgeber, —§, — ;
ber mat, —{e)^, ^e.
count, ber ^raf, —en, —en.
count up, anf ' red^nen, w.
courage, ber 9Jlnt, — (e)§.
course (of a stream), ber Sauf, — e§,
— e ; (at a school), ber ^nrfnS.
cousin, ber SSetter, — §, — ; bie
©onfi'ne, — n.
covered, bebedt'.
crow, frozen, w.
crown, bie ^rone, — n.
crutch, bie ^riicfe, — n.
cry, rnfen, str. ; njeinen, w.
cure, fnrie'ren, iv.
custom, ber SSrand), — e§, — e; bie
©itte, — n ; bie ©ctuo^n ' l;cit, —en.
dame, bie i^xau, —en.
dark, bnnfcl.
daughter, bie Xodjter, — .
dead, tot.
dear, tencr.
death, ber %o\), — e§, — e.
declare, bel^an^ ' ten, iv. ; erfld ' ren,
w.
deep, tief.
defeat, befie'gen, w. ; fdjlagen, str.
defy, tro^cn, w. (dat.).
demand, bie Slnforberung, — en; to
make a demand, eine Slnforbe^
rnng fteHen, w.
departure, ha§> f^ortgeiien, — §; ber
5luf brnc^, — g, -^e.
dervish, ber ^ertt)ifd), — e§, — e.
desk, i>a§> ^nlt, — (e)§, — e.
destined, be destined, foEen, w.
devour, f ceffen, str.
die, fterben, str., (fein).
324
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
difficult, fd)h)er, fc^njierig.
diligent, flei^tg.
disobedient, uiige^orfam.
disobey, ungc^or[am fein, s^r. (dat.)
(fein); txo^cn,w. (dat.).
distinguish, au^'jeid^nen, w.
divergence, bie SSerfd)ie ' bent)eit,
—en,
do, tun, str., madden, w. ; how do
you do? tt)te gel^t eg ^^ntw, h)ie
befinben ©ie fic^ ? that won't do,
ba§ gel^t nic^t.
doctor, ber ® of tor, — §, ^ofto'rcn;
ber Slrgt, — (c)g, — e.
dog, ber §imb, — (e)§, — e.
domestic animal, ba§ §au§ticr,
-(e)§, -e.
donkey, ber (£fef, — §, — .
dot, ber ^un!t, — (e)§, — e.
dove, bie Xaube, — n.
down, (=below), brunten, uiitcii;
(=downward«), nicbcr ; sit down,
\\d) fe^en, w.
dragon, ber ®rac^e, — n, — n.
dreadfully, furc^tbar.
dream, traumen, w. ; ber Xrauni,
-(e)§, --e.
drink, trinlen, str.; ber 2^raii!,
Srun!, — (e)g, — e.
drive, fal^ren, str. (fein).
drop, faGen laffen, sfr. ; she drops
it, [ie lafet e§ fallen.
each, jeber, jebe, jebeg; each other,
un§, eud£), fid^, einan ' ber.
eagle, ber 2lar, — (e)§, — e.
ear, \>a^ DIjr, — §, —en.
early, frill^.
easy, Teic^t.
eat, effen, str.
effort, bie Slnftrengnng, —en.
eight, (id:^t
elector, ber ^nrfiirft, —en, —en.
elephant, ber (Slcfanf, -en, —en.
eleven, elf.
emerald, ber ©maragb', — (e)§, — e.
emperor, ber 5^aifer, — §, — .
emphasis, ha^ ©etoic^t', — e§; bie
SSeto'nnng, —en.
empire, tia^ ^aifcrreid^, — §, — e.
encounter, befte ' ^en, str.
enjoy oneself, fid) amiifie'rcn, w.
enumerate, anf 'goljlen, w.
equally, ebenfo fel^r; gleic^; tolove
equally, gleicf) gem l^aben, ebenfo
feljr (ieben n)ie.
error, ber i^itrtum, — §, — er.
everybody, jcbcrmann.
examination, bie ^riifnng, -en.
example, "ba^ ©jem':pel, — §, — ;
ha^ S3eif^)iel, — §, — c.
exceedingly, anf§ :^od)fte or an-
fecrfte; l^odjft, anfjcrft.
except, an^er (dat.).
exhaust, erfd)i)p'fcn, w.
expend, an§' gebcn, str.
explain, erf Id ' ren, w.
expose, OLM^'^t^nXfW. (dat.).
extant, befte 'l^enb.
eye, 'aa^ 5lnge, — §, — n.
face, bag ©efid^t, — (e)§, — er.
fact, bie Satfac^e, — n.
fair, ber ^a^rmarft, — (e)§, — e.
fall, fallen, str. (fein); fall asleep,
ein'fd)tafcn, str. (fein).
famous, berii^mt'.
farmer, ber SSauer, — n or — §, — n.
father, ber SSater,- §, — ; father of
gods and men, ber 2lIIt)ater, — §.
fear, fiird^ten, w.
feather, bie geber, — n.
feather-bed, tiOi^ geberbett, — (e)§,
-en.
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
325
feeble, ^djtoad).
fellow, bcr ^erl, —§, — e.
field, bag gelb, — (e)§, — er.
fl^ht, fdmpfen, iv. ; fedjten, sir.
find, [inben, sfr.
finder, ber ginber, — g, — .
fir, bic Sanne, — n; bcr Xannen--
baiint, — §, — e.
fire, ba§ i^enex, — §, — .
firm(ly), feft.
first, adj. , erft; adi?. (=not until),
erjt; at first, guerft; in the first
place, erfteu§; (=next), sunad^jt.
five, fiinf.
fiame, tobern, w. ; bic fjfamme, — n.
flat land, bic ©bene, — n.
flower, bic ^lumc, — n.
flowret, t)a^ S31iimlein, — §, —, bag
S31iimci)cn, — g, — .
fly, flicgen, str. (fcin).
fo^, ber S^ebel, — §, — .
fond, be fond of. licb l^abcn, Qcrii
l^abcn; adj., liebenb.
foolish, toric^t, bumm.
for, prep., fiir (ace); not for
years, erft nad) ^al)rcn; for cen-
turies, ;^a:^rl)un ' berte lang; look
out for him, aiig'fd^auen iiai^ i^m,
w.; conj., bcnn.
foreign, fremb.
forest, ber SSalb, — (c)§, -^^r.
forge, fd)miebcn, w.
forget, bergef'fen, str.
form, bilben, w.
former, pron., jencr, jene, jeneg;
adj., frii^er, borl^er'ge^enb.
formerly, friil^er.
four, t)ier.
four-in-hand, bierfpannig.
fox, ber %m&)^, — e§, — e.
free ( =set free), bef rei ' en, w. ;
adj., frei.
friend, ber f^reimb, —it% ~e.
frightened, bang; be frightened,
erfc^ro'cfcn fcin.
from, t)on (dat. ), au§ (dat.); from
that, babon' ; from (out of) what,
tt)obon'.
full, tjoIL
garden, ber ©arten, — §, — .
gay, bnnt; frotjlic^.
gentle, milb, [anft, giitig.
German, bciitfd); a German, ein
©entfd^er, eine %n\i\d)t.
Germania, bie ©crma'nia.
Germany, tia^ 2)entf(i)lanb, — g.
get, bcf om ' men, s^r. ; get out of the
way ! ge^ au§ bent SBcg !
girl, bag aRobd)cn, — g, — .
give, gcben, str.
glass, bag ©lag, —eg, — er; adj.»
grofern.
gloomy, biifter.
go, gel^en, str. (fein); go to sleep,
cin'fd^tafen, str. (fein), f^lafen
ge^en; go out, aug'gcl^cn, s^r.
God, ber @ott, —eg, — er.
gold, bag ©olb, — (e)g; gold-piece,
bag ©olbftiicf, — (e)g, — e.
golden, gotbcn.
goldsmith, bcr ©olbfd^mieb, — g,
— e.
good, gilt.
gorgeous, prodjtig, praditboH.
gown, bag ^leib, — (e)g, — er.
grade, bie ©tuf c, — n.
grandfather, ber (SJro^bater, — g,
grandmother, bie ©rofemntter, — ♦
grass, bag ©rag, —eg, -^er.
gray, grau.
great, gro^
green, griiiu
326
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
^ow (= become), toerben, sir.
(fein); (= increase), ti)ad)\cn, str.
(fein).
growth, ba§ 28ad)§tiim, — (c)g; ba§
SBad^feit, — g; (= increase), bag
5lntt)a(i)[en, —§♦
guard, fi^ii^en, ii?.
guess, raten, str.; guess riddles,
diat\el 15 fen, z^?.
gymnasium, bag ©tjmna ' fiiim, —§>,
— fieiu
hair, ba§ §aar, — (e)§, — e«
half, bie ^olfte, — n; adj., t^alb,
hammer, ber jammer, — §, — .
hand, bie §anb, — e*
hand, reic^en, w.
happy, gludliii).
hard, tjart, fcfitoer; work hard,
fc^toer arbeiten; hard earned,
fauer tierbient'.
hare, ber §afe, — n, — n.
hat, ber §ut, — (e)§, — e,
hate, l^affen, w.
have, l^aben, tc. ; have a thing done,
eitoa§> madden (tun) laffen,
have to, miiffen, w.
hawk, ber ^abic^t, — §, — e.
he, er; ber; biefer,
head, ber ^o^f, — (e)§, -^c.
hear, pren, w.
heart, ta^ §ers, — en§, —en.
heaven, ber ^intmel, — §, — .
heavy, fd^tcer.
help, l^elfen, s#r. (dat.).
hen, bie §enne, — n.
hence, barum' ; beStuegen.
her, iijx, xf^xe, if)V,
herd, pten, w.
Herman, Hermann, — §.
hero, ber ^etb, —en, —en.
hers, il^rer, i:^re, i^r(e)§.
high, \)od),
his, adj., fein, feinc, fein; pron.,
feincr, feine, fein(e)§; pred. adj.,
fein.
historical, l^ifto ' rifcf).
history, bie (5)cfc^id)'te, — n.
hold, l^alten, str.
home, bie §eimat, —en; adv.
(=homewards), nad) §aufe, ^cint ;
(=at home), §u ^aufe, bal^eim'.
homogeneous, einl^eitlic^.
hope, fjoffcn, w.
horse, "^(1% $ferb, — (e)§, — e; tia^
9?ofe, -ffe§, -ffe.
hospital, ^a% ^ofpital', — §, — er.
host, ber SKirt, — (e)§, — e.
hour, bie ©tunbe, — n.
house, ha^ ^axi^, — e§, — er.
how, n)ie.
however, cber, boc!^.
humiliate, bemiitigen, w.
hunter, ber ^ciger, — §, — .
hurt, nie^ tun, dr.
husband, ber Wamx, — (e)g, — er;
ber (^atte, — n, — n.
hut, bie §iitte, — n.
I,i(^.
if, ttjenn ; ob.
ill, franf.
impulse, ber ^Vi% — (e)§, — e.
in, in (aco. and dat.), in the
evening, am §lbenb ; in order to,
urn gu (inf.); in it, barin'; in
what or which, n)orin'.
inclination, bie SFJeignng, —en ; ac-
cording to his own inclination,
nacf) feinem eignen ^opf.
increase, "i^a^ SSergro^crn, — §.
indoors, brinnen, int ^au^,
industrious, flei^ig.
influence, ber ©influ^, — ffe§, —ffe.
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
327
inspiration, bet ginfaU, — (e)§, — c.
instead of, (an)[tatt ' (gen. )
instruction, ber Unterrid^t, — §.
interesting, intereftant'.
tntervention, ha^ (Sinfcl)reitcn, — §.
into, in (ace.)-
inYulnerable, unbertounb ' bar.
it, e§ ; ex, [te.
its, adj., fein, feme, feitt; pron.,
fetner, feine, fein(e)g.
joyous(ly), tDO^Igemut, freubig,
fro^.
judge, ber 9licf)ter, — §, — .
jump, fpringen str, ([cin).
just, adj., gered^t; adv., gerabe,
eben.
keen(ly), fcf)arf.
keep, bel^ol'ten, str.
kill, toten, w.
kind, giitig, freimbltdE}.
kindergarten, ber ^inbcrgarten,
kindly, freunbfid^.
king, ber ^bnig, — §, — c.
kingdom, ha^ konxQxeid), — (e)§,— c.
kiss, fiiffen, lo.
knight, ber 9iitter, — §, — ,
know, (=be acquainted with)
fennett, irr., cf. App. 88; (=
be cognizant of) toiff en, irr. , cf .
App. 83; know a lesson, eine
Stnfgabe fonnen, w.
known, be!annt'; well known,
njol^Ibefannt
lady, bie ©crnte, — n; bie fjrau, —en.
land, ha^ £anb, — e§, — er or — e.
language, bie (Bpxad)C, —n; ancient
languages, bie alien <Bpxad)en;
modern languages, bie nencrcn
©^rad£)en.
large, gro^
last, le^t.
last, bauem, w.
late, f^jat.
latter, biefer, biefe, biefeS (bie§);
ber Ie|tere.
laugh, lad^en, w.
lazy, f anl.
leaf, ba§ SSIatt, — (e)§, -^er.
less, lueniger.
lesson, bie Seftion', —en; to take
a lesson, eine ©tnnbe ne^men.
str.
let, laffen, str.
letter, ber S3ricf, — (c)§, — e.
lie, lie gen, str.
life, \)a^ Seben, — §, — .
like, gem ^aben ; I like it, ic^ l^abe
e§ gern, e§ gefaEt ntir; I like to
do it, icf) tne e§ gem.
linden tree, bie Sinbe, — n; linden
leaf, \)a^ Sinbenbfatt, — (e)§, — cr.
listen, l^oren, w. ; t)or(^en, w. ; listen
to the birds, anf bie SSogel l^oren,
w. ; ben SSogeln ju'l^oren, w.
little, flein.
live, leben, w.; hJot)nen, w.; live
oneself out, ftcf) au^'tchen,w.
load, bie Saft, —en.
long, lang.
look, fei^en, str.; (== appear) on§'»
[e^en, str. ; look out, an§> ' fc^auen,
w.; look at, an'f(i)aucn, w.;
an'fel^en, str.
loosen, lofen, w. ; lodern, w.
lord, ber §err, — n, —en.
lose, berlie'ren, str.; lose one's
way, fic^ berir'ren, w.
lost, berirrt'.
Louis, SnblDig, — §.
love, lieben, w. ; his first love, fcine
erjte Siebe.
328
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
lover, bet Siebl^aber, — §, — .
low, nicbrig*
lowland, bie ©bene,— n.
maiden, bic ^ungfrau, —en.
make, madden, w. ; make one's way,
\id) biirc^ ' fd)Iagen, str.
man, ber 9)Jann, — e§, — er; bcr
^en\d), —en, —en.
manufacturing city, bie ©ettjerbS-
ftabt, -^e.
many, tjtele.
marry, ^eiraten, t<7.
master, ber §err, — n, —en; ber
Wei\tex, — §, — .
may, bilrfcn, w.
meadow, bie SBiefe, — n.
means, by means of, mittel^ (gen.)
burc^ (ace.)
medicine, bie SD^ebi^in', —en.
medieyal, nnttelaltcr(id).
meet, begeg ' nen, w. (dat. ), (fcin) ;
treffen, str.
melt, fc^melgen sfr., (fein).
merciiant, ber ^anfmann, — (e)§,
— leute.
mi^lity, mad)tig.
migration of races, bie SSoIfcr-
tttanberung, —en.
mild, mitb.
millionaire, ber ^iUionax', — §,
— e.
mind, ber (Sinn, — (e)§, — e.
mine, meiner, meine, mein(e)§
mislead, berf iil^ ' ren, to.
moan, dd^^en, w.
modern, neuer; mobern'.
money, ta^ @elb, — e§, — er.
moon, ber Tlonh, — (e)§, — e.
morning, ber aJJorgen, — §, — ;
mornings, ntorgen^; this morn-
ing, j^ente morgen.
mortal, bcr Wen^d), —en, —en.
most, ttieift; a most difficult
examination, eine pc^ft (or
au^erft) fdiioierige ^riifnng; the
most difficult examination, bie
fd^njierigfte ^riifnng.
mother, bie SD^ntter, — ♦
mountain, ber 33erg, — (e)§, — e;
the mountain-range, ba§ (SJebirge,
— §, — .
mountain top, ber ©i^fcl,- §,— .
mourn, tranern, w. (urn and ace);
betran'ern (ace.)
mouse, bie Wlau^, — e.
moutli, ber SJlnnb, — (e)§, — er.
Mr., ber §err, —n, —en.
mucli, biel; fel^r.
multiplication table, bo§ ©inntal-
ein§',— ,— .
Munich, \)a^ aJJiinc^en, — §.
museum, ha^ 2JJnfe'um, — §, Win-
f e ' en.
must, mii[fen, w. ; you must not,
bn barfft nid)t.
my, ntein, meine, meiiu
name, ber 9?ame(n), — men§, —men.
narrow, eng.
national, national'; national
hymn, bie 9'?ationar'!^l)mne, — n.
native land, t>a§^ ^eimatlanb, —{c%
— er.
natural, natiir'fici); natural
science, bie 9Jatnr'n)iffenfc^aft,
—en.
near, nal^.
need, brand^en, w.
neighborhood, bie ^at)e, — n.
neither. . .nor, ttieber. . .noc^.
nephew, ber S^Jeff e, — n, — n.
never, nie.
new, neiu
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
329
next, nac^ft.
ni^ht, bie '^a^t,—e*
nine, neiuu
no, itein ; !em, fcine, f ciiu
nor, no(i)'f nor I either, icij and;
nic^t.
northern, norbUc^, norbifdj.
not, nic^t.
now, mm, je|t.
number, bie ^a% —en; bic SfJiim^
ttter, — n.
nut, bie 3lu% — ffe.
oak, bie (5id)c, — n.
obedient, gc^or'fam, fclgfanu
obey, QcfiOX'd)cn, w.
obliged, be obliged, miiffen, w.
obli^in^, gefcil'Iig.
observant, beo'bad)tenb.
observe, bemcr'fcn, w.
occur, ftatt ' ftitbcn, str.
o'clock, U^r; at six o'clock, um
fed)§ U^r,
of, t)on (dat.); of course, natiirlid);
of it, that, bat)on'; of which,
what, njot)on'.
ofl'er, bictcii, str.
ofllcer, ber iDffiaier', — §, — c.
often, oft,
old, alt.
on, auf, CL\\ (dat. and ace), on ac-
count of, ttjcgen (gen. ).
one, ein§; adj., tux, cine, cin;
pron., einer, eine, eine§; indef.
pron. , man.
only, nur.
open, adj., often; open the door,
ntac^e bie Xixx auf.
or, ober.
order, in order, um (inf.)
orphan, bie SSaifc, — n.
our, unfcr, unfre, unfcr.
ours, unfrer, unfrc, unfer§; unfcr.
out,prep. aug (dat.); adv., 'ijcxau^' ,
I)inau§', bran^cn.
own, eigen.
pa^e, bie ©eite, — n.
pair, ha^ ^aat, — e§, — e.
paper, ha^ ^apicx', —^, — e.
past, nac^ (dat.); oorbci', ooriibcr;
half-past ten, Ijalb etf.
pastor, bcr ^farrcr, — §, — .
peace, bie 9f{u^c; bcr ^ricbcn, — §.
peasant, ber 33auer, — § or— n, — n ;
bie SSduerin, — ncn.
penny, bcr pfennig, — §, — e.
people, bie Scute ; "hg.^ SSolf, — (c)§,
— er.
permitted, be permitted, biirf en, iv.
phenomenon, bie (gr[d)ci ' uung,
—en; ba§ ^pnomcn', — §, — e.
pick, )jidcn, w.
piece, "ba^ QiM, — (e)§, — e.
place, bie ©tcUe, — u; bcr ^la|,
— e§, — e ;bcr Drt — (e)g, — er.
place, tegcn, w. ; ftcGen, w. ; fe^en, w.
plant, ipflangcn, w,
play, fpiclcu, w.
play, \)(i^ 6^icl, — §, — c.
please, bittc ; gcf atlcu, str. ; it
pleases me, e§ gcfallt mir.
pliable, gcfd)mei'big.
poet, ber ®id)ter,—§, — ; bcr^oct',
—en, —en.
poor, arm.
population, bie ©inmo^ucrgal^r,
—en.
praise, loben, w.
prefer, Ueber ^aben, w. ; bor'gicl^en,
str.
prepare, Oor'bereiten,t(?.
prescribe, oerfd)rciben, str.
present, ta^ ©cfd^eri', — §, — c.
330
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
pretty, l^iibfc^.
prince, bcr giirft, —en, —en; bcr
$rin§, — en, — en'»
princess, bie ^ringef'fin, — nen.
probably, hjo^l; ttja^rfdiein'Iid).
promise, tjerfpre ' d)en, s^r.
protection, ber (S(i)U^, — e§.
proud, jtolg,
Prussian, :preu^ifc!^,
punish, ftrafen, w.
pupil, ber ©d)uler, — §, — ; bie
©(i)ulerin, —nen.
purse, bie SSorfe, — n.
queen, bie ^onigin, —nen.
queer, tonnberlid).
quick(ly), [rf)nell.
quite, gang.
raise, l^eben, str.\ gur SSIiitc ber-
l^el'fen, s^r.
rapi(l(ly), [d)neE.
rather, bod^.
raven, ber ^aht, — n, — n.
reach, errei'd)en, m ; reid)en, ?^.
read, lefen, str.
receive, befom' men, s^r. ; er^al'ten,
str.
reckless, toog^alftg.
red, rot
reformation, bie 9?ef orntation ' ,
—en.
rejoice, fid^ fren'en, w. (uber and
anf with ace.)
relate, er§a:^'Icn, w. ; beric^'ten, w.
release, txVb'\n\,w.\ befrei'en, w.
remain, bleiben, str. (fein).
remember, \\6) erin'nern, 2^.
remind, erin ' nern w. (an and ace. ).
reply, antttjorten, w. ; entgeg'nen, w.
resemble, al^nlic^ [e!^en, str. (dat.);
gleid^en (dat.)
resound, er!Iin ' gen, str.
return, bie ^uriic! ' f nnf t.
return, §nriic!' !ef)rcn, w. (fein);
gnriid'Jommen, str. (fein).
revolutionize, nrn'^turgen, w.
reward, bie SSelol^'nung, — en; ber
Sol^n, — e§, — e.
Rhine, ber 9f{{|ein, — §.
rich, reic^.
riddle, \ia^ 9?atfel, — §, — .
ride, reiten, str. (fein).
ri^ht, recl)t, rid^tig ; be right, rcc^t
l^aben.
ripe, reif.
rise (of the sun), anf'ge^en, str.
(fein); (of persons), anf fte^en,
str. (fein).
river, ber %lvi% — ffe§, — ffe.
robe, bo§ @ett)anb'— (c)§, — cr.
Roman, ber Oiomer, — §, — ; adj.,
rontifcf).
romantic, rontan'tifc^.
ragged, ^erb.
run, lanf en, str. (fein) ; run away,
fort 'lanf en, s^r. (fein).
rusli, fic^ ftiirgen (onf and ace.) iv.
rustling, ranfd^enb.
safe(ly), fielder.
sauerkraut, ba§ ©anerfrant, — (e)§.
save, retten, w.
say, fagen, w. ; said to be, foKen,
w.
scenery, bie ©generie', —en; bie
SanbfcEiaft, —en.
school, bie ©d^nle, — n;schoollife,
tid^ ©d^ulleben, — §.
school system, ba§ ©dinlnjefen,
science, bie SBiffenfd^aft, — en.
scold, fd)elten, str.
search, in search of, nad^ (dat. )
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
331
secret, ba§ ^e^etm'ni§,—ffe§, — ffe.
see, fe^en, str.
seek, \ud)en, w.
sell, tjertau'fen, «7.
semester, bo§ Seme'fter, — §, — .
sentence, ber (2q^, —eg, — c; bcr
3f?id)t§f^rnc^, ©pruc^, — (c)§, -^c.
servant, ber Wiener, —^, — ; bcr
^ned)t, — (e)§, — e,
set, un'tergei^en, s^r. (feiii); ftcHen,
w.\ tegen, ttJ. ; fe|en, tt;.
seven, [tebem
shake, fc^iitteln, ti7.
she, fie.
sheep, "aa^ ©d)af, — <e)§, — e.
shepherd, ber (SdE)dfer, — §, — .
shoe, ber <B6)\\% (c)§, — c.
shoemaker, ber Sc^ul)iuad)er, — #,
— ; ber ©c^ufter, — §, — .
shoot, [(i)ie^en, str.
shore, ba§ Ufcr, — §, — .
shoulder, bie ©d^ultcr, — n.
show, seigen, w.
shuttle, bie ©^3ure, — n.
silk, bie (Seibe, — n; ad/, feibcii.
silver, tiOi^ (Silber, — ^; ad/., fil-
beriu
simple, einfacfj.
simplicity, bie ginfadj^eit.
since, feit; "ba.
sing, jingen, str.
Sister, bie ©(i)tt)efter, — n.
sister - in - lawy bie Sc^ttJageria,
— nen*
sit, fi|en, str.
situated, gelcgen; be situated,
liegen, str.
six, fed^S.
sixteenth, \t6)^t\)\\t
sky, ber ^immel, —^, — ♦
slay, erfd)la'gen, str.
sleep, ber ©djlaf, — (e)§.
sleep, fc^fafeit, s^r. ; go to sleep,
ein'fd)Iafen, str. (fein); fc^lafen
ge()en, sfr. ([ein).
small, !lein.
smile, lad)elit, w.
smithy, bie ©dimiebe, — n.
snow, ber ©d^nee, — §♦
soft, fanft.
soldier, ber ©olbat', —en, —en.
son, ber (5ot)n, — (e)§, — e.
song, ba§ Sieb, — (e)§, — er.
sorry, leib ; I am sorry, e§ tnt mir
Icib ; I am sorry for you, bn tnft
mir leib.
south, ber 6iiben, — §.
southern, [iiblid).
South Germany, ©iibbentfc^Ianb,
— §.
sparrow, ber O^jerling, — §, — e.
speak, fpred)en, str.
spectacles, bie SSriUe, — n.
spin, fpinnen, str.
spirit, bcr @ei[t, — (e)§, — cr; in
good spirits, tuol^lgcmnt, bci gntcr
Sanne, tjeiter.
splendid(ly), :prad^tig, prac^tboE,
gro^artig.
splendor, bie ^rad^t.
spring, ber griil^Iing, — §, — e.
sprout, f^riegen, str. (fein).
stand, fte:^en, str.
star, ber (Stem, — §, — e.
statue, bie (Statue, — n; t>a^ ®enf '^
mat, — §, — er.
stay, bleiben, str. (fein).
steal, fte^len, str.
step, treten, str. (fein); step for-
ward, bortreten, str. (fein).
stepmother, bie (Sticfmutter, — .
still, nod),
stork, ber ©tord^, — §, — e.
story, bie ©efc^ic^tc, — n.
332
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
Strassburg", ta^ ©trapxirg, — §;
adj., ftrapurger.
stream, ber glit§, — ff^^/— fl^j ^^^
<Btxom, — (e)§, — e.
street, bte ©tra^e, — n.
strong, ftarL
student, ber ©tubent', — eit, —en;
bie ©tuben ' tin, — nen,
study, jiubie'ren, w. ; \>a^ ©tnbinm,
— §, — bten»
style, ber ©tU,— (e)§, — e; style of
^ architecture, ber- S3anftil.
subject, \)a^ ^ad), — (e)§, — cr ; ber
Untertan, — §, —en; adj., iinter=
tan.
subject, nnterorbnen, m
sudden(ly), ^jlo^Iic^.
suffer, leiben, str.
sum, bie ©nmme, — n.
summer, ber ©ontmer, — §, — ♦
sun, bie ©onne, — n,
Sunday, ber ©onntag, — §, — e.
superior, liberie 'gen.
support, fid) itii|en, w.
suppose, be supposed to, foUen.
surprised, iiberrafdit; be surprised
at, fid^ hJnnbern iiber.
sweetly, fii^.
sword, t>a^ ©c^njert, — (e)§, — er.
system of instruction, ha^ Un^^
terri(i)t§mefen, — §, — .
table, ber %\\<^, — (e)§, — e.
Tacitus, ber SacitnS, be§ SacituS,
tailor, ber ©dineiber, — §, — .
take, ne^nten, str., take to heart,
[id) gn ^ergen nel^men.
take off*, ab 'nefinten, s*r.,ob'legen,
w., an^giel^en, str.
tankard, bie ^anne, — n.
teacher, ber Sel^rer, — §, — ; bie
Sel^rerin, — nen.
technical, ted)nifc^; technical
school, Ue tec^nifd)e ^od)\d}uU, -n.
tell, fagen, w., ex^af)'ien, w.
ten, gel^n.
than, al§.
that, dem. pron. , jener, jenc, jeneS ;
ber, bie, ba§; rel, ber, bie, bo^;
con/., ha^
tlie, def. art, ber, bie, ba§; the. . .
the, j;e...befto.
their, i:^r, tf)re, it)x.
theirs, i^rer, i^re, i^r(e)§.
there, \)a, bort; there is, are, c3,
ift, e§ finb, e§ gibt
therefore, barnm', beg^alb, be^mc-
gen.
they, fie.
thing, ta^ S)ing, — (e)§, — e, the
second thing, 'i)a§> l^meite.
think, benfen, irr., cf. App. 88;
think of, geben'fen (gen.).
third, britt
thirty, brei^ig.
this, biefer, biefe, biefe§ (bie§).
thoroughly, tiid)tig.
thought, ber (5Jeban!e, — n^, — n.
three, brei.
through, bnrcf) (ace), through
it, baburc^ ' ; through which,
tt)oburd)'.
time, bie 3eit, —en; the first time,
t)a§> erfte Ttal
tiresome, langttjeilig.
to, §u (dat.); nacf) (dat.); an
(ace); to and fro, !^in unb ^er.
too, §u; and).
tower, ber Surm, — (e)§, — e.
trace back, jnriid'fii^ren, ti?.
treat, befjan ' bein, w.
tree, ber SSaunt, — (e)§, — e.
tree top, ber SBipfel, — §, — .
trice, in a trice, im 3Zn»
ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY
333
trunk (of a tree) ber ©tamm,
turn, !e^ren, w.
twelve, gujolf.
twenty-four, t)icrunb5n)an^ic|.
two, gttjei.
uncle, bet Dn!cl, — §, — .
uniform, ein^eitUd).
unite, tjerei'nen, lo.
university, bie Unibcrfttat, — cit.
until, big; not until, cr[t.
upon, auf, (ace. and dat.); once
upon a time, einmal' ; upon the
whole, tm gan^en; upon this,
that, barauf; upon vsrhich,
ttjoraitf.
use, gebraiid^en, w. ; beiiii^cn, lo.
usually, geh)oi)ufid).
yalkyrie, bie SSalfii'rc, — n.
vast, mdt^tig, rie[ig.
very, fe^r.
village, 'ba^ %ox\, — (e)§, — er.
visitor, ber SScfu' c^er, — §, — .
vulnerable, tjertDunb ' bar.
wagon, ber SSagcn, — §, — .
wagoner, ber f^u^rmaun, — (e)§,
— leiite.
walk, gel^en, fpagie'reu gc^eit, str.
(fein).
walk, ber @ang, — e§, — e.
wall, bie SSJJaiier, — n; bie 3Banb,
— e*
want, tDoflen, w.
war, ber ^rieg, — (e)§, — e.
warrior, ber ^rieger, — §, — .
watch, bie 2Bacf)t, —en.
watch, pten, w., n)arf)cu, w., be*
ttja ' c^en, w,
water, ha^ SBaffer, — §, — .
watershed, bie a8a[jer[d)cibe, — lu
way (=manner), bie 2Bei[e, — n;
(=road, path) ber 28eg, — (e)§, — e»
we, tt)ir*
wear, tragen, str.
week, bie SSodie, — n,
well, ad/., gefunb; ctdi;., gut; fc^on;
wo^l; I am well, \6) befiube mid^
t»oi)l; I do not feel well, mir ift
nic^t tuo^L
well, ber SSrunnen, — §, — .
west, ber SBeften, — §.
western, tueftUd).
what, trag.
when, interr. adv., tuann; conj.,
Wenn, aB.
whence, trto^er'.
where, tt)o; where to, tropin';
where from, njot)er'.
whether, ob.
which, reZ., hjeld^er, ttjctd^c, tDeld)e§;
in which, ttJOrin' ; upon which,
ttjorauf ; interr., tuer, toa^.
while, bie 335eile; conj. or prep.,
tuQ^renb.
whither, tuo^in'.
why, ttJarum'; inter j., ei, nun,
wicked, b5fe (bog), fc^led)t.
wide, hjeit
widow, bie SBitwe, — n.
wife, bie f^rau, —en; bie (ijattin,
— nen.
will (wish) wollen, w.
willow, bie SBeibe, — n.
window, tia^ ^enfter, — g, — .
wine, ber SSein, — (e)§, — e.
winter, ber ^Sinter, — §, — .
wish, triinfd^en, lo.; ber SBunfc^,
— e§, — e.
with, mit (dat.); with it, bamit',
with which, what, ttJOmit'.
withdraw, fic^ guriid'aie^en, str.
334
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN
without, oI)ne (ace); (= out-of-
doors), brau^en.
wolf, ber SSolf, — (e)§, ^e.
woman, bie i^xau, —en.
wonderful, tuunberbar.
wood, ta§> ^oI§, — e§, — er.
wood-nymph, ha^ SBoIbtDcibleitt,
woodpecker, ber 'Bpe^t, — (e)§, — e.
woods, bet SBolb, — (e)§, — er.
wood-sprite, t)a§^ SBalbmeiblein, — §,
work, bie 5lrbeit, —en; arbeiten,
work of art, \)a§> ^mi\itvext, — §,
— e.
world, bie 2BeIt, —en.
worm, ber SSiirm, — (c)§, — er.
write, f(l)reiben, str.
wrong, falfcf); unri(i)tig.
year, ba§ ^a^r, — (e)§, — e.
yes, ja.
yield, nad^'geben, str. (dat.); aug'==
ttJeic^en, str., (dat.) (fein).
you, bit, 6ie, i:^r.
young, jung.
your, bein, beine, bein; ^t)r, ^:^re,
^t^x; ener, eure, euer.
yours, beiner, beine, bcin(e)§,
i^firer, ^^re, ^^reg; eurer, eure,
eure§.
youth, ber ^iingling, — §, — e.
zephyrs, bie Siifte.
THE LAKE GERMAN SERIES.
ELEMENTS OF GERMAN.
By Henrietta K. Becker, Ph.D., The University of
Chicago.
A beginner's book intended to cover the work of
the first year's German in high school or the first six
months in college. A series of graded lessons cover-
ing the main points of grammar, based upon carefully
selected stories and poems, cioth, 334 pages. Price, $1.00.
EASY GERMAN STORIES. Vol. I.
By Philip S. Allen, Ph.D., and Max Batt, Ph.D.
A collection of short stories, including two of
Baumbach's Somniernidrchen, two of Rosegger's
rustic sketches, and Heyse's VArrabbiata. The book
contains practical Exercises for German conversation
based upon the text, a Grammatical Appendix, Notes
and Vocabulary. A book of first readings in German
prose. Cloth, 242 pages. Price, 70 cents.
GERMAN STORIES. Vol. II.
By Philip S. Allen, Ph.D., and Max Batt, Ph.D.
A continuation of the above. Contains Liliencron's
Der Narr, Riehl's Der Leibmedikus, and Wilden-
bruch's Das edle Blut. For second-year reading in
high school or college. Cloth, 242 pagres. Price. 70 cents.
SCHILLER'S MARIA STUART.
Edited with Notes and Introduction by Carl Edgar
Eggert, Ph.D., of the University of Michigan.
Cloth, 280 pages. Illustrated. Price, 70 cents.
SCOTT, FORESMAN & CO.,
378-388 Wabash Avenue : : CHICAQO.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
BERKELEY
Return to desk from which borrowed.
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
; 120ec'5tR!'
UBecMlP
, \«i^^*^^^
pj,6 8 1388 99
HUG 18 1952 Uli
U0cV56Bli
SEP20«8'4p
.1
REC'D LD
SEP 27 1956
i0cf64SM
REC'D I
.D
SEP 2 fc '64-
IPM
LD 21-95m-ll,'50(2877sl6)476
9266^
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY
J